LWUA Vol2. Reformat PDF

LWUA
ANDARD
IFI ATIONS
FOR
' TERSYSTEM
ONSTRUCTION
BIDDING DOCUMENT
VOLUME 2
NOV I MBI R 2009

SECTION V- SPECIFICATIONS
PART A- STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PART B- SPECIAL PROVISIONS

PART A
STANDARD TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS FOR WATER
SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION
CONSTRUCTION OF WATER SYSTEM FOR STANDARD TECHNIC AL SPECIFICATIONS
SEC TION V - PART A
SECTION V -SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART A- STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR
WATER SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION
1. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS ..................................••............................ 1-1
1.1 Owner .................................................................... ... ........................... .. 1-1

1.2 Administration ................................................................................. .. ..... .. 1-1
1.3 Procuring Entity ...................................................................................... . 1-1
1.4 Engineer....... ................................................ ........................ ................. .. 1-1
1.5 Contractor ...................... ..... ... .............. ......................... ......................... . 1-1
1.6 Subcontractor .................... ...................... .. ................................ ............. . 1-1
1.7 Contract. ....................................................................................... ........... 1-1
1 .8 Specifications ....................... .......................................... .. ...................... . 1-1
1.9 Drawings ... .............................................................................................. 1-2
1.10 Work .... ................................................................................................... . 1-2
1.11 Constructional Plant. ..... ...... .. ............ ....... ............................................... . 1-2
1.12 Tem poraryWork.s .................................................................................. .. 1-2
1.13 Site .............................................................................................. .......... .. 1-2
1.1 4 A pproval ..................................................................................... ........ .... . 1-2
1.15 Working I Calendar Day ..................................................................... .... .. 1-2
1.16 Abbreviations . .. ............................................. ...... ..................... ........... .... . 1-2
2. SPECIFICATIONS, DRAWINGS AND RELATED DATA .................................... . 2-1
2 .1 Specifications. Drawings and Discre pancies ............................................ 2-1

2.2 Shop Drawings ..... ................................................................................. .. 2-1
2.3 Reference to Standards or Publications ................................................. .. 2-2
2.4 Reference to Proprietary Products ......................................................... .. 2-2
2.5 Specification and Drawings Furnished to Contractor .... ................. ...... .... . 2-3
3. ADMINISTRA TION-ENGINEER..OWNER-CONTRACTOR RELATIONS ............ . 3-1
3.1 Administra tio n's Authority ...................... ......... .. ...................................... 3-1 ~· ·- ·-
3.2 Engineer's Authority ................................................................................. 3-1

3.3 Protests .................................................................................................. . 3-1
3. 4 Arbitration ............................................................................................... . 3-2
3.5 Legal Address of Contractor .................................................................. .. 3-2
3.6 Resident Engineer's Office .......................................................... ............ . 3-2
3. 7 Contractor's Employees .......................................................................... . 3-2
3.8 Contractor's Superintendence ............................. ................................... .. 3-3
3. 9 Inspection and Testing ....................... .... .... ..... .. ... ........ .. ........... .. ........ ..... 3-3
3.10 Assignment Fo rbidden ........................................... .................... ....... ..... .. 3-4
3.11 Subco ntracts ......... .............. .................. ...... .. ....... .................................. . 3-4
3.12 Suspension of Work ..................................................................... ... ....... .. 3-4
3.13 Termination for Default of Co ntractor ..................................................... .. 3-5
3. 14 Termination for Default of Owner ........................................................... .. 3..6
3.15 Termination fo r Other Causes ............................................................... .. . 3-6
3.16 Procedures fo r Termination of Contracts ............................................ ..... . 3-7
3.1 7 Failure to Comply .. ................................ ................. ......................... ....... . 3-8
3.18 Rights-of-Wa y... ................................ ....... ....... .. ............ ... .................. .. ... . 3-8
3. 19 Construction Interferences .......................................................... ........... .. :).f)
3.20 Constru ction Stakes and Reference Marks ........................................... ... ::; .. '! ')
~·
3.21 Local Labor and Labor-Intensive Meth ods .............................................. .. •1
.,:-.·It
)
CONSTRUCTION OF WATER SYSTEM FOR STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFI CATIONS
SECTION V • PART A
4. MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP ...... ........................................................... .. 4-1
4.1 Safeguarding of Equipment, Materials and Work...................................... 4-1

4.2 New Materials and Equipment.......................................... ....................... 4-1
4.3 Contractor's Utilities................................................................................. 4-1
4.4 Title to Materials Found on the Site.......................................................... 4-1
4.5 Defective Equipment, Materials or Work.... .............................................. 4-1
4.6 Rubbish Control.......... ............................................................................. 4-2
4.7 Dust Control................................................................................ ...... ...... 4-2
4.8 Cleaning Up............................................................................................. 4-2
4.9 Character of Workmen.................................................................. ..... ...... 4-2
4.10 Sanctions for Non-Observance........................................................... ..... 4-2
5. PROGRESS AND PAYMENT .............................................................................. 5-1
5.1 Variation Orders and Change Orders....................................................... 5-1

5.2 Extra Work Costing ..................................... 000000 ............................. oo........ 5-2
5.3 Overtime Work...................................................................................... ... 5-2
5.4 Extension of Contract Time ................................................................ 00.... 5-2
5.5 Liquidated Damages................................................................................ 5-3
5.6 Monthly Progress Report......................................................................... 5-4
5. 7 Measurement of Quantities .................................... oo .... oo.... .......... ...... ...... 5-4
5.8 Scope of Payments.................................................................................. 5-4
5.9 Partial Payments................................................................. ..................... 5-4
5.10 Elimination of Items ....................................... ........................ 00 .......... 0000.. 5-5
5.11 Ownership of Equipment and Materials.......................... .. .............. .. .. ...... · 5-6
5.12 Payment of Contractor's Obligations........................................................ 5-6
5.13 Acceptance and Final Payment................................................................ 5-6
5.14 Release of Retention Money.................................................................... 5-7
5.15 FinaiAcceptance ...............................................................................oo.... 5-7
5.16 Adjustment of Contract Price ........... oo ........ oo .... oo .................................. 00 ... 5-7
5.17 Books and Records .......................... oo .... 00............. ... .. ...... ... .. .................. 5-8
5.18 Force Majeure ................................. 00...... ..................... ..... .. .................... 5-8
5.19 Contract Completion ................ .... ................ ................ ..... .. .................... 5-9
6. BONDS, INSURANCE, LEGAL RESPONSIBILITY AND PUBLIC SAFETY ........ 6-1
6.1 Securities ....................................... oooooooooo ............ oo.~oo .. ooooooooo ..... oo.... ....... 6-1
6.2 Additional Surety ...................................oooo ............ oooo...... .. ............... ....... 6-1
6.3 Materials I Workmanship Guarantee........................................................ 6-2
6.4 Unpaid Claims .............................................................................00.00....... 6-2
6.5 Insurance ....................... ................................... ........................ .... ..... ..... 6-3
6.6 No Personal Liability oooooo ....... oo .. oo .................. oo ..... 00 ....:.............. ............... 6-4
6.7 Laws and Regulations ........................... 00.00 ............................ ............. 00.. 6-4
6.8 Permits and Licenses ................ ....... .......................... ........... ................. 6·4
6.9 Value Added And Use taxes.................................................................... 6-5
6.10 Patents and Copyrights............................................................................ 6-5
6.11 Public Safety and Convenience .................................. 00................. ......... 6-5
6.12 Sanitary Provisions ...................................................oo......... .............. ...... 6-5
6.13 Safety and Health Regulations................................................................. 6-5
6.14 Non-Observance of Safety Provisions ......................................... 00 ........ 000 6-5
7. EARTHWORK ..................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1 General ..... 00 ............... oo ...... oo.oo .............. ................................................ . 7-1

7.2 Compaction Test .......................................................... oo ...... 000 ... 00 ...... 00 .. . 7-1
-/.3 Excavation ................ oo .. 00 ......... ...................... 00 .... ... .. .......................... 00 .. 7·1
'1.4 Backfill ........ .............................................................. ............ ................... 7·4
"1.!3 Slope Stabilizing ..................... .. .................... ....... ..... ... .. ..... ... .............. 0000 7-7
ii
CONSTRUCTION OF WATER SYSTEM FOR STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION V - PART A
8. REINFORCED CONCRETE ................................................................................. 8-1
8.1 Work Included............................................. .................. ........................... 8-1

8.2 Materials...................... ............................................................................ 8-1
8.3 Storage of Materials.. ........................................................ ........... ............ 8-2
8.4 Testing of Materials ..................................... ... ..... .... ........ ........................ 8-2
8.5 Controlled Strengths of Concrete............................................................. 8-2
8.6 Method of Detennining Strength: Trial Batch.... ....................................... 8-2
8.7 Concrete Proportion and Consistency................... ............ ....................... 8-2
8.8 Exclusion of Water.......................... ........................ ......... ........................ 8-3
8.9 Mixing Concrete................................................................ ....................... 8-3
8.1 o Preparation of Surface for Concreting .......................... ............................ 8-4
8.11 Placing Concrete ................. ........................................ .... . .................. .... 8-4
8.12 Fonns .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .... .... .. .. .... ...... ..... ..... ..... .. ... .. ......... .... .... .. .. ... .. .... .. .. .. ..... 8-5
8.13 Construction Joints ........ .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .... .. .. .... .. ... .. .. .. .... .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .... .. ... .. .. . 8-8
8.14 Corrosion Protection Requirements.......................................................... 8-11
8.15 Order of Placing Concrete........................................................................ 8-11
8.16 Tamping and Vibrating................................................. ........ .................... 8-12
8.17 Curing and Waterproofing............ ........................................ .................... 8-12
8.18 Care and Repair of Concrete................................................ ................... 8-14
8.19 Finish of Concrete Surfaces ..................................................................... 8-14
8.20 Treatment of Surface Defects .................................................................. 8-15
8.21 Architectural Finish.................................................................................. 8-15
8.22 Ready-Mixed Concrete............................. ................................ ............... 8-16
8.23 Slipfonn Process in Concrete Work........................................................... 8-17
8.24 Placing Reinforcement........................... .................................. ............ ... . 8-19
8.25 Offsets and Splices In Reinforcement... ...................... ... ........................ ... 8-20
8.26 Test on Concrete.......................................................................... ........... 8-20
8.27 Liquidated Damages (For Failure to Meet Concrete Strength Requirements).... 8-20
9. STEEL AND MISCELLANEOUS METAL WORKS .............................................. 9-1
9.1 General................................................................................................... 9-1

9.2. Materials.................................................................................................. 9-1
9.3 Galvanizing .. ............ ............ ..... ......... ................ ... ............. .... ........ ......... 9-3
9.4 Shop Fabrication -steel WorKs .......................·......................................... 9-3
9.5 Welding ......................................................... .'......................... ................ 9-4
9.6 Erection of Steel Reservoir Structure ...............'........................................ 9-6
10. PIPING ................................................................................................................ 10-1
10.1 General ................................................................................................... 10-1

10.2 Mortar Lined and Enamel or Mortar Coated &eel Pipe ............................. 10-1
10.3 Small Steel Pipe ......... ............................................................................. 10-9
10.4 Cast Iron Water Pipe................................................................................ 10-10
10.5 Cast Iron Soil Pipe .................................................................................. . 10-10
10.6 Asbestos-Cement Water Pipe (Not Applicable) ................. ..................... .. 10-11
10.7 UPVC (Polyvinyl Chloride) Pipe ............................................................. .. 10-12
10.8 PE (Polyethylene) Plastic Pipe ............................................................... .. 10-20
10.9 PB (Polybutylene Plastic) Tubing ........................................................... .. 10-25
10.10 Fiberglass Pressure Pipe .................................................................. ...... . 10-27
10.11 Ductile Iron Pipe .................................................................. ................... . 10-35
10.12 Service Lines ......................................................................................... .. 10-35
10.13 Service Saddle ........... ............................. .......................... ..................... . 10-37
10.14 Mechanical-Type Couplings .................................................................... . 10-38
10.15 Sleeve-Type Couplings ........................................................................... . 10-38
10.16 Gaskets and Bolts............................................................................ ..... ... 10.. 30
10.17 Pressure Gages ..................................................................................... .. 10-39
'10.18 Concrete Drain Pipes ..................... ... ....................... ......... ........ ............. .. 10-39
iii
SECTION V - PART A
- ------------ - - -- -- -
10.19 Steel Casing................................ ............................................................ 10-39

10.20 Warning Tape..................................................................... ..................... 10-39
11. VALVES ............................................................................................................. . 11-1
11 .1 General .................................................................. ............................... . 11-1

11 .2 Gate Valves ......................................................................... ................... . 11-1
11 .3 Butterfly Valves .......................................................... ........... .................. . 11-2
11.4 Check Valves.......................................................................................... . 11-4
11.5 Air Vacuum and Air Release Valves ....................................................... .. 11-4
11.6 Air Vacuum Valves ................................................................................. . 11-4
11.7 Air Release Valves .................................................................. ............... . 11-5
11.8 Float Valves ............................................................................................. 11-5
11.9 Miscellaneous Small Valves .................................................................... . 11-5
11.10 Plug Valves ............................................................................................ . 11-5
11 .11Pressure Reducing Valves ...................................................................... . 11-5
11 .12 Pressure Relief Valves ............................................................................. 11-5
11 .13 Altitude Valves ........................................................................................ . 11-5
11.14 Flap Valves ............................................................................................ .. 11-6
12. PRESSURE AND LEAKAGE TESTING AND DISINFECTING ........................... .. 12-1
12.1 General ......................................... .............................. ............................ 12-1

12.2 Pipeline Testing....................................................................................... 12-1
12.3 Pipeline Disinfecting............. ........................................ ........ .................... 12-2
12.4 Testing and Disinfection of Reservoir and Appurtenant Piping .................. 12-2
13. SURFACE RESTORATION AND PAVING .......................................................... 13-1
13.1 General ................................................................ ...... ......... .............. ..... 13-1

13.2 Removal of Existing Pavement ................................................................ 13-1
13.3 Restoration of Damaged Surface and Property ........................................ 13-1
13.4 Replacement of Surface Structure and Private Property........................... 13-1
13.5 Temporary Resurfacing and Repaving..................... ................................ 13-1
13.6 Paving ............................................... ........... ........................................... 13-2
14. PAINTING AND COATINGS................................................................................ 14-1
14.1 General ................................................................... ~............................. .. 14-1

14.2 Scope ..................................................................................................... . 14-1
14.3 Right of Rejection ....... .. ..................... ..................................................... . 14-1
14.4 Protection of the Work ............................................................................. 14-1
14.5 Workmanship ......................... ..... ........................................................... . 14-1
14.6 Storage of Materials .... ........... .......... .......................... :............................ . 14-2
14.7 Preparation of Paint ............ ................... ............................... .............. .... . 14·2
14.8 Paint to be Provided to Owner ............................................. ................... . 14-2
14.9 Clean Up .......................... .......................................................... ........ .... . 14-2
14.1 0 Materials............ ............. ... .................................................... ................. . 14-2
14.11 Preparation of Surfaces ........................................................................... 14-3
14.12 Application of Paint ................................................................................. . 14-4
14.13 Painting Systems .................................................................. ................. . 14-5
'IG. SECURITY FENCING .......................................................................................... 15-1
15.1 General .................................................................................................. 15-1

15.2 Chain Link Fence..................................................................................... 15-1
'!!3.3 Barbed Wire ............................................................................................ 15·2
·j :'j.-~ r::oncrete Hollow Blocks.......................... ................................................. 15-2
·j !j. !) Shop Drawings .. .. .. ... .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. ... .. .. ... ... ... .. ... .. ... .. ... .. .. . .. .... ... ... ..... 15-2
iv
SECTION V - PART A
16. FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM ............................................................................. 16-1
16.1 General................................................................................... .... ..... ....... 16-1

16.2 Stand-Up Type Fire Hydrant......................................... ... ..... .............. ..... 16-1
16.3 Underground Spring-Type Hydrant System................... ............... ............ 16-1
16.4 Testing, Inspection and Rejection............................................................ 16-2
16.5 Marking ....... .. ........................... .......................................... ..... .... ........ .... 16-3
17. ELECTRO-MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT ............................................................ . 17-1
17.1 General................................................................................................... 17-1

17.2 Mechanical Equipment.... .. ....................................................................... 17-3
17.3 Electrical Equipment................................................................................ 17-16
18. WATER METERS ............................................................................................... . 18-1
18.1 General ........... ...................................... .............................. ................ .... 18-1

18.2 Meter Body ............................................................................................. . 18-1
18.3 Measuring Chamber Assembly .............................................................. .. 18-1
18.4 Register ............................................................................................. .... .. 18-1
18.5 Dial Lens ............................................................................................... .. 18-1
18.6 Register Box Ring (Bonnet) And Lid ........................................................ . 18-2
18.7 Meter Coupling (Tailpieces) .............................................. ............. ..... ... .. 18-2
18.8 Coupling Nuts And Gaskets .................................................................... . 18-2
18.9 Sealing ......................................................................................... ....... .. .. 18-2
18.10 Pressure Loss ........................................................................................ . 18-2
18.11 Test Methods And Equipment.. .............................................................. .. 18-3
18.12 Warranty .................................................................................................. 18-3
18.13 Accreditation ................................................ ........................... ..... .. .. ....... . 18-3
19. CONCRETE MASONRY ...................................................................................... 19-1
19.1 Scope ofWork........................................................................................ . 19-1

19.2 General Requirements................. ....... ................. .... ............... ................. 19-1
19.3 Materials........................................................... ....................................... 19-1
19.4 Laying Concrete Masonry Units............................................................... 19-1
20. CARPENTRY AND JOINERY....................................;.. ,.................................... .. 20-1

I
20.1 Scope ofWorl<.................... ..................................................................... 20-1

20.2 General Requirements............................................................................. 20-1
20.3 Materials................................................................................................. 20-1
20.4 Pressure Treated Lumber........................................................................ 20-3
20.5 Rough Carpentry .............................................. :...................................... 20-3
20.6 Joinery Work................... .. ...................................................................... 20-4
21. DOORS-WINDOWS-GLAZING............................................................................ 21-1
21.1 Scope ofWork........................................................... .............................. 21-1

21.2 General Requirements........... ................. ...... ............. .............................. 21-1
21.3 Doors. .. ............ ...................................................................... ... .............. 21-1
21.4 Windows.... .... .......................................................................................... 21-2
21.5 Hardware................................................................................................. 2·1-2
21 .6 Glazing... .. ................................................................. ........... ................... 21-4
21.7 Wrought Iron Grilles................................................................................. 21-5
flOOFING AND TINNERY ...................................................................................
~2. 1 Scope ofWork.... .......... ...................... ..................................................... ;J.?.-1

22.2 Corru gated Asbestos Cement Roofing .. ........................... .. ...................... 22-1
v
SECTION V - PART A
22.3 Tinnery ............ .................. .. ............ ...... .. ... .... ..... . .... ................. .... .......... 22-2
22.4 Waterproofing....... ....... ............................................................................ 22-2
22.5 Cove Light: Acrylic Light Diffuser............................................................ 22-3
23 . WALL AND FLOOR FINISHES ............................................................................ 23-1
23 .1 Scope of Work......................................................................................... 23-1

23.2 Plaster..................................................................................................... 23-1
23.3 Ceramic Tiles.......................................................................................... 23-2
23.4 Asbestos Vinyl Tiles...................................................................... ........... 23-3
23.5 Flain Cement Finish..................................................... ............................ 23-4
23.6 Vinyl Tiles...................................................................................... .......... 23-5
24. PLUMBING......................................................................................................... . 24-1
24.1 Scope of Work ............................................................... ......................... . 24-1

24.2 General Requirements ..................................................... ....................... . 24-1
24 .3 Materials ........................................................................ ......................... . 24-2
24.4 Excavation, Trenching and Backfilling .................................................... .. 24-3
24.5 Installation of Soil, Waste, Drain and Vent Piping ................................... .. 24-4
24.6 Installation of Water Pipes, Fittings and Connections .............................. . 24-5
24.7 Fastenings for Fixtures and Equipment.. ................................................. . 24-6
24.8 Painting ......................................................................... ....................... ... 24-6
24.9 Permits .................... ..................................... ......................................... .. 24-6
24.10 As-Built Drawings ................................................................................... . 24-6
24.11 Guarantee .............................................................................................. . 24-7
24.12 Test for System ...................................................................................... . 24-7
24.13 Disinfection ............................................................................................ .. 24-7
24.14 Plumbing Fixtures ............................................................. ...................... . 24-7
,.,
I'
SECTION V - PART A
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LIST OF STANDARD DRAIWNGS
CD-1 01 R Typical Trench Details

CD-102R Horizontal Concrete Thrust Blocks
CD-103R Vertical Concrete Thrust Blocks (Downward Thrust)
CD-104R Joint Details for Steel Pipe
CD-105R Joint Details for Steel Pipe
CD-106R Butt Strap Closure Joint Detail
C0-107 Concrete Encasement Detail
CD-108 Pipe Support Detail
CD-1 09 Concrete Anchor Block
CD-11 OR Concrete Anchor Block
CD-111R Steel Casing for Welded Steel Pipe
CD-201A Valve Box and Cover
CD-201R Installation of Buried Gate Valve 300 mm (12"} and Smaller
CD-202R Installation of Buried Butterfly Valve 350 mm (14 ") and Larger
CD-203R Fire Hydrant Installation (Residential Type)
CD-204R Fire Hydrant Installation (Commercial Type)
CD-205 Barricade Installation
CD-206R 25 mm (1") Air Vacuum and Air Release Assembly
CD-207R so mm (2") Air Vacuum and Air Release Assembly
CD-208R Dead-End-Blow-Off Assembly
Service Connection for 3m3 (5/8") & 5m (3/4") Above Ground ~eter Sets
3
CD-301R
3
CD-302R Service Connection for 7 m (1 ")Above Ground Meter Sets
3
CD-303R Service Connection for 20m (1-1/2") Above Ground Meter Sets
3
CD-304R Service Connection for 30 m (2") Above Ground Meter Sets
CD-305 Public Faucet
CD-401R Sample Project Sign
MD-101 25 mm (1 ") Air Vacuum-Air Release and Pressure Gauge Assembly-
Above Ground
MD-102 50 mm (2") Air Vacuum-Air Release and Pressure Gauge Assembly-
Above Ground
MD-103 Coupling and Harness Set Detail
MD-104 Engine Mounting Detail .
MD-105 Pressure Gauge I Pressure Switch Assrmbly
MD-106 Steel Pipe Sleeve Thru CH~ W~l
MD-107 Pump Base Installation
MD-108 Exhaust Pipe Assembly
MD-109 Silencer and Hanger Detail
MD-110 Fuel Oil Tank Detail
MD-111 Chlorine Cylinder Enclosure
SD-101 Reservoir Construction Joint, Waterstop t=orm and Miscellaneous Details
SD-102R Reservoir Construction Joint, Waterstop Form and Miscellaneous Details
SD-103R Typical Underdrain Detail
SD-104 Reservoir Access Hatch
SD-105 Galvanized Steel Ladder Details
SD-106 Non-Traffic Valve Vault
SCCD1 Full Voltage Motor Starter Main Circuit Diagram
SCCD2 Full Voltage Motor Starter Control Circuit Diagram
SCCD3 Reduced VoltElge Starter-Auto-Transformer Type Main Circuit Diagram
8CC04 Heduced Voltage Starter Auto-Transforrner Typ~ Control Circuit Dingram
SCCD5 Reduced Voltage Starter Wye-Delta Type Main Circuit Diagram
SCCD6 Redu ced Voltage Starter Wye-Delta Type Control Circuit DiC\gram
SECTION V- PART A
1 - DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
For the purpose of this Clause, the following terms are defined as follows:
1.1 OWNER
The word "Owner" refers to the Water District named in the Bidding Documents.
1.2 ADMINISTRATION
The word "Administration· or "LWUA" refers to the "Local Water Utilities Administration," the duly
authorized agency of the Water District for the implementation of the Contract acting either
indirectly, directly or through its properly authorized agents, such agents acting within the scope
of the particular duties entrusted to them.
1.3 PROCURING ENTITY
The Procuring Entity is the party who employs the Contractor to carry out the Works stated in the
Special Conditions of the Contract.
1.4 ENGINEER
The word "Engineer" refers to the individual or finn authorized by the Administration to oversee
the execution of the Contract and approve the Works; acting either indirectly, directly o.r through
its property authorized agents, each agent acting only within the scope of authority delegated to
him by the LWUA.
1.5 CONTRACTOR
The word "Contractor" refers to the party entering into the Contract for the perfonnance of the
work required, its legal representative and/or its duly appointed agent.
1.6 SUBCONTRACTOR
The word "Subcontractor' refers to any person, finn, or corporation entering into agreement with
the Contractor for the perfonnance of any part of the Contractor:s obligation under the Contract.
1.7 CONTRACT
The word "Contract" refers to the Contract Documents and shall include the Contract Agreement
entered into by the Owner and the Contractor for the pertonnance of the Works described in the
Contract Documents and shown on the Drawings, together with the Invitation for Bids, lnfonnation
for Bidders, the Bid Fonn, lnfonnation Required of Bidders, Basic Contract, the General
Conditions, the Special Provisions, the General Technical Specification, the Drawings,
Appendices, Annexes, Schedules, all Addenda issued by LWUA with respect to the foregoing
prior to the opening of bids and all Change Orders issued by the Engineer with the approval of
LWUA and signed by the Contractor pertaining to the Contract after the same has been awarded.
1.8 SPECIFICATIONS
The word "Specifications" refe•s to the Special Pro•Jisions and the Technir;al Specifications of the
Contract, toaether with ail addenda ancJ change orders issued with respect therato.
~ -1
SECTION V- PART A
1.9 DRAWINGS
The words "Drawings" or "Contract Drawings" refer to those drawings accompanying the
Specifications and subsequently approved drawings, which show the locations, nature, extent,
and form of the Works, together with applicable detail.
1.10 WORK
The word 'Work" refers to labor, materials, equipment, transportation and all incidental costs
necessary to complete the Contract.
1.11 CONSTRUCTIONAL PLANT
The words "Constructional Plant" refer to all appliances or things of whatsoever nature required
for the execution, completion and maintenance of the Works or Temporary Works (as hereinafter
defined) but does not include materials or other things intended to form or forming part of the
Permanent Works.
1.12 TEMPORARY WORKS
The words "Temporary Works" refer to all works or structures of every kind which are
impermanent in nature or intended to serve/exist for a limited time only, required ~or the
execution, completion or maintenance of the Works.
1.13 SITE
The word "Site" refers to the lands and other places on, under, in or through which work Is to be
executed or carried out and any other lands or places provided by the Owner for the purposes of
the Contract together with such other places as may be specifically designated in the Contract as
forming part of the Site.
1.14 APPROVAL
The word "Approval" refers to concurrence including subsequent written confirmation of previous
verbal approval by th~ Engineer or LWUA. -·-- ·-· ·
1.15 WORKING/CALENDAR DAY
The term "Working Day'' refers to working days in the Government service. The term "Calendar
Day" refers to the days in a week, including Saturdays, Sundays and holidays. Whenever the
word "day" is used, it shall refer to calendar day.
1.16 ABBREVIATIONS
Whenever the following abbreviations are used, they shall have the meaning indicated:
JV\SHTO American Association of the State Highway ami TranspOJiatlon Officials

AASHO American Association of the St~ta Highway Official.:;
/\CI American Concrete Institute
AG/.._ American Gas Association
AGMA American Gear Manufacturer's Association
A:;ptHllt Institute
,t\merican lr•slilut~ <:·f .A.rcha-;,ct::>
Arn.:1rican !nsml!b r:i 81-;:el Cur.struc.!!·:;n
, \i'll'3fi.::~n lr·:·il and ~?.:i :c;l 1: <:lilL;k
SECTION V- PART A
ANSI American National standards Institute

API American Petroleum Institute
ASA American Standard Association
ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers
ASH RAE American Society of HeaUng, Refrigerating and
Air Conditioning Engineers
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASTM American Society of Testing Materials
AWG American Wire Gauge
AWS American Welding Society
A\JI.NIJA American Water Works Association, Inc.
CENRO Commun:ty Environment and Natural Resources Office
CRSI Concrete Reinforcement steel Institute
DPWH Department of Public Works and Highways
ISO International Organization for standardization
LWUA Local Water Utilities Administration
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
NSCB National Structural Code for Buildings (Philippines)
NSF National Sanitation Foundation
PCA Portland Cement Association
PEC Philippine Electrical Code
PS Philippine Bureau of Standards
SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council
UBC Unifonn Building Code Pacific Coast Building Officials
Conference of the International Conference of Building Officials
U/L Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc.
WHO Wortd Health Organization
.·,....,,
SECTION V- PART A
2 -SPECIFICATIONS, DRAWINGS AND RELATED DATA
2.1 SPECIFICATIONS, DRAWINGS AND DISCREPANCIES
a. The intent of the Specifications and Drawings is that the Contractor shall furnish all the
required construction plant, equipment, appliances, tools, labor, materials and services
unless otherwise specifically provided for.
b. The Specifications and Drawings are complementary and what is called for in one shall
be as binding as if called for in both.
c. Any discrepancies, errors, or omissions found in the Contract Documents including

Drawings shall be reported in writing within ten (1 0) days from discovery to the Engineer
who will issue the correction In writing within the same period. The Contractor shall not
take advantage of any such discrepancies, errors, or omissions, but shall comply with any
corrective measures regarding the same prescribed by the Engineer.
d. In case of connict, the order governing priority of documents shall be:
i. Contract Agreement;
ii. Instructions to Bidders;
iii. Addenda to the Bidding Documents;
iv. Specifications;
v. Drawings;
vi. Special Conditions of Contract;
vii. General Conditions of Contract; and
viii. Any other document listed in the sec as forming part of this Contract.
2.2 SHOP DRAWINGS
a. Wherever called for in the Specifications or on the Drawings, or as required, the

Contractor shall furnish the Engineer for review eight (8) prints of each shop drawing. The
term "shop drawing" as used herein shall be understood to include detailed design
calculations, fabrication and installation drawings, lists, graphs, and operating
instructions. Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for review/approval within
ten (1 O) days from receipt of Notice to Proceed unless otherwise extended in writing by
the Engineer. ·
-- - -. -·-- b. _ at- - ~---

Afl shop drawing submittals :.l1ali be accompan1ea- by a transmittal form u·sf n·g- tfi"efo..;,.rm -
bound with the Contract Documents. Any shop drawing submittal r.ot accompanied by
such form, or where all applicable items on the form are not completed, will be returned
for resubmittal. The Contractor may authorize a material or equipment supplier to deal
directly with the LWUA with regard to shop drawings; however, ultimate responsibility for
the accuracy and completeness of the information contained in the submittal shall remain
with t11e Contractor.
c. A separate transmittal form shall be used for each specific item or cl~ss of material or
equipment for which a submittal is required. Transmittal of shop drawings on various
items using a single transmittal form will be permitted only when the items taken together
constitute a manufacturer's "package" or are so functionally r~latF.d that expediency
indicates review of the group or package as a whole. At his O?tion, tha Contractor may
obtain from LWUA quantities of the shop drawing transmittal form at reproduction cost.
cl. Within fineen (15) calendar days after receipt of said prints, the Engir.eer lr'ilil return prints
of each drawing to the Contractor with his comments noted thereon. Whenever a
rosubmiltal is required. the Contractor shall m:::~ke a comp!ste 2<X s ~'~c·;~!e suomiltal to
I .WUA within ten (1ll) dfrys from rer.::>ipt ()f the returrf.d snop dr.;-"";:;<;s. t-~~)~·Cc:mplifl n r.:e
;wreor will (Jive ri:>e to l!w A<.kr:ini.st,·c1tiO'l's rigll! to fo2i!trer: {a) e<·r:ce! ~:-.r; rt\'t<l.l'd, or (b)
\'Jitili!OI(! U10 nron<'y t._':~;-~ ~t':~ ('•)ntrn·::lor, to cov~r addill-JnCJI CX:!.·t-3 of 0~0 lninB.::r s rovl~o.v
··..1
SECTION V- PART A
2- SPECIFICATIONS, DRAWINGS AND RELATED DATA
beyond the second submission. Such failure may be considered a factor against
Contractor's competence in future biddings to be conducted by the Admin istration.
e. If three (3) prints of the drawing are returned to the Contractor mar1<ed "NO
EXCEPTIONS TAKEN," fonrnal revision of said drawing will not be required.
f. If three (3) prints of the drawing are returned to the Contractor marked "MAKE
CORRECTIONS NOTED," formal revision of the drawing will not be required.
g. If one (1) print of the drawings is returned to the Contractor marked "AMEND-
RESUBMIT." the Contractor shall revise the drawing and shall resubmit eight (8) copi~s
of the revised drawing to the Engineer.
h. If one (1) print of the drawings is returned to the Contractor marked "REJECTED -
RESUBMIT.~ the Contractor shall revise the drawing and shall resubmit eight (8) copies
of the revised drawing to the Engineer.
i. Fabrication of an item shall not be commenced before the LWUA has reviewed the
pertinent shop drawings and returned copies to the Contractor marked either ''NO
EXCEPTIONS TAKEN" or "MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED." Revisions indicated on the
shop drawings shall be considered as changes necessary to meet the requirements of
the Contract Drawings and Specifications and shall not be taken as the basis of claims for
extra wor1<. The Contractor shall have no claim for damages or extension of time due to
any delay resulting from the Contractor having to make the required revisions to shop
drawings (unless review by LWUA of the drawings is delayed beyond a reasonable period
of time and unless the Contractor can establish that the LWUA's delay in review actually
resulted in a delay in the Contractor's Construction schedule). The review of the
drawings by LWUA will be limited to checking for general agreement with the
Specifications and Drawings, and shall in no way relieve the Contractor of responsibility
for errors or omissions contained therein nor shall such review operate to waive or modify
any provision contained in the Specifications or Contract Drawings. Fabricating
dimensions, quantities of material, applicable code requirements, and other Contract
requirements shall be the Contractor's responsibility.
2.3 REFERENCE TO STANDARDS OR PUBLICATIONS
· Any reference made in the specifications o{ br~iwiilgs to ~any- specifieation, standard, or

publication of any organization shall, in the absence of a specific designation to the contrary, be
understood to refer to the latest edition of the specification, standard, or publication effective as of
the date 30 days prior to the date of bid opening.
2.4 REFERENCE TO PROPRIETARY PRODUCTS
Where references to proprietary products appear in the Specifications or Drawings, it Js for the
purpose of establishing an acceptable ~tandard of quality or design but no guarantee is given that
said referenced manufacturer's product will meet all contract requirements without modifications.
Unless a substitute is expressly prohibited, the Contractor may request approval of a substitute
for any such proprietary product. Such request must be in writing and must include descriptive
literature, specifications, test reports, or samples, os appropriate, to enable the LWUA to
determine the acceptability of the product proposed for substitution. No sub3titute product shall
t;e use<! in the Works until written npproval i1as been received (rem the LWU;\ . /-\pprovol of shop
rlrawing s shall fllwoys be in writing anc.J shall not be presumed.
,'\If r.nsts invni•J•Hl !n rr.al<ir.g !!'lborator:r ter;ts of Hw :5C1mplo subrnitterJ 8 '.: sullsmute f0f thG
t>.p,ae;ifk:rJ ;m·!t·~ ~ lnl :.:i1all uc born e lJy tlw Contrm;tcr.
SECTION V- PART A
2 -SPECIFICATIONS, DRAWINGS AND RELATED DATA
2.5 SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWING~ FURNISHED TO CONTRACTOR
The Owner will furnish the Contractor with three (3) sets of Specifications together with reduced
drawings (if any) and three (3) sets of full-scale drawings. Additional quantities of the
Specifications and Drawings will be furnished at reproducti on cost.
... -. . .
SECTION V- PART A
3- ADMINISTRATIQN .. ENGINEER~OWNER
CONTRACTOR RELATIONS
3.1 ADMINISTRATION'S AUTHORITY
The Administration has been authorized to act on behalf of the Owner to the extent provided in
the contract documents. As the Owner's representative, the Administration shall, during the life of
this Contract, observe and approve the sequence of work during the life of this Contract up to its
successful completion. When necessary and/or in order to prevent improper execution of the
Works, the Administration shall have the authority to order the suspension, cancellation or
termination of work, or to direct that changes be made, which approval or direction shall, however,
in no way affect the responsibility of the Contractor in the conduct of his work.
The Administration shall, in all cases, make all necessary explanations as to the meaning and
intention of the drawings and specifications; determine the amount, quality, acceptability and
frtness of the several kinds of work and materials which are to be paid for under this Contract;
decide all questions of fact in relation to said work; and decide every question of fact which may
arise relative to the fulfillment of this Contract.
3.2 ENGINEER'S AUTHORITY
a. The Engineer, acting as the authorized representative of the Administration, will decide
such questions which may arise as to the quality and acceptability of materials and
_equipmentJumished, -WOrk performed, rate of progress of the work, interpretation of the
Specifications and Drawings, and those relating to acceptability in fulfillment of the
Contract by the Contractor. The Engineer shall, thereafter, transmit such reports or
recommendations to the Administration for confirmation and/or modification within ten
(1 0) days from rendition thereof. Unless otherwise modified/amended or revoked by the
Administration within ten (10) days from receipt of Engineer's written advice, such
instruction, order or decision of the Engineer shall be final and binding upon the
Contractor subject, however, to the conditions of Clause 3.3 - Protests.
b. Any difference which may arise between different contractors under the Engineer's
surveillance shall be arbitrated by the latter; however, the Engineer shall not arbitrate
disputes between the Contractor and Subcontractors.
c. The Engineer wlll, subject to verification and/or approval by the Administration, certify
eStliJl~t~fJne value of work completed and !!!P. mate?..-2J~~'¥.·~:~.g-:.-,rnc-c<r.'uGJ'Hle with--the'- - -:.=---:;; y,...-.•-~
conditions set forth in Clause 5- Progress and Payments.
3.3 PROTESTS
If the Contractor considers any work demanded of him to be· outside the requirements of the
Contract, or if he considers any order, instruction, or decision of the Engineer or of any inspector
to be unfair or unreasonable, he shall, immediately upon receipt of such order, instruction, or
decision, ask for a written confirmation of the same; whereupon he shall proceed without delay to
perform the work or to conform to the order, instruction, or decisions; thereafter, unless the
Contractor finds such order, instruction, or decision as indicated In the said written confirmation
satisfactory, he shall, within ten (1 0) days after receipt of the same, file a written protest with the
Engineer, stating clear1y and in detail t1is objections ond the reasons tl1ereof. E~<r.ept for such
protests or objections as are made of record in the manner specified anu wlll1in ti10 time statecl
hBrein, ttw Contractor hereby waives nil grounds for protests or objeetions to il1c ord ers,
instructions, or decisions of the Engineer and hereby agrees that, as to att mJl!Grs not included In
such protest, the orders, instructions and decisions of the Engineer sha ll be considered final and
bindino. All orders, instruction nnd decisions of the Engineer will be limitF)d to nw !ters ffllling
\.'Jitilin tho t::nyineer's authorit:l a~, ..:;pectfil•. d in C.lc1use .; u · 2ngincer's Autilorii;;.
~:- 1
SECTION V- PART A
3- ADMINISTRATION~ENGINEER ..QWNER-
The Engineer shall resolve the protest within fifteen (15) days from ils filing. If the protest is
adversely decided by the Engineer, the Contractor may elevate his protest to the Administration
within 10 days from receipt of the Engineer's decision; otherwise, the decision of the Engineer
shall be considered final and binding. The Administration shall, within thirty (30) days from receipt
of the protest, give written notice of its decision to the Contractor.
Save as hereinafter provided, such decision in respect of every matter so referred shall be final
and binding upon the Contractor until the completion of the Works and shall forthwith be given
effect by the Contractor with all due diligence, whether or not the Contractor requires arbitration
as provided in Clause 3.4- Arbitration. If the Administration has given notice of its decision to the
Contractor and no claim to arbitration has been communicated to the Administration by the
Contractor within a period of ten (1 0) days from receipt of such notice, the said decision shall
remain final and binding upon the Contractor. If the Administration shall fail to give notice of its
decision as aforesaid within a period of thirty (30) days after receipt of protest or if the Contractor
be dissatisfied with any such decision, then and in any such case the Contractor may, within ten
(1 0) days after the expiration of the aforesaid period of thirty (30) days (as the case may be)
require that the matter or matters in dispute be referred to arbitration as provided herein below.
Where, however, the Administration issues instructions/orders or renders a decision In its own
initiative, any protest or objection thereto shall be filed directly with the Administration and shall be
governed by and resolved in accordance with the procedures herein above provided.
3.4 ARBITRATION
Subject to the provisions of Clause 3.3 - Protests, all questions under the Contract may be
submitted for arbitration in the Philippines according to the provisions of Republic Act 9285,
otherwise known as the "Alternative Dispute Resolution Act of 2004." Provided, however, that
disputes that are within the competence of the Construction Industry Authority Arbitration
Commission to resolve shall be referred thereto.
3.5 LEGAL ADDRESS OF CONTRACTOR
The address given in the Contract Agreement is hereby designated as the place to which all
notices, letters and other communications to the Contractor will be mailed or delivered. The
mailing or delivRcy. t~J...Lb?,_..$~i.d-~ddress of any notice, letter, -oroother-(;crrmnantr,'Htion shall oe- ----
1
deemed sufficient service thereof upon the Contractor. The date of such service sha!l be the date
of such mailing or delivery. The said address may be changed at any time by a written notice
signed by the Contractor and delivered to the Administration.
3.6 RESIDENT ENGINEER'S OFFICE
If requirecl in the Special Provisions, the Contractor shall provide separate, temporary offices for
use by the Resident Engineer, and others as prescribed by Owner. The number of offices, size
and furnishing shall be specified in the Special Provisions.
3.7 CONTRACTOR'S EMPLOYEES
Tile employees of the Contmctor are not employees of the Owner. Therefore, the f)wner shall
not be liable or responsible for any personal injury or damage including <Ieath cau~~d to any of
HH~ employcas of the Contractor <ic.sring the ta'Wful performance of their duties. The Contractor
~hall, at all times, stand solely liable and/or responsible for the enforcement of and compliance
with all exir,t!no lm·is, ruh' s nr,(\ regt1\ations <lpplic-ab:e; ~!ld the Contrf!ctor IHW;by f.l/.Jr€es and
i~i 11<ls !tseli to 'i~'Je <:1Kl l1olcJ ihe Owner ffee and llarrr%s:s rro;n ~ny or <l!l 1:abllil..:·s in r.:Jsp8ct
theroto :'l(!c)/.:J( w lei!(~ u·~{)f(; f: i11(),
SECTION V- PART A
3- ADMINISTRATION-ENGINEER-OWNER-
3.8 CONTRACTOR'S SUPERINTENDENCE
A qualified superintendent, acceptable to the Engineer, shalf superintend the work and shall
provide competent supervision of the construction until completion. The superintendent shall have
full authority to act on behalf of the Contractor, and all directions given by the Engineer to the
superintendent shall be considered given to the Contractor. If the superintendent is not present
on a part of the work. where the Engineer desires to give instructions, such instructions may be
given by the Engineer to the foreman in charge of the particular work to which the instructions
apply. Such instructions given to a foreman shalf likewise be considered given to the Contractor.
Such instructions given by the Engineer to the superintendent or to the foreman, when they
concern items of substantial importance, will be confirmed in writing. All instructions and
directions given by the Engineer will be limited to matters properly falling within the Engineer's
authority as specified in Clause 3.2- Engineer's Authority.
Whenever required by existing Philippine laws, the Contractor shall employ the services of a
licensed Sanitary Engineer to direct and supervise all sanitary engineering work. in accordance
with the provisions of Republic Act No. 1364 known as the Sanitary Engineering Law.
3.9 INSPECTION AND TESTING
a. All materials furnished and all work. performed- under the Contract shall be subject to
inspection by the Engineer. The Contractor shall be held strictly to the true intent of the
Specifications and Drawings in regard to quality of materials, workmanship and diligent
execution of the Contract. Such Inspection includes mill, plant, shop, or field inspection
as required. The Engineer shall be permitted access to all parts of the work, including
plants where materials or equipment are manufactured or fabricated; and he shall be
furnished with such materials, information and assistance by the Contractor, his
subcontractors and suppliers as required to make a complete and detailed inspection.
b. Work done in the absence of prescribed inspection may be required to be removed and
replaced under the proper inspection; and the entire cost of removal and replacement,
including the cost of all materials which may be fumi~hed by the Owner and used in the
work. thus removed, shall be borne by the Contractor, regardless of whether the work.
removed is found to be defective or not. Work. covered up without the authority o~ ~b._e~~ __ _
Engineen;h~ll. ~!pon order of the Engineer, be uncovered to the( eXteilt required; and the
Contractor shalf similarly bear the entire cost of performing all the work and of furnishing
all materials necessary for the removal of the covering and its subsequent replacement,
as directed and approved by the Engineer.
c. The cost of carrying out normal inspections and tests such as factory tests for material
and equipment to be delivered under the Contract and tests for all materials and
equipment after installation, when installation is part of the Contract, should be at the
Contractor's or Subcontractor's expense under their normal contractual obligations.
Owner's costs should be restricted to those incurred by its agent/representative incident
to the inspection.
cl. T!13 Engineer wm make, or have made, such normal tests as 11e deems necessary to
insurP. that the work is being accomplished in accordance witil the requiremE:nts of the
c ontract.
Unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions, the cost of such testing will be borne
l1y :I:J Cwner. In tr.a event such test-s revGal non-compliance witil the requirf:rr1enis cf t11e
CuHr<lCl, the Contra ctor shAll ber~r the cost of ~u-::h corn~ct;ve measures ~!;) 3n1Gd
; .::-:·~.-.- ~· . Jry by th<:i E:-:gineer, as wei! ?.S ~l w c0st til- ~. 'JI:•.;i:: ql!G nt i"'-_,(v,~ling .
SECTION V - PART A
e. For locally manufactured materials and equipment, the Contractor shall require his
Supplier to submit in writing to the Administration the schedule/s of production at least five
(5) working days prior to start thereof.
3.10 ASSIGNMENT FORBIDDEN
a. The Contractor shall not assign, sublet, sell, transfer, or otherwise dispose of the Contract
or any portion thereof, or his rights, title, or Interest therein, or his obligations thereunder,
without the prior written approval of the Owner and Administration.
b. If the Contractor violates the provisions of the preceding clause, the Contract may be
terminated at the option of the Owner and Administration. In such event, the Owner shall
be relieved of all liabilities and obligations to the Contractor, and to his assignee or
transferee, growing out of such termination.
3.11 SUBCONTRACTS
a. Subcontracts may be permitted to such extent as shall be shown to be necessary or

advantageous to the Contractor in the prosecution of the work and without injury to the
Owner's interests. Individual Subcontractor(s) performing work in excess of one-half of
one percent of the Contract Price must be approved In advance ·In writing by the
Administration. The resubletting of work by a Subcontractor shall be subject to the same
limitations as original subletting. Each Subcontractor shall be properly licensed for the
type of work which he is to perform. However, the Contractor shall perform not less than
fifty percent (50%) of the total value of the work with his forces.
b. A copy of each subcontract shall be in writing, signed by the Contractor and his
Subcontractor, giving the name of the latter and the terms and conditions of each
subcontract and shall be filed with the LWUA. Each Subcontract shall contain a reference
to the Agreement between the Owner and the Contractor, and the terms of that
Agreement shall be made a part of each subcontract insofar as applicable to the work
covered thereby. Each subcontract shall provide for. annulment of same by the
Contractor upon written order of the Engineer, If in · the Engineer's opinion, the
subcontractor fails to comply with the requirements of the prime contract insofar as the
same may be applicable 1o ·his work. ~ .i:.-=. · - - - = --~.-:. ··--- ~
c. The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for the acts and omissions of his
subcontractors and their employees to the same extent as he is responsible for the acts
and omissions of his employees. Nothing contained in this Clause shall create any
contractual relationship between any Subcontractor and Owner or relieve the Contractor
of any liability or obligation under the prime Contract.
3.12 SUSPENSION OF WORI(
a. The Engineer shall have the authority to suspend the work wholly or partly by written
order for such period as may be deemed necessal)', ctue to force majeure or any
fortuitous events or for failure on the part of the Contractor to correct bad conditions which
nre unsafe for workers or for tile general public, to carry out valid orders given by the
Owner or to perform any provisions of the Contract, or clue to adjustment of plans to suit
iield conditions ns founclnecessnry during construction. 'fh8 Contractor shall immediately
comply with such order to suspend the work wholly or partly.
b. -!!1s Contmctor or IJis dui~J 2u'i1C1i ~e<.l r~rrt-~ent_f!!:·,s ~;!:;:-; 1 1 t"3ve ti?B ri!)ht tc· suspem1 \Vorl<
C•[.'·:)C81it'r. 0n -nny cr 811 r:~ :.:.j s.::t.~:/a.-~tiv!He5 r.:!o:1g f;.~ cri:!c3i ~:8til tlf activitiE!S after lift>~ em
SECTION V- PART A
(15) calendar days from date of receipt of written notice from the Contractor to the Owner
or its authorized representative due to the following:
1. There exist right-of-way problems which prohibit the Contractor from performing work
in accordance with the approved construction schedule.
2. Requisite construction plans which must be Owner-furnished are not issued to the
Contractor precluding any work called for by such plans.
3. Peace and order conditions make it extremely dangerous, if not impossible, to work.
However, this condition must be certified in writing by the Philippine National Police
(PNP) Station which has responsibility over the affected area and confirmed by the
Department of Interior and Local Govemment (DlLG) Regional Directors.
4. There is failure on the part of the Owner to deliver Owner-furnished materials and
equipment as stipulated in the Contract.
5. Delay in the payment of contractor's claim for progress billing beyond forty-five (45)
calendar days from the time the Contractor's claim has been certified to by the
Engineer that the documents are complete unless there are justifiable reasons
thereof which shall be communicated in writing to the Contractor·.
d. In case of total suspension or suspension of activities along the critical path and not due
to any fault of the Contractor, the total allowed Contract time shall be adjusted equivalent
to the elapsed time between the effective order of suspension and the order to resume
work.
3.13 TERMINATION FOR DEFAULT OF CONTRACTOR
a. The Owner shall terminate this Contract for default when any of the following conditions
attend its implementation:
1. Due to the Contractor's fault and while the project Is ongoing, it has incurred negative
slippage of fifteen percent (15%) or more in accordance with Presidentiai __R~cree
1870, re-g-ardless of whether or not previous warnings and notices have been issued
for the Contradcr to improve his performance;
2. Due to its own fault and after this Contract time has expired, the Contractor incurs
delay in the completion of the Wor1<. after this Contract has expired; or
3. The Contractor:
i. abandons the Contract Works, refuses or fails to comply with a valid instruction of
the Engineer or fails to proceed expeditiously and without delay despite a written
notice by the Engineer;
ii. does not actually have on 1he project Site the minimum essential equipment llst erl
on the Bid necessal)' to prosecute the Works in accordance with the approved
Program of Work and equipment deployment scl1edule as 1equircd for ll~e projecl;
iii. does not execute 1he Works in accordance with this Contract or persistently or
flagrantly r:e~!!eds to c?..;r; out its obligntions under t11is Conlmct:
iv. neglects or refrtse~. to r~:nr.'.' 2: m~lt1 !i~~~~; or 'w pGrlom1 a r,ew w:c.~~' J i<·,l ~r.~. t?e:··,
rojected :Js .:.'ef&ctivG or u.:st ;H :jbl <~; or
SECTION V- PART A
v. sublets any part of this Contract without approval by the Engineer.
4. All materials on the Site, Plant, Equipment. and Wor1<s shall be deemed to be the
property of the Owner if this Contract is rescinded because of the Contractor's
default.
3.14 TERMINATION FOR DEFAULT OF OWNER
The Contractor may terminate this Contract with the Owner if the works are completely stopped
for a continuous· period of at least sixty (60) calendar days through no fault of its own, due to any
of the following reasons:
a. Failure of the Owner to deliver, within a reasonable time, supplies, materials, right-of-way,
or other items it is obligated to furnish under the terms of this Contract; or
b. The prosecution of the Wor1< is disrupted by the adverse peace and order situation, as
certified by the Armed Forces of the Philippines Provincial Commander and approved by
the Secretary of National Defense. ·
3.15 TERMINATION FOR OTHER CAUSES
a. The Owner may terminate this Contract, in whole or in part, at any time· for its
convenience. The Administration may terminate this Contract for the convenience of the
Owner if he has determined the existence of conditions that make Project Implementation
economically, financially or technically impractical and/or unnecessary, such as, but not
limited to, fortuitous event(s) or changes in law and National Government policies.
b. The Owner or the Contractor may tenninate this Contract if the other party causes a
fundamental breach of this Contract.
c. Fundamental breaches of Contract shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:
1. The Contractor stops work for twenty-eight (28) days when no stoppage of work is
shown on the current Program of Work and the stoppage has not been authorized by
th~ Fngineer; - -.:- --
2. The Engineer instructs the Contractor to delay the progress of the Works, and the
instruction is not withdrawn within twenty-eight (28) days;
3. The Owner shall terminate this Contract If the Contractor is declared bankrupt or
insolvent as detennined with finality by a court of competent jurisdiction. In this
event, termination will be without compensation to the Contractor, provided that such
termination will not prejudice or affect any right of action or remedy v1hich has
accrued or will accrue thereafter to the Owner and/or the Contractor. In the case of
the Contractor's insolvency, any Contractor's Equipment which the Owner instructs in
the notice is to be used until the completion of the Wor1<s;
4. A payment certified by the Engineer is not paid by the Owner to the Contractor within
eighty-four (84) days from the date of the Engineer's certificate;
5. The Engineer gives Notice that failure to correct a particular Defect is a fundamental
broach of Contract and the Contractor fails to correct it ·.'iithi:J a 1ec1 ~ .)nacl.s p3riod of
'ilrne tletermim·xl by i.iw Engineer;
(;. The Contr<~ctor cir. ~.;;; no1 rn<lintain a SBmuity, which is loqull-ed;
SECTION V- PART A
7. The Contractor has delayed the completion of the Works by the number of days for
which the maximum amount of liquidated damages can be paid, as defined in the
GCC Clause 9; and
8. In case it is determined prima facie by the Administration that the Contractor has
engaged, before or during the implementation of the Contract, in unlawful deeds and
behaviors relative to contract acquisition and implementation, such as, but not limited
~o. the following:
i. corrupt, fraudulent, collusive and coercive practices as defined in ITB Clause

2.1 (a);
ii. drawing up or using forged documents;
iii. using adulterated materials, means or methods, or engaging in production

contrary to rules of science or the trade; and
iv. any other act analogous to the foregoing.
The Funding Source or the Owner, as appropriate, wm··seek to impose the maximum civii,
administrative and/or criminal penalties available under the applicable law on individuals and
organizations deemed to be involved with corrupt, fraudulent, or coercive practices.
When persons from either party to this Contract give notice of a fundamental breach to the
Engineer in order to tenninate the existing contract for a cause other than those listed under GCC
Clause 0, the Engineer shall decide whether the breach is fundamental or not.
If this Contract is tenninated, the Contractor shall stop work immediately, make the Site safe and
secure, and leave the Site as soon as reasonably possible.
3.16 PROCEDURES FOR TERMINATION OF CONTRACTS
The following provisions shall govern the procedures for the tennination of this Contract:
a. Upon receipt of a. written report of acts or causes which may constitute ground(s) for
termination as aforementioned, or upon its own initiative. the Implementing Unit shall,
within a period of seven (7) calendar days, verify the existence of such ground(s) and
cause the execution of a Verified Report, with all relevant evidence attached;
b. Upon recommendation by the Implementing Unit, the Administration shall terminate this
Contract only by a written notice to the Contractor conveying the termination of this
Contract. The notice shall state:
1. that this Contract is being terminated for any of the ground(s) aforementioned, and a
statement of the acts that constitute the ground(s) constituting the same;
~:. the extent of termination, whether in whole or in part;
~~ . an instruction to the Contractor to show cause as to wr1y ti1is Contt'ClCt sllould not be
terminated; and
·:·. specinl instructions of the Owner,. d <my.
!·
SECTION V- PART A
3- ADMINISTRATION·ENGINEER-OWNER-
c. Within a period of seven (7) calendar days from receipt of the Notice of Termination, the
Contractor shall submit to the Administration a verified position paper stating why the
Contract should not be terminated. If the Contractor fails to show cause after the lapse of
the seven (7) day period, either by inaction or by default, the Administration shall issue an
order terminating the Contract;
d. The Owner may, at any time before receipt of the Bidder's verified position paper to
withdraw the Notice to Terminate if it is determined that certain items or works subject of
the notice had been completed, delivered, or performed before the Contractor's receipt of
the notice;
e. Within a non-extendible period of ten (10) calendar days from receipt of the verified
position paper, the Administration shall decide whether or not to terminate this Contract.
It shall serve a written notice to the Contractor of its decision and, unless otherwise
provided in the said notice, this Contract is deemed terminated from receipt of the
Contractor of the notice of decision. The termination shall only be based on the ground(s)
stated in the Notice to Terminate; and
f. The Administration may create a Contract Termination Review Committee (CTRC) to

assist him in the discharge of this function. All decisions recommended by the CTRC
shall be subject to the approval of the Administration.
3.17 FAILURE TO COMPLY
If the Contractor should refuse or neglect to comply with the provisions of the Contract or the
orders of the Administration or its duly authorized agent, the latter may have such provisions or
orders carried out by others at the expense of the Contractor.
The Contractor shall be liable to the Owner for whatever damage_ the latter might sustain by
reason of the Contractor's non-observance of the provisions of the Contract.
3.18 RIGHTS-OF-WAY
t
- --...... -- ~
l_ands of.riqiJt.::Qf.:.w...aylnr.the. Works to be constructed under-1-h-c~vm-'i'Wc'f-w.i'f"of::1J!Wiffifif~: ·. ...o:. -
by the Owner or as shown on the Drawings. Nothing contained in the Contract
Documents shall be interpreted as giving the Contractor exclusive occupancy of lands or
right-of-way provided. Any additional lands or right-of-way required for construction
operations shall be provided by the Contractor at his own expense.
b. Except as may otherwise be provided, the Contractor shall secure, from the agencies
having jurisdiction, the necessary pennits to create obstructions, to make excavations if
required under the Contract, and to otherwise encroach upon rights-of-way, and present
evidence to the Engineer that such permission has been granted, before vJork is
commenced. Regulations and requirements of all agencies concerned shall be strictly
adhered to in the performance of this Contract, including the furnishing of insurance and
bonds required by such agencies. The enforcement of such requirements ur1d·a,· this
ContrL~ct shall not be made the belsis for claims for additional compensation.
(:. The Contrnctor shall not clo nny work th~t will affect any oil, gas, sewer, or water pipeliM,
any telephone, telegraph, or electric transmission line, fence, or any other structure nor
enter upon tile rights-of-way involved until notified .b\' the Er.gineer that the Owner has
~'{;cureu authority thc:reof ~fCiY· iil<; prt:;per r:;:HI.y. Yite ContractN is r~::;ponsib\e fo; ~ ~I the
;,::ce:,,:;ary permits with iliA ~~---:· i ~i:.'J!lf~--2 1?i' U~::: C•/Jnr;r. Nter DuU1Nity has been c·U::tln-?rJ,
!11.3 C,}f1tmctor shall giv8 :::·!~d i ..:lliy ~1:_. ,-) nvtfC(: i1i !liS intr;niion to begin work, Dlltl Si1Sil
~--3
SECTION V- PART A
3- ADMINISTRATION~ENGINEER~OWNER
give said party convenient access and every facility for removing, shoring, supporting, or
otherwise protecting such pipeline, transmission line, ditch, fence or structure, and for
fence, or structure, and for replacing same. The Contractor shall not be entitled to
extension of time or extra compensation on account of any postponement, interference,
or delay caused by any such pipeline, transmission line, fence, or structure obstructing
construction except as provided in Clause 3.18 - Construction Interferences.
3.19 CONSTRUCTION INTERFERENCES
a. As used in this Clause, the following words are defined as follows: "utility" shall be
understood to include tracks, overhead or underground wires, cables, pipelines, conduits,
ducts, sewers or stonn drains; the term "service connection" shall be understood to mean
all or any portion of a pipeline Oncluding sewer house laterals), conduit, wire, cable or
duct, Including meter, between a utility distribution line and an individual consumer, or
consumers when served by a single service connection; and the term "construction
interference" shall be understood to include any utility or service connection within the
limits of excavation or over-excavation required for the work under the Contract as shown
or as ordered by the Engineer, or any utility or service connection located In the space
which will be required by any of the work under the Contract.
b. In the event any utility or service connection is required to be-disturbed or rem-oved to

permit construction of a pipeline or other structure under the Contract, each disturbance
or removal shall be done only with the approval of the Engineer, and following notification
to the Owner of the interfering utility or service connection. Any such utility or service
connection removed or otherwise disturbed shall be reconstructed as promptly as
possible in its original or other authorized location in a condition at least as good as prior
to such removal or disturbance, subject to the inspection of the owner of the same at any
stage of the work. For this purpose. the Contractor shall be required. upon completion of
that particular phase of the work affecting said utility or connection. to present to the
Owner a certificate from the owner of the ulility or connection to the effect that the utility or
connection removed or otherwise disturbed has been restored in acceptable condition.
The Contractor's responsibility under this Clause to re,move or replace shall apply even in
the event such damage or destruction occurs after backfilling or is not discovered until
after completion of backfilling. The owner of the utHity or service connection shall be
notified immediateL~after~Uarnaga or destruction ocettrs or~-discwereu-.- ----..-h.-- · ·· · -- -- ·- -- ··--- - -
c. During the performance of the work under this Contract, the owner of any utility affected
by the work shall have the right to enter, when necessary, upon any portion of the Site for
the purpose of maintaining services and of making changes in or repairs to said utility.
d. The Drawings show the approximate positions of known utilities and sewer house laterals
in the Immediate vicinity of the Works, but the Owner does not guarantee that all existing
utilities and sewer house laterals are shown , or shown in ttleir correct location. Service
connections, except for sewer house laterals, normally are not shown on the Drawings.
The Contractor, before commencing any excavation, shall ascertain from records or
otherwise, the existence, horizontal and verti cal position, and ownership of all existing
utilities and service connections . If the Contractor discove rs any utility or sewer houso
lateral In the line of the work which is not shovm on the Drawings, 11e s11~ ll immedintely
notify the Engineer of the existence of the same. The Owner slw ll not be linllle fo r nny
consequences mising os a result of a service connection being incorre ctl y l oc~t{3d in -ti1G
field by the agency having jurisdiction over said service connection.
c:. ,'\If co-'3ts involved in re:n.:J•-ting, r<;!ocating, pr:J~ecting . £liflporti n~l. re~<'li,~n~l , iil·l!nbni:>~J or
r:~plflcing a utiii t:.1 ~A~ i cii actual:;.: c.;,' l::::l!tut c;.o ~ :-.(·nstrt_
:.::U·jl1 ir.l_.:: ri'er : ncJ, \fli : : i l ~;:1 ~;] t;lil!i:; ::.;
2-9
SECTION V- PART A
shown on the Drawings as an interference, however approximate the location shown may
be, shall be borne by the Contractor.
f. All costs involved in removing, relocating, protecting, supporting, repairing, maintaining or

replacing a utility which actually constitutes a construction interference, when said utility is
not shown as an interference or is omitted from the Drawings, will be paid for by the
Owner as extra work.
g. All costs involved in removing, relocating, protecting, supporting, repairing, maintaining or

replacing· a service connection lamer than 50 mm (2 in) in nominal diameter which
actually constitutes a construction interference, when said service connection is shown on
the Drawings as an interference, however, approximate the location shown may be, shall
be borne by the Contractor.
h. All costs involved in removing, relocating, protecting, supporting, repairing, maintaining or

replacing a service connection larger than 50 mm (2-in) in nominal diameter which
actually constitutes a construction interference, when said service connection is not
shown as an interference, or is omitted from the Drawings, will be paid for by the Owner
as extra work.
i. All costs involved in removing, relocating, protecting, supporting, repairing, maintaining or

replacing a service connection so mm (2-in) or smaller in nominal diameter which aCtua lly
constitutes a construction interference, whether or not said service connection is shown
on the Drawings, shall be borne by the Contractor.
j. The Contractor shall not be assessed liquidated damages for failure to complete the work
on time, to the extent that such delay was caused by failure of the Owner or of the agency
having jurisdiction over the utility or service connection to authorize or otherwise provide
for its removal, relocation, protection, support, repair, maintenance or replacement.
k. The owner reserves the right, upon determination of the actual position of existing utilities
and service connections, to make changes in alignment Of grade of the Owner's pipeline
when, by so doing, the necessity for relocation of existing· utilities or service connections
will be avoided. Such changes will be ordered in writing by the Engineer. Where ~ _____ _- --:. ·-
...J applicahle, ndjustment.in .the Contract Price will be on the-basis of the unit price"Srated nY
I the Bill of Quantities. Where unit prices in the Bill of Quantities are not appl!cable,
adjustments in Contract Price will be made in accordance with Clause 42 - Variation
Orders of the General Conditions of the Contract.
3.20 CONSTRUCTION STAKES AND REFERENCE MARKS
The Contractor shall set construction stakes establishing lines, slopes and center line and bench
marks for pipe work, culvert work, utility lines, structures and other appurtenances, as may be
necessary and will furnish the Resident Engineer with all necessa ry equipment and labor for
checking lines, slopes, and grades. These stakes and marks shall constitute the field control in
accordance with which the Contractor shall execute the work.
The Contractor shr~ll furnish, free of charge, all additionfll stakes, templates, batter boards, and
other m<~terials <md supplies necess<~ry for marking <1nd maintaining points and lines established.
fillet shall Dlso furnish the r~esident Engineer such labor ns may be reasonabl y re~ui red in
establisfliny points and lines to the satisfactory prosecution of the work. The Contractor shall be
1~ 3 1d responsible for tile p;·e~ervaUon of 311 s!3ke~ and mmks.
::. '!IJ
SECTION V- PART A
In cases involving any changes in stakeout, the Contractor shall cooperate with the Resident
Engineer and facilitate the prompt re-establishment of the field control for the altered or adjusted
work.
3.21 LOCAL LABOR AND LABOR INTENSIVE METHODS
Pursuant to the provisions of Balas Pambansa Big. 13 (Infrastructure Act for 1979) entitled "An
Act Appropriating Funds for Public Works and Highway Projects and for Other Purposes," the
Contractor, in the prosecution of the Contract, shall give preference to the use of available skilled
and unskillea labor in the locality.
Whenever technically practicable and economically feasible, labor intensive methods should be
given preference especially in the excavation and laying of pipelines.
SECTION V- PART A
4- MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
4.1 SAFEGUARDING OF EQUIPMENT, MATERJALS AND WORK
The Contractor shall properly safeguard all equipment, materials and the work against loss,
damages, malicious mischief, or tampering by unauthorized persons until acceptance of the
Works by the Owner and Administration. Locked and covered storage or continuous surveillance
by watchmen shall be provided if required to accomplish this purpose.
4.2 NEW MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
Unless otherwise specifically shown or permitted by the Engineer, all materials and equipment
incorporated in the Works shall be new and of current manufacture. The Engineer may request
the Contractor to furnish manufacturers' certificates to this effect.
4.3 CONTRACTOR'S UTILITIES
a. Unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions, the Owner shall furnish, without
c harge, reasonable quantities of water required by the Contractor in the performance of
the work under the Contract, provided the required hydrostatic test and disinfection pass
on the first scheduled testing. However, the Contractor shall provide the facilities
necessary to convey the water from the Owner-designated source to the points of use.
Furthermore, for hydrostatic test or disinfection, the Contractor shall be charged for
additional volume of water after the first scheduled test fails.
b. The Contractor shall provide his own telephone and all electric power required in the
performance of the worl< under the Contract, and shall pay all Installation charges and
monthly bills in connection therewith.
4.4 TITLE TO MATERIALS FOUND ON THE SITE
The Owner reserves the right to retain title to all soils, stone, sand, gravel, and other materials
developed and obtained from the excavation and from other operations connected with the worl<.
Unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions, neither the Contractor nor any
Subcontractor shall have any right, title, or interest in or to any such materials. The Contractor
will be permitted to use in his work, without charge, any: such materials which meet the
requirements of the Specifications and Drawings.
4.~ DE'FECTtVE-EQtiiPMENT, -MATERIALS OR WORK. · :- . -
a. Inspection of the Work shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his obligations under the
Contract. Even though the equipment, materials, or worl< required to be provided under
the Contract have been inspected, accepted, and estimated for payment. the Contractor
shall, at his expense, replace or repair any such equipment, materials, or work found to
be defective or otherwise not to comply with the requirements of the Contract up to the
end of the maintenance and guarantee period.
h. Any equipment or materials brought upon the job site by the Contractor and subsequently
rejected by the Engineer as not complying with the requirements of the Contract shall be
removed by the Contractor to a sfltisfnctory distance from lhe site.
c. !i the Contractor shCJII f~ il to rep<~ir or replac~ ursatisfactory eCluipmenl. materials or worl<,

or to remove unsatisfactor; GQuipment or rn <Jteriflls from the job s1te. within 1.on (10)
c ~femJar dCJys D.ftc r being ordered to •jo so by lhe Engineer, the t:ngineer, 1Ni£h tile
concurrence of the Owner, may make the ordered repairs or remove !he condemned
( ')tt!pmmr\ or rr rfltmi.'llco, ::.nci 11":3 Or1110r shall c~dilei HlO r:ost therecf h .rr'l. :lrlY m•.Hlt<y tiL; ~
(·r to i.x:comL~ (J w~ ti l'?- Con i: ~l·.-i<:·! .
SECTION V- PART A
4- MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
4.6 RUBBISH CONTROL
During the progress of the work, the Contractor shall keep the Site and other areas used by him in
a neat and clean condition, and free from any accumulation or rubbish.
4.7 DUST CONTROL
The Contractor shall at all times conduct his work so as to avoid unnecessary dust. He shalf
provide adequate equipment and water as determined by the Engineer to be necessary for the
accomplishment of this objective.
4.8 CLEANING UP
The Contractor shall promptly remove from the vicinity of the completed Works all rubbish,
unused materials, concrete fonns, equipment, and temporary structures used during construction.
Additional clean-up work, if provided in the Special Provisions, shall be performed by the
Contractor.
4.9 CHARACTER OF WORKMEN
Only qualified personnel and skilled workmen shall be employed on the Site except in positions
normally occupied by unskilled labor. When required in writing by the Engineer, the Contractor or
any Subcontractor shall discharge any person who is, in the opinion of the Engineer, incompetent,
disorderly or otherwise unsatisfactory, and shall not again employ such discharged person on the
work except with the written consent of the Engineer. Such discharged person shall not be the
basis of any claim for damages against the Owner or any of his agents.
If the Contractor permits such a person on the Site, without the consent of the Engineer, this
alone shall be sufficient to immediately suspend the Contract until the Engineer's instructions
have been fulfilled.
4.10 SANCTIONS FOR NON-OBSERVANCE
In case the Contractor violates or fails to observe Clauses 4.6 to 4.8, it shall be valid ground for
issuance of suspension order and shaH be allowed to resunie after compliance with the
requirement under the clauses mentioned. The Contractor will no\ be entitled to time extension
due to said suspension order since the Contracto-r is considerecfaT fauu:---------- --- - - -- - -- -
... "
-
SECTION V- PART A
5- PROGRESS AND PAYMENT
5.1 VARIATION ORDERS AND CHANGE ORDERS
a. Variation Orders may be issued by the Engineer to cover any increase/decrease in

quantities, including the introduction of new work items that are not included in the
original contract or reclassification of work items that are eilher due to change of plans,
design or alignment to suit actual field conditions resulting in disparity between the
preconstruction plans used for purposes of bidding and the uas staked plans" or
construction drawings prepared after a joint survey by the Contractor and the Engineer
after award of the Contract, provided that the cumulative amount of the Variation Order
does not exceed ten percent (10%) of the original project cost. The addition/deletion of
Works should be within the general scope of the project as bid and awarded. A Variation
Order may be in the form of either a Change Order or an Extra Work Order.
b. A Change Order may be issued by the implementing official to cover any

increase/decrease in quantities of original Work items in the Contract.
c. An Extra Work Order may be issued by the implementing official to cover the introduction
of new work necessary for the completion, improvement or protection of the project which
were not included as items of Work in the original Contract, such as, where there are
subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site differing materially from those indicated
in the Contract, or where there are duly unknown physical conditions at the site of an
unusual nature differing materially from those ordinarily encountered and generally
recognized ·as inherent in the Work or character provided for in the Contract. . ·
d. Any cumulative Variation Order beyond ten percent (1 0%) shall be subject of another
contract to be bid out if the works are separable from the original contract. In exceptional
cases where it is urgently necessary to complete the original scope of work, the Owner
may authorize the Variation Order beyond ten percent (1 0%) but not more than twenty
percent (20%) subject to the guidelines to be determined by the GPPB: Provided,
however, that appropriate sanctions shall be imposed on the designer, consultant or
official responsible for the original detailed engineering design which failed to consider the
Variation Order beyond ten percent (1 0%).
e. In claiming for any Variation Order, the Contractor shall, within seven (7) calendar days
after such work has been commenced or after t~e circumstances leading to such
condition(s) leading to the extra cost and within tweQ.!y-eight (28) calendar days, deliver a
wlitten communieatioh giving -fi:ill and detailed particulars of any extra cost in order that It
may be investigated at that time. Failure to provide either of such notices in the time
stipulated shall constitute a waiver by the Contractor for any claim. The preparation and
submission of Variation Orders are as follows:
If the Owner believes that a Change Order or Extra Work Order should be issued, he
shall prepare the proposed Order accompanied with the notices submitted by the
Contractor, the plans therefore, his computations as to the quantities of the additional
works involved per item indicating the specific stations where such works are needed,
the date of his inspections and investigations thereon, and the log book t11ereof, and a
detailed estimate of the unit cost of such items of work, together with his justifications
for the need of suc11 Change Order or Extra Work Order, and shall submit the same
to the Engineer.
ii The Engineer, upon receipt of the proposed Change Order or E:xlra \Nor:< Order shall
immediately instruct the technical staff of the Owner to conduct an on-the-spot
investigation to verify the need for the Work to be prosecuted. A report of such
't2rifiotion shall be submitted directly to ihe Engin&sr.
.·: -,
~
SECTION V- PART A
iii The Engineer, after being satisfied that such Change Order or Extra Work Order is
justified and necessary, shall review the estimated quantities and prices and forward
the proposal with the supporting documentation to the Owner for consideration.
iv If, after review of the plans, quantities and estimated unit cost of the items of work
involved, the proper office of the Owner empowered to review and evaluate Change
Orders or Extra Wor1< Orders recommends approval thereof, the Engineer, believing
the Change Order or Extra Work Order to be in order, shall approve the same.
v The timeframe for the processing of Variation Orders from the preparation up to the
approval by the Owner concerned shall not exceed thirty (30) calendar days.
5.2 EXTRA WORK COSTING
a. For addilionaVextra works duly covered by Change Orders involving work items which are
exactly the same or similar to those in the original Contract, the applicable unit prices of
work items original Contract shall be used.
b. For additional/extra works duly covered by Extra Wor1< Orders involving new work items
that are not in the original Contract, the unit prices of the new work items shall be based
on the direct unit costs used in the original contract (e.g. unit cost of cement, rebars, form
lumber, labor rate, equipment rental, etc.) . All new components of the new work Item
shall be fixed prices, provided the same is acceptable to both Engineer and the
Contractor, and provided further that the direct unit costs of the new components shall be
based on the contractor's estimate as validated by the Engineer concerned via
documented canvass in accordance with existing rules and regulations. The direct cost of
the new unit item shall then be combined with the mar1<-up factor 0.e. taxes and profit)
used by the Contractor in his bid to determine the unit price of the new work item.
c. The cost of the extra work done shall be submitted at the intervals to be determined by
the Engineer in a satisfactory form, which shall be approved or adjusted at once by the
Owner. Request for payment by the Contractor for any extra work shall be accompanied
by a statement, with the approved supporting forms, giving a detailed accounting and
record of amount for which he claims payment. Said: request for payment shall be
included with the Contractor's statement for progress payr11ent.
S.3 OVERTiME WORK
Except as otherwise provided in this Clause, the Contractor shall receive no additional
compensation for overtime wor1<, even though such work may be required under
emergency conditions and may be ordered by the Engineer in writing. Additional
compensation will be paid the Contractor for overtime work only in the event extra work is
ordered by the Engineer and the Change Order specifically authorizes the use of
O'Jertime work, and then only to such extent as regular wages are regularly being paid by
the Contractor for overtime work of a similar nature in the same locality.
5.4 EXTENSION OF CONTRACT TIME
n. :3hould the amount of additional work or other special circumstances of any kinrl
v1hatsoever occur such as fairly to entitle the Contractor to an extension of the
construction period, the Engineer, with the approvnl of tile Owner, shall rJetermine the
nmount of such extension; provided that the Engineer i:> not buund to take into account
any claim for an extension of time unless the ~ontractor has, prior to the expimtion of the
1 ::nsiruc'don periori and within tt;irty (:0) r.a !F:rorlnr riS'JS nftcr ~; u<;h \ 'iO l l< has been
'.f.'rl~m 8ncctl cr ll\'!f!i 11 ~ ) ell cum~t<J:1<:'8S l:-;::tl!;1u ~>::: :-: !H:-.n c!a~m ~ ~v~'> ari ::.~:~n. deliverer!
r .:i'. )$ -t0 ·fi1C:~ t.::noinBN ill Ci-:iar lti~t he cct.:·:i ;;.:_,._,,) i l , ·H~~~:iq ."ib d \rem <.l~ Hiat tim8. F~i htJ _)
._': r·l'. •::JJ .-;~·:'l l n;_::icc ~· i·1~ll cor,siitut0 a ·.·.:~ . .-u L•j ~"" C:u:lli'~iCh::·r ul dO)' claim. Upon
. --
CONSTRUCTION OF WATER SYSTEM FOR STANOARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION V- PART A
receipt of detailed particulars, the Engineer shall examine the facts and extent of the
delay and shall extend the contract time for period of the work when, in the Engineer's
opinion, the findings of facts justify an extension.
b. No extension of contract time shall be granted the Contractor due to: (a) ordinary
unfavorable weather conditions, and (b) inexcusable failure or negligence of Contractor to
provide the required equipment, supplies or materials.
c. Extension of contract time may be granted only when the affected activities fall within the
critical path of the PERT/CPM network.
d. No extension of contract time shall be granted when the reason given to support the
request for extension was already considered in the determination of the original contract
time during the conduct of detailed engineering and in the preparation of the contract
documents as agreed upon by the parties before contract perfection.
e. Extension of contract time shall be granted for rainy/unworkable days considered

unfavorable for the prosecution of the works at the site, based on the actual conditions
obtained at the site, in excess of the number of rainy/unworkable days pre-determined by
the Engineer in relation to the original contract time during the conduct of detailed
engineering and in the preparation of the contract documents as agreed upon by the
parties before contract perfection, and/or for equivalent period of delay due to major
calamities -such as exceptionally destructive typhoons, floods and earthquakes, and
epidemics, and for causes such as non-delivery on time of materials, working drawings,
or written information to be furnished by the Engineer, non-acquisition of permit to enter
private properties within the right-of-way resulting in complete paralyzation of construction
activities, and other meritorious causes as determined by the Engineer and approved by
the Owner. Shortage of construction materials, general labor strikes, and peace and
order problems that disrupt construction operations through no fault of the Contractor may
be considered as additional grounds for extension of contract time provided they are
publicly felt and certified by appropriate government agencies such as DTI, DOLE, DILG,
and DND, among others. The written consent of bondsmen must be attached to any
request of the Contractor for extension of contract time and submitted to the Engineer for
consideration, and the validity of the Performance. Security shall be correspondingly
extended.
5.5 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
a. The Contractor shall pay liquidated damages to the Owner at tne rate per day stated in
the SCC for each day that the Completion Date is later than the Intended Completion
Date. The total amount of liquidated damages shall not exceed the amount defined in the
SCC. Tile Owner may deduct liquidated damages from payments due to the Contractor.
rnyment of liquidated damages shall not affect the Contract. Once the cumulative
rtmount of liquidated damages reaches ten per~nt (10%) of the amount of this Contract,
the Owner shall rescind this Contract, without preJudiGe to other courses of action and
remedies open to it.
h. If the Intended Completion Date is extended aftr~r liquid<~ted damages have been paid,
the Engineer shall correct any overpayment of liquidated damages by the Contractor by
;;~(!justing the next payment certificate. The Contractor shall be paid interest on the
ovcrpe1yment. cCllculated from tt1e date of paymE-nt to ihe date of repayment, at the rates
specified in GCC Clause 39.1.
~- 3
SECTION V- PART A
5.6 MONTHLY PROGRESS REPORT
The Contractor is required to submit to the Owner three (3) copies of a monthly progress report
which shall include the following: (a) items of work accomplished for the month; (b) a cumulative
summary of the items of work accomplished to date; and (c) items of work scheduled for the
following month. The first monthly progress report will cover the time from the date when the
Notice to Proceed is issued until the end of the following month. Subsequently, monthly reports
shall be submitted monthly thereafter until provisional acceptance of the project. If the Contractor
fails to submit two (2) successive monthly progress reports on due date, the Owner may withhold
approval of progress payments until the reports are received.
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to report promptly to the Adn1inistration and the
Engineer the occurrence of any event or condition that might delay or prevent completion of the
project in accordance with the approved construction CPM and to indicate steps being taken to
meet the situation.
5.7 MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIES
All work completed and accepted under the Contract shall be measured by the Engineer
according to Philippine Standard Metric Measure, in accordance with the Clauses for
Measurement and Payment. Computations of quantities of work performed shall be based on
such measurements. Items paid for by lineal meter shall be measured, parallel to such lines,
sewer, drains, pipelines, underground wiring, fences, culverts, etc. without reduction for length of
frttings, valves and similar facilities. No local rules or customs will be considered.
Unless otherwise specifically provided for in these Specifications or in the Special Provisions,
items to be paid for by weight shall be measured on suitable scales furnished by and at the
expense of the Contractor. Such scales shall be calibrated and sealed at the Contractors
expense as often as necessary.
5.8 SCOPE OF PAYMENTS
The sum of all payments shall be considered full compensation for furnishing all materials, labor,
tools, equipment, and for performing all work contemplated under the Contract. It shall also be
considered full recompense to the Contractor for all losses or dafl'\8ges arising from the nature of
the work or from unforeseen difficulties encountered <;luring Jh~ pros~cution- of the Contract, for all- - -- ..:
--- -iisks of eve,.Ylirid and To( an expenses incurred. - -·- ·
The payment of any partial estimate or any retained percentage shall not affect the obligations of
the Contractor to repair or renew any defective part of the Works, or to replace any defective
materials or to be responsible for all damage due to such defects. •
5.9 PARTIAL PAYMENTS
Once a month, as the work progresses, the Engineer will make an estimate of the value of the
work completed and materials supplied in accordance with the Contract.
The LWUA, as the authorized representative of the owner, shall certif'J release to the Funding
?.gency of the Contractor's monthly payment for the value of the work accomplist1Gd, including tl1e
value of materials delivered, installed ~nd tested, if testing i:J required, d uring the month except
lhal payment for the m£1terials shall be in the manner prescnbed und6r this Clause. Provided,
however, that all payments due to the Contractor shall be subject to ten percent (10%) retention
until the completion of the Contract. Provided, further that the reter.tion monev shall serve AS the
::- .:>ntra.-:-~or's <:ddition:~l smety c>.nd !.>llc:tll b0 subject to the Conlracto1's f•)rf3itur:~ i·~ c.~1s~ ot viol<ltion
of any c.·>nditions under ti1e Cor.tm;t.
SECTION V- PART A
LWUA shall have the right to deduct from the Contractor's billing such amount as may be
necessary to cover third party liabilities, as well as uncorrected defects in the Works.
Payment will not be made on items procured in Philippine Pesos not fully paid for and not titled in
the name of the Contractor as verified by copies of paid invoices supplied to the Engineer, nor for
items that do not comply with the source and origin requirements of the Contract.
Unless authorized by the Administration, a partial payment will not be made for any work which
does not confoon to the construction schedule included in the Special Provisions, if one is
included. Payment for the work may be withheld until preceding works specified are completed.
Partial payments are based on estimates only and are subject to adjustment as required by
averages or shortages. Partial payments deductions will be made from progress payments for
the cost of any material incorporated in the work that has not been paid for in full by the
Contractor.
Any provision to the contrary notwithstanding, all payments shall be subject to existing laws and
Commission on Audit rules and regulations.
It is understood that the Contract is for one whole and complete Works, and that no progress
payments or payment on account or the use of parts of the Works or equipment shall constitute
an acceptance of any part of the Works before completion and final acceptance of the whole of
the Works, except as may be otherwise approved by the Owner.
Materials and Equipment for the Peonanent Works
The Contractor shall procure all materials and equipment required for the peonanent works in
accordance with the approved CPMIPERT Program. The Contractor shall be entitled to such sum
as the Administration may consider proper in respect of materials and equipment intended for but
not yet incorporated in the Peonanent Works. Payment for the materials and equipment for the
Permanent Works shall be subject to the following conditions: ..,
a. "·
that the materials and equipment are in accordance With the specifications for the
Peonanent Works; I
t
b. that such matE?~!S.Q(.equipment have been delivere.dto the Site, and are properly stored
and profectea-agafristloss or damage or deterioration to the satisfaction of the Engineer;
c. that the Contractor's records of the requirements, orders, receipt and use of materials or
equipment are kept in a foon approved by the Engineer and such records shall be
available for inspection by the Engineer; •
c1. that the Contractor shall submit with his monthly statement the estimated value of the
materials <lnd equipment on Site together with such documents as may be required by the
Engineer for the purpose of valuation of the materials and Plant and providing evidence of
ownership and payment therefore; and
e. that ownership of such muterials und equipment sl1all be deemed to rest on the Owner;
Tile :>um payable for such materi~l!> and equipment on Site shall not exceed seventy-five perc3nt
(750f.:>) of the cost of m<lterials <1nd equipment delivered to !he Site.
5.10 ELIMINATION OF ITEMS
8ilol!ld <my item contain8d in the f] i!l of Ouanlities ba founo unner;e.->s8r .·, 0 \:tnGr m<iy i)'J '.vrilten
<';der t0 llle GontraGtor, cie:.::t:~ such item frorn ihe Contract. and no al!owanc0 will bo made for
it8ms so eliminated in JnaxinQ paymor:t t(.l thG Contractor except for such actual worl( 85 may 11ave
SECTION V- PART A
been done and for materials actually purchased prior to notification of the deletion of the item.
The materials paid for or financed under the Contract but not utilized due to the elimination of the
item shall become the property of the Owner.
5.11 OWNERSHIP OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
Any material and/or equipment purchased by the Contractor which are paid/reimbursed by LWUA
and/or the Owner and/or financed under the Contract are to be incorporated in the project or
turned over by the Contractor to the Owner upon completion of the project or at such earlier date
as they may be no longer needed in the project.
All materials that are not incorpor&ted but purchased/supplied and/or financed by LWUA and/or
the Contract are subject to inventory or inspection and shall immediately be turned over to the
Owner by the Contractor in an undamaged condftion.
All equipment purchased by the Contractor are to be inventoried and inspected by the Engineer
and shall immediately be turned over to the Owner in an undamaged condition, except for such
normal wear and tear as could be expected from such use as the equipment may have been
employed in the Project.
Provided, however that, if the materials/equipment are returned in a damaged condition, the
Administration/Owner may refuse acceptance of the same and/or that if the materials/equipment
are missing, the Administration/Engineer is authorized to deduct the value (based on acqu isition
cost) corresponding to such materials/equipment from final payments due the Contractor and in
the insufficiency thereof, to proceed against the Securities.
5.12 PAYMENT OF CONTRACTOR'S OBLIGATIONS
The Contractor shall punctually pay all workmen employed by him on the Works at such ·rates as
are provided by existing laws. He shall also pay promptly for all materials and equipment and
rentals of equipment used by him, and all taxes due from him. He shall remit as required by law
all amounts withheld from the salaries or wages of his employees or workmen.
Before any partial payment beyond fifty percent (50%) of the Contract Price, the Contractor shall
submit a notarized affidavit stating that he has paid all obligations que for labor, materials, rent for
equipment etc and taxes, in connection with the Contract. AnothE!r__s_imilar statement shall- be -
required before final -payment is ·made. ·lri case the contractor, for any reason, fails to file such
affidavit, or if affidavit is contradicted by verified statements of claimants for unpaid accounts for
wages, salaries, rent, materials and taxes incurred In connection with this Contract project, the
Engineer may withhold an amount from payments due the Contracto! as specified in the Contract.
Direct payment to creditors of the Contractor may be allowed upon the submission by the
Contractor of a deed of assignment, or such other acceptable documents, in favor of such
creditors approved by the Engineer, and only upon showing that the obligation is incurred to meet
project-related expenditures. Provided, however, that such direct payment shall likewise be
subjected to the pertinent provisions of the Contract. The Contractor shall not assign more than
ninety percent (90%) of the value of materials as contained in the Bid Form item, but in no case
shall the unit price of the materials assigned exceed fifty-four percent (54%) of 1h0 Contractor's
overall unit bid price for the related item.
6.13 ACCEPTANCE AND FINAL PA'/MENT
Whenever the improvement provided for by the Contract shall have been r ompletel•; performed
<111d tho Worl<.s have been C1 pprovcd an<l accepted, a fitwl estimate showing~ h'~ v~h ~-<: or the work
(lone ViiII l>e prqnred by tt1e Enginr:er. This final esun-•2-ie slla!l t;.') f(,r:,rr.; · r::~~d :'1 l i :,~ Contmctor
for hi.s nrJprovnl <JI!d ~ iQ i~atu re. The s ioni;lg of thclin:JI<"~'! im nte !:r.· til •.) .--,c- :·.11;-Ji iU : lt:-dl COiiSlit.llte
f~ll ncc:::plm:cc by !lim of the toic:l &1fi uui'1t shown <J.:> enii ro payrnGiH .'vr illO ' •iTIC. u li t due to hirn
SECTION V- PART A
under the Contract, and by his action, the Contractor shall be stopped from filing any further claim
whatsoever under the Contract.
If the final estimate as submitted is not acceptable to the Contractor, he shall file with the
Engineer a written statement setting forth his claim for adjustment. Failure of the Contractor to file
such a statement within thirty (30) days after the date of receipt of the final estimate shall
constitute his agreement to the quantities and prices as set forth and he shall have no further
claim against the Owner except as indicated in the final estimate of quantfties. The amount of this
estimate, less any sums that have been deducted or retained under the provision of the Contract,
will be paid to the Contractor.
5.14 RELEASE OF RETENTION MONEY
The Owner shall retain from each payment due to the Contractor an amount equal to a
percentage thereof using the rate as specified in sec Clause 41.2.
Progress payments are subject to the retention of ten percent (1 0%) of the value of the work
done, referred to as the ·retention money." Such retention shall be based on the total amount due
to the Contractor prior to any deduction and shall be retained from each monthly payment until
fifty percent (50%) of the value of work done, as determined by LWUA, is completed. If, after fifty
percent (50%) completion, the Work is satisfactorily done and on schedule, no additional retention
shall be made, otherwise, ten percent (10%) retention shall be again imposed using the rate
specified therefor.
The total ·retention money" shall be due for release upon final acceptance of the Works. The
Contractor may, however, request the substitution of the retention money for each progress billing
with irrevocable standby letters of credit from a commercial bank, bank guarantees or surety bonds
callable on demand, of amounts equivalent to the retention money substituted for and acceptable
to the LWUA, provided that the project is on schedule and is satisfactorily undertaken. Otherwise,
the percentage retained shall be made. Said irrevocable standby letters of credit, bank guarantees
and/or surety bonds, to be posted in favor of the LWUA, shall be valid for a duration to be
determined by the concerned implementing office/agency and will answer for the purpose for which
the retention is intended, i.e., to cover uncorrected discovered defects and third party liabilities.
On completion of the whole Works, the Contractor may sub~titute retention money with an uo_n
demand" Bank guc:lrarrtee ·ii-raionn acceptable to fhe twuA..-:: -~ ---~ -·------·-- - --- ·
5.15 FINAL ACCEPTANCE
Final Acceptance shall be understood as the acceptance of the Project by LWUA or by the Owner
with the approval of LWUA
A certificate of Project completion may, however, be issued prior to final acceptance provided that
the project can be put into operation by the Owner pending completion of the remaining minor
works and subject to the Contractor completing the remaining minor works witl1in the period and
in accordance with the tenns and conditions specified in the Certificate. In no case shall the
Contractor be entitled to the release of securities, final payment, and in case of wo!"k delays,
retention money prior to the project's finn! acceptance.
5.16 ADJUSTMENT OF CONTR/\CT PRICE
Except for extraordinary circumstances as determined by NEDA and approved hy the GPPB, no
1;fice GdjLlstment ~;IHJI! h:c aHa•;.; cj unless otl1erwise specitied in t11e ~3:)8ci;)i C·.mditions of tho
Conlr.:Jel.
::· .'
SECTION V- PART A
5.17 BOOKS AND RECORDS
The Contractor will be required to maintain adequate books and records concerning transactions
under or in connection with the Contract and to make them available for inspection and audit by
the Owner, or others designated by the Owner, during the Contract tenn and for a period of three
(3) years after the final payment under the Contract, to insure compliance with the requirements
of the contract between the Owner and the Contractor. They will be subject to audit for
compliance with possible source and origin, transportation and comparable requirements.
5.18 FORCE MAJEURE
a. For purposes of this Contract, the tenns "force majeure" and "fortuitous event" may be
used interchangeably. In this regard, a fortuitous event or force majeure shall be
interpreted to mean an event which the Contractor could not have foreseen, or which
though foreseen, was inevitable. It shall not include ordinary unfavorable weather
conditions; and any other cause the effects of which could have been avoided with the
exercise of reasonable diligence by the Contractor.
Conditions of "Force Majeure" as defined in the Contract shall include, but not be limited
to, the following:
Blockade or embargo Lockout

Civil disorder or uprising Major shipping losses
Earthquake Rebellion
Epidemic Revolution
Explosion Riot
Fire General Strike
Insurrection Tsunami
Invasion War (declared or not)
and such other conditions or their after-effects as would 1ender the site unworkable, or
._, any cause or condition beyond the control and remedy and not due to the negligence--or -· -" -..!"- · - - · '-- -
- fault of any of the parties to the Contract.
b. If this Contract is discontinued by an outbreak of war or by any other event entirely

outside the control of either the Owner or the Contractor, the Engineer shall certify that
this Contract has been discontinued. The Contractor shall· make the Site safe and stop
work as quickly as possible after receiving this certificate and shall be paid for all works
carried out l)efore receiving it and for any Work carried out afterwards to which a
commitment w~s made.
c. It the event continues for n period of eighty-four (84) days, either party may then give notice
of tennination, which shall take effect twenty-eight (28) days after the giving of the notice.
d. /\ftnr t::lrm!nat!on, tiw Contractor shall be entitled to P<lym8nt of the unpaicl balance of the
v<Jiuc of the \fl/orks r.xecutecl ond of the materials and PlJnt r,:;asonul)lj delivered to the
Sit<\ <KI_jw.te.J '<.ly the followino:
1) <my <>um to which the Contr~r.tor is entitled under !h8 Coillr<Jct;

.?.' ·ii !r; cu:>t err- f1is ~-.u.spen ~·.ion ;wd c\emobiliz.alion;
:'•) ; lilY ~.;: ,,H i t) ·:;b ::i I -nw n\~.l:':c· r t$ ;;;ntm .::cl.
[.')
SECTION V- PART A
5 ~PROGRESS AND PAYMENT
e. The net balance due shall be paid or repaid within a reasonable time period from tt1e time
of the notice of termination.
5.19 CONTRACT COMPLETION
Once the project reaches substantial completion with an accomplishment of 95% of the total
contract amount, LWUA may create an inspectorate team to make the preliminary inspection and
submit d punch-list to the Contractor in preparation for the final turnover of the project. Said
punch-list will contain, among others, the remaining works, work deficiencies for necessary
corrections, and the specific duration/time to fully complete the project considering the approved
remaining contract time. This however, shall not preclude the claim of the Owner for liquidated
damages.
(;.J
SECTION V- PART A
6 - BONDS, INSURANCE, LEGAL RESPONSIBILITY AND

PUBLIC SAFETY
6.1 SECURITIES
To guarantee the faithful performance of the Contractor under the Contract, he shall post, within
ten (10) calendar days from receipt of Notice of Award, a Performance Security in the form of
cash, manager's check, cashier's check, bank draft/guarantee letter of credit issued by a
reputable bank, or surety bond e<~llable on demand, or any combination thereof, in accordance
with the following schedule:
a. Cash, manager's check. e<~shier's check, irrevocable letter of credit, bank draft - five
percent (5%) of the Contract Price;
b. Bank guarantee - ten percent (1 0%) of the Contract Price;
c. Surety bond -thirty percent (30%) of the Contract Price;
d. Foreign government guarantee in the amount of one hundred percent (1 00%) of the
contract price.
The Performance Security shall be posted in favor of LWUA and shall guarantee the payment of
the amount of the security as penalty in the event it is established that the Contractor is in default
in his obligations thereunder.
In the execution of the Performance Security. the following conditions shall be complied with:
a. It shall be executed in accordance with the form as prescribed therefor.
b. It shall be valid until a date thirty (30) days from the date of issue of Certificate of
Completion.
c. The following provisions shall form part of the Performance Security: "The right to institute
action on the penal bond pursuant to Act No. 3688 of any Individual firm. partnership.
corporation and association supplying the Contractor with labor and materials for the
prosecution of the wor1<. is hereby acknowledged and confirmed. a
Subject to the conditions of the Contract. the Performance security shall be released by LWUA
1- I after the issiJ.ance. of the Certifie3t3 of Ccrnple;<ion ·of the ·cui1tiad;- pi·ovicled' thit thE:ire: are -no · ·
claims for labor and materials filed against the Contractor or !he surety company.
In case of a reduction in !he contract value. or. in the case of procurement of infrastructure
projects. for partially completed works under !he contract which are usable and accepted by the
Government, and !he use of which in the judgment of the implementing agency or !he Owner will
not affect the structural integrity of the entire project, the said agency or Owner shall allow a
proportional reduction in the original Performance Security, provided that any such reduction is
more than ten percent (1 0%) and that the aggregate of such reductions is not more than fifty
percent (50%) of the original Performance Security.
6.2 ADDITIONAL SURETY
Should any surety upon the security for the performance of this Contract become unaccoptable to
l.WUA, the Contractor shall promptly furnish such rcpiClcement security as m<=~y be ,equirccl wiil1in
fi 1e (5) working days from receipt of written order to do so.
The Contractor shall post an nddHion!ll P8rformance Security to cover an'; c·.!;r:u:8t;v0 incre,)SP. of
1.:on~ tr1an ten percent (10%) over tile or!oin<ll 'f[-llue of the contract as <1 re "S:..:lt of ·:ldjuslrnenl:; in
l~i~ ll 1:·;lc-os nnrJJor ChEln0e (lJd:)rs, '2xtr2 Wr;r:\ •.)rders .:lnd Supp:cn~an iEI ; ... 01 ~~~n en t~. ·,- h:~
. ..-
~~
SECTION V- PART A

PUBLIC SAFETY
Contractor shall cause for the extension of the validity period of the Performance Security to cover
approved Contract time extension.
In the event of Contractor's failure to prosecute any portion of the contracted work, LWUA may,
without necessarily terminating the Contract, draw such amount against the security as may be
required to complete such portion. Within fifteen (15) days from such withdrawal, the Contractor
shall submit additional security as replenishment.
6.3 MATERIALS/WORKMANSHIP GUARANTEE
a. The Contractor shall guarantee the entire work constructed by him under the Contract to
be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year following the
date of final acceptance of the works by the Owner's governing body and approval by
Administration. The Contractor shall agree to make, at its own expense , any repairs or
replacements made necessal)' by defects in materials or workmanship which become
evident within the guarantee period. The Contractor shall further agree to indemnify and
save harmless the Owner and his officers, agents and employees, against and from all
claims and liabilities arising from damage and injul)' due to any defects. The Contractor
shall make all repairs and replacements promptly upon receipt of a written order from the
Administration/Engineer. If the Contractor fails to make the repairs and replacements
promptly, the Owner may do the work required and charge the cost thereof to the
guarantee bond required in sub-clause (b) below. If said guarantee security is insufficient
to cover the expenses, the deficiency shall be shouldered by the Contractor.
b. To guarantee the conditions specified in Clause 6.3(a), the Contractor shall post a
guarantee/bond in the amount not less than five (5%) of the Contract Price in the form of
cash, manager's check, cashier's check, irrevocable domestic letter of credit, bank
guarantee or a combination thereof, valid and effective for the duration of the guarantee
pe riod.
c. The Contractor shall procure, for the benefit of the Owner, standard warranties and
guarantees from all manufacturers and/or suppliers of materials or equipment
incorporated in the Contract.
6.4 UNPAID CLA.IMS
If, upon or before completion of the Contract, any person claiming to have performed any labor or
to have furnished any materials, supplies, or services in the performance of the Contract, or to
have agreed to do so, shall file with the Engineer a verified statement of such claim stating in
general terms the kind of labor and materials, the value of the same, and the name of the person
to or for whom the same was furnished or performed, together with a statement that the same has
not been pnid, the Engineer subject to the approval of the Owner may withhold from money due
the Contractor such amount as may be sufficient to satisfy the claim until the same is either
<~mical>ly settled or until the claim shall have been finally adjudicated by the courts. Provided,
however, that should the claimant request the Owner in writing to adjudicate such claim, the
Owner may, in the exercise of its discretion, require the Contractor to substantially contest the
Glf\im in \Nriting within such time as the Owner may deem appropriate, and thereafter resolve th e
pending controversy, and in the absence of a restraining order issuecl by the proper court, certifl'
Uw releCJse of the amount to whomsoever it may adjudga ~o be the rightful claimant 111ereto.
F"rovidecl fu1il1er. thnt before tile discreti on herein mentioned can be exerciseo hy the O•tmer. th8
Contractor's creditor filing lhe claim, being not one of the parties to this Contract, shall be
informeo by the Owner of the provisions of this Clause, and suGh claimant shall. once notified of
i ir ; i. •:·ndit;OI1:> i :~rein irr.posct.l, suhmit ~ V:Jritten stateiTI&ilt l ·) ·:hE: Mfe~t til<'! I. !1e binds hims~!f to tr1e
r·,··.Ni!:i•_.r:~. ( l f liJj;:: G lll 1j:~\.\ ::.v::l<nowled[lir.g tr.erein iilC r~uti-,'J (t:t C·f 'ih(; O·; mf?r ~0 r.;:,;olve tile c:a:m.
!
. ·..
CONSTRUCTION OF WATER SYSTEM FOR STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICAllONS
SECTION V- PART A
6 ~ BONDS, INSURANCE, LEGAL RESPONSIBILITY AND

PUBLIC SAFETY
If any such person shall, in the first instance, bring against the Contractor or any of its agents
and/or Owner or any of its agents an action in court to enforce any of the above-mentioned
claims, Owner once formally notified of the existing claim may, in the exercise of its discretion,
withhold from money due the Contractor an amount sufficient to satisfy the decision of the court
together with costs awarded, if any, until the case is finally settled, or may, in the absence of a
court order restraining the Owner from certifying the release of such amount, certify payment to
the Contractor the money due him under the Contract, including the amount being contested.
The Administration may likewise give due cognizance to Contractor's claim against any third
person claiming to have undertaken certain acuvities related to the Contract; the filing and
resolution of such claim shall be in accordance with the procedure prescribed above.
It is expressly understood that Owner, in the exercise of the discretion herein granted, shall be
free from any and all liabilities.
6.5 INSURANCE
a. General - The Contractor shall not commence work under the Contract until he has
obtained an "All Risks Insurance" from an insurance company acceptable to the OWner.
Such insurance shall be maintained continuously until completion of the Works plus, any
period between completion and final acceptance of the Works and, addition_ally at the
appropriate level of cover for the one year guarantee period. ·
The insurance policy shall carry a provision/rider that the same shall be automatically
renewed/extended by the insurance company for a period of one (1) month and monthly
thereafter until the work has been finally accepted. Non-remittance by the Contractor of
the corresponding premium therein will not invalidate the policy, in which case LWUA will
effect the payment of the outstanding premium within ten (1 0) days from receipt of advice
from the insurer, deductible from any money due the Contractor under this or other
contract administered by the Owner.
The required insurance(s) shall cover among others: ·t
(1) Bodily injury- P100,000.00 for any one person and not exceeding ~00,000.09 per ,
c;~ne accident, when such bodily injury· Joes not caus~ 1i1Efl·oss ·of""ilre. · · · ·· ··
(2) Property damage, other than that caused by operation of motor vehicles, including
injury to or destruction of wires, pipes and similar property and appurtenant
apparatus; collapse or structural injury to any struc.ture - ~1 00,000.00 on account of
one accident, and ~00,000.00 on account of all accidents. This coverage does not
include structures and other works being done under the Contract.
(3) In case the Contractor is a self-insurer, an employer's liability insurance is in the

amount of ~12,000.00 per person employed in the work.
(4) Builder's risk- in an amount equal to the value of all materials provided by the Owner
and materials and equipment imported from abroad and locally procurecl by tlle
Contractor.
(5) Insurance for Goods in Transit- The full amount of all materials to t~ supplier! undel
this Contract shall be insured at all times Rgainst oil risks incident to til air t!'ansit to the
Site. It is understood that the insurance shall include all risks from Philippine port of
entry, if impcrt"?rJ, or r-~c-.cg of cJep~ftu r~ . if localiy l)rocu r::d, t 1 tr.o Sit'Cl. ;~i ! c:. ~r r ~~
insurance si1ai! !:;~ sec;. rt;~l or; ~01 ro,:; :Jnc.I ccnJilion$ l;;)n$i..:,t;;:nt \·;iiil ~jC C•(i cc;, t.r:i<0:1 ·: !:,i
pmctices.
~.
SECTION V - PART A
6 ~BONDS, INSURANCE, LEGAL RESPONSIBILITY AND

PUBLIC SAFETY
b. Subcontractor's Insurance
1. The Contractor shall either. (1) require each of its subcontractors to procure and
maintain the insurance hereunder required, or (2) insure the activities of its
subcontractors in its own policy, in like manner.
2. All subcontractors shall provide coverage corresponding to fifty percent (50%) of the
amount in Clauses (a)-(1) to (a)-(2); full amount of Clause (a)-(3); and the value of
materials and equipment being subcontracted for Clause (a)-(4).
c. Separate Insurance ~ Where any of the risks herein required to be insured against
cannot be covered by the All Risks Insurance policy, the Contractor shall arrange the
same to be covered under a separate insurance.
d. Scope of Insurance - The insurance required under this Clause shall. provide adequate
protection for the Contractor and its subcontractors, respectively, against damage claims
which may arise from operations under the Contract, whether such operations be by the
insured or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by it. In addition, the insurance shall
name the Administration, Owner, Engineer and their authorized representatives as
"additional insured" under the policy.
e. Proof of Insurance -The Contractor shall furnish the Owner with certificates showing the
type, amount, class of operations covered, effective dates and date of expiration of
policies. Such certificate shall also contain substantially the following statement:
"The insurance covered by this certificate will not be cancelled or materially altered,
except after ten (1 0) days written notice has been received by the Owner".
6.6 NO PERSONAL LIABILITY
The Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner, and their officers, agents and
employees, against and from all claims and personal liability arising under or by reason of the
Contract and the performance of the work. '
6.7 LAWS AND REGULATtONS
The Contractor shall obseNe and comply with all national, provincial and local laws, ordinances,
codes, orders, and regulations which in any manner affect those engaged or employed on the
work, the materials used in the work, or the conduct of construction. If any discrepancy or
inconsistency should be discovered in this Contract in relation to ariy such law, ordinance. code,
order, or regulation, the Contractor shall repnrt the same in writing to the Engineer. The
Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the owner, Administration and their officers,
agents, and employees, against all claims or liabilities arising from violation of any such law,
ordinance, code, order, or regulation, whether by itself or by its employees or subcontractors.
Any particular law or regulation specified or referred to elsewhere in these Contract Documents
shall not in any way limit the obligations of the Contractor to comply with all other provisions of
national, provincial and local laws and regulations.
G.iJ PERMITS AND LICENSES
Tho procurement and payment of all building excavation permits and all other permits necessary
in the pro.iect implementation shall be the responsibility of the Contmctor. The Owner sh<\11
; ot"OVille 9!1 <l~·~;i~l8nCG Wilen ever necessary.
c.:.
I
I.
SECTION V - PART A

PUBLIC SAFETY
6.9 VALUE ADDED AND USE TAXES
Unless otherwise provided for in the Contract, the Contractor shall pay all sates and use taxes
assessed by national, provincial or local authorities on materials furnished by the Contractor in the
perfonnance of the work.
6.10 PATENTS AND COPYRIGHTS
The Contractor shall indemnify and save hanntess the Owner and their officers, agents, and
employcas, ·against all claims or liability arising from the use of any patented or copyrighted
oesign, device, materials, or process by the Contractor or any of its subcontractors in the
perfonnance of the Contract.
6.11 PUBLIC SAFETY AND CONVENIENCE
a. Public Safety - Whenever the Contractor's operations create a condition hazardous to

traffic or to public, it shall furnish at its own expense such flagmen and guards as are
necessary to give adequate warning to the public of any dangerous conditions to be
encountered; and it shalt furnish, erect, and maintain such fences, barricades, lights,
signs and other devices as are necessary to prevent accidents and avoid damage or
injury to the public. Signs, flags, tights, and other warning and safety devices, shall
conform to the requirements set forth in the BPW "Standard Specifications for"Highways
and Bridges, 1951" or its latest revision.
b. Public Convenience -The Contractor shall so conduct its operations as to offer the least
possible obstruction and inconvenience to public traffic and it shall have under
construction no greater length of pipeline trench or amount of work than it can prosecute
property with due regard to the rights of the public. Convenience of abutting tots along
the road shall be provided for as far as practicable. Convenient access to driveways,
houses, and buildings along the line of pipelines shall be maintained and temporary
approaches to crossings or intersecting roads shall be provided and kept in good
condition.
6.12 SANITARY PROVISIONS

.• - ·1' I-
The Contractor shall provide and maintain such sanitary accommodations for the use of . its
employees and those of its subcontractors as may be necessary to comply with applicable
national and local laws and ordinances, regulations, customs and practices.
6.13 SAFETY AND HEALTH REGULATIONS
Contractors and subcontractors shall comply with all applicable national and local laws and
ordinances, regulations, customs and practices regarding safety and health.
6.14 NON-OBSERVANCE OF SAFETY PROVISIONS
Should the Contractor fail to faithfully obseNe the Public Safety Provisior.s t~ erein sp~cifred, ths
Engineer with the approval of the Owner may exercise such remedial rights a~ are provided under
tile Contract. The Engineer may withhold on~ percent (1 %) of the monthly r-rJnrass pElyments
<lue to the Contractor until it makes gcod Its cont.mctual obli(J<ltion.
·3-'.)
SECTION V- PART A
7 M EARTHWORK
7.1 GENERAL
The Contractor shall perfonn all earthwork required and shown on drawings.
7.2 COMPACTION TEST
Where the backfill is required to be compacted to a specified density, tests for compliance may be
made by and at the expense of the Owner, using the test procedure specified in Methods of Tests
for Moisture-Density Relation in Soils using a 10-lb hammer and 18-in. drop (ASTM D1557),
modified to use three (3) layers. All field density tests shall be perfonned in accordance with the
test procedure specified in "Method of Test for Density of Soil in Place by the Sand Cone Method"
(ASTM 01556).
7.3 EXCAVATION
a. General
Except when specifically provided to the contrary, excavation shall include the removal of
materials of whatever nature encountered, including all obstructions of any nature ·that
would interfere with the proper execution and completion of the work. The removal of
said materials shall conform to the lines and grades shown or ordered. Unless otherwise
provided, the entire construction site shall be stripped of all vegetation and debris, and
such materials shall be removed from the site prior to performing any excavation or
placing any filL The Contractor shall furnish, place and maintain all supports and shoring
that may be required for the sides of the excavations, and all pumping, ditching, or other
approved measures for the removal or exclusion of water, including taking care of stomn
water and waste water reaching the site of the work from any source, so as to prevent
damage to the work or adjoining property.
The walls and faces of all excavations in which workers are exposed to danger from
unstable ground shall be guarded against by a shoring system, sloping of the excavation,
or some other acceptable method. The Contractor shall furnish, install, and maintain
such sheeting, bracing, etc, as may be necessary to protect the workers and to prevent
any movement of earth which could injure or delay the work or endanger adjacent
structures. In excavations where workers may be required to enter, excavated or other
materials shall be effectively .stnrerJ and retained _(ll !e<lr.~ 1300 mm. or more from the edge -
,,.'•-i"ili · 10 • ~~: ~Loll • • ~ ..;,.- , • • : ' ••• •
44
of lhe.. excaval1on. All excavat1on and trenching operations shall conform to any and all
national, provincial, and local safety requirements.
b. Excavation Beneath Proposed Structures
Except where otherwise specified for a particular structure or ordered by the Engineer,
excavation shall be carried to the grade of the bottom of the footing or slab. Where
shown or ordered, areas beneath proposed structures shall be over-excavated. When
such over-excavation is shown on the Drawings, both over-excavation and subsequent
backfill to the required grade shall be perfonned by the Contractor at his own expense.
When such over-excavation is not shown but is ordered by the Engineer, such over-
excavation and any resulting backnll will be paid for under a separate unit price bid item if
such bid item has been established; otherwise, payment will be made in accordance v1ith
negotiated prices. After the required excav<'ltion or over-excavation has been completed,
the exposed surface shflll be scarined to a depth of 150 mm (6 in.) broPght to optimum
moisture ~ontent, and rolled with l1eavy compaction equipment to ninety-five percent
(95%) of maximum density.
SECTION V- PART A
7 R EARTHWORK
c. Excavation Beneath Areas to be Paved
Excavation under areas to be paved shall extend to the bottom of the aggregate base, if
such base is called for; otherwise, it shall extend to the bottom of paving. After the
required excavation has been completed, the exposed surface shall be scarified, brought
to optimum moisture content, and rolled with heavy compaction equipment to ninety
percent (90%) of maximum density.
d. Pipeline Trench Excavation
1. General
Unless otheiWise shown or ordered, excavation for pipelines shall be open-cut

trenches. The bottom of the trenctJ, including any shoring, shall have a minimum
width equal to the outside diameter of the pipe plus 300 mm (12 in.) and a maximum
width equal to the outside diameter of the pipe plus 600 mm (24 in.). Excem when
otherwise shown or ordered by the Engineer, the bottom of the trench shall be
excavated uniformly to the grade of the bottom of the pipe. The trench bottom shall
be given a final trim using a string line for establishing grade, such that each pipe
section when first laid will be wholly in contact with the ground or bedding along the
extreme bottom of the pipe. Rounding out the trench to form a cradle will not be
required. The maximum length of open trench permitted at any one time and in one
location shall be 300 metres, or the length necessary to accommodate the amount of
pipe installed in a
single day, whichever is greater. All newly laid pipes shall be
backfilled at least 150 mm (6 in.) above tne top of the pipe at the end of each day.
The remainder of the trench shall be backfilled not later than the following day.
Barricades and warning lights satisfactory to the Engineer shall be provided and
maintained for all trenches left open overnight except at intersections and driveways
in which case heavy steel plates, adequately braced bridges or other type of crossing
capable of supporting vehicular traffic shall be furnished as directed by the Engineer.
2. Trench Over-Excavation Where Shown
The trenches shall be over-excavated where shoWn, to the depth shown, then
backfilled to the grade of the bottom of the pipe -..yith suitable selected granular
material or with S<Hl~l . Said backfill shall be brou_gnt to the optimum -moist:.1r-c content
' and comp~Cie(i to'· iifrlety~fwe . p'ercent (95%) of maxfmum density under proposed
1
structures, and ninety percent (90%) elsewhere. Work specified in this Clause shall
be perfonned by the Contractor at his own expense.
3. Trench Over-Excavation to Clear Obstructions
Trenches shall be over-excavated to a depth approved by the Engineer for pipeline

clearance of obstructions. All work specified in this Clause shall be performed by the
Contractor at his own expense when the over-excavation plus tne cover of the pipe
measured to existing ground surface does not exceed 1.5 metres; when the
• additional over-excavation plus the cover of the pipe measured to existing ground
surface exceeds 1.5 metres, additional payment will be made to the Contr8ctor for
ti1at portion of work located below said depth. Said additional payment v1ill be made
under separate unit price bid items for over-excavation if such birJ items have been
c:Eiablished; otherwise, payment will be made in accordance with negoti<:1 tc>d prices.
4. Trench Over-Excavation When Ordered
·, : ·::nr.llCS shall be over-oxcnvated beyond tl1 ~ i.!eptll ~' lv:;·:m •·.:hCln r;rd:::md by the
E-ngineGr. Such over-axcnv8tion shall be to the d ~S pth .;;.jererJ. T!; a trencil ~llall tl1en
f;J rsfilled to t11e grade of tile bottom of the pipe with ..-:;;ih<~r seleded granular material
~·-2
SECTION V- PART A
7 - EARTHWORK
obtained from the excavation, sand, or crushed rock, at the option of the Engineer.
When crushed rock bedding is ordered, well-graded material of 40 mm (1 .6 in.)
maximum size shall be used. Bedding material shall be placed in layers, brought to
optimum moisture content, and compacted to ninety-five percent (95%) of maximum
density where the pipeline trench passes under structures, and ninety percent (90%)
elsewhere. Payment will be made under separate unit price bid item for furnishing
and installing bedding and backfill if such bid items have been established; otherwise,
payment will be made in accordance with negotiated prices.
e. Over-Excavation Not Ordered, Specified or Shown
Any over-excavation carried below the grade ordered, specified, or shown shall be refilled
to the required grade with suitable selected granular material by the Contractor at his own
expense. Such material shall be moistened as required and compacted to ninety-five
percent (95%) of maximum density under structures and ninety percent (90%) elsewhere.
f. Disposal of Excess Excavated Material
The Contractor shall remove and dispose all excess ex cavated material at his own
expense and In a manner approved by the Engineer.
g. Excavation in lawn Areas
Where pipeline excavation occurs in the lawn area, the sod shall be carefully removed
and stockpiled to preserve it for replacement. Excavated material from the trench may be
placed on the lawn provided a drop cloth or other suitable method is employed to protect
the lawn from damage. The lawn shall not remain covered for more than seventy-two
(72) hours. Immediately after completion of backfilling and testing of the pipeline, the sod
shall be replaced in a manner so as to restore the lawn as near as possible to its original
condition.
h. Excavation in Vicinity of Trees
Except where trees are shown on the drawings to b.e removed, trees shall be protected
from injury during construction operations; and no trpe is to be removed without written
permission from the Engineer. No tree roof.s oveJ f)_O_rnlll (2· in.) in d.iamet.e} sh3Jl.-bo- cut
....,. • •• 1 ..... ~ ~
without the p'e finissfon o(tfle' Englrieer. Trees shall be supported during excavation as
may be directed by the Engineer.
i. Rock Excavation
Rock excavation shall include removal and disposal of any kind of rock which cannot be
excavated without blasting or the use Gf rippers, and all boulders or other detached
stones each having a volume of 0.25 cubic metre or more as detennined by physical
measurements by the Engineer.
j. Excavation Beneath Proposed Concrete Reservoir
After the reservoir area has been stripped of all vegetation and debris. as specified in
Clause (a) J1erein. loam and topsoil from the top 60 em (24 in.) of excavated soil shall be
removed and stockpiled for possible later use as fill on or around the reservoir and for
miscellaneous topsoil. Excavation under the reselVuir shall extend to tile bottom of the
drainrock layer. After such excavation has been completed, the exposed surface shall be
rollcct with heavy c-omp<!cHon equipr.1er.t t0 provicle a f 'BSI)nably ~;mooth ~uriace for
r!Jcement of tile dmir: i"0C'~<. Are:':ls under the r-3~&rv.:ir up:jn ""~i-::;h 08;iJifi!! is to ;~e plnced
!:l1flll !J0 ~.1c.mifir:Hi tc n c'·.:-pUl vi 15 ~m (6 in.) tJrl1ug!·,t !·) r;ptirnun ri~G;stura cc;:ter,l, mv.l
comp.:Je;!ecl to ninety<i'/J :: dl\:t-,11 (95%) o1maximu:r. JE.ilsiiy.
l-3
SECTION V- PART A
7 - EARTHWORK
7.4 BACKFILL
a. General
Backfill shall not be dropped directly upon any structure or pipe. Materials used for
backfill shall be selected material, free from grass, roots, brush or other vegetation. or
rocks having maximum dimension larger than 150 mm (6 in.). Material placed within 150
mm (6 in.) of any structure or pipe shall be free of rocks or unbroken masses or earth
materials having maximum dimension larger than 75 mm (3 in.). Backfill shall not be
placed around or upon any structure until the concrete has attained sufficient strength to
withstand the loads imposed. Backfill around water-retaining structure::. shall not be
placed until the structures have been tested, and the structures shall be full of water while
backfill is being placed.
b. Backfill Around and Beneath Proposed Structures and Paved Areas
a
Except where otherwise specified for particular structure or ordered by the Engineer,
backfill placed around and beneath proposed structures and paved areas, shall be placed
in horizontal layers not to exceed 200 mm (8 in.) in thickness, as measured before
compaction, where compaction is attained by means of sheepsfoot rollers, pneumatic
type rollers or any heavy compaction equipment approved by the Engineer. Where the
use of heavy compaction equipment is impractical, the layers shall not exceed 150 mm
(6 in.) in thickness before compaction, and compaction shall be attained by means of
hand-operated power driven tampers. The backfill shall be brought up evenly, with each
layer moistened and compacted by mechanical means to ninety-five percent (95%) of
maximum density beneath proposed structures, and ninety percent (90%) of maximum
density around the sides of structures and beneath proposed paved areas.
c. Pipeline Trench Backfill
1. Pipeline trenches shall be backfilled to a level of 150 mm (6 ln.) above the top of the
pipe with selected material obtained from the excavation; if, in the Engineer's opinion,
said material is unsuitable for backfill purposes, borrow material having the sand
equivalent value of not less than twenty (20) (ASTM· D-2419) shall be used for this
portion of the trench backfilL Borrow material, when ordered by the Engineer, will be
. p~id_ for :!-!f¥.1~r_ ..a s,epA,rate unit price bid item if such bid item has been ·establislte'd ~ ~ "~ ' ·· JJ
.. ,....., __ ~ . '': -··· ~ ...
otherwise, payment will be made in accordance with a negotiated price. Selected
..:·. , .: · Ll;i; . , _.•
material shall first be brought up to mid-diameter of the pipe and compacted; then the
remainder of the backfill to 150 mm (6 in.) above the pipe may be placed and
compacted . Such material shall be compacted to flinety-five percent (95%) of
maximum density where the trench is located under proposed structures, and ninety
percent (90%) of maximum density elsewhere. Compaction shall be obtained by
tamping in not more than 150 mm (6 in.) layers or by using excess water and passing
a concrete vibrator between the pipe and side of trench, in case of sand formation as
determined and allowed by the Engineer.
2. After the initial portion of backfill has been placed as specified above, the remainder
of the trench shall be backfilled. When compaction of the initial portion of backfill is
obtained with excess water, not less than four (4) hours shall have elapsed between
tilf! placement of inlllal backfill nn(J subsequent back.fill. The remainder of ttl<? backfill
,;:h<1ll be selected material obtnined from the Bxcavation and shall be placed in
t:orizontallayers. Each layer shall be no more than 150 mm (6 in.) in depth. Layers
shall be moistened, tamped , puddled, rolled, or mherv;ise compacted to:
i. rdn ~ty-fiv2 percr-H"~t O~i%) (!( m<t"<!flium d:,n,:;itJ ·.-;('0i& ~f; -:. ~-!.&i:t:il is !oe;at;;;sj ur.der
pl"<'))OSBd SiH.:C;tUIOS;
"7--4
SECTION V- PART A
7 ~ EARTHWORK
ii. ninety percent (90%) of maximum density where trench is located under existing
or proposed asphalt or concrete surface;
iii. eighty percent (80%) of maximum density where the trench is located under
unpaved shoulders, gravel roadways or dirt roads;
iv. one hundred percent (1 00%) of the natural density of the surrounding areas
where the trench is located in unimproved right-of-way.
If the backfill material is sandy or granular in nature and the trench is not located under a
structure, the layer construction r.1ay be eliminated; and compaction may be obtained by
flooding and jetting, provided this latter method is approved by the agency having
jurisdiction over the highway or street. If flooding and jetting are permitted , the remaining
backfill shall be placed in layers not exceeding 900 mm (36 in.) thickness. Each layer
shall be flooded, jetted and rodded to secure complete saturation of the material before
placing the next layer.
d. Drainrock Beneath Proposed Concrete Reservoir
When shown on the drawings, drainrock shall be provided in accordance with the
following provisions:
1. Following site preparation, excavation, and any backfilling, a 150 mm (6 ln.) thick
layer drainrock shall be placed over the reservoir area as shown on the drawings.
2. Drainrock shall be clean gravel or crushed stone and shall be durable and free from
slaking or decomposition under the action of alternate wetting and drying . It shall be
uniformly graded and of such size that the percentage by weight, as determined by
the "Standard Method of Test for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates"
(ASTM C136), shall conform with the following grading:
Sieve Size Percentage Passing
1 -inch :100
3/4- inch •
9.o ~J oo_•. _,
3/8- inch 40- 100
No. 4 25-40
No. 8 18. 33
No. 30 5- 15
No. 50 0-7
No. 200 0-3

The drainrock shall have a sand equivalent of not less than seventy-five (75) as
determined by ASTM D-2419.
3. Tl1e drainrock shall be thoroughly moistened and comra(,".crl willl <"rt ln::~st two (2)
pe1sses us!ng approved plate or roller type vibmtory compactinrJ 0quipment. The
surface of the drainrock immediately beneath the reservoir shall be stabilized with hot
::>pplied liquid asphalt Bfter the surface of the drainrock l;as i)8Bn finish-graded: The
Contractvr shnli u~e. at his option, one of tile b'vo ty~10s ··jf ,:.;::;pi_~8:i ~;:..~·~d bolo·,._,:
SECTION V- PART A
7 - EARTHWORK
Iw...1 ~
Designation MC 70 MC 250
Spray Temperature ~C) 57-79 74-93
Coverage 2.3 um2 2.3 um2

If the surface remains tacky, sufficient sand shall be applied to absorb the excess asphalt.
Instead of the hot-applied asphalt, the Contractor, at his option, may elect to use the
waterproofing asphalt emulsion described in Clause 8.17 (g)(1).
e. Backfill Around Reservoir Walls
Backfill around reseNoir walls shall consist of selected material obtained from the
excavation, and shall be placed in uniform layers not more than 200 mm (6 in.) in
thickness before compaction where compaction is attained by means of sheepsfoot
rollers, pneumatic type rollers or any approved heavy compaction equipment. Where the
use of this equipment is impractical, the layers shall not exceed 150 mm (6 in.) in
thickness before compaction shall be attained by means of hand-operated power-driven
tampers. The backfill shall be brought up evenly with each layer moistened and
compacted by mechanical means to ninety percent (90%) of maximum density. Flooding,
ponding, or jetting will not be permitted. Backfill around the reseNoir walls shall· ilot be
placed until after the reseNoir has been tested for leakage. The reservoir shall remain
filled with water while said backfill is being placed. Loaded carryalls or vehicles weighing
more than 4,500 kg (9,900 lb) when loaded shall not be permitted closer to the walls than
a horizontal distance equal to the depth of the fill at that time.
f. Fill on Reservoir Roof
Fill shall not be deposited on the roof of the reseNoir earlier than thirty (30) days after the
entire roof slab has been placed. The earth shall be placed in layers. Mobile equipment
weighing more than 4,500 kg (9,900 lb) when loaded will not be permitted to travel over
the completed roof. Fill on the roof shall be moistened as required and compacted to a
maximum density of ninety percent (90%) using a roller weighing not more than 3,600 kg
• ,,1 • ,,_. II"'~ ',o
. (7S~~Q.Ib). V,lb,r,a,tiog .r.omp.acl.ion eqL~ipment shall not-be used on the reservoir·roof: ·The
top 150 mm (6 in.) of fill on the reservoir roof shall consist of loamy earth, free of rocks
larger than 25 mm (1 in.) in maximum diameter.
g. Embankment Fill
The area where an embankment is to be constructed shall be cleared of all vegetation,

roots and foreign materials. Following this, the surface shall be mo!stened, scarified to a
depth of 150 mm (6 in.) and rolled or otherwise mechanically compacted to ninety percent
(90%) of maximum density elsewhere. Embankment fill shall be placed in horizontal
layers not to exceed 200 mm (8 in.) in thickness. as measured before compaction, where
compaction is attained by means of sheepsfoot rollers, pneumatic type rollers or any
approved heavy compaction equipment. Where the lise of this equipment is
impracticable, the layers shall not exceed 150 mm (6 in.) in thickness befor8 compaction;
and compaction shall be attained by means of hand-operated powe:·-driven t2mpers. The
brtckfill S!)all be brought up evenly with each layer moist~ned and rcmp8ctsd by
mechanical means to ninety-five percent (95%) of maximum density under proposed
~tructllrss, and ninety pmcent (90%) of maximum den~H! e:s0V1h~re. T~.:! ~or !300 mm
(/.0 in ) of bJcf,fill or emi:J<1n:<.ment st1all consi&i of loan:y eact:1 fr ct. 0f rr; ,~ks lafger til an
;::. ,-IIITl (~ in.J in 1118)<inll'rn dimension .
..,. ~
: -l)
SECTION V- PART A
7 ~ EARTHWORK
7.5 SLOPE STABILIZING
Unless otherwise specified, all embankment slopes steeper than three (3) units horizontal to one
(1) unit vertical shall be stabilized by sodding as directed by the Engineer. Strips of sod not less
than 300 mm (12 in.) wide shall be placed along sloped banks.
Sods shall be taken only from fields not less than three (3) years old and have been previously
rolled and mowed at least once. Sods taken from wild field that have not been mowed will not be
acceptable. Sod shall be of sufficient thickness to prevent excessive breakage and shall be
stripped in the largest practicable widths and lengths. It shall be tamped in place, properly leveled
and immediately well-sprinkled. All sods not in good condition after being tamped in place shall
be removed and replaced.
Immediately after setting of grass sod, sod shall be covered with 6 mm (0.24 in.) of screened
topsoil which has been well-mixed with 460 grams (1 lb) of grass seed per 100 square metres
2
(1,076 ft ). Sod shall be replaced with the same kind of surfacing or better in accordance with the
latest specifications; resodding shall continue until acceptance.
7-l
·.
SECTION V- PART A
8 -REINFORCED CONCRETE
8.1 WORK INCLUDED
The work to be undertaken under this Clause shall include all labor, materials, equipment, plant
and other facilities and the satisfactory performance of all work necessary to complete all
concrete work shown on the Drawings and specified herein. All work included under this Clause
shall be subject to the General Conditions accompanying these specifications. The Contractor is
required to refer especially thereto.
8.2 MATERIALS
a. Cement
Except as may be otherwise provided in these specifications, cement shall conform with
the "Standard Specifications for Portland Cement" (ASTM C-150-Latest Revision) and
shall be Type I. The cement shall be of one brand and shall not be more than three (3)
months from date of manufacture.
b. Concrete-Aggregates
1. Concrete aggregates shall be well-graded, clean, hard particles of gravel or crushed

rock conforming with the "Standard Specifications" for Concrete Aggregates" (ASTM
C-33 Latest Revision).
2. The maximum size of the aggregates shall not be larger than one-fifth (1/5) of the
narrowest dimension between forms and not larger than three-fourths (3/4) of the
minimum clear spacing between individual reinforcing bars, or bundles of bars, and in
no case larger than 38 mm (1-1/2 in.) in diameter except that larger diameters may be
allowed in massive concreting with written permission from the Engineer.
c. Water
Water used in mixing concrete shall be clean and free from injurious amounts of oils,
acids, alkali, organic materials, or other substances that may be deleterious to concrete or
steel. ·
d. Reinforcing Steel
All reinforcing steel bars used shall be of deformed type, new, free from rust, oil, defects,
greases, or kinks. They shall conform with the latest edition of the National Structural
Code for Buildings with a minimum grade equal to 275. MPa unless otherwise shown on
the plans.
e. Admixture
At the Contractor's option or at the request of the Engineer, but in either case at the
expense of the Contractor, an admixture may be added to the concrete to control the set,
effect water reduction, and increase workability. Such admixture may be eitf1er a
11ydroxylated carboxylic and acid type or a hydroxylated polymer t~fPe, hul si1all contain no
c::~lcium chloride. The required quantities of cement nhall be usttl in the mix regardless o1
whether or not any admixture is used. The quantity of admixture u~;ed and the method of
111ixing shnll be in accordarCB witr1 the manufacturer's insll t:c!io1u;. WIJCrc th0 Elif
temperature at the time of placement is expected to be consistently over 26.-rc (80°F),
S1.1Ch admixture shall be Super Concrete r:m~.tlsions' "Pia~tinwnt", ''Master 8ui!c101"s",
"f.lozzoliUl 300R", c;r substitute.
~-1
SECTION V- PART A
8 - REINFORCED CONCRETE
f. Calcium Chloride
Except as otherwise specified for Architectural finish , the use of calcium chloride in
concrete will not be permitted.
8.3 STORAGE OF MATERIALS
Cement and aggregates shall be stored in such a manner as to prevent deterioration or intrusion
by foreign matter. Any material which has deteriorated or which has been damaged shall not be
used for concrete. Steel shall be stored under cover or otherwise prevented from rusting.
8.4 TESTING OF MATERIALS
The Owner or his duly authorized representative or the Engineer shall periodically order the test
of any material supplied by the Contractor entering into concrete or reinforced concrete to
determine its suitability for the intended purpose. Such tests shall be in accordance with the
standards of the American Society for Testing and Materials, as noted elsewhere in these
Specifications. Samples shall be provided by the Contractor without cost to the Owner.
Expenses for the testing and cost of transporting samples to testing laboratory shall be borne by
the Owner. Copies of results of tests shall be furnished to the Owner promptly. Compressive
strength specimens for tests of concrete during construction shall be according to "Making and
Curing of Concrete Compression and Flexural Strength Test Specimens in the Field" (ASTM C-
31).
8.5 CONTROLLED STRENGTHS OF CONCRETE
a. Concrete for structur<!l elements, including slabs on grade within water-retaining

structures and stairs shall develop a minimum 28-day compressive cylinder strength of
20.68 megapascal (3,000 psi), unless otherwise specified in the plans.
b. Concrete for non-structural elements such as cradles, unreinforced encasements, thrust

blocks, and partition walls shall develop a minimum 28-day cylinder strength of 17.25
MPa (2500 psi), unless otherwise specified in the plans.
c. Levelling concrete under reservoir base slabs/foundations,shall have a minimum 28-day

cylinder strength of 14 MPa (2,000) psi.
8.6 METHOD OF DETERMINING STRENGTH: TRIAL BATCH
The Contractor shall submit design mixes and test results of samples made in accordance with
"Standard Method of Making and Curing Concrete Compression ana Flexure Test Specimens in
the Laboratory" (ASTM C-192-Latest Revision) and "Standard Method of Test for Compressive
Strength of Molded Concrete Cylinders" (ASTM Designation C-39) for each strength required,
stating the proposed slump and the proportional weights of cement, saturated surface dry
aggregates, and water. These mixes shall be proved by preliminary tests thirty (30) days before
concreting and shall show a 28-day strength of fifteen percent (15%) hi-gher than the ultimate
strength required. No substitution shall be made in the materials or mixed without additional tests
to show that the quality of concrete is satisfactory.
O.'i' CONCRETE PROPORTION AND CONSISTENCY
:L T l1s proportions of aggregate to cement for any concrete shall te such as to produce a
mixture which will work readily into the comers and angles of ~hfl forms and around
F;~nforcemcnt v1itll ti1e method of placir.J Hrp:.)ye<l 1)1l the wot k bu~ •vithout JH) fmilling the
t r~~:!crl8ls to ~:eoregate, or ~xc e s'3 free v<at_:.r tr, r.:;ll<x1 on the .:,'. ;·t2c~. "i lJe c~~mbined
r.::;£Jf3}!<lt!)'J !iiiflll be of sue;h composition of s:<' ~--> tlut ,.,:·t-.~n ::·:: C'.if<lh~rJ on the No. 4
~ .-'~ :d.ll\'l cJL:.vc.., ti1J ',\·eight passin9 thd si~v~ { :in0 :JOQt ~:g\:lii:.·) ~n~1 11 not ue loss than ti1i1ty
3-::?
SECTION V- PART A
8- REINFORCED CONCRETE
percent (30%) of the total, except that these proportions do not necessarily apply to
lightweight ag.gregates.
b. The methods of measuring concrete materials shall be such that the proportions can be
accurately controlled and easily checked at any time during the work. Measurement of
materials for ready-mixed concrete shall conform with the "Standard Specifications for
Ready-mixed Concrete" (ASTM C-94, Latest Revision) where applicable.
c. Aggregates shall be measured out by weight and to within one percent (1%). Cement
shall conform with 40 kg (88 lb) per bag and this is to be verified from time to time. Water
shall be measured by weight or volume to within one and one-half percent (1-1/2 %).
d. The water shall in no case exceed 21.24 litres, and 25.67 litres (5.62 and 6.79 US
gallons) per bag of cement for all concrete with specified strength of fc=20.68 MPa (3000
psi) and 17.25 MPa (2500 psi), respectively. Slumps shall be within the following limits:
Portion of Slump
Structure Millimetres
Columns and end

supported beams,
girders 50-100 2-4
Walls and thin
vertical sections 75-125 3-5
Footings, slabs on
grade and canti-
levered beams
and slabs 50-80 2-3
Slumps shall be according to "Test of Slump for Portland Cement Concrete" (ASTM C
143).
e. The minimum cement content for 20.68 MPa (3000 psl) concrete shall be 8.39 sacks per
cubic metre of concrete.
~
f. Job mix adjustments on water content shall b~. ~l9!'f~d _Qntl,.With Engineer's permission
and provided that ·cemerlf '{5' also added to maintain the original water-cement ratio of the
design mix.
8.8 EXCLUSION OF WATER
No concrete shall be placed in any structure until all water entering the space to be filled with
concrete has been properly cui off or has been diverted by pipes, or other means. and carried out
of the fomls, clear of the work. No concrete shall be deposited under water without the explicit
permission of the Engineer, and then only in strict accordance with his directions; nor shall the
Contractor, without explicit permission, allow still w ater to rise on any concrete until the concrete
has attained its initial set. Water shall not be permitted to flow over the surface of any concrete in
such manner ancl at such velocity as will injure the surface finish of the concrete. Pumping or
ot11er neces::;ary dewatering opemtions for removing ground water, if required, will be subject to
tl1e approval of tt1e Engineer.
3.~ 1\iliXII\IG CONCRE'fl':
<l. Nt' lwnd 1nixinf1 ~!1:::11 L2- :J::O'!;e<J, 0}:c;pt ln 01'rlCTQ f.ncy such as mixer !)rerJI<(J0vli1 <lurlllg
concreting opeHtliotls. :111\l tllis ::>ll ~1il stc·p as .so0n .:Js !he pour is completoci, al :1
c•::n<J!J uetion jl)in t ::IH.\',!1 .:•f .:.'fir>nvi:-:e .:les!::tT:i~Acl by i (l[} f:l1~]inoqr. All .:;on i;l·l'lt=~ f>lklll ~~ .'
SECTION V- PART A
machine mixed for at least one and one-half (1-1/2) minutes after all materials. including
water, are in the mixing drum.
b. The mixer shall be of an approved size and type which will insure a uniform distribution of
material throughout the mass. It shall be equipped with a device for accurately measuring
and controlling the amount of mixing water in each batch.
c. The first batch of GOncrete materials placed in the mixer shall contain a sufficient excess
of cement, sand, and water to coat the inside of the drum without reducing t11e cement of
the mix to be discharged.
d. Retempering, i.e .. remixing with the addition of water to concrete that has been partially
hardened will not be permitted.
8.10 PREPARATION OF SURFACES FOR CONCRETING
a. Earth surfaces shall be thoroughly wetted by sprinkling prior to ttle placing of any
concrete, and these surfaces shall be kept moist by frequent sprinkling up to the time of
placing concrete thereon. The surface shall be free from standing water, mud, and debris
at the time of placing concrete.
b. Concrete surfaces upon or against which concrete is to be placed, where the placement
of the old concrete has been stopped or interrupted so that, in the opinion. of the
Engineer, the new concrete cannot be incorporated integrally with that previously placed,
are defined as construction joints. The surfaces of horizontal joints shall be leveled with a
wooden noat to provide a reasonably smooth surface. A surface consisting largely of
coarse aggregate shall be avoided. Except where the drawings call for joint surfaces to
be painted, the joint surfaces shall be cleaned of all laitance, loose or defective concrete
and foreign material. Such cleaning shall be accomplished by sandblasting followed by
thorough washing. All pools of water shall be removed from the surface of construction
joints before the new concrete is placed. After the surfaces have been prepared to the
satisfaction of the Engineer, all approximately horizontal construction joints shall be
covered with a layer of mortar approximately 25 mm (1 in.) thick. The mortar shall have
the same proportion of cement and sand as the regular concrete mixture, unless
otherwise directed by the Engineer. The water-cement ratio of the mortar in place shall
not exceed that of the concrete to be placed upon it, and th~ consistency of the mortar
~t:cil be suitable for ·j)lacing a·nd Working in a manner tierefnafter specified. The mortar
shall be spread uniformly and shall be worked thoroughly Into all irregularities of the
surface, and wire brooms shall be used where possible to scrub the mortar into the
surface. Concrete shall be placed immediately upon the fresh mortar.
c. When the placing of concrete is to be Interrupted long enough for the concrete to take a
set, the working face shall be given a shape by the use of forms or other means that will
secure proper union with subsequent work, provided that construction joints shall be
made only where approved by the Engineer.
8.11 PLACING CONCRETE
~- Concrete which upon or before placing is founcl not lo conform with the req•.1irements
specified herein shall be rejected find immediately removed from the work. Concrete
':Vhich is not placed in accordance with tl1es:1 spscifiGntions, or wl1ich is of inferi·j; quality.
as determined by tJ1e Engineer, s11all be removed and replaced by and at the expense of
the Contractor. No concrete shall be placecl excApt in thfl presence of a duly authorized
1:;presentative of thJ Eng;m~.:;r. Concrete ~;i1;tll not IJ~ placed when '-'nsuitab:e i;~at or
wind conclitions will piev(?;;t prope: p\:-,r ::m!:r:l e1ml ( tlfi11fl , 1~ (\et0rminer:l by the t:nginen.
r ·,·;or to p!ncing r.~ny GOi~·~~Gt ,:>, thl' (:(!'! · !·<tr~0f .:;ln!l Ul'.'-3 the Engin8E!I' hventy-tour (24)
lw:.u5 written notice.
SECTION V- PART A
b. Concrete shall be deposited in its final position without segregation, re-handling, or

flowing. Placing shall be done preferably with buggies, buckets, or wheelbarrows. No
chutes will be allowed except to transfer concrete from hoppers to buggies,
wheelbarrows, or buckets, in which case they shall not exceed six (6) metres (20 ft) in
aggregate length.
c. Placing of concrete with a free drop or fall more than 1.20 metres (4 ft) shall not be
allowed, except when approved by the Engineer and when approved sheet metal
conduits, pipes, or "elephant trunks" are employed. When employed, these conveyors
shall be kept full of concrete and the ends kept buried in the newly placed concrete as
pouring progresses.
d. Concrete in forms shall be deposited in uniform horizontal layers not deeper than 450 mm
(18 in.) and care shall be taken to avoid inclined layers or inclined construction joints
except where such are required for sloping members. Each layer shall be placed while
the previous layer is still soft. The rate of placing concrete in forms shall not exceed 1.5
metres (5 ft) of vertical rise per hour. ·
8.12 FORMS
a. General
The Contractor shall provide forms to confine the concrete and shape it to t~e required
lines. Plastering, in general, shall not be allowed. The Contractor shall assume full
responsibility for the adequate design of all forms. However, fonns which in the opinion of
the Engineer are unsafe or inadequate in any respect may at any time be condemned by
the Engineer; and the Contractor shall promptly remove the condemned forms from the
work and replace them at his own expense. A sufficient number of forms of each kind
shall be provided to permit the required rate of progress to be maintained. Whenever, in
the opinion of the Engineer, additional forms are necessary to maintain the progress
schedule, such additional forms shall be provided by the Contractor at his own expense.
The design and inspection of concrete forms, falsework, and shoring shall comply with
applicable safety regulations, and as may be specified in the General Condition£ of these
Specifications. 1
b. Materials
Except as otherwise expressly approved by the Engineer, all lumber brought at the job
site for use as forms, shoring, or bracing shall be new material.
All forms shall be smooth surface forms and shall be of the following materials:
Walls - steel or plywood panels

Columns - steel, plywood or surfaced lumber
Roof plywood
All other work - steel panels, plywood or surfaced lumber
Plywood shall be manufactured especially for concrete form work and shall be oilecl with
an approved form oil and edgt)-se<Jied.
c:. c,;Jumn forms shall be checked for plumbness before concrete is deposited. Hand i10!es
slwll be provided in column forms fit lowest points of pour lifts to runder this space
accessible for cleaning.
d. /\II oirder, beam, and [:!;-1iJ c:ot·.~er!in'3[) shall be t;rowned ot le::~st 6.~1 rr,m ('1/1 in.) in ;;,II
directions for every 4.5"1 m~i£:'3 ("i:':" m ~-pan. ~iowever, cr~mbers from ail cAniiiever.s ~-;i:J!I
L;~ ag indicated on ti:o !.:i.::ms c1 j))t<lir.ecl frorn llle Engineer by the Contractor.
1-
SECTION V- PART A
8 ~REINFORCED CONCRETE
e. The following are the tolerance limits for formwork:
1. Variation from plumb:
In lines and surfaces of columns, piers, walls and risers:
In 3.05 m (1 0 ft) 6.3 mm (1/4 in.)

6.1 o m (20 ft) max. 9.5 mm (3/8 in.)
12.20 m (40ft)
or more 19.0 mm (3/4 in.)
For exposed corner columns and/or piers, control joint grooves and other
conspicuous lines:
In any bay 6.10 m

(20ft) max. 6 .3 mm (1/4 in.)
In 12.20 m (40 f!)
or more 13.0 mm (1/2 in.)
2. Variation in cross-sectional dimensions of columns and piers, beams, and thickness

of walls and slabs:
Minus 6.3 mm (1/4 in.)

Plus 13.0 mm (1/2 in.)
3. Footings
Variations in dimensions on drawings (applied to concrete only and not to reinforcing

bars or dowels): ·
Minus 13.0 mm (1/2 in.)

Plus 50.0 mm (2 in.)
Misplacement of eccentricity, two percent (2%) of the footings width in the direction of
misplacement but not to exceed 50.0 mm (2 in.). Requction in thickness five percent
(5%) at specified thickness.
4. Variation in steps:
(1) In a flight of steps

Rise 3.2 mm (1/8 in.)
Tread 6.3 mm (1/4 in.)
(2) In consecutive s~eps

Rise 1.6 mm (~/16 in.)
Tread· 3.2 mm (1/9 in.)
When required for another work, or when requested by the Owner or his Engineer,
the Contractor shall remove or relocate shoring; but existing ~:;lwring :; hall not be
disturbed until new shores .are set in position.
1'. Design
1. .P.IJ forms sh-311 be true in every r0spect to thG · aquir-sd 8hap8 ~nd siz;,o. :;·nail wnfonn
·N,th thfl este~blished alignment and graclo, and shall be of ;,u:-fi·::h~!'l :'>trengih <lJV.l
!'i!Jidity to maintain tl1eir posi!ion :md :;!)ape rm,ler H1e loads an.i opefations incicl0nt to
pLh~inu nnd vibrating tile concreto. Sui!uble C:i lid eifeclive mean5 shall be provided on
SECTION V- PART A
all forms for holding adjacent edges and ends of panels and sections tightly together
and in accurate alignment so as to prevent the formation of ridges. fins, or offsets, or
similar surface defects in the finished concrete. Plywood, 16.0 mm (5/8 in.) and
greater in thickness, may be fastened directly to studding if the studs are close
enough to prevent visible deflection marks in concrete. The forms shall be tight so as
to prevent the loss of water, cement, and fins during placing and vibrating of the
concrete. Adequate clean-out holes shall be provided at the bottom of each lift of
forms. The size, number, and location of such clean-outs shall be subject to the
approval of the Engineer.
2. Concrete construction joints will not be permitted on locations other than those shown
or specified, except as may be approved by the Engineer. When a second lift is
placed on hardened concrete, special precaution shall be taken in the way of the
number, location, and tightening of ties at the top of the old lift and bottom of the new
to prevent any unsatisfactory effect whatsoever on the concrete. Pipe stubs and
anchor bolts shall be set in the form where required.
3. Unless otherwise shown, exterior comers in concrete members shall be provided with
19.0 mm (3/4 in.) chamfers. Re-entrant corners in concrete members shall not have
fillets unless otherwise shown.
4. Reservoir forms and falsework supporting the roof slab shall be designed for a
minimum additional live load or 0.96 KPa (20 psf).
g. Form Ties
Form ties with integral water stops shall be provided with a cork or other suitable means
for forming a conical hole to insure that the form-tie may be broken off back of the face of
the concrete. The maximum diameter or removable cones for rod ties, or of other
removable form-tie fasteners having a circular cross-section, shall not exceed 38 mm
(1-1/2in.) and all such fasteners shall be such as to leave holes of regular shape for
reaming. Holes left by the removal of fasteners from the ends of snap-ties or form-ties
shall be reamed with suitable toothed reamers so as to leave the surfaces of the holes
clean and rough before being filled with mortar as provided in Clause 8.20. Wire ties for
holding forms will not be permitted. No form tying device or part thereof, other than metal,
$_hall be l_eft .!f.r:n.b~dpeg in the concrete, nor shall any tie be removed in suci ,-n~<mi1 ~·r·'as ·w· ~ ·
. .. • .1 .. . . ! •.
leave a hole extending through the· interior of the concrete member. The use of snap-ties
which cause spalling of the concrete upon form stripping or tie removal will not be
permitted. If steel panel forms are used, rubber grommets shall be provided where the
ties pass through the form in order to prevent loss of cement paste. Where metal rods
extending through the concrete are used to support or to strengthen forms. the rods shall
remain embedded and shall terminate not less than 25 mm (1 in.) back from the formed
fa ce or faces of the concrete. Form ties or metal rods left embedded in concrete of water-
retaining tanks shall be equipped with an integral metal waterstop of not less than 38 mm
(1-1/2 in.) in diameter.
h. Vertical Surfaces
!\II vertical surfaces of concrete members shall be formed, except where placement of the
:;oncrete against the ground Is called for on the drawings or explicitly outl10rized by the
:.:naineer. Not less than 25 mm (1 ln.) of concrete shall be added to the thickness of the
<-oncrete member as shown where concrete is permitted to be placed against trimmed
qro1.1nct in lieu of forms. Such permission will be grantee! only for members of
mrnpmntively limited height amJ wh0re the r.lwmcter of the w ound is suc!1 that it cnn be
tr:mnv=Kl to ti1e required lines ancl will stc.mci soc; 1miy vtiti'JGut : .111 11~9 0r 0!oughin~1 until tile
·.NJcretc 1·1dS t een placed.
SECTION V- PART A
i. Maintenance of Forms
Forms shall be maintained at all times in good condition, particular1y as to size, shape,
strength, rigidity, tightness, and smoothness of surface. Fonns, when in place, shall
confonn with the established alignment and grades. Before concrete is placed, the fonns
shall be thoroughly cleaned. The forms surfaces shall be treated with a non-staining
mineral oil or other lubricant approved by the Engineer. Any excess lubricant shall be
satisfactorily removed before placing the concrete. In addition, all forms shall be given a
preliminary oil treatment by the manufacturer or shall be oiled by the Contractor at least
two (2) weeks in advance of their use. Care shall be exercised to keep oil off the surfaces
of steel reinforcement and other metal items to be embodied in concrete. Forms may be
reused if in good condition and if approved by the Engineer. Light sanding between uses
will be required wherever necessary in the opinion of the Engineer to obtain uniform
surface texture on all exposed concrete surfaces. Exposed concrete surfaces are defined
as surfaces which are permanently exposed to view. In the case of forms for the inside
wall surfaces of hydraulic structures, unused lie rod holes shall be covered with metal
caps or shalf be filled by other methods approved by the Engineer.
j. Removal of Forms
Directions of the Engineer concerning the removal of forms shall be strictly followed, and
this work shall be done with care so as to avoid injury to the concrete. No heavy loading
on green concrete will be permitted. In the case of roof slabs and above-ground floor
slabs, forms shall remain in place until test cylinders for the roof concrete attain a
minimum compressive strength of 15.52 MPa (2,250 psi) provided that no fonns shall be
disturbed or removed under an individual panel or unit before the concrete in the adjacent
panel or unit has attained a strength of '\5.52 MPa (2,250 psi) and has been in place for a
minimum of seven (7) days. The time required to establish said strength will be
determined by the Engineer who will make several test cylinders for this purpose from
concrete used in the first group of roof panels placed. If the time so determined is more
than the seven-day minimum, then it shall be used as the minimum length of time. Fonns
for all vertical walls and columns shall remain in place at least three (3) days after the
concrete has been placed. Forms for all parts of the work not specifically mentioned
herein shall remain in place for periods of time as ordered by the Engineer.
8.13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
a. General
Construction joints shall be provided where shown on the drawings. Special care shall be
used to prepare concrete surfaces at joints where bonding between two sections of
concrete is required. Unless other.vise indicated on the drawings, such bonding will be
required at all horizontal joints in walls. Surfaces shall be prepared in accordance with
Clause 8.10. Except where otherv1ise shown or specified, al all joints where waterstops
are required, the joint face of the first pour shall be coated with an approved bond breaker
applied in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. It shall contain a
coloring agent so that areas of applications will be readily distinguishable for a six-month
period in sunlight. Tl1e surfaces of the groove for the sealant shall not be coated.
Concrete next to waterstops shall he placed in accordance with ·:lw£e 8.1 6 (b).
b. Construction Joint Sealant
IJI/i1~rc shown, construction joint·> in Hom· slab5 sht~ll l:.; proviclccl •.-\''ttl t-1p:~ rf!d ~~roovc'3
VJllicll shHII i)e filled witll a cons[!'uc!lorr Jnint 3~-alc; nt. ·:·he m::ltc-n [,~ u.-~Bd i (:l forming the
i<lp0rccl woovns shn11 be !2H :n tiH::' nroov:lS nnl·: j u:;l t ,:;.y 9 the qrcov,·s <UY·I ciG:)f'lfd and
t•:ldd wili1 .io!nt f)e8lant. AH,: r !'8fii(IViiiiJ iiw forn~s ·,-;Tno HlG grG ~ ; c ~: . .,,~! 1:::-it:;Jr;co and fins
nlmll be removed, and tile grooves shall be sandblasted. The grooves shall be allowed to
SECTION V- PART A
8 REINFORCED CONCRETE
M
become thoroughly dry, after which they shall be blown out; immediately thereafter, they
shall be primed and filled with the construction joint sealant. The primer used shall be
supplied by the same manufacturer supplying the sealant. No sealant will be permitted to
be used without a primer. Care shall be used to completely fill the sealant grooves.
Areas designated to receive a sealant fillet shall be thoroughly cleaned, as outlined for
the tapered grooves, prior to application of the sealant. The sealant shall be
polyurethane polymer designed for bonding to concrete which is continuously submerged
in water. No material will be acceptable which has an unsatisfactory history as to bond or
durability when used in the joints of hydraulic structures. Prior to ordering the sealant
material, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval sufficient data to show
general compliance with the specification raquirements. The material shall meet the
following requirements:
Work Life 45-90 minutes

Time to Reach 20 Shore
"A" Hardness (at 25°C)
Ultimate Hardness 30-40 Shore "A"
Tensile Strength 1.73 MPa (250 psi) min.
Ultimate Elongation 400 percent, min.
Tear Resistance
(Die C ASTM 0624) 13.4 kg/em
(75 lb per inch)
of thickness, min.
Color Light Gray
In addition, the material shall show no signs of adhesive or cohesive failure when tested
in accordance with the following procedure:
1. Sealant specimen shall be prepared between two concrete blocks 25 mm x 50 mm x

76 mm (1 in. x 2 in. x 3 in.) in size. Spacing between the blocks shall be 13 mm
(1/2 in.). Coated spacers 50 mm x 38 mm x 13 mm (2 in. x 1-1/2 in. x 1/2 in.) shall be
used to insure sealant cross-sections of 13 mm x 50 mm (1/2 in. x 2 in.) with a width
of 13 mm (1/2 in.).
2. Sealant shall be cast and cured according to, manufacturer's recommendations

~ ... - .. excep.~ :t9-~.tcuring period shall not exceed twenty-four (24) hours. ..- ~~- -~ -~ ... . .~ u • '·
3. Following the curing period, the gap between blocks shall be widened to 31.7 mm
(1-1/4 in.). Spacers shall be used to maintain this gap for twenty-four (24) hours prior
to inspection for failure.
Certified test reports from the sealant manufacturer on the ilctunl batch of material
being supplied indic<:ling Gompliance with the above requirements shall be furnished
to the Engineer before the se3lant is used on the job. The primer and sealant shall
he placed strictly in a~crdance with the recommendations of the manufacturer,
taking special care to properly mix the sealant prior to application . Before any sealant
is placed, the crew doing the work shall be carefully instructed as to the proper
method of application i)y a representative of the sealant manufacturer. /\II seaiDnt
si1all cure at least sever, (/) days before the structure is filled with wnter.
c. Watarstops
1. Milterial and Manufacture
\f\fnterstop8 Shall t~~ i'Y~il '\~:.,: l ri 01'1 :l ri l"' l8SlOHl~: riC r: o !'{Vin~lr~ill~~r:r,;: S:') li'!~C I!J:; f
f.'lfl'i.uining tiH~ nee·;:· <;:•.·-~· p: :~:,t;,'Jze rs, 1 n"ins. ;';\nt1ili:wr~;. :.1,1d .-.-.\i :or :·p:Jt :c' i q:-;
llcce::.;:;my to meet thE: rq~!i,·.::m.::n t~ oi tilG~e spei.,i/lcalions. Nv ; .)Claimed or .;;c;ap
2-0
SECTION V- PART A
material shall be used. The waterstop manufacturer shall furnish to the Engineer
current test reports and a written certification that the material to be shipped to the job
site meets the following physical requi rements:
Physical Property,
Sheet Material Value ASTM Std.
Tensile Strength-
minimum 12.07 MPa D412,
(1750 psi) Die C
Ultimate Elongation
minimum 350% D412,
Die C
Low Temp. Brittle- -:)rc
ness- max. (-35°C) D746
Stiffness in 2.76 MPa

Flex ure minimum (400 psi) D747
Accelerate Extraction
Tensile strength- 10.35 MPa D412

minimum (1500 psi) Die C
Ultimate Elongation-
minimum 300% D412,
Die c
Effect of Alkalies
Change in Weight (%) +0.25/

-0.10
Change in Durometer,
Shore A +5
Finished Waterstogs
':, ... ·. . . -----
Tensile strength-
minimum MPa 0.67 D412,
Die C
Ultimate Elongation-
minimum(%) 280 0412,
Die C
2. Qualification Samples
Prior to production of the material required under this Contract, qualification samples
shall be submitted. Such samples shall consist of extruded or molded secti0ns of
each size or shape to be used, and shall be accomplished so !hat th2 mc.!erial and
wor:<rnanship represents in 811 respects the material to be furnished under this
C ontra,~!. The ba1Rnc8 of the material to be used under th1s Contract sl1~1!l ilut be
produced until 8fter tho l::nginecr has approved the qualification 2am~les.
3. srlices and .Joints
~)rin l trJ L' ~·'J o' t'!·~ ._,_r:;10r:,top r1nteri:tl in Hl8 field, '-~ ~a n ~p: c: c·: H f;:b:i~;;l lf:'·.~ .-:r'):.::;
( ur,.:;twc!cci c.>r ~ ! a.:. J·, .;:;:.; Dr s l"!.qp(~ ~o
rJe u'5ed .<;hali rs sui::mi\'(0•1 t0 ti\8
of mate1ial
c.. :g:no..:r to1 <:p~J ov.E.l.. ·i 1165.3 samples shall be fabr;catf:d so that the malerial and
SECTION V- PART A
workmanship represent in all respects the fittings to be furnished under this Contract.
Field samples of fabricated fittings (crosses, tees, etc.) will be selected at random by
the Engineer for testing by a laboratory at the Owner's expense. When tested, they
shall have tensile strength across the joints equal to at least 4.14 MPa (600 psi).
Field splices and joints shall be made in accordance with the waterstop
manufacturer's instruction using a thermostatically-controlled heating iron.
4. Flat-Strip Waterstops
Flat-strip waterstops, where required, shall be as shown. At no place shall the

thickness be less than 4.76 mm (0.1875 in.). Adequate means shall be provided for
anchoring the waterstop in concrete. In placing flat-strip waterstops in the forms,
means shall be provided to prevent them from being folded over by the concrete as it
is placed. Horizontal waterstops shall be held in place with continuous supports to
which the top edge of the waterstop shall be tackled. Vertical waterstops shall be
held in place with light wire ties on 450 mm (18 in.) centers which shall be passed
through the edge of the waterstop and tied to the two curtains of reinforcing steel. In
placing concrete around waterstops, concrete shall be worked under the waterstops
by hand so as to avoid the formation of air and rock pockets.
d. Expansion Joint Filler
Where expansion joint filler is indicated on the drawings, the material shall be of the
performed non-extruding type joint filler which may be constructed of open cellular
sponge rubber, or closed cellular sponge rubber of firm texture. Bituminous fiber type will
not be permitled. All non-extruding and resilient-type performed expansion joint fillers
shall conform with the requirements and tests set forth in "Specifications for Preformed
Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural
Construction," Type (ASTM Designation D-1752), except as otherwise provided herein.
8.14 CORROSION PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS
Pipes, conduits, dowels, and other ferrous items required to be embedded in concrete
construction shall be so positioned and supported prior to placement of concrete that there will be
a minimum of so mm (2 in.) clearance between said items and any part of the concrete
reinforcement. .~-~qv,r;i.nq .sJ.Jcth.Hf!.ms..i!1_!)osit!on by wiring or welding ·fl'rdse to the reinforcement ··
will not be permitted.
8.15 ORDER OF PLACING CONCRETE
a. The order of placing concrete in all parts of the work shall be subject to tt1e approval of
the Engineer. In order to minimize the effects of shrinkage, the concrete shall be placed
in units as bounded by construction joints shown on the drawings. The placing of units
s11all be done by placing alternate units in a manner such tllat each unit placed shall have
cured at least seven (7) days before the contiguous unit or units are placed, except t11at
vertical walls shall be placed until the wall footings have cured at least fourteen (14) days,
and the corner sections of vertical walls shall not be placed until all the adjacent wall
panels have cured at least fourteen (14) days.
b. T!le surface of the concrete shall be level whenever a run of concreio is stopped. To
iilsure a level, straight joint on the exposed surface of walls, a woocl strip 8t least ·j 9.0 mm
(0. 75 in.) thick shall be tacked to the forms on these surfaces. The concrete shall be
c8rricd about 13.0 rnm (0.50 in.) abuve the ~:ndersidr~ rJf the strip. f.lho•.1t one 1\om after
L3 concre!P. is rlace<l, the strip shall lJc r~~rnoved <Jnd any irr~glii::~t ities in t!w celtiC
·; : .mecl by iiJ <J str!p st1all be leveled with :1 trow:;l Clll'::i aU l:.;it:.::Hi·:0 ~i·rai! he remov0d.
,, #.JI
c,... , I
SECTION V- PART A
8.16 TAMPING AND VIBRATING
a. As concrete is placed in the forms or in excavations, it shall be thoroughly settled and

compacted throughout the entire depth of the layer which is being consolidated, into a
dense, homogeneous mass, filling all corners and angles, thoroughly embedding the
reinforcement, eliminating rock pockets, and bringing only a slight excess of water to the
exposed surface of concrete during placement.
b. Care shall be used in placing concrete around waterstops. The concrete shall be
carefully worked by redding and vibrating to make sure that all air and rock pockets have
been eliminated. Where flat-strip type waterstops are used, the concrete shall be worked
under the waterstops by hand, making sure that all air and rock pockets have been
eliminated.
c. Concrete in walls shall be internally vibrated and at the same time rammed, stirred, or
worked with suitable appliances, tamping bars, shovels, or forked tools until it completely
fills the forms or excavations and closes snugly against all surfaces. Subsequent layers
of concrete shall not be placed until the layers previously placed have been worked
thoroughly as specified. Except in special cases where their use is deemed impracticable
by the Engineer, the Contractor shall use internally vibrated, high speed power vibrators
not less than 8000 rpm of an approved immersion type in sufficient numbers, with standby
units as required, to accomplish the results herein specified within fifteen (15) minutes
after concrete of the prescribed consistency is placed in the forms. The vibrating head
shall be kept from contact with the surfaces of the forms. Care shall be taken not to
vibrate concrete excessively or to work it in any manner that causes segregation of its
face.
8.17 CURING AND WATERPROOFING
a. General
All concrete shall be cured for not less than fourteen (14) days after placing, in
accordance with the methods specified herein for the different parts of the work, and
described in detail in the following Clauses.
•... . 1
Surf~ceto be mred or
waterproofed Method
Unstripped wooden forms 1
Construction joints between

footings and walls, and
floor slabs and columns 2
Encasement concrete and

thrust blocks 3
All concrete surfaces not

specifically provided for
elsewhere in this Clause 4
Floor slabs in hydraulic

structures and exterlcr :;url"=:1c;es
o"f exposed roof slabs
SECTION V- PART A
b. Method 1
Wooden fonns shalf be wetted immediately after concrete has been poured and shall be
kept wet with water until removed. If fonns are removed within fourteen (14) days of
placing the concrete, curing shalf be continued in accordance with the applicable method
for the particular structure as set out in Methods 2, 4, 5 and 6 below.
c. Method 2
The surface shall be covered with burlap mats which shall be kept wet with water for the
duration of the curing period, until the concrete in the walls has been placed. No curing
compound shall be applied to surfaces cured under Method 2.
d. Method 3
The surface shall be covered with moist earth, not less than four (4) hours nor more than
twenty-four (24) hours after the concrete is placed.
e. Method 4
1. The surface shall be sprayed with a liquid curing compound which will not affect the
bond of.paint to the concrete surface. It shall be applied in accordance with the
2 . 2
manufacturer's instructions at a maximum coverage rate of 4.91 m /L (200 ft /gal) in
such manner as to cover the surface with a unifonn film which will seal thoroughly.
2. Where the curing compound method is used, care shall be exercised to avoid
damage to the seal during the curing period. Should the seal be damaged or broken
before the expiration of the curing period, the break shall be repaired immediately by
the application of additional curing compound over the damaged portion.
3. Wherever curing compound may have been applied by mistake to surfaces against
which concrete subsequently is to be placed and to which it is to adhere, said
compound shall be entirely removed by sandblasting prior to the placing of new
concrete. ·
4. WhAre curing compo~r.j is 5f1c;.;ilit:J, 11 Slli:!i'i- be ·-ap:plied wiHiin.·tiio· '(2). tio'ur$ ·after...
completion of the finish or unfonned surfaces, and within two (2) hours after removal
of fonns on formed surfaces. Repairs required to be made to formed surfaces shall
be made within the said 2~hour period; provided, however, that any such repairs
which cannot be made within the said 2-hour period shall be delayed until after the
curing compound has been applied. When repairs are to be made to an area on
which curing compound has been applied, the area involved shall first be sandblasted
t o remove the curing compound, following which repairs shall be made as provided
under Clause 21.20.
f. Method 5
lmme<liately after the concrete has been troweled, it shall be givsn 3 coat of curino
compound in accordance with Clause (e) herein. Not less than one ('I) flour or more tll;m
four (4) hours after the coat ol' curing compound l1as been <~ppliec1, til e muiace shall :~·)
wetted with water dalivered 'tllmugh CJ fog nozzle ancl concrete curinn 1Jianl<e1-s sllall i)G
placed on the stabs. The curing blankets shall consist of one of the following two types:
1. Sheets of 11e::~vy, wc;\f:rrroof !;i::11:uail ·P<Olf.~cr laid v1ith tin .:;;~ry·s L-;~!_el1 t~neth?.r and
w!!h th e joint!:/ cs:-,._,sen ~tr:ps ~r: :~IG(J 'Ni\11 t;O mn!' t:). in.) \'Jidi-! :::IIi:)~; .:;1 ~-.<:l<.d!i'rO t::ii)f! :Jr
wilil th o er1gts - I<:;J!~( d n::..t le:: ', i!1~1n 7G mm ('~ ill.) r.:•xi :<1~k,·:,·:! tug·:Anc::,- ., ,lU1 .J
waterproof cement to fonn a continuous watertight joint.
SECTION V - PART A
2. Sheets of clear polyethylene having a thickness of not less than six (6) mils laid with
edges butted together and with the joints between sheets sealed with 25 rnm (1 in.)
wide strips or acetate tape.
The curing blankets shall be left in place during the 14-day curing and shall not be
removed until after concrete for adjacent work has been placed. Should the curing
blankets become tom or otherwise ineffective, the Contractor shall replace damaged
sections. During the first seven (7) days of the curing period, no traffic of any nature and
no depositing, temporary or otherwise, of any materials shall be permitted on the curing
blankets. During the remainder of the curing period, foot traffic and temporary depositing
of materials that impose light pressure will be permitted only on top of plywood sheets 16
mm (5/8 in.) minimum thickness laid over the curing blanket.
g. Method 6
1. The surface shall be sprayed with a waterproofing agent consisting of an asphalt

emulsion immediately after the wall fonns have been removed. Application shall be
in two coats. The first coat shall be diluted to 1/2 strength by the addition of water
2
and shall be sprayed on so as to provide a maximum coverage rate of 2.45 m /L
2
(1 00 ft /gal) of dilute solution. The second coat shall consist of an application of the
specified material undiluted, and ~hall be sprayed on to surface so as to provide a
maximum coverage rate of 2.45 m /L (100ft /gal).
2. As soon as the asphalt emulsion applied in accordance with Clause 21.17 (g) (1) has
taken an initial set, the entire area thus coated shall be coated with whitewash. Any
formula for mixing the whitewash may be used which produces a unifonnly coated
white surface and which so remains until placing of the backfill. Should the
whitewash fail to remain on the surface until backfill is placed, the Contractor shall
apply additional whitewash as ordered by the Engineer.
8.18 CARE AND REPAIR OF CONCRETE
The Contractor shall protect all concrete against Injury or damage from excessive heat, lack of
moisture, overstress, or any other cause until final acceptance by tne Owner. Particular care shall
be taken to prevent t~~ d_rying of concrete an_q t<>. _avoid, roughening or .otherwise damaging the···· ' -: · ;...-·...: . -(,."':. -= •
·suii'ace:- Any concretEr 'found to be ·damaged or which may have been originally defective, or
which becomes defective at any time prior to the final acceptance of the complete work, or which
departs from the established line or grade, or which for any other reason does not conform with
the Specifications, shall be satisfactorily repaired or removed and replaced with acceptable
concrete at the Contractor's expense.
8.19 FINISH OF CONCRETE SURFACES
a. All finished or formed surfaces shall conform accurately with the shape, alignment, grades
and sections as indicated on the plans or as prescribed by the Engineer. Surfaces shall
be free from fins, bulges, ridges, offsets, honey-combing, or roughness of any kind, and
snail present a finished, smooth, continuous hard surface.
b. Except 3S other.vise provided herein, unformed top surfaces of 1;oncrote shall be brought
to llniform surfaces and \'/Orked witll suitable tools to a reasonably srnooth woodfloat
finish. Excessive floating of surfaces while the concrete is plastic will not be permitted .
All surfaces shall be placed monolithically with the base slab. Ousting of dry cernant ancJ
U tlld on thB concrde 'Jurfaco t0 absorb ex:-:os~ rnois\ure will n•Jt b3 p:mn\aatl. Flc.or slabs
;:·;·:cl OX!JOS:xl toys of ~;va lle;; <1.1d curbs shDII !):) given a :3!eEd trov;el finish. .At the
(' ;·,ntr.:1ctor's O:)tion, 'ii'w ai~.:.vG-:·nen!ion0 d fl cor 0!ah~ m :l/ lJ:~ ·.!d:>hud \'J;th a pow~ r f:o;~t
' J •
l...- :~
SECTION V- PART A
after screeding. Subsequent to the aforementioned finish, all sloping surfaces of floor
slabs shall be lightly broomed to provide a skid-resistant surface.
8.20 TREATMENT OF SURFACE DEFECTS
a. As soon as forms are removed, all exposed surfaces shall be carefully examined and any
irregularities shall be immediately rubbed or ground in a satisfactory manner in order to
secure a smooth, uniform, and continuous surface. Plastering or coating of surfaces to
be smoothed will not be pennitted. No repairs shall be made until after inspection by the
Engineer, and then only in strict accordance with his directions. Concrete containing
voids, holes, honeycombing, or similar depression defects shall be completely removed
and replaced; provided that where required or approved by the Engineer, defects shall be
repaired with gunite or with cement mortar placed by an approved compressed air mortar
gun. In no case will extensive patching of honeycombed concrete be pennitted. All
repairs and replacements herein specified shall be promptly executed by the Contractor
at his own expense.
b. Defective surfaces to be repaired as specified in Clause (a) herein , shall be cut back from
trueline a minimum depth of 13.0 mm (1/2 in.) over the entire area. Feathered edges
shall be avoided. Where chipping or cutting tools are not required in order to deepen the
area properly, the surface shall be prepared for bonding by the removal of all laitance or
soft material, and not less than 0.79 mm (1/32 in.) depth of the surface film from all hard
portions, by means of an efficient sandblast. After cutting and sandblasting, the surface
shall be wetted sufficiently in advance of shooting with gunite or with cement mortar so
that while the repair material is being applied, the surfaces under repair will remain moist,
but not so wet as to overcome the suction upon which a good bond depends. The
material used for repair purposes shall consist of a mixture of one (1) bag of cement to
3 3
0.08 m (3ft) of sand. For exposed walls, the cement shall contain such a proportion of
white portland cement as is required to make the color or the patch match the color of the
surrounding concrete.
c. Holes left by the tie-rod cones shall be reamed with suitable toothed reamers so as to
leave the surfaces of the holes clean and rough. These holes then shall be repa ired in an
approved manner with dry-packed mortar. Holes left by fonn-typing devices having a
rectangular cross-section and other imperfections havlng a depth greater than thei r least
.. surface .jimension shall not be reamed btk ~·(lalf · IJ"e'"'rB'jTctli'i:!(i 'ffr'a~rl"arJpfthied hianner'with'·~ .... ". -~ .. -- -- ·...
dry-packed mortar.
d. All repairs shall be built up and shaped in such a manner that the completed work will
confonn with the requirements of Clause 8.19 using approved methods which will not
disturb the bond, cause sagging or horizontal fractures. Surfaces of said repairs shall
receive the same kind and amount of curing treatment as required for the concrete in the
repaired section.
e. Prior to filling any structure with water, any cracks that may have d eveloped shall be
"vee'd" as shown on the drawings and filled with sealant conforming with the
requirements of Clause 8.13(b) .
8.:-.!'l ARCHITECTURAL FINISH
l\il prominently exposed exterior, vertical, -2bovc-gr-ound concrete surfacns shall 0e oiven an
architectural finish as follows:
!J :·w;cJi:,tely ::tfter the forms me stripped , the c-cncrerc ~ u rfRCH stl·:Jll f)G !nspeclul c1nd sny poor
: : :;·:(~.voids , rock pockets, or other tieiec:~;v.:· .:• r<'!<.! ~' .:.-:·dl ::-8 re pfiii'ecl <-l'·;d :-111 iomrli(;' 1 >:1~- l{!fler hole;,
i•:; t-..1 n.-; r('q ll ~r<-~d in Clause :3 :~ 0 . Afl0r t!10 ( ) : 1u-~ ~e; !1:1" cur.:'.rl !lt i::J<!!>l :'O!Jr'h>;n (H) .Jsy!>, w.'?.t ill,-,
.:iurtace and apply with a brush a grout made by mixing one (1) part portland cement and one (1)
' .
~-- ·JG
SECTION V- PART A
part of fine sand that will pass a No. 16 sieve with sufficient water to give it the consistency of
thick paint. The cement used in said grout shall be one-half gray and one-half white portland
cement, or as directed by the Engineer. Calcium chloride in the amount of five percent (5%) by
volume of the cement shall be used in the brush coat. The freshly applied grout shall be
vigorously rubbed into the concrete surface with a wood float filling all small air holes. The
surface shall then be kept moist for an hour or more, depending on the weather, until the grout
hardens sufficiently so that it can be scraped from the surface with the edge of a steel trowel
without disturbing grout in the air holes. After all the surface grout has been removed with a steel
trowel, the surface shall be allowed to dry and, when dry, shall be vigorously rubbed with bur1ap to
remove completely all surface grout so that there is no visible paint-like film of grout on the
concrete . The entire cleaning operation for any area must be completed the day it is started, and
no grout shall be left on the surface overnight. Cleaning operations for any given day shall be
terminated at panel joints. It is essential that the various operations be carefully timed to secure
the desired effect which is a light-colored concrete surface of uniform color and texture without
any appearance of a paint or grout film. In the event that improper manipulation results in an
inferior finish, the Contractor shall rub such inferior areas with carborundum bricks as directed by
the Engineer. Before beginning any of the final treatment on exposed surfaces, the Contractor
2 2
shall treat in a satisfactory manner an area of at least 18.6 m (200 ft ) in some inconspicuous
place selected by the Engineer and shall preserve said treated area undisturbed until the
completion of the job. All architecturally-treated concrete surfaces shall conform with the
approved sample in texture, color. and quality. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to
maintain and protect the concrete finish.
8.22 READY-MIXED CONCRETE
a. At the Contractor's option, ready-mixed concrete may be used, meeting the requirements
as to materials, batching, mixing, transporting, and placing as specified herein and in the
requirements of the "Specifications for Ready-Mixed Concrete" (ASTM C-94), including
the supplementary requirements specified in Clauses (b) through (g) herein.
b. Ready-mixed concrete shall be delivered to the site of the work, and discharge shall be
completed within one hour after the addition of the cement to the aggregates or before
the drum has been revolved 250 revolutions, whichever is first. In hot weather, or under
conditions contributing to quick stiffening of the concrete, ·or when the temperature of the
concrete is 29.44°C (85°F) or above, the time between tt'fe introduction of the cement to - . . . . . . .. ..... -;
the B.Cgre.g<>..t'}~.and disch3rge sh3ll not axceed forty-1ive (45} minutes:' ·
c. Truck mixers shall be equipped with electrically-actuated counters by which the number of
revolutions of the drum or blades may be readily verified. The counter shall be of the
resettable, recording type and shall be mounted in the driver's cab. The counters shall be
actuated at the time of starting mixers at mixing speeds.
d. Each batcll of concrete shall be mixed in a truck mixer for not less than seventy (70)
revolutions of the drum or blades at the rate of rotation designated by the manufacturer of
the equipment. Additional mixing, if any, shall be at the speed designated by the
manufacturer of the equipment as agitating speed. All materials including mixing water
shall be in the mixer drum before actuating the revolution counter for determining the
number of revolutions of mixin g.
G. '!"ruck mixers and their operati0n must bP- sucll t"lat the concrete throughout the mixed
batch as discharged is VJithin r-lcceptabl e limits of uniformity with respect to consistency.
mix, and grading . If slump tests taken at approximately the 1/4 and 3/4 points of the load
<:hiring discha r~Je give sl!!rnp~ cliff~ri nr.J l>y rr.ore th<.n :~5 mm ("I in.) \'Jhe!l the specifiGrl
~Jurnp is 76 mm (3 in.) or l~ss, or if t!:0y d.iffer ty rncre ti:an 50 :nrn ('2 in.) when th:;
~ !X~cifie<i slump is mor.::- ;.h8n 7e nm ~:~ ir1.}, t !~"' rr iy~; :;tv! II 1~ct be used on !.f1e .,~,or~
un:2ss tl~o. r:8using. l'on ··!i ~ lon ;;:; co,Tc:r:.':~rl <1 .1(1 ~at:sf-1 ~~o:·~ p0.1iomvme0 i~_; v<:,fifled t ·J
additional slump tests. All mechanicai details of the mixer, such as water measuring and
SECTION V - PART A
discharge apparatus, condition of the blades, speed rotation, general mechanical

condition of the unit, and clearance of the drum , shall be checked before a furthe r attempt
to use the unit will be perm ~ted.
f. Each batch of ready-mixed concrete delivered at the job site shall be accompanied by a
ticket furnished to the Engineer and showing volume of concrete, the weight of cement in
kilograms (pounds), and total weight of all ingredients in kilograms (pounds). The ticket
shall also show the time of day at which the materials were batched.
g. The use of non-agitating equipment for transporting ready-mixed concrete will not be
permitted. Combination truck and trailer equipmE:nt for transporting ready-mixed concrete
will not be permitted. The quality and quantity of materials used in ready-mixed concrete
and in batch aggregates shall be subject to continuous inspection at the batciling plant by
the Engineer.
8.23 SLIPFORM PROCESS IN CONCRETE WORK
a. General
The use of slipforrn in concrete work is optional for this project. However, should the
Contractor decide to adopt slipform in concreting, the procedures/guidelines outlined
below shall be followed.
b. Form Material
Either steel, plywood, or timber sheeting shall be used.
c. Depth of Fonns
The effective depth of any slip form shall be a minimum of 1.00 m (39 in.) and a maximum
of 2.00 m (78 in.).
d. Yokes
Additional supports shall be provided in order to prevent buckling of the jack rods.
e. Bracing and Working Platfonn
The Contractor shall provide adequate bracing which shall be a part of the working
platform. Plywood not less than 19 mm (0.75 in.) thick may be used as the working
platform. The top of the working platform shall be in the same level as the tops of the
inside forms, to permit direct shovelling of concrete from the deck into the forms.
f. Jacking System
The Contractor shall use hydraulic lifting gear with hydraulic jacks bearing against rods
buried in the concrete. Alternately, the forms may be lifted by winches and cable, rack
cllld pinion, or hung from steel rods. Hydraulically operated jacks with capacities ranging
f1·om 3000, 4500 and 6000 kilograms shall be used . Jacks shall be cylinrJrical in share
with a hole in the center throu gl1 which the jack rod passes, with two ~:\~ts of ja•iJS wl1ici1
nlternately lift and grip.
o. ,lack Rods
The Contractor ~-ilall use 25 mm (1 in.) ·,.J!<'lrnet~r ;>month miid <;.!L'r-! !:.:H;:; 'f'Ji!il thr ~~dr;t:l
ends for easy coupling fDr E>:lfnsion. Jnci< rm~~ .'>hall ren~ail! in ri:ll ' (l ~-s p·:~rl C•l' tlt.i
rainforcemeni. Unsupported iengtl·, of jack ruus ~hall not be morl~ llta n O.UU m (2 iil.) on
SECTION V- PART A
8 ·REINFORCED CONCRETE
maximum load. Where rods pass through large formed openings, they must be braced
adequately.
h. Control of the Jacking Process
A suitable process distribution system from a control hydraulic pump shall be used. The
Contractor shall operate all jacks at the sa me speed to give uniform lift, care bei ng taken
that the jacks carry the same loads. All jacks shall be provided with the same hydraulic
pressure to avoid cases where some will lift more slowly than the others.
To control the level of the forms during the jacKing process, plastic pipes with colo red
water may be used, care being taken to purge out or remove entrapped air in the plastic
pipe.
i. Control and Tolerances
As jacking proceeds, provisions shall be made to limit any deviations from the vertical. A
plumb bob shall be used during the entire operation.
j. Reinforcement
i. Vertical reinforcement placed shall be held in position by templates-mounted on the

forms and moving with them. Steel shall be lapped and tied to the rod below and
shall be held at the top by the templates at heights of from 1.20 to 3.00 m (3.94 to
9.84 ft) from the deck. Where difficulties are encountered in the use of templates, the
Contractor shall weld a piece of steel to the yokes just above the top of the forms to
guide the reinforcement into the correct position.
2. Horizontal reinforcement shall be placed as work progresses. The Contractor shall

thread the bars through the yokes and tie or weld these to the vertical steel to control
buckling. Steel should be of short lengths, say, 3.00 m (9.37 ft) to permit easy
handling. The reinforcing steel should be placed on the working platform in the
correct order for placement.
k. Forming Openings and Recesses
The Contractor shall employ special techniques to form openings for doors, for
connections of beams and floors, and for provisions of nibs and haunches. Toothed or
dovetailed connections shall be used.
I. Handling Concrete
The Contractor shall use the common method for slipforming structural cores by
depositing the concrete on the working platform and shovelling it into its final position.
Crane and bucket or hoist and barrows may be used.
m. Normal Concreting Operations
After the slip process has started, the workmen shall place the concre te continuously
around the structure in 150 mm to 220 mm (6 in. to 8.8 in .) layers by st10velling same into
forms. On ceasing concreting, tile forms shall be kept moving to prevent form ation of
excessive adllesion. The "llack off' process shall involve jacking at a decreasing rate,
ntout 2-3 hours after placing or until th0 freeboard is about 450 mm to 500 mm (18 in. to
::~o in.}. When concf6tiPg r;:;sum 2-s, th8 workmen shail jack the forms lJf> about ,;: : s mm lG
~Q mm (1 in. to 2 in ) hGfc,re pourin!J c:on~n;t ,~.
8-1 8
SECTION V- PART A
n. Care and Maintenance of Fonnwork
After concreting has ceased, the exposed fonns must be cleaned and oiled. Care should
be taken to prevent coating of reinforcing steel and spillage onto the set concrete.
o. Finishing and Curing
1. Finishing
Where small holes and depressions occur, a sponge float to fill small holes shall be
used to improve the overall appearance of the finished surface.
2. Curing
Potable water shall be used for curing. Wherever possible, water shall be sprayed
directly onto the surface. The Contractor shall provide suitable and adequate water
supply at the working platform. Workers shall apply water to the concrete surface
intermittently. Where the finished structure is to be exposed to the elements, the
wetting action of rain to complete the cement hydration may be used as a curing
method.
Covering of the interior .and exterior surfaces of the fonned structure with plastic
sheets to keep the moisture always in contact with the concrete surface will be an
acceptable method of curing.
8.24 PLACING REINFORCEMENT
a. All reinforcement shall be placed in accordance with the plans furnished by the Engineer.
In case of any doubt or ambiguity in placing of steel, the Contractor shall consult with the
Engineer whose decision shall be final in such cases.
b. All loose rust or scale, all adhering materials, and all oil or other materials which tend to
destroy bond between the concrete and the reinforcement ·shall be removed before
placing the steel and before concreting begins.
c. Metal .r~in~2r~r}le[lt . shall be acr.IJrntely placed and adequately secured· by ·-u-stng·"

' --. .
. -.,.......
..
annealed iron wire ties or suitable dips at intersections and shall be supported by
concrete or metal supports, spacers, or metal hangers. The minimum clear distance
between parallel bars shall be one and one-half (1-1/2) times th e diameter for round bars,
and twice the side dimension for square bars. In no case shall the clear distance
between bars be less than 25 mm (1 in.) nor less than o·ne and one-third (1-1/3) times the
maximum size of the coarse aggregate. Where bars are used in two or more layers, the
bars in the upper layers shall be placed directly above those in the lower layers at a clear
distance of not less than 25 mm (1 in.).
d. Bends for stirrups and ties shall be made around a pin having a diameter not less than six
(6) times the minimum thickness of the bar, except that for bars larger than 25 mm (1-in .),
ttw pin shall not be less than eight {8} times the minimum thi c!<ness of the bar. All bars
~hall be bent cold.
e. r~e inforcement steel shall not be straightened or rebent in a rnnnner th <Jt will injure t11~
rnHterinl. Bars with kinks or bends not &hown on the drawings shall not be used. Heating
c:f tl10 reinforcement will t.e ~rmitt6d or.ly when a()proved by th rc: Enoineor.
CONSTRUCTION OF WATER SYS TEM FOR STANDARD TECH NICAL SPECIFICATION S
SECTION V - PART A
8.25 OFFSETS AND SPLICES IN REINFORCEMENT
a. In slabs, beams, and girders, splices or reinforcement at points of maximum stress shall
be generally avoided, and may be allowed only upon written approval of splice details by
the Engineer. Splices shall provide sufficient lap to transfer stress between bars by
bonding shear or by butt welding to develop in tension at least one hund red twenty-five
percent (125%) of the specified yield strength of the reinforcing bar. Splices in adjacent
bars shall be generally staggered.
b. Where changes in the cross-section of a column occur, the longitudinal bars shall be
offset in a region where lateral support is afforded. Where offset, the slope of the inclined
portion of the bar with the axis of the column shall not be more than one in six; in the case
of tied columns , the ties shall be spaced not over 76 mm (3 in.) on center for a distance of
300 mm (12 in.) below the actual point of offset unless otherwise shown on the plans.
8.26 TEST ON CONCRETE
a. The Owner or the Engineer may require a reasonable number of tests on the concrete to
be made during the progress of the work. Not less than four (4) cylindrical specimens
shall be made for each test of which at least two (2) shall be reserved for 28-day test. Not
less than one test shall be made for every fifty (50) cubic metres of concrete and in no
case less than one test for each day's concreting. Samples shall be secured and molded
in accordance with "Standard Method of Sampling Fresh Concrete" (ASTM C-172- Latest
Revision) and "standard Method of Making and Curing Test Specimens in the Field"
(ASTM C-31 - Latest Revision) . Strength test shall be made in accordance with the
"Standard Method of Test for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens"
(ASTM C-39 - Latest Revision).
The Contractor shall provide the samples to be taken at the place of deposit and as
specified by the Engineer and shall also box samples for shipment, packing them to
prevent damage from sharp blows. The Owner or his duly authorized representative shall
transport the test cylinders to a laboratory for testing. The owner shall pay costs of said
transportation and testing of the samples.
b. To conform with the requirements of these Specifications, the average strength of test
samples represe nting each class of concrete RS well as the - average of any five (5)
consecutive strength tests representing each class of concrete, shall be equal to or
greater than the specified strength and not more than one strength test in ten shall have ·
an average value less than ninety percent (90%) the specified streng th.
c. Should the test fail to give the required strength, the Owner shall have the right to order a
change in the proportions or in the procedures of curing of the concrete for the rest of the
structure.
3.27 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES (FOR FAILURE TO MEET CONCRETE STRENGTH

REQUIREMENTS)
For failure to meet the specified strengths of concrete which has been designed, prepa rBc1, and
deposited by the Contractor, the Contmctor shall pay the Owner as liquidated damages, not :1s
p<malty er forfeiture, the following scheduiP. applied on th e amount of concrete represented by thE<
samples.
a. For concrete less than one hundred p8rcent (1 00%) l)ut greater thnn N ecp::::tl to r.iret/
f)~) I'C\·mt(OD%) of sp-ec\ti-c•.1 ::u ~-r. ::1.i~s. p·;1 :F:nt ~ f ten r}erc~m'( ( I 0%) or 1~c unit !JicJ ~",:>'.
par t:!J I;ic metre cf coner.:;t,l.
SECTION V- PART A
b. For concrete less than ninety percent (90%) but greater than or equal to eighty percent
(80%) of specified strengths, payment of fifteen percent (15%) of the un it bid cost per
cubic metre of concrete.
c. For concrete less than eighty percent (80%} of the specified strength, removal of the
concrete so deposited and the replacement of same at the expense of the Contractor.
1. In any case of failure to meet specified strength, the Contractor may, at his expense.
obtain concrete core samples from the poured concrete and the compressive strength
of same, as determined by a competent testing authority, shall be taken as conclusive
evidence of its strength and integrity, provided the vorings will not impair the safety of
the structure and can be satisfactorily replac;ed.
To detennine adequacy of affected parts, the Owner shall have the option to order
load tests on parts of the structure where concrete strength tests are below eighty
percent (80%} of specified. These tests shall be in accordance with ACI-318, latest
revision; recommendations and their costs shall be borne by the Contractor.
2. In case of failure of samples to meet specified strengths to the extent mentioned in

(a}. (b) or (c) above, the Contractor shall be required to prolong the curing of the
poured concrete as directed by the Engineer, in addition to payment of the liquidated
damages mentioned above.
i3 21
SECTION V- PART A
9- STEEL AND MISCELLANEOUS METAL WORKS
9.1 GENERAL
a. The Contractor shall furnish, fabricate, and install all steel and miscellaneous metalworks
as specified herein and as shown in the drawings. Miscellaneous metalwork is defined as
all rtems required to be fabricated from structural steel shapes, plates, bars, and thei r
products. He shall provide the necessary labor, supervision, tools, ma terials, supplies,
and appurtenances for the proper construction and operation of the elevated steel
reservoir. The Contractor shall accomplish the work in a complete and finished manner
and insure the highest quality of workmanship in accordance with the drawings and
specifications and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
b. Structural steel straps, plates, bars and their products shall conform with the "Standard
Specifications for Structural Steel" (ASTM Designation A36).
c. Unless otherwise shown , all miscellaneous metalworks of fabricated steel shall be

galvanized after fabrication in accordance with Clause 9.3. Unless otherwise indicated,
stainless steel metalwork shall be of Type 18-8 stainless steel. Items fabricated on
stainless steel sl1all not be galvanized .
d. All materials to be used shall be new, previously unused, and in fi rst class cond ition.
Steel materials of unidentified analysis may be used, provided they are tested and
properly certified by a qualified testing laboratory.
e. Painting of all steel metalwork, unless otherwise specified, shall be in accordance with
Clause 14- "Painting and Coating."
f. Testing and disinfecting shall be undertaken as specified in Clause 12 - Pressure and

Leakage Testing and Disinfecting .
g. Shop drawings for all steel and miscellaneous metalwork shall be submitted to the
Engineer for review in accordance with Clause 2.2- Shop Drawings.
h. The work and equipment to be provided by the Contractor under this Contract shall
conform with the U.S. Standards as mentioned in . the following clauses or with any
International Standards of equal value.
i. Welding terms used in this specification shall be interpreted according to the definition
given in AWS A3.0.
9.2 MATERIALS
a. Structural Shapes
All structural shapes for use shall be produced by the open-hearth, basic oxygen , or
electric-furnace process. Open or non-tubular structural shapes sha ll conform with ASTM
A36. When structural shapes are fabricated from steel plates, the plates sh all confonn
with Item (b) .
tJ. Plates
Pl<1te material shali be open-hearth , electric-furnace, or basic-oxygen process sl eel

confom1ing with the latest revisi on of any of the following applicable ASTM specifications:
J\ 36 ; A 131. Grades A and 8; A283, Grades A , B, C and D; or A573, Grade 58.
D-1
SECTION V - PART A
9 ~STEEL AND MISCELLANEOUS METAL WORKS
c. Anchor Bolts, Rods, and Reinforcing Steel
1. The Contractor shall furnish and set all bolts, anchor bolts, rods and reinforcing steel.
Except where otherwise shown or specified, all bolts, anchor bolts, washers, and nuts
shall be steel, galvanized after fabrication in accordance with Clause 9.3.
2. Except as otherwise provided herein, steel for bolts, anchor bolts, and cap screws
shall be in accordance with "Specifications for Low Carbon Steel Externally and
Internally Threaded Standard Fasteners," Grade B (ASTM Designation A307), or
"Specifications for Carbon Steel Bars Subject to Mechanical Property Requirements"
(ASTM Designation A306) or threaded parts of ASTM A36 and shall meet the
following additional requirements: (1) the nut material shall be free-cutting steel, and
(2) the nuts shall be capable of developing the full strength of the bolts. Threads shall
be Coarse Thread Series conforming with the requirements of the American Standard
for Screw Threads. All bolts and cap screws shall have hexagon heads, and nuts
shall be Heavy Hexagon Series.
3. Threads of galvanized bolts and nuts shall be formed with suitable taps and dies such
that they retain the normal clearance after hot-dip galvanizing.
4. Unless otherwise shown, all bolts, anchor bolts, and nuts which are buried,
submerged, or inside a covered hydraulic structure shall be Hot-Dip galvanized per
TS-20 and then coated with two coats of coal tar epoxy after installation.
d. Ladders
All ladders shall be fabricated of carbon steel and galvanized after fabrication.
e. Steel Pipe Handrails
Steel pipe handrails shall be standard 38 mm (1-1/2) in.) black steel pipe made up by
welding. Railing shall be shop-fabricated into easily handled units and hot-dip galvanized
after fabrication. Field welding of pipe handrail joints will be permitted only if approved by
the Engineer, and then only in accordance with his instructions. Submerged steel pipe
shall be coated with two coats of coal tar epoxy after instaUation.
f. Pipe Columns
Pipe column steel shall conform with the "Specifications for Welded and Seamless Steel
Pipe," (ASTM A53}, Grade B. Pipe columns that would be submerged shall be coated
with two coats of coal tar epoxy. ·
g. Metal Decking
Metal decking shall be of the size and gage shown in the drawings and shall meet the
requirements of the Specification for the "Design of Light Gage, Cold-formed Steel
Structural Members" of the American Iron and Steel Institute. The steel shall be
galv<:mized after fa brication.
11. Safety Stair Treads

t\lwninum safely stair treacls i 00 mm (4 in.} wide shall be provid~d on all s1airs, and
elsewhere where sl1own.
CONSTRUCTION OF WATER SYSTEM FOR STANDARD TECHNICAL SPEC IFICATIONS
SECTION V- PART A
i. Metal Grating and Floor Hatches
1. G eneral
Metal grating and floor hatches shall be of the design, sizes, and typ es shown.
Aluminum in contact w ith other metals or concrete shall be painted wi th one (1) coat
of zinc chromate and two (2) coats of approved aluminum metal-and-masonry paint.
2 . Metal Grating
Metal grating shall be fabricated of aluminum, stainless steel, or galvanized steel as

shown. No single piece of grating shall weigh more than 25 kg (55 lb) unless
specifically detailed otherwise. Aluminum shall be 6061T6 Alloy Bearing Bars and
6063TS Alloy Cross Bars. Stainless steel shall be Type 18-8. All grating shall be
completely banded.
3. Floor Hatches
Floor hatc hes shall be fabricated of steel or aluminum as shown. Hatches shall be
double-swing, and shall be furnished with two (2) stay bars designed to hold the
covers in an open position and provide a railing around the opening , stay bar
brackets designed to provide storage for the bars when the latch is closed, four (4)
flush handles, joint gutter, and moat-type edge drain complete with drain connection.
Steel hatches shall be galvanized after fabrication . Drain connection size and
location shall be as shown.
j. Iron Castings
Iron castings shall conform with th e "Specifi cations for Gray Iron Casting" (ASTM A48),
unless otherwise shown.
k. Seat Angles, Supports, and Guides
Seat angles for grating shall be aluminum or steel as shown and of a size as shown.
Guides for slide gates shall be steel, of a size shown, ~ot-dip galvanized after fabri cation.
9.3 GALVANIZING
All structural steel places, shapes, bars, and fabricated assemblies required to be
galvanized shall, after the steel has been thoroughly cleaned of rust and scale, be
galvanized in accordan ce with the "Specification for Zinc (Hot-Galvanized) Coatings on
Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars and
Strip" (ASTM A123). Any galvanized part that becomes warped during the galvanizing
operation shall be straightened. Bolts, anchor bolts, nuts, and similar threaded fasteners,
after being properly cleaned, shall be galvanized in accordance with the "Specifications
fo r Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware" (ASTM A153). Field repairs to
galvanizing shall be made using "Galvano," "Galvo-Weld," or approved equal.
9.4 SHOP FABRICATION - STEEL WORf\S
a. General
All work required of the Contmctor shall he of the highest quality workmnnship. LAying
t •U t of slwp-fnbricated matelial s!1aii1J:>. do ne c.nly by experl8nGc(l \No r:~m c.n.
SECTION V- PART A
9 -STEEL AND MISCELLANEOUS METAL WORKS
b. Straightening
Any required straightening of materials shall be done by methods that will not harm the
steel material. Minor cold straightening may be performed by hammering or preferably by
rolling or pressing. Heat may be used in straightening for more severe deformations.
c. Finish of Plate Edges -Welded Work
The plate edges to be welded may be universal mill edges or tf1ey may be prepared by
shearing, machining, chipping, or by mechanically guided oxygen or plasma arc cutting.
L::dges of irregular contour may be prepared by manually guided oxygen or plasma arc
cutting.
1. Oxygen or plasma arc cutting. When edges of plates are oxygen or plasma arc cut,
the surface obtained shall be uniform and smooth and shall be cleared of slag
accumulation before welding. All cutting shall follow closely the lines prescribed.
2. Shearing. Shearing may be used for material 13 mm (1/2 in.) or less in thickness to
be joined by butt joints, and for all thickness of materials permitted to be joined by lap
joints.
d. Rolling
Plates shall be cold-rolled to suit the curvature of tank.
e. Double-Curved Plates
Plates that are curved in two directions may be pressed either cold or hot or may be
dished with a "mortar and pestle" die by repeated application.
f. Milling of Columns
The ends of columns shall be milled to provide a satisfactory bearing unless the design
calls for sufficient welding to resist the total calculated loads.
g. Shop Assembly
Double-curved tank bottoms, shells, and roofs shall be assembled in the shop, if
necessary, to ensure that they will fit properly in the field.
h. Shippingrrransporting
All materials shall be loaded, transported to the site, unloaded and stored in such a
manner as to prevent damage.
9.5 WELDING
a. General
/~II weldin~
shall be the shielded arc method and shall conform witl1 th8 A\fV~) "Code for
Arc <1nd Gas Welding in Building Construction." Qualification of w81ders 0ht1.ll be in
accordance with the specifications for Standard Qualification Procedure ot "iilC AWS.
~). SuU JoiMs
'i. Subject to prim<1ry r.tress due lo weight' 1 pressqre ol" l!l e t:m:; u,;n~·:: ll h: Duti j;,;ill~~
~' lli)J GCt to primary stress wlii r.s longHuJinal join Is of (.. / •ir,dr, .::Ji ~ ;::.i,.i, :..i 10!!::. <.Ji1Ci ali
SECTION V- PART A
joints below the point of support in suspended bottoms of elevated tanks shall have
complete joint penetration welds, which may be double welded from botll sides or
welded from one side only using a backing strip or equivalent means t o ens ure
complete joint penetration welds. Butt joints may be used for al l thickness permitted
to be welded under th is specification.
2. Subje ct to secondary stress: In butt j oints subject to secondary stress, such as

ci rcu mferential j oints of cylindrical tank shells, materials 10 mm (3/8 in.) or less in
thickness and single-groove welded joints shall have complete joint penetration
welds. Joints in materials of thickness greater than 10 mm (3/8 in.) with square
groove or double-groove welds shall be either partial joint penetration or complete
joint penetrati on welds at the option of the Contractor, unless complete joint
penetration is specified by the Engineer. In partial joint penetration welds, the
unwelded portion plus any under cutting, shall not exceed one-third of the thickness
of the thinner plate; the unwelded portion shall be located near the center of the
thinner plate, and partial joint penetration welds shall have complete joint penetration
welds for a distance of at least 75 mm (3 in.) on each side of Intersecting sides of
intersecting joints. Partial joint penetration welds shall have a strength equivalent to
at least two-thirds that of a double-groove butt weld having complete joint penetration.
If complete joint penetration welds are desired, they shall be specified by the
Engineer.
3. Butt joints may be used for welding all thickness of material permitted to be welded
under this specification.
c. Lap Joints
1. Subject to primary stress due to weight or pressure of tank contents: Lap joints
subject to primary stress, such as longitudinal joints of cylindrical tank shells and all
joints below the point of supports in suspended bottoms of elevated tanks, shall have
continuous full fillet welds on both edges of the joints. The maximum th ickness
permitted for this type shall be 12 mm (1/2 in.).
2. S ubject to secondary stress: Lap joints subject to secondary stress, such as

c irc umferential joints of cylindrical tank shells, s~all be welded on both sides with
continuous fillet welds. The maximum thickness permitted for this type shall be-
16 mm-(S/8-fn.):
3. In any case, welded lap joints, except when shown on the plans, shall be lapped not
less than five times the nominal thickness of the thinner plate joined (ST); but in
double-welded lap joints, the lap need not exceed 50 mm (2 in.), and in single-welded
lap joints, the lap need not exceed 25 mm (1 in.).
(J. Plates
The maximum thickness of plates, except structural components and base plates
permitted to be welded under th e spec ification shall be 50 mm (2 in.) or oth erwise as
shown in the plans.
e. Roof Plates
F=or roof plates which me not subject to hydrostatic pressure from tank conten ts, lap joints
may be welded on the top side only with co ntinuous full fillet welds. Butt joints shall be
~;in~JI 0-groov~ Vields , !iSing suitable backing or cqlllva:ent rr·8Elns to en:;LlfG 3t least ninety
r)8r,;ent (00%) joint pcnetmtion.
S-£i
CONSTRUCTION OF WATER SYSTEM FOR STANDARD TE CHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION V - PART A
f. Minimum Size of Fillet and Seal Welds
1. Fillet Welds: Plates 5 mm (3/16 in.) and less in thickness shall have full fillet welds.
Plates more than 5 mm (3/16 in.) thick shall have welds of a size not less than one-
third the thickness of the thinner plate at the joint, with a minimum of 5 mm (3/16 in.).
2. Seal Welds: Seal welding, when desired, shall be accomplished by a con tinuous
weld combining the functions of sealing and strength, changing section only as the
required strength may necessitate.
g. Minimum Length of Welds
The minimum length of any weld shall be four times the size but not less than 38 mm (1-
1/2 in.), or else the size of the weld shall be considered not to exceed one-fou rth of its
length.
The effective length of a fillet weld shall not include the length of the tapered ends. A
deduction of at least 6.35 mm (1/4 in.) shall be made from the overall length as an
allowance for tapered ends.
h. Intermittent Welding
lntennittent welding shall not be used on tank shell plating in contact with tank contents or
on surfaces exposed to external weathering. lntennittent groove welds shall not be used .
1. Length: The length of any segment of intenni!tent weld shall not be less than four
times the weld size but never less than 38 mm (1-1/2 in.).
2. Seams: All seams that are to have intennittent weld shall have contin uous le ngth of
welds at each end for a distance of at least 150 mm (6 in.).
i. Safety in Welding and Cutting
Operations involving welding, cutting, brazing, or allied. processes shall conform with
ANSI Z49. 1 for the protection of welders, welding operatiol), and nea rby personnel.
j. Safe Usage of Cutting and Welding Processes
Procedures shall confonn with ANSI Z49.2 (NFPA 51 B) for the prevention of fire and
property damage.
9.G ERECTION OF STEEL RESERVOIR STRUCTURE
a. General
The Contractor shall furnish alf labor, tools, falsework, scaffolding, <"~ nd other eq uipment
necessary and shall erect the tank so that it is compl etely ready for use.
b. Welds
All weld s in th e tank and structural attCJchrnents shall be made in a manne r tc' ensure
com plele fusion with the base meta!, \'/ithin the limits specified fo r each joint, and in
accordance with the qualified procedure.
·1 . \.~!-;n!l1 (!f Go ndilions: Welding shz'l not t •G ;::-:;tiorm ed \.VIJ.:;n t!t ~ ~;u rl·~:rc;:> of the pmts
-~.~ ;-;a nre \'JJt fro.n mi:i , c,- wit..;,-; ! :un i:..; la!!!r.o (' 11 s.t.r.:lt .<>ur f<lc~:~g. r., ;- du.-in•)
~_ ,o l\l<::d
SECTION V- PART A
periods of high winds, unless the welder or welding operator and work are protected
properly.
2. Peening: Peening of weld layers may be used to prevent undue distortion. Surface
layers shall not be peened. Peening shall be perfonned with light blows from a power
hammer with a blunt-nosed tool.
3. Contour: The surface bends shall merge smoothly into each other in all welds.
4. Reinforcement: The reinforcement of bull welds shall, as practicable, be preferably

not more than 1.6 mm (1/16 in.). In no case shall the face of the weld lie below the
surface of the plates being joined.
5. Gouging: Gouging at the root of the welds and gouging of welds to remove defects
may be perfonned with a round-nosed tool or by arc or oxygen gouging.
6. Cleaning between beads. Eact1 bead of multiple-pass weld shall be cleared of slag
and other loose deposits before the next bead is applied.
c. Preparation of Surface to be Welded
Surfaces to be welded shall be free from loose scale, slag, heavy rust, grease, paint, and
any other foreign material, except tightly adherent mill scale. A light film of deoxaluminate
or equivalent spatter film compound may be disregarded. Such surfaces shall be smooth,
uniform, and free from fins, seams, and other defects that adversely affect proper
welding. A fine film of rust adhering on cut or sheared edge after wire brushing need not
be removed.
d. Tack Welds
Tack weld used in the assembly of joints subject to primary stress from the weight or
pressure of the tank contents shall be thoroughly cleared of all welding slag, but need not
be removed, provided they are visually inspected for soundness (no cracks, complete
fusion. filled craters, and acceptable profiles) and metal.
e. Tank Assembly
All shell, bottom and roof plates subjected to stress by the weight or pressure of the
contained liquid shall be assembled and welded in such a manner that the proper
curvature of the plates in both directions is maintained.
1. Clips, jigs, and lugs: Clips, jigs, or lugs welded to the shell plates for erection
purposes shall be removed without damaging the plates, and any portion of the weld
beads remaining shall be chipped or ground smooth.
2. Bottom plates for elevated tanks: The bottom plates for elevnted tanks shall be
assembled and welded together by a procedure that will result in a minimum of
distortion from weld shrinkage.
3. TDnk Sl1ell: For waldinn in the vertical position, the progrc~sion of w8lding shall be
either upward or downward.
The shell plates shall b~ joined hy welding the joint'5 in <J seC!!IenGe that lhe
Contractor l~ns fotJ.:".<l ! i.l n::su!t in lhn least disto,ibn ctee tu :>h1ink~iOt~ of ihc w~!d ~·lilli
ii1at will avoi<l kin'(~; 8t :t1e l•.Jn[J:tudin:il j~"lints.
SECTION V- PART A
f. Matching Plates
1. Lap Joints: The plates fonning a lap joint shall be held in as close contact as possible
during welding and in no case shall the separation be more than 1.6 mm (1/16 in.).
Where separation occurs, the size of the weld shall be increased by the amount of
separation.
2. Butt joints under primary stress: In butt joints subject to primary stress from weight or
pressure of tank contents, the adjoining plates shall be aligned accurately and
retained in position during welding, so that in the finished joint, the centerlines of
adjoining plates edges shall not have an offset from eac~. other at any point in excess
of ten percent (1 0%) of the plate thickness (using 'the thickness of the thinner plate if
of different thickness) or 1.6 mm (1/16 in.) whichever is smaller.
3. Butt joints under secondary stress: In butt joints subject to secondary stress, the
adjoining plates shall be aligned accurately and retained in the position during
welding so that in the finished joint, the thinner plate Of one is thinner than the other)
shall not project beyond its adjoining plate by more than twenty percent (20%) of the
plate thickness (using thickness of thinner plate if of different thickness) or 3 mm
(1/8 in.) whichever is smaller.
4. Cleaning of Welds: The Contractor's crew shall remove weld scale or slag, spatter,
burrs, and other sharp or rough projections in a manner that will leave the surface
suitable for the subsequent cleaning and painting operation. Weld seams need not
be chipped or ground, provided they may be satisfactorily cleaned and painted.
g. Grouting of Column and Riser Bases
After the tank has been completely erected and "trued up," a minimum of 25 mm (1 in.)
space between the column and riser bases and the foundation shall be provided for
grouting. The space shall be wetted thoroughly and fitted with a 1:15 cement-sand grout,
which is forced under the base plates until the space is filled completely. The Contractor
shall furnish materials and labor for grouting.
SECTION V- PART A
10- PIPING
10.1 GENERAL
a. The Contractor shall furnish and install all pipes, fittings, closure pieces, supports, bolts,
nuts, gaskets, jointing materials, and appurtenances as shown and specified, and as
required fo r a complete and workable piping system. Shop drawings of all piping systems
shall be furnished in accordance with Clause 2.2 "Shop Drawings".
b. All bolts, nuts, and studs in the assembly of piping shall conform with the requirements of
Clause 9 - Steel and Miscellaneous Metalworks.
c. All exposed piping shall be adequately supported with devices of appropriate design.
Where details are shown, the supports shall conform thereto and shall be placed as
indicated; provided that support for all piping shall be complete and adequate regardl ess
of whether or not supporting devices are specifically shown.
d. All pipes shall be laid in a uniform profile as shown on the Drawings.
10.2 MORTAR LINED AND ENAMEL OR MORTAR COATED STEEL PIPE
a. General
Mortar lined and enamel or mortar coated steel pipe materials and method of
manufacture of straight pipe and pipe specials shall conform with Federal Specifications
SS-P38Sa dated January 31, 1964 and Amendment 1 dated February 27, 1968
(hereinafter referred to as "Fed Spec"), subject to the exceptions and supplemental
requirements contained in the following Clauses. The pipe, of the diameter and class
shown, shall be furnished complete with rubber gaskets if required, and all specials and
bends shall be provided as shown. Pipe outside diameters shall be as shown in Clause
h. Plate thickness of steel diameter specified or shown are minimum wall thicknesses.
Shop drawings of all pipes and specials shall be furnished in accordance with Clause 2.2.
b. Cement
Cement shall conform with ASTM C-150 and shal,l be Type 1 for Pipe linings and
coatings.
c. Aggregate
Aggregate shall conform with ASTM C33.
d. Mortar
The cement mortar used for the lining and coating shall be composed of mixtures of
portland cement, aggregate and water, well-mixed and of the proper consistency to
produce dense, homogeneous lining and coating that will adhere firmly to the steel
cylinder. The cement mortar shall develop compressive strength of not less than 18 MPa
(2,600 psi) at twenty-eight (28) days.
e. Cylinder Material
Cylinders shall be fCliJricated from hot-rolled carbon steel st'J ~ets or !)lP.tes conf0rming v;ith
N.:)TM A-570 Grades c , D , orE, ASTM J\-283 Grade D; steel pipe conforming w ith ASTM
A-139 Grade B or, if approved by the Engineer, high-strength low-alloy steel conforming
,_.,ith /\STM A-.5-n Crm le ~~2 .
CONSTRUCTION OF WATER SYSTEM FOR STANDARD TECHNICAL SPEC IF !CATIONS
SECTION V- PART A
10- PIPING
f. Rubber Gasket
The rubber gasket shall be the continuous ring type, made of a special composition
rubber. The compound shall be of first-grade natural crude, synthetic rubber, or a
suitable combination thereof. The gasket shall be so formed and cured as to be dense,
homogeneous, and have a smooth surface free of blisters, pits, and other imperfections.
The gasket shall be of sufficient volume to fill substantially the recess provided when the
joint is assembled and shall be the sole element depended upon to make the joint
watertight. Gaskets shall be furnished with the pipe. The compound shall conform with
the physical requirements listed below:
Physical Requirement Value
Tensile strength, min.

Natural rubber 15.85 MPa (2300 psi)
Synthetic rubber
and combination 14.47 MPa (2100 psi)
Ultimate elongation, percent minimum

Natural 500%
Synthetic and
combination 425%
Shore durometer, Type A 40-65
Compression set, percent of

original deflection, maximum 20%
Tensile strength after aging

percent of original tensile
strength, minimum 80%
(Oxygen pressu re test or air heat test)
g. Welded Joints
•
Where welded joints are provided, weld bell type joints may be used, or the bell may be
cut back, -or a filler rod added so as to permit a field weld between the bell and spigot joint
rings.
h. Pipe Design
Design parameters shall be as follows:
For cement-lined steel pipes
Class 150
Nominal Thickness (mm) Thickness (mm)
Diameter (rnm) of Steel Cylinder, of Steel Cylinder,
Mortar-coaled Surfncc Painte<l
:;oo ancl under 2-AO I.< :I()

3:'30 • soo 4.'!0 o.OO
600 . 700 6.00 7.90
P>O ·· 9011 7 90 ~. ~\()
1000 - '1200 ~I ) ) . '1 '1.1 0
? r -.
l ~o..:
SECTION V- PART A
10- PIPING
Outside diameters of cement-lined/cement-coated, coal-tar coated and surface-

painted steel pipes
Nominal Outside
Diameter (mm) Diameter (mm)
100 114.30
150 168.30
200 219.10
250 273.10
300 323.90
350 391.00
400 441.80
450 506.60
500 557.40
600 661 .60
700 763.20
750 817.80
800 868.60
900 970.20
1000 1075.00
1100 1176.60
1200 1278.20
i. Lining
The mortar for pipe lining shall consist of one part cement to not more than three (3) parts
sand by weight. The cement mortar lining shall be applied by the centrifugal method or
by a method obtaining equivalent results. The process used in the application of the
lining shall produce a smooth, dense durable surface, free from pockets, voids, over-
sanded areas, blisters, and excessively cracked areas. Except where otherwise specified
or shown, lining thickness shall be as follows, with a tolerance of plus or minus twenty-five
percent (25%):
Nominal Pipe Lining

Diameter .. . Thickness
Under 300 mm 6mm

300 to 400 mm 13 mm
over400 mm 20 mm
j. Cement Mortar Coating
The steel reinforcement in the mortar coating shall consist of: (a) Helically wound cold
drawn steel wire or, (b) a cage of self-furring welded steel wire fabric of 50 mm x 50 mm
No. 14 gage fabric or 50 mm x 100 rnm No. 13 gage fabric, or (c) 25 mm No. 18 gage or
37 mm hexagonal No. 17 gage ribbon mesh, twisted wire fabric, salvaged both edges
using steel wire. Helically wound steel wire shall be not less than th~ th ickness of No. 14
gage and shall be embedded at t11e approximate center of the cement mort~r r;oating.
Mortar for pipe coating ~hal! consist of rme (1) part cement to n0t :no:e than tl1ree (3)
pmts sand by welgllt. Ti1e wrnent mo1tar coating shall be Clpplied by pneumatic
placement or by a method producing equivalent result!>. Except as othe:~n;s.:; ~:Jec!ficd or
.snowrr, coaling .:. h!\11 !:1-:· :::i 1wn for •.lUsit.;;~s.
10·3
SECTION V- PART A
10- PIPING
k. Curing
The pipe shall be water or steam cured, or a combination of both, or the coating may be
cured by covering with a plastic membrane. Water curing and steam curing may be used
interchangeably on a time ratio basis of four (4) hours water curing to one (1) hour steam
curing.
1. Steam Curing - Where steam curing is used, the pipe shall be kept in steam
maintained at a temperature of 55°C for the specified period. The pipe ends shall be
tightly capped with waterproofed cover whenever the steam curing is inte rrupted or
completed. The waterproof covers shall be kept througrcut and beyond the curing
period. The covers shall not be removed until the pipes are to be laid. The
Contractor shall furnish the Engineer copies of recorded charts showing tempe rature
and duration of curing period.
2 . Water Curing - Where the water curing is used, the pipe shall be kept continually
moist by spraying or other means for seven (7) days before being moved to the
trench side. The pipe shall not be allowed to dry either on the inside or outside
surfaces during the curing period. The pipe shall be tightly capped with a waterproof
cover immediately upon completion of the lining of each section to prevent the
escape of moisture from the interior of the pipe. When additional moisture is required
to maintain a moist condition, water shall be introduced inside the pipe after the
mortar has attained sufficient set so that the introduction of water will not damage the
mortar. The pipes shall be water-cured for a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours
before application of the coating.
I. Compressive Strength for Mortar
Test cylinders shall be cast samples of the mortar used in lining and coating the pipe.
T he curing of test cylinders shall be in confonnity with the curing of the pipe. Cylinders
shall be molded and tested in accordance with ASTM C39 or C 109.
m. Hydrostatic Pressure Test
All steel cylinders shall be subjected to a hydrostatic p~essure test which stresses the
steel to 172.36 MPa. Whil e under pressure test, aJJ welds shall be thoroughly inspected
and air parts .Showint(leakage· shall be marked. Cylinders which show any leakage under
test shall be re-welded at the point of leakage and subjected to another hydrostatic test.
n. Specials
1. Definition
Specials are defined as bends, reducers, wyes, tees, crosses, outlets, and manifolds,
wherever located, and all piping above ground or in structures.
2. Design
Except as otr1erwise provided herein , materials, fabric<ltion, Dnd slwp testing of

:.traight pipe sl1all conform with the "AWWP.. St;;lndard for Steel \1Vat0r 1:-ipe o lnchGs
anrl Larger" (AWNA C·200). Minimum plate t hh~kness of special5 ::ll<1ll !:;:; compuied
using the following formu la:
'( '-' D;.'/2(f/S)
T ·· pl<-!te thickness in inr,l1w;

D - u t1i.~ida cl1amcter of ste.::l 8]'li,ldb· !n i il ~;l l 0;5
10-4
SECTION V- PART A
10- PIPING
P = tlesign pressure (psi)

S ::: factor of safety, 2.50
Y = specified yield point of steel in psi
but in no case shall the design stress ['OS) exceed 91 MPa (13,200 psi) nor shall
plate thi ckness be less than the following :
Pipe Manifolds
Piping Above
Ground Piping Fittings
Nominal Pipe in Structures Underground
Diameter Fittings above Installation
(mm) Ground (mm) (mm)
300 and under 4.70 mm 4.70 mm

350 - 500 6.00 mm 4.70 mm
600 - 700 7.90 mm 6.00 mm
750 - 900 9.50 mm 7.90 mm
1000 - 1200 11.10 mm 9.50 mm
3. Outlets, Tees, Wyes, and Crosses
Outlets shall be welded to the steel cylinder of the pipe following application of mortar
coating to the cylinder. Following this, all outlets larger than SO mm (2 in.) in diameter
shall be provided with steel reinforcing saddles, wrapper plates, or crotch plates, or
they shall be fabricated in their entirety of steel plates having a thickness equal to the
sum of the required thickness of the saddle or wrapper plate , plus the cylinder to
which they are attached .
Such saddles or wrapper plates shall be of steel plate at least 1.25 tim es the
thickness of the pipe cylinder to which the outlet is attached . Th e total cross-
sectional area of the saddle or wrapper plates shall be at least 1.25 tim es the product
of the cut-out length and the plate thickness of the pipe, as determ ined by the
equation in Clause (n) (2). Th e overall width of the saddle or wrapper plate shall not
be more than 2 times, and not less than 1.67 tim~s. the maximum dimension of the
cu t-out. Outlets 300 mm (12 in.) and smaller m<;~y'_b_~ .tab.dr.~teQ . from schedule 30 or
heav"i'er'steei plpe in the sta ndard outside d iameters, i.e., 324 mm (12-3/4 in .), 273
mm (10-3/4 in.), 219 mm (8-5/8in.), 169 mm (6-5/8 in.), and 114 mm (4-1/2 in.) .
Where required, crotch plates shall be provided, designed according to the

nomograph method described in AWWA Manual' M-11, Clause 19.5, or AWWA
Journal, Vol. 47, No.6, June 1955, pp. 617 to 623.
Tees, wyes, and crosses shall either be fabricated of steel plate or provided with
wrapper plates or with crotch plates. The thickness of the plate or plates, exclusive of
crotch plates, being such that when multiplied by the diameter of the opening, will be
not less than 1.25 times the cross-sectional area of the cut-out. Where tees, wyes, or
crosses are fabricated from steel p!ate without wrapper plates, th e thi ckness of the
plate shall not be less than 2.5 times the required plate thickn ess shown in the
preceding table for such fittings.
4. Dimensi ons
l.',1les5 c\herwise s!1ovm , dimen3ions of spec!nls :.hn ll confom1 witil ''Al/1/WA Stcmd arcl
f•:-:r DimG!lSions for StGcl Water Pipf.J Fittings" (A\f'v\JV.\ C· 20!3) f01· (;ervie;e in
·r :-a.·,::,Jil!0:!on and Di~lri b ;Jtion System;:,.
1iJ-5
SECTION V- PART A
10- PIPING
5. Steel Welding Fittings
Steel welding fittings shall conform with ASTM A234.
6. Ends for Mechanical-Type Couplings
Except as otherwise provided herein, where mechanical-type couplings are indicated,

the ends of the pipe shall be banded with Type C collared ends using double fillet
welds. Where pipe 300 mm (12 in.) and smaller is furnished in standard schedule
thickness, and where the wall thickness equals or exceeds the coupling
manufacturer's minimum wall thickness, the pipe enos may be grooved.
7. Flanges
Where the design pressure is 1.2 MPa (175 ps~ or less, flanges shall conform with
either AWWA C-207 Class D, or E. or ANSI 816.5 1.0 MPa (150 psi) class. Whe re
the design pressure is greater than 1.2 MPa (17 5 psi), flanges shall conform with
ANSI 816.5 2.0 MPa (300 psi) class. Flanges shall have flat or raised faces.
Flanges shall be attached with bolt holes straddling the vertical axis of the pipe.
8. Shop testing
Upon completion of welding, but before lining and coating, each special shall be bulk-
headed and tested under a hydrostatic pressure of not less than one and one-half (1-
1/2) times the pressure for which the pipe has been designed; provided, however,
that if straight pipe used in fabricating the special has been previously tested in
accordance with Clause (n) (2) herein, the circumferential welds may be tested by a
dye penetrant process using Turco Dy-Check or approved equal, with no furthe r
hydrostatic test. Any pinholes or porous welds which may be revealed by the test
shall be chipped out and re-welded and the special retested.
9. Lining
All requirements pertaining to thickness, application, and curing of lining specified for
straight pipe shall apply to specials, with the following, provision . If the special cannot
be line9~~r.trt~\.tg~l!y•. iLsh.all.be lined by hand. In- such cas~. the. lining shall be
reinforced with 50 mm x 100 mm (2 in. x 4 in.) No. 12 welded wire fabric positioned
approximately in the center of the lining. The wire spaced 50 mm (2 in.) on centers
shall extend circumferentially around the pipe with the fabric securely fastened to the
pipe. Splices shall be lapped 100 mm (4 in.) and the free ends tied or looped to
assure continuity. ·
10. Coating
All requirements pertaining to thickness, application, and curing of coating specified

for straight pipe shall apply to specials. Unless otherwise shown, the coating on the
buried portion of a pipe section passing through a structure wall shall extend SO mm
(2 in.) inside the outer surface of the wall , or to the wa ll flange. if one is indiC8ted .
Pipe above ground or in structure shall be field-painted as s pecified in C lause 14 -
Painting and Coatings.
1·1. Marking
/ '.m~ r!; inclicc:t;ng H10 true -_:el!icai QX!::; of l!lc spcc.ial sha l~ t -'3 p l<tG &d on th e :(:·p 2.,~:;
!:;v!iom of tM ::;pecial.
SECTION V- PART A
10- PIPING
o. Internal Bracing
1. General
Pipe sections 450 mm (18 in.) and larger shall be braced internally as soon as
practicable after the cement mortar lining has been applied. Bracing shall remain in
the pipe until installation and backfilling have been completed.
2. 450 (28 in.) through 750 mm (30 in.) Diameter Pipe
Pipe sections shall be braced within 300 mm (12 in.) of each end with two 2 x 4s
wedged In the pipe at right angles to each other.
3. Larger than 750 mm (30 in.) through 1200 mm (48 in.) Diameter Pipe
Pipe sections shall be braced within 300 mm (12 in.) of each end, and at intervals not
exceeding 3 m (10 ft) along the pipe length, with two 2 x 4s wedged in the pipe at
right angles to each other.
4. Larger than 1200 mm (48 in) Diameter Pipe
Pipe sections shall be braced within 300 mm (12 in.) of each end, and at intervals not
exceeding 3 m (1 0 ft) along the pipe length, with two 4 x 4s wedged in the pipe at
right angles.
p. Cleanliness of Pipe
The interior of each pipe section and special shall be clean and free of foreign materials
when they are delivered to the site of the work.
q. Transport and Handling
1. General
Coal tar enamel and cement mortar coated steel pipe shall be transported and
handwd tilS .~pecifien her8in. Any pipe section that becomes dam[lged~~rs· ·a resalt of·:· :
improper transporting, handling or stockpiling shall be repaired to the satisfaction of
the Engineer. Where damaged areas are extensive or where, in the Engineer's
opinion, field repairs are not practicable, the Engineer may order the Contractor to
remove the damaged pipe section from the site of the work and replace it with a new
section.
2. Coal Tar Enamel Coated Steel Pipe
Transporting and handling of enamel coated pipe shall conform with the requirements
of AWWA Standard C-203. After enamel coated pipe f1as been delivered trench side,
any section of pipe which, in the Engineer's opinion, indicates possible coating
f!nmage, shall be spark-tested by the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer, at
the expense of the Contractor. Any damaged areas in the enamel coating shall !)e
·~iald-repaired using hot coal tar enamel or the section of pipe rcplilced as specified
<1bove.
3. Cement Mortar Coated Steel Pipe
Pif1:3 fihllll be lifted ;)y m~C'~'1., o<" p::~dds,~ f-"J;\ Wt or !.1y !:c'it ~·iino;. fn :3ucl1 u mJiH·:;r
"~ to 11-:lnimiLe i)f;,H.Hn!) c! i;·.;-; p:;'3 ~Ntlc;; ~!lJ ;1r-:>veJ: I'I:mwqc~ \o ·[tr:) ('o'J<llinq. '.!Vil <.:~:~
i..:ainu 'lr<.msport8d, p1~e st1all i)~ suppurtc;u Hl a mam rDr ·111ai will p1everrt distortion or
10· 7
SECTION V- PART A
10- PIPING
damage to the lining or coating. Wilen not being handled, pipe shall be stockpiled on
timber cradles or properly prepared ground with all rock eliminated. Damaged pipe
shall be repaired or replaced as specified above.
r. Installation of Piping
1. General
Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall furnish and Install all pipes, specials,
fittings, closure pieces, valves. supports, bolts. nuts, gaskets, jointing materials, and
all ott:&r appurtenances as shown and as required to provide a complete and
wori<able installation. Where pipe support details are shown. the supports shall
conform therewith and shall be placed as indicated; provided, that the support for all
exposed piping shall be complete and adequate regardless of whether or not
supporting devices are specifically shown. Concrete thrust blocks, anchor blocks, or
welded joints shall be provided at all junctions, changes in direction exceeding 11-1/2
degrees or where otherwise shown. At all times when the wori< of installing pipe is
not in progress, all openings into the pipe and the ends of the pipe in trenches or
structures shall be kept tightly closed to prevent entrance of animals and foreign
materials. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent the pipe
from floating due to water entering the trench from any source, shall assume full
responsibility for any damage due to this cause. and shall at his own expense restore
and replace the pipe to its specified condition and grade if it is displaced -due to
floating. The Contractor shall maintain the inside of the pipe free from foreign
materials and In a clean and sanitary condition until its acceptance by the Owner.
2. Laying
Trenches shall be in a reasonably dry condition when the pipe is laid. Necessary
facilities including slings shall be provided for lowering and properly placing the pipe
section in the trench without damage. The pipe sections shall be laid to the line and
grade when shown and they shall be closely jointed to form a smooth flow line.
Immediately before placing each section of pipe in final position for jointing, the
bedding for the pipe shall be checked for firmness and uniformity of surface.
3. Rubber and Gasket Joints
The rubber gasket joints shall be made by properly lubricating the rubber gasket with
a suitable vegetable compound soap before it is placed in the groove at the spigot
end . The gasket shall be stretched over the spigot of t~e pipe and carefully seated in
the groove, with care taken to equalize the stress in the gasket around the
circumference of the joint. The gasket shall not be twisted, rolled, cut, crimped, or
otl1erwise injured or forced out of position during the closure of the joint. A "feeler"
gage shall be used to check the position of the rubber gasket after tile joint has been
telescoped.
4. Field-Welded Joints
Field welding of pipe joints st1a11 conform V!illl the requirements of the "~,1/'JWA
Standards for Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe .Joints" (AINWA G206). Prior tJ
welding, the joint shall be made np in <Jccorc!ance witll Clau.se {r) (:)) and {1) {5/
herein. Such joints shnli be inspeGted and approved by t~1e Engineer before any
protective coating is placed around the outside of the joint.
.,,. ')
)
SECTION V- PART A
10- PIPING
5. Protective Coatings
With pipe smaller than 450 mm (18 in.) in diameter before the spigot is inserted into
the bell, the bell shall be daubed with mortar containing one (1) part cement to three
(3) parts sand. The spigot end then shall be forced to the bottom of the bell and
excess mortar on the inside of joint shall be swabbed out. With pipe 450 mm (18 in.)
in diameter and larger, joints shall be pointed on the inside with mortar as specified
for field joints in AWWA Standard C205 after the backfill has been placed. After
coated pipe sections have been joined, the coating shall be made continuous across
the joints, forming a coating equivalent to the factory-applied coating of adjacent pipe
sections. Coating and spark testing of coal tar er1amel field joints shall be as
specified in AWWA Standard C203 and shall be performed at the expense of the
Contractor. The use of coal tar tape to provide the required protection will not be
permitted.
After the pipe sections on cement mortar coated pipe have been joined, but before
backfilling has been completed, the outside annular space between pipe sections
shall be completely filled with grout. The grout shall be poured in such a manner that
all exposed portions of metal joints shall be completely protected with cement mortar.
Grout shall consist of one (1) part cement to three (3) parts sand, by weight, and shall
be sufficiently fluid to permit it to be poured into the joint space. Exterior field joints
shall be coated with cement mortar, retained by suitable forms, so as to bridge the
joint.
The mortar shall be compacted within the form to produce dense coating without
voids. The joint coating shall be kept moist until the backfill is placed.
6. Butt-straps
Where a butt-strap is used, both the interior and exterior surfaces of the butt-strap
shall be given a coating equivalent to the factory-applied coating of the adjoining pipe
sections. Mortar coating shall be reinforced with wire mesh. The mortar lining shall
be reinforced witl1 wire mesh where the exposed length of the butt-strap, as
measured between the ends of the connected pipe section, exceeds 1oo mm (4-in.).
Butt-straps used as closure pieces shall be provided with hand holes for repair of the
lining. as~~h9wn in Standard Drawing CD-106R. · ···'""; ' ..._,_ ..~ ·~ ·· ·
. .
10.3 SMALL STEEL PIPE
Unless otherwise shown, galvanized steer pipe in sizes less than 100 mm (4 in.) in
diameter and smaller shall conform with the requirements of the "Specifications for Black
and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe for Ordinary
Uses" (ASTM A-120) and shall be Schedule 40. G<llvanized steel pipe shall not be
cement mortar-lined unless otherwise shown. Fittings for galvanized steel pipe shall be of
galvanized malleable iron. Galvanized and black steel pipe shall not be used for buried
service, except where shown on the Drawings.
Galvanized steel pipe for service connections s11all be allowed only as specifically shown
on the Drawings. The pipe shall be wrapped with a 500 micron thick PVC t~pe to a total
thickness of 1000 microns, with half width overlapping. PVC tape shall be of a type
~1pprovcd by tf1c Engineer and shall be applierJ in ~-'lC.:C'fdan e~ wi!IJ tlw manufacturer's
recommendations.
SECTION V- PART A
10- PIPING
10.4 CAST IRON WATER PIPE
a. Materials
Bell and spigot cast iron pipe shall conform with the requirements of the following:
1. "Cast Iron Pipe Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds for Water or Other Liquids" (AWWA
C-1 06) or "Cast Iron Pipe Centrifugally Cast in Sand-Lined Molds for Water or other
Liquids" (AWWA C-108), shall be Class 100 or Class 150 where shown on the
Drawings and as indicated in the Bid Schedule; or
2: "ISO Recommendation R-13; Cast Iron Pipes, Special Castings and Cast Iron Parts
for Pressure Main Lines." The pipe shall be Class LA; however, the hydrostatic test
pressure shall be 2.45 MPa (355 psi) for all sizes.
b. Flanges
Standard flanged cast iron pipe frttings shall conform with the requi rements of the
"American Standard for Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings" (ANSI 816.1),
Class 125.
c. Short Body Cast Iron Fittings
Short body cast iron fittings shall conform wilh the requirements of the "American
Standard for Cast-Iron and Ductile Iron Fittings, 2 in. through 48 in., for Water and Ot her
Liquids" (AWWA C-110) or "Cast Iron Pipes, Special Castings and Cast Iron Parts fo r
Pressure Main Lines," ISO R13. Fittings shall have a wall thickness of not less than that
of the pipe with which they are used and the ends shall have inside diamete rs suitable for
making a watertight joint with the cast iron pipe furnished .
d. Cast Iron Pipe Joints
Cast iron pipe shall be furnished with bell and spigot ends with rubber "push-on" joints,
flanged joints, or flex ible couplings as shown. At the option of the Contractor, a
mechanical joint may be substituted on all cast iron pipe and fittings for which a bell and
spigotjoint i~ called for. The mechanical joint shall CQnform with the- requireme nts of the
"American Standard for Rubber Gasket Joints for Cast-Iron and Ductile Iron Pressure
Pipe and Fittings" (AWWA C-111), Class 150, except that inside diameters shall be
suitable for making watertight joint with the cast iron pipe furnished.
e. Cement Mortar Lining
Cast iron pipe and fitting shall be lined with cement mortar in accordance with the
requirements of the "American Standard for Cement-Mortar Lining for Cast-Iron Pipe and
Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water'' (AWWA C-1 04).
f. Installation
Cast iron pipe and filling shall be installed in accordance with thf. requirements of the
"Standard for Installation of Cast-Iron Water Mains" (AifVWA C-600).
10.5 Cl\ST IRON SOIL PIPE
Cm>l iron soil pipe and fillings sh~ll be bE>II and spigot pipe co:1forming wi!h :11e
1~·quirom ents fo,. Gxlra- il c~a'!Y soil pipe <! lid fi:tin v> of ti1::: ":3pecincatirms for Cast I ron Goi!
r-:;Js :1nd Fi:_tings" (1\NSl !\ ·i : 2. 5.1) . Th0 pipe :; i ·~ ,-; 11 bo ·:':)a l-·rar pi! ell coat.:.d.
10-10
SECTION V - PART A
10 ~PIPING
10.6 ASBESTOS-CEMENT WATER PIPE {NOT APPLICABLE)
a. Materials
Asbestos-cement pipe shall conform with the latest edition of the following specification:
1. International Organization for Standardization (ISO), recommendation R160

"Asbestos Cement Pressure Pipes," subject to the following additional requirements:
i. Classification : Series II, Class 2.45 MPa
ii. Internal Hydraulic Pressure Test: A test pressure of 2.45 MPa (355 psi) shall be
applied to each length of pipe. The test shall be performed in accordance with
ISO 160, Clause 2.6.1 except that the application and maintenance of the test
pressure may be in accordance with the requirements of AVWVA C-400, Clause
5.2 .2.1, at the manufacturer's option.
iii. Longitudinal Bending Test: A longitudinal bending test shall be performed on

each length of pipe in sizes up to and including 200 mm (8 in.) diameter when the
length exceeds 2.9 m (9.5 ft.) . The test shall be performed in accordance with
the requirements of AWWA C-400 Clause 5 .2.3 , Class 100.
iv. Transverse Crushing Test: A transverse crushing test shall be performed as

specified in ISO R160, Clause 2.6.3. The number of tests shall be as specified in
ISO R160 Clause 4.2.3.
v. Acceptance Tests: The consignment shall be delivered with acceptance tests, as

specified in ISO R160 Clause 4, subject to the additional requirements included
herein.
vi. Manufacturer's Certificate: The manufacturer shall supply the Owner with a
certificate showing that the pipe has been tested in accordance with , and satisfies
the requirements of, the specifications as modified herein.
vii. Pipe Joints: The tolerance on dimensions of. pipe and couplings, as well as the
dJ(n.~-D~iQD? an,d .spe(!ifications of rubber jointing rings, .shall be such that an
internal hydraulic pressure of 2.45 MPa (355 psi) can be maintained wit hout
leakage when the pipes are set at the maximum angular deviation ind icated by
the manufacturer of the pipe.
2. Fittings shall be of cast iron conforming in general with the requirements of the
"American Standard for Cast-Iron and Ductile-I ron Fittings, 2 in. ttuough 48 in., for
Water and Other Liquids" (AWWA C-11 0) or "Cast Iron Pipes, Special Castings and
Cast Iron Parts for Pressure Main Lines, ISO R13; provided, however, that the ends
s hall be designed for rubber rings joints. Fittings shall be cement-mortar lined and
sllall have inside diameters suitable for making a watertight joint with the asbestos
cement pipe furnished .
3. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings show ing materials and met110d of joining
the pipe to cast iron fillings and valves to the Engineer for approval prior to placing an
order for the materials in accordance with Clause 7.02.
b. Tr<lnsportation of asbestos cement pipes from thP. m.::lnufa c.turing plant to, nml proper
~:!-_;:;kpiJi ng in, the co;;twUor's sio1age yard z,t the jr.~b site shall bt~ tl1e respur.!',i\>ilily of tlw
;·.,anufacturer. EverJ ~i lif;i':l en t , upon rl, ~h-,iling {he job site shi-ll! b:~ Sl.•h_;ectcd to om!
~-: ~lndred percent !,1 i;G~(•J '.fi;_'<i~ i insp2.c.t:on. ;f 1<?-SS tl1 ~·ii1 tw6 pefcer,l (;?.•/J) Oi' the r.oip8~:
:-i1ippcJ are found wi:;i , 1~iul0 d~ilo-.<.,g8, a r&pr;:;sentatJVe sample equivalenl w f1ve IJ8rcenl
1C- 11
SECTION V- PART A
10- PIPING
(5%) of the lot, selected at random, shall be subjected to hydrostatic test at 1.0 MPa
(150 psi), the pressure maintained for thirty (30) seconds. If twenty percent (20%) or
more of the five percent (5%) samples fail, the whole lot shall be subjected to hydro test.
In the visual inspection, if two percent (2%) or more of the lot shipped exhibit visible
damage, the whole lot shall be subjected to hydrostatic test in the same manner as
described above.
Only those which will pass this job site hydro test, when required under the foregoing
specification, shall be accepted by the Contractor and later installed in the project.
Testing sha~l be performed by the manufacturer at no cost to the Owner.
c. Installations
1. General
Asbestos-cement pipe shall be installed in accordance with the "Standard for

Installation of Asbestos-Cement Water Pipe" (AWWA C-603), except that the pipe
shall not be laid using earth mounds.
2. Inspection
Prior to installation, all asbestos-cement pipe and couplings and all rubber rings shall
be inspected for damage and defects in materials and workmanship. All damaged or
defective materials shall be rejected and removed from the job site.
3. Joining to Cast Iron
Joints between asbestos-cement pipe and cast-iron valves and fittings shall be
sealed with a rubber ring gasket After assembling the joint, the position of the rubber
ring gaskets shall be located on an even distance from the face of the valve or fitting,
for the full circumference of the pipe.
10.7 UPVC (POLYVINYL CHLORIDE} PIPE
This standard specifies t~.e.J.~quir.ements for unplasticized polyvinyl chloride -(uPVC)·-pipes -with'
1 nominal outside diameter of 63 mm to 500 mm intended for the conveyance of potable water
under pressure and of temperatures up to 45°C for use below ground.
The pipe shall conform with the requirements of the Philippine Natio.nal Standard Specification for
Unplasticized Polyvinyl Chloride (uPVC) Pipes for Potable Water Supply (PNS 65:1993) except
as otherwise specified herein.
a. References
The titles of the standards publications referred to in this standard are listed in pages 1 0-
19 and 10-20.
h. Definitions
For the purpose oi ll1is ~;tandard. H1c following <lefinitions ~hall apply:
1. nominal rressure (PI'I) - The? norm~l m aximum internal pr2%ure ti18t ~.tw ;·.fl:.? ~=::~n
~ush'l i n in c,o~~~inc..us l!!k ·, ll!:.. i:) expru.:>.st~Cl in rneg ap<'l~ca ls (MP;~) :11 .~J' c.
~. d~.sion nlcr:-dr.-:urn on ·:ilc i?J'lH

i.·i,·h··-~·:- :"';. ~:h·:) J~:..- ~f~1r ,.l~)ltnt~t~cl n··~lxi~n~rn l~r· .- q c !· trr.:~s
o-r tile pipe niO(IlJ ~; 1;,; ·, , :.n.:,v;::l :.;c i:lxis due to internal pressure 'to wh1ci1 ti1e pipe can be
SECTION V- PART A
10- PIPING
subjected continuously without failure. This is used in calculating the wall thickness
of the pipe. For the purpose of this standard, the maximum induced stress is 8.5
MPa at 28°C.
3. pipe series (s) - It is used in classifying the pipe, which is the ratio of the design
maximum induced stress to the nominal pressure of the pipe. The pipe series
number may be rounded off to the nearest whole number.
4. nominal dimensions - Nominal dimensions and values indicated herein are minimum
limits as defined in this standard .
5. unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (uPVC) pipe - A pipe produced basically from an

extrusion grade PVC material of high molecular weight which does not contain any
plasticizer.
6. rework material - PVC plastics from a processor's own production that has been
reground, pelletized or solvated after having been previously processed.
c. Classification
Pipes shall be classified in accordance with the pipe series and/or the nominal pressure
as follows:
1. Series 10 (PN 0.86 MPa)

In designing the maximum nominal pressure of the uPVC pipe under ambient
temperatures other than 28°C, Table 1 - Maximum Induced Stress for Other
Temperatures may be utilized in arriving at the maximum induced stress to be used. The
said table may also be used in derating the nominal pressures of the pipe specified in this
standard.
Table 1
Maximum Induced stress for Other Temperatures
Coefficient to be Applied to
Water Temperature, t, oc the Maximum Induced Stress
0 < t < 25 1
25 < t < 35 0.8
35 < t < 45 0.63
d. Requirements
1. Materials
The material from which the pipes ari} :·nade shall consist substantially of
polyvinyl chloride that conforms with PNS 291, to which may be added only those
AclditivGs neces'3ary to facilitate the m<~nufa~ture of qlJality pipes of ooocl surf,:;t;e
finish Clnd sound physical, (f!B•::h8nical ~nd c.l?t:mical pr0rer·ue~..
SECTION V- PART A
10- PIPING
ii. None of the additives shall be used separately or together in quantities sufficient
to constitute a toxic, organoleptic or microbial growth hazard or to impair the
fabrication or welding properties of the product, or to impair the chemical,
mechanical and physical properties (particularly long-term hydrostatic and impact
strength) as defined in this standard.
iii. The use of the manufacturer's own clean reworl<. material produced during the
manufacture and production testing of products conforming with this standard is
permissible. No other reworl<. material shall be used.
2. Dimensions
i. Standard Configurations - Shown in Figure 1 are the standard configurations of

uPVC pipes with elastomeric sealing ring socket ends (sizes 63 mm to 500 mm)
n. Dimension and Tolerances - The outside diameters, socket depths, socket

diameters, minimum wall thicknesses, effective lengths of the different pipe
series/nominal pressures and the tolerances are indicated in Table 2.
iii. Length- Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, the length of the pipe shall
be taken to mean the effective length, Le, as shown in Figure 1. The minimum
effective lengths are indicated in Table 2. A tolerance of +20 mm is allowable.
3. Physical Characteristics
i. Appearance - The pipe shall be homogeneous throughout and free from cracks,
holes, encrustations and other foreign Inclusions. Excessive die lines and/or
stress marks (particularly in the socket and bell groove) as well as discernible
material marbling are not allowed . The ends of the pipe shall be cleanly cut and
square to the axis of the pipe.
ii. Color - The color of the pipe shall be blue nearest to RAL 5012 and shall be
uniform throughout the entire surface of the pipe.
iii. Effect of Materials on Water Quality - When useq under the conditions for which
they are designed, non-metallic materials in contact with, or likely to come into
contact with potable water· shall not constitute a toxic hazard, shall not support
microbial growth and shall not give rise to unpleasant taste or odor, cloudiness or
discoloration of the water.
Concentration of substances, chemicals and biOlogical agents leached from

materials in contact with potable water, and measurements of the relevant
organoleptic/physical parameters shall not exceed the maximum values
recommended by the W011d Health Organization in its publication "Guidelines for
Drinking Water Quality" Vol. 1"Recommendations" (WHO, Geneva, 1984).
If lead or mono/di-alkyl tin compounds are permitted to be used as stabilizers, the

quantities of lead or tin measured as metals shall be determined in accordance
with the method described in PNS 966/ISO 31'14. The permHted levels shall not
exceed the limits specified in Table 3.
·j 8-14
(')
0
z
(/)
~
;o
c:
(")
~
0
z
0
~
-n
:E
)>
~
m
;o
t (/)
l
-<
(/)
~
m
s:
-n
r-rl-
0
;o
OD ~
0
I
·'
~_) ""'0
01 ""'0
z
G)
I
I I (/)
~
)::>
E Le z
0
)>
Lo ;o
0
~
m
(")
:I:
z
Figure 1 - Standard Configuration of Unplasticized Polyvinyl Chloride (uPVC) C'5
(/))>
mr
Pipes with Elastomeric Sealing Ring Socket Ends (63 mm to 500mm) (")(/)
~"
Om
Z(")
<:~
I(")
"~
)::>_
~~
)::>(/)
(')
0
1'~~t0 2- StcJndard Dimens£ons and Tof.erances for Unpla:stic.izad Polyvlny1 Chloride (uPVC) Pipes for Potab~ water z
(F)
-1
::0
c:
(')
~,0 ~5$ S~7 S~& St.1nda<O
:...: (' .r...:.: D-.;..~~·1¢. .:...~-c...:J) ~"!'<101 S~0~(01) -1
~.....! •...:: PN•~~ PN"0t6~ PN"'1:!S Wpa PN•1!0~ E~lh'O
P"r...::-~~-
·~'c.>
~!Qic) O.U.l~f
~ wn........, ~..,.,
~
0
~;..:t.=r ~-F) ~17am ~<ruin
Ntll,..,.
TcJuQnal
Wnlrn..m Tol.¢f1lncl> Tolcta..oo 7ol--- z
·:::-,-;) {(.:":..":~)
~
i~"(ft;·,
·:=~
~ \ll'<'l) ~ Till~~ ~
'Th!O:~U
~
~
l!lfO:~U
~
O'llm) ,..,.,
~ctu:r.u
~ !!, 0
"T1
~ ~ ..0:!. :,0~ i7 ~.e &4., 3..0 -o.so u .05e •U .0.~ 5..4 ..0.7-4 3000'eCOO :E
l>
-1
;;_ ~ -<:•.3 :. ~ -~ ~07 ~-., lVI -4.4 • .oe-4 !.2 40.n 6.Z ~e:z 7.8 00,93 eooo m
-;w ~ , .:, ...(;.4 .,... i1-4 1,, .;~ 111.! s~ •.073 0 4().1.3 75 OO.t6 !1.5 <1.1!> ~
::0
(F)
-<
,.u, 1M ...:l!S :;2.0 13.1 162.0 152.6 7.7 •t:RT • .2 +1.12 11.0 •130 13 s ..., _~
&lCIO
(F)
-1
m
:cu 'l«.• .0.7 :,2..7 164 1XT.1 221...4 ~0~ •1..28 1U •U9 U v4 • 1.14 194 •2.14 eooo 3::
"T1
~ z.j .o..g ;:.3.0 1'T:S 211:1.0 28:l.ll 1U •LM 111..0 •1 BO 112 .Z.12 7-4.1 ~81 8000 0
::0
~ 3~ !. •1.0 :.3.1 1t6 3t U 311..& 1'-2 ..~.72 1t.O ~ 21.& +2..3& 27.1 ~ eooo I
!;!.(, ~
...,_, ~.u 207 ~..) sec.£ 17.1 ....,_., :21U ~23 2<4.3 ~.,.,
106 ~.2& II(I(X)
~
.!«. 400 ., ~ :.-4.1 no

~·
406.0 ,. s ~1) :n.o ~ ... 27--4 ~ ... - - ~
0
I
..... "'-~·:. ~ ~ .. :.~A 2:l6 :r.l.7 ~7 .r:..n 30.1 ~2:1 . 800QIOOO 1J

~· ~·
lS-.1
(")
:.II.C :so &07.6 ..,oe . 1J
··~ ~·
3«1 $00 IIC60 2•U :lt:! ~
z
G'>
NOirES:
I (F)
1. ~Jrr.;~;:.~n i rd\Jo::>:!d s.tta·:;s use<! mcalcUating mirimum wall thickness is. 8.5 Mpa at 28"'C. Tns isd9ived m:m 10 Mpe i:nd.Joed stress at -1
l>
2•:tC. derated by 0 ..85 at 28CC. , • z
0
l>
::0
:2. For:nu.la I!Js.eci mcab.Jiating wa! t:h~ss is: 0
-1
m
(')
:I:
=~ z
2S+ P
n
(F)l>
,, mr-
(')(F)
·,.C,Q'e : t ::: is t~e mini:n>Jm wa! thdcrless. mrn ~"'0
Om
OD ~ :s m-e oU!Sd-c diam~~ of pipe, mm zn
p <'Ti
= ls tha nominal woMg pressure. Mpa I(;
s = ~ t~ indwed s.tress, Mpa -ol>
l>~
::oo
-lz
l>cn
SECTION V- PART A
10- PIPING
Table 3- Maximum Levels of Toxic Substances
Extraction Total Concentration

Toxic Substances 1st 3rd of 3 Extracts .
Lead, mg/L 1.00 0.05
Di-alkyl Tin, C4
and other higher
monologues measured
as tin, mg/L 0.02
Cadmium, mg/L 0.01
Mercury, mg/L 0.001
iv. Physical Properties- The pipe shall conform with the physical properties specified
in Table 4.
Table 4- Physical Properties
Property Test Method
Vicat Softening Temperature,

oc, minimum 76 PNS 952/ISO 2507
Longitudinal Reversion, %, max. 5 PNS 951/ISO 2505
Water Absorption, g/m2 , max. 40 PNS 953/ISO 2508
v. Resistance to Acetone - The pipe shall not show signs of delamination or

disintegration when immersed in acetone. Flattening and/or swelling of the pipe
shall not be deemed to constitute failure when tested in accordance with PNS
97i\/IS0...34 72.
vi. Resistance to Sulfuric Acid - The mass of the specimen shall not increase by
more than 0.316 g nor decrease by more than 0.013 g when tested in accordance
with PNS 979/ISO 3473. The effect of the acid on the surface appearance of the
specimen (roughening, bleaching or blackening) shall be ignored.
4. Mechanical Properties
The pipe shall confonm with the applied pressure for the hydrostatic pressure tests
indicated in Table 5 of PNS 65:1993 when tested in accordance with PNS 509/ISO
1167.
Tabla 5 - Applied Pressure ·for Pressure Test at 260
Unit: fv1Pa
Series 10 8 7 5
nurst Pre.ssur~ '· ~') 4.F,d :J.-1.9 "1.1 0

~;hort Term PrE~S::Jl.!:~ :: . )(! 4 qo f"; _:·o 6.70
Lor.o Tr~rm P1 s;,~v' ~ ; /0 :J.:\0 :1.:J0 4.65
SECTION V- PART A
10- PIPING
For specific calculation, the following formula for deriving the applied pressure may
be used:
2 x S x tmin·
p =
where:
p is the applied pressure, MPa

S is the design stress at 28°C, MPa
lmin· is the minimum wall thickness, ;nm
Dm is the maximum mean outside diameter, mm
Hydrostatic Pressure Test Requirement
i. Burst Pressure - The pipe shall withstand the applied pressure for at least 60
seconds without failure. The value for the induced stress used in calculating
pressure requirement is 37.5 MPa at 28°C.
ii. Short Term Pressure - The pipe shall withstand the applied pressure for at least
one hour without failure. The value for the induced stress used in calculating
iii. Long Term Pressure - The pipe shall withstand the applied pressure for at least
1000 hours without failure. The value for the induced stress used in calculating
iv. Resistance to External Blows - The true impact rate of the batch at 28°C shall not
exceed 10% when tested in accordance with PNS 967/ISO 3127.
NOTE - The true impact rate is the total number of broken test pieces divided by
the total number of blows, expressed as percentage as if the whole batch had
been tested. In practice, test pieces are drawn at random from the batch and
only estimate of the true impact rates are obtained.
v. Flattening - The pipe shall not show evidence of splitting, cracking ·and breaking
when flattened to a minimum of 40% of its outside diameter when tested in
accordance with PNS 800/ASTM 02241 .
5. Joints
Elastomeric sealing ring type joints shall be used for sizes 63 mm up to 500 mm. The
elastomeric sealing ring shall conform with PNS 1 008/ISO 4633.
e. Sampling and Testing
1. At least one piece or set (depending on the quantities specified by the test method) of
sample/s per production batch (one produr~tion run or one production shift, whichever
is shorter) shall be taken at random for testing in accordance with tile methods and
procedures specified in this standard.
2. The pipes shall be tested in accordance with the methods prescribed in litis standard.
3. Tl1e frequency of samr:.lino sr;d :es:irg v f pi!)es ;s shown in T.::lblc ~i.
r• l) _,l'"o
I,.· ,.~
SECTION V- PART A
10- PIPING
f. Marking
The pipe shall be clear1y marked with the following information spaced at intervals of not
more than one metre:
1. Name of Product
2. Nominal outside diameter, mm
3. Series and/or Nominal pressure, MPa
4. Manufacturer's name and/or its recognized trademark
5. The words "Made in PHL" or "Made in the Phil."
6. The words "For Potable Water"
Table 6 -Sampling and Testing Schedule for

Assessment of Compliance
Clause Requirements Minimum Frequency
General Requirements
10.7d2(b) Diameter and Wall Thickness Hourly

10.7d2(c) Length Every 8 hours
10.7d3(a) Appearance Every pipe
Type Test
10.7d1 Material Once every 6 months

or every change of
formulation
10.7d3(c) Effect of Materials on
Water Quality -do-
10.7d3(d) Vicat Softening -do-
10.7d3(d) Water Absorption -do-
10.7d3(d) Resistance to Sulfuric Acid - do-
10. 7d4(a)(3) Long Term Pressure -do-
10.7d5 Joints -do-
Quality Control Test
10. 7d3(d) Longitudinal Reversion Every 8 hours

10.7d3(e) Resistance to Acetone -do-
1o. 7d4(a)(1) Burst Pressure - do-
10.7d4(a)(2) Short Term Pressure Every 24 hours
10.7d4(b) Resistance to External Blows Every 8 hours
10.7d4(c) Flattening -do -
REr-ERENCES
The following stanclards through reference in the text form part of lhis national standard.
/\ t t11a tirne of publication of tl1is PNS, the editions rndicated were valiu.
PNS 291 :1991 , Plastic-P olyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Resins - Specific~tion
! 'i,IS ~i ogm::,o 1 1o'/. i 0 7 ~, !:J!asti..:: pipes for 1 1~ i r.s:):.~x: or :tuiu.; - Det8rmin .:.iion of tiH:l
t\)!:ik:lunce to i ntt·ln ~~ pr2s.surt!
SECTION V- PART A
10 ~PIPING
PNS 800/ASTM D 2241 - 1980, Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)
Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR Series)
PNS 951 /ISO 2505-1981, Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipes - Longitudinal
reversion -Test methods and specification
PNS 95211SO 2507-1982, Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipes and fittings- Vicat
softening temperature - Test methods and specification
PNS 953/ISO 2508-1981, Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipes- Water absorption
- Determination and specification
PNS 966/tSO 3114-1977, Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipes for potable water
supply - Extractability of lead and tin- Test method
PNS 967/ISO 3127-1980, Unplaslicized polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipes for the transport of
fluids - Determination and specification of resistance to external blows
PNS 978/JSO 3472-1975, Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipes- Specification and
determination of resistance to acetone
PNS 979/ISO 3473-1977, Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipes - Effect of

sulphuric acid - Requirement and test method
PNS 1008/ISO 4633-1983, Rubber seals - Joint rings for water supply, drainage and
sewerage pipelines- Specification for materials
PNS 1027/ISO 6992~1986, Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipes for drinking water
supply~
Extractability of cadmium and mercury occurring as impurities
ABBREVIATIONS
ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials

ISO - International Organization for standardization
PNS - Philippine National Standard
10.8 PE (POLYETHYLENE) PLASTIC PIPE
a. Materials
1. General - The pipes shall be manufactured from polyethylene containing only those
antioxidants, UV stabilizers and pigments necessary for the manufacture of pipes
conforming to this specification and for its end use, including weldability when it is
possible. The pipes for drinking water shall be either black or blue or black with blue
stripes. For black pipes, the carbon black content in the compound shall be (2.25±.
0.25)% by mass, when measured in accordance with ISO 6964. The use of the color
blue or black with blue stripes shall be specified in accordance with national
requirements. The material for the stripes shall be of the same type of resin as used
in the base compound for the pipe .
.?. Dispersion of Pigments in Compound'> - When determined in Clccordance vJith ISO

1'1't20, the dispersion of the carbon black shall be equal to or less than grade 3.
When determined in accordance with ISO 13949, the dispersion of tJ!ue piQmcnts
2i1<11l be equal to or less th::.:n g ~aje 3.
Ti:0rm::t1 StniJility- 1Nhen detem1ined i11 .qr.r r>rclcmc:e v;i~il 1~; 0/TR 10\137, the induction
L! 110 fl)r materials Pf. 63, PE 30, and PE 'i Ou JilJII be:: eit11er <~t least 20 minutes when
SECTION V- PART A
10- PIPING
tested at 200°C or an equivalent period when tested at 21 ooc, provided the

equivalence is supported by a clear correlation between results obtained at 200°C or
21 0°C, respectively. In cases of dispute, the test temperature shall be 200°C.
4. Reworked material - Clean rewori<ed material generated from a manufacturer's own

production of pipe in accordance with this specification may be used if it is derived
from the same resin as used for the relevant production.
b. Effect on watet quality - When used under conditions for which they are designed,
materials in contact with or likely to come into contact with drinking water shall not
constitute a toxic hazard, shall not support microbial growth and shall not give rise to
unpleasant taste or odor, cloudiness or discoloration of the water.
The concentrations of substances, chemicals and biological agents leached from

materials in contact with drinking water, and measurements of the relevant organoleptic
physical parameters, shall not exceed the maximum values recommended by the Worid
Health Organization in its publication Guidelines for Drinking Water Quality, Volume I
Recommendations, or as required by the ECC Council Directive of July 1980 on the
quality of water intended for human consumption, whichever is the more stringent in each
case. Conformance to this provision shall be certified by a testing institute accredited by
the Bureau of Product Standards.
c. Designation and classification - The compound shall be designated by the material

type (e.g. PE 80) conforming to the applicable level of minimum required strength (MRS)
specified as follows:
Designation of MRS. at 50 yrs and Maximum allowable hydrostatic

Material 20°C, Mpa design stress os, Mpa
PE 100 10 8
PE 80 8 6.3
PE 63 6.3 5
when the lower confidence limit oLcL for the compound is determined in accordance with
ISOrfR 9080 and this ow_ is classified in accordance with ISO 12162 to obtain the MRS.
d. Melt flow rate and density - When measured In accordance with ISO 1133, the. melt
flow rate shall conform to the following conditions:
1. The melt flow rate of the compound shall not deviate by more than :t 30% from the
value specified by the manufacturer.
2. The change in MFR caused by processing, i.e. the difference between the measured
value for material from the pipe and the measured value for the compound, shall not
be more than 25%.
e. Geometrical Chatactetistics
1. The dimensions of pipes shall b2 met~sured in accordance with ISO 3126.
2. ~Jomin al outsirle (li nrnet~rs shnll r.onfonn to ISO 16·1-1. The :.' elected outside
diameters and t/1c w<JII U1ickness in accordance with the sele~,;ted nominal pressures
are given <'Is follows:
SECTION V- PART A
10- PIPING
For polyethylene pipes PE 100 (PE 3408) with desian stress a§ of 8 Mpa
Nominal outside Nominal Wall Thickness, en. mm

Diameter dn, mm S8/SDR 17 I PN1 0 S6.3/SDR 13.6 S5/SDR11/ PN 16
/PN12.5
20 - - 2.3
25 - - 2.3
32 2.3 2.4 3.0
50 3.0 3.7 4.6
63 3.7 4.7 5.8
75 4.5 :>.6 6.8
90 5.4 6.7 8.2
·-
110 6.6 8.1 10.0
160 9.5 11.8 14.6
200 11.9 14.7 18.2
225 13.4 16.6 20.5
280 16.6 20.6 25.4
315 18.7 23.2 28.6
355 21.1 26.1 32.2
400 23.7 29.4 36.3
450 26.7 33.1 40.9
For polyethylene pipes PE 80 {PE 2406) with design stress a~ of 6.3 Mpa
Nominal Nominal Wall Thickness, en,mm

outside
S10/SDR 21 S8/SDR 17 S6.3/ SDR SS/SDR 11 S4/SDR 9
Diameter d 0 ,
PN6 PN 8 13.6/ PN 10 PN 12.5 PN 16
Mm
20 - - -- - 2.3
25 - - 2.3 2.8
32 - 2.3 2.4 3.0 3.6
50 2.4 3.0 3.7 4.6 5.6
63 3.0 3.8 4.7 l 5.8 7.1
75 .. - .. - 3.6 4.5 5.6 .. 6.8 8.4
90 4.3 5.4 6.7 8.2 10.1
110 5.3 6.6 8.1 10.0 12.3
160 7.7 9.5 11.8 14.6 17.9
200 9.6 11 .9 14.7 18.2 22.4
225 10.8 13.4 16.6 20.5 25.2
280 13.4 16.6 20.6 25.4 31 .3
315 23.2
--
15.0 13.7 28.6 35.2
355 16.9 21.1 I 26.1 32.2 39.7 ..__
400 19.1 23.7 29.4 36.3 44.7
450 21 .5 26.7 33.1 40.9 50.3
SECTION V- PART A
10- PIPING
For polyethylene pipes PE 63 with design stress o9 of 5 Mpa

Nominal Wall Thickness, e0 ,mm
Nominal S16 S12.5 S8.3 S8 S6.3 S5 S4 S3.2
outside SDR SDR SDR SDR SDR SDR SDR9 SDR 7.4
Diameter 33 26 17.6 17 13.6 11 PN 12.5 PN 16
dn. mm PN PN 4 PN 6 PN PN 8 PN10
3.2 6.3
20 - - - - 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.8
25 - - 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 ?..8 3.5
32 - - 2.3 2.3 2.4 2.!) 3.6 4.4
50 - 2.3 2.9 3.0 3.7 4.6 5.6 6.9
63 2.3 2.5 3.6 3.8 4.7 5.8 7.1 8.6
75 2.3 2.9 4.3 4.5 5.6 6.8 8.4 10.3
90 2.8 3.5 5.1 5.4 6.7 8.2 10.1 12.3
110 3.4 4.2 6.3 6.6 8.1 10.0 12.3 15.1
160 4.9 6.2 9.1 9.5 11.8 14.6 17.9 21.9
200 6.2 7.7 11.4 11.9 14.7 18.2 22.4 27.4
225 6.9 8.6 12.8 13.4 16.6 20.5 25.2 30.8
280 8.6 10.7 15.9 16.6 20.6 25.4 31.3 38.3
315 9.7 12.1 17.9 18.7 23.2 28.6 35.2 43.1
355 10.9 13.6 20.1 21 .1 26.1 32.2 39.7 48.5
400 12.3 15.3 22.7 23.7 29.4 36.3 44.7 54.7
450 13.8 17.2 25.5 26.7 33.1 40.9 50.3 61 .5
3. The tolerances on the outside diameters shall be in accordance with ISO 11922-1,
Grade A for normal tolerance (NT) pipes, and Grade B for close tolerance (CT) pipes.
4. Nominal wall thickness en shall be in accordance with ISO 4065. The tolerance on
the minimum wall thicknesses (ey, min) perrni1ted at any point shall conform to ISO
11922-1, i.e. Grade T for ey, min~16 mm and Grade U for ey, mln?:16mm.
5. The ovality of pipes at the manufacturer after extrusion but prior to coiling shall
conform to ISO 11922-1, specifically Grade N for PE 63,- PE 80, and PE 100.
6. The minimum diameter of a drum of coiled pipe shall be 18 x dn and in any case such
that kinking of the pipe is prevented.
7. The length of straight pipes and coils shall not be less than that agreed between the
supplier and user.
f. Mechanical Properties
1. Hydrostatic Strength - When tested in accordance with ISO 1167, the pipes shall
conform to the following requirements:
1
0nly brittle failures are lakr;n into B·:::r.ounl
10 :?'3
SECTION V- PART A
10 PIPING
R
2. Retest in cases of failure at 80°C- A brittle fracture in less than 165h shall constitute
a failure. If, in the 165h test, a test piece fails in a ductile mode in less than 165h, a
retest shall be perfonned at a lower stress. The new stress, and the new minimum
failure time, shall be selected from the line through the stress/time points given below:
PE 63 PE 80 PE 100
Stress Minimum Stress Minimum Stress Minimum
Mpa failure time, Mpa failure time, Mpa failure time,
h h h
3.5 165 -
4.6 165 5.5 165
3.4 285 4.5 219 5.4 233
3.3 538 4.4 283 5.3 332
3.2 1000 4.3 394 5.2 476
4.2 533 5.1 688
4.1 727 5.0 1000
4.0 1000
g. Physical Characteristics
1. Thennal stability of pipes manufactured from PE 63, PE 80 and PE 100 - When

determined in accordance with ISO!TR 10837, the induction time for test specimens
taken from pipes manufactured from PE 63, PE 80 and PE 100 shall be eitherat least
20 minutes when tested at 200°C, or an equivalent period when tested at 21 0°C,
provided the equivalence is supported by a clear correlation between results obtained
at 200°C or 21 0°C, respectively. The test specimens shall be taken from the inside
surface of the pipe.
2. Longitudinal Reversion - The value of the longitudinal reversion shall not be greater
than 3%, when determined in accordance with ISO 2505-1, method A or B, using
11 0°C±_2°C for PE 63, PE 80 and PE 100, and the test time given in ISO 2505-2 For
pipes with an outside diameter greater then 200 mm, longitudinally cut segments may
be used.
3. Weathering of non-black pipes - To detennine the effects of weathering, pipes shall

be exposed to outdoor conditions in accordance with ~the procedures adopted by the
· Bureau o'f Product Standards and described in ISO 4607. After exposure to a total
solar eneryy of at least 3.5 GJ/M 2 , the pipe shall conform to the following
requirements:
Hydrostatic strength, when detennined with f.1 at 80°C for at least 165h, shall be
the minimum required.
The elongation at break, when determined in accordance with ISO 6259-1 and
ISO 6259-3, shall not be less than 350%;
The induction lime, when measured in accordance with ISO!TR 10837 using a
test specimen taken from the outside surface of the pipe, shall be at least 10
minutes at 200°C.
II. Fusion compatibility - If pipes manufactured from PE 63, PE 80 or PE 100 are to be

jo ined by butt fusion or using electrofusion fittings mixing different pipe rr.nterials, the
joints shall confonn to the requirements specified in f.1 (80°C/165h). Compounds
designated PE 63, PE 80 or PE 1oo having <l melt flow rate MFR (190°C/51<g) within t11c
range 0.2g/1 0 min to 1.3g/1 Om in shall be considered compatible for fusion to each other.
i. l'ilar/(ing --All pipes sh all b8 indelibly marked n! rnexbnum in!.?rJals of 1 m . The n1 a1kinr,~
o:~iwll incli cate at least !he l·ollov;ing inlomi8tion:
I. 'jiJ.-24
SECTION V- PART A
10- PIPING
the manufacturer's name and/or trademark

the Bureau of Product Standards •an check mark
the number of this PNS standard
the dimensions (nominal outside diameter x normal wall thickness)
the outside diameter tolerance (A or B)
the designation of the pipe material (e.g. PE 100, PE 80 , PE 63)
the nominal pressure (PN)
the pipe series (S or SDR)
the production period (date or code)
the number of the national standard
the words "potable water" have to be induded if the pipe is intended for drinking water
other markings that may be specified by the owner
j. Sampling and Testing Schedule - The manufacturer shall adhere to the following
sampling and testing schedule as specified by PNS ISO 4427: 2002 Annex 8 as follows:
Requirements Minimum Frequency per Extruder
·t. Diameter and wall thickness Per roll/hourly

2. Length Every 8 hours
3. Appearance Every 8 hours
Type Test
·t. Material Every 6 months or every change of material

brand /pipe
2. Carbon Blac k -do-
3. Weathering & Thermal Stability -do-
4. Effect of Material on Water Quality -do-
5. Density -do-
8 . Melt Flow Rate -do-
MRS Test
·t 0,000 hr test for master batches Every change of material

Supplier/Brand
Hydrostatic Strength
·t . 100hrtest Every 6 months o r every change in material

brand
2. 165 hr test -do-
3. 1000 hr test -do-
Quality Control Test
Longitudinal Reversion Every 0 fwurs
'I 0.09 PB (POLYBUT'/LENf. PLASTIC) TUBING
a. Materials
i !·::: P-'ctru sion cc · 1pcund sh<lll be Type I!, CIC!ss C, Grad e I polvhtllylene re sin (PB-211 0)
~•:,: tl i"{i i;~r~ ,j l;y /\ .', .·M !)-2581. All com pounds used shall t1e virgin plclSt!C •::xc cp~. 11Hlt Cl8 <
1n
' :; ::;t)!·;< nwkri al .':·c;m ':he manufacture r's vvm pipe prcd iJction ;n<ly i:K ; t<Z:Gd so kn10 as i. h<)
SECTION V- PART A
10- PIPING
original was virgin material. The tubing shall meet the requirements of the National
Sanitation Foundation (NSF} for potable water use as tested by the National Institute of
Science and Technology or other approved testing laboratories and shall be made from
non-toxic, non-lead based plasticizer approved by the Engineer.
b. Dimensions
The Standard Dimension Ratio (SDR) shall be a maximum of 13.5 with average diameter,
wall thickness and tolerance as herein specified, when measured in accordance with
ASTM 0-2122.
The dimensional criteria of all polybutylene water service tubing shall conform with the
following:
Nominal Pipe Size Outside 0.0. Min. Wall Tolerance

Diameter Tolerance Thickness (t)
(mm) (in.) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm}
20 1/2 20 0.3 1.50 0.40
25 3/4 25 0.3 1.90 0.40
32 1 32 0.3 2.40 0.40
50 1-1/2 50 0.5 3.70 0.60
63 2 63 0.6 4.70 0.60
c. Rating
All service tubing shall be rated for use with water at 23.0°C(73.4°F) at mtmmum
hydrostatic design stress of 6.9 MPa (1000 psi) and minimum working pressure of 1.1
MPa (160 psi).
d. Marking
All tubing shall be clear1y marked at intervals of not more than 0.60 m with .nominal size,
type of material (PB211 0), standard Dimension Ratio (SOR 13.5), pressure rating (1.1
MPa or 160 psi), ASTM designation (ASTM 02666), manufacturer's trade name and
production code, and the seal of approval from an accreditM testing laboratory.
e. Testing
Inspection and testing on tubing shall be carried out by the manufacturer in accordance
wllh ASTM D2581 and D2666 as follows:
Sustained pressure test based on fiber stress of 13.1 o MPa at 230C;

Minimum burst pressure test based on fiber stress of 15.17 MPa at 23oc.
f. Installation
The installation and method of end connections of PB plastic tubing shall be as shown on
the Drawings and <lS specified in Clause 10.12. All procedures and tools used shall
comply v1rth the recommendations of the manufacturer and be approved by t!Je Engineer.
SECTION V- PART A
10 ·PIPING
10.10 FIBERGLASS PRESSURE PIPE
a. Scope and Field of Application
This standard covers the specifications for fiberglass pressure pipe with diameters from
nominal size ON 100 (mm) to normal size DN 1 ooo (mm) intended to convey potable
water.
b. Reference Standards
AWWA C950-95 Fiberglass Pressure Pipe
AWWAC111 Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron Pressure Pipes and Fittings
ASTM D3567 Standard Method of Determining Dimensions of Reinforced
Thermosetting Resin Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D2563 Standard Practice for Classifying Visual Defects in Glass-Reinforced
Plastic Laminate Parts
ASTM D2483 Standard Test Method for Identification of Hardness of Rigid Plastic
means of a Barcol lmpressor
ASTM 3517 Standard Specification for "Fiberglass" (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced
Thermo Setting Resin) Pressure Pipe
ASTM D2412 Standard Test Method for Determination of External Loading
Characteristics of Plastic Pipe by Parallel-Plate Loading
ISO 13 Grey Iron Pipes and Grey Iron Parts Pressure Main Lines
ISO 2531 Ductile Iron Pipes, Fittings & Accessories or Pressure Pipelines
c. Classification
Fiberglass pressure pipe shall be classified according to type, grade, and liner as follows:
1. Type as determined by the method of manufacture:
Type I : Filament Wound

Type II : Centrifugally Cast
2. Grade as determined by construction and materials used:
Grade 1: Glass-fiber reinforced epoxy (RTRP epoxy)

Grade 2: Glass-fiber reinforced polyester (RTRP polyester)
Grade 3: Glass-fiber reinforced epoxy mortar (RTMP epoxy)
Grade 4: Glass-fiber reinforced polyester mortar (RPMP polyester)
3. Liner
Liner A: Thermoplastic liner

Liner B: Reinforced Thermoset liner
Liner C: Non-reinforced Thermoset liner
(1. Materials
The resin , reinforcement, coloran~s, filler, and other materials as described under Clause
10.1 Oc: "Classification" when combined as a composite structure, shall produce fiberglass
pipes that r,t1all meet t11e requirements as specified under control test3 and recJrds uf
1\\NWI\ cosn.. ~5.
SECTION V- PART A
10- PIPING
Fiberglass pipes shall have an internal resin rich layer (liner) not exceeding 1 0% by mass
of filler. Thickness of liner shall not be less than 1.0 mm.
Fiberglass pipes shall also have an exterior coating (outer layer for protection against
aggressive soil). It shall be rich of resin suitable (by means of chemical additives or
fillers) to protect the pipes and liner frttings from ultra violet rays.
All materials used in the manufacture of fiberglass pressure pipe products shall not
contain any ingredient that is considered toxic and harmful to humans.
Fiberglass pressure pipe shall not impart to water any objectionable taste, color, or odor
or any element or chemical in a concentration known to be hazardous to health.
e. Pipe Dimensions
Length - Pipes shall be furnished in laying lengths of 6 m or 12 m.
Diameters- Pipe diameters and tolerances (exclusive of liner and coating) of sizes 100
mm to 1000 mm shall be in accordance wtth Table 1 and Table 2.
Wall Thickness -The minimum wall thickness of the pipes with sizes 100 mm to 1000 m
shall be in accordance with Table 3.
f. Pressure Class
Fiberglass pressure pipe shall be able to sustain a maximum working pressure of

1034 kPa (150 psi) at 23°C. For those thermoplastic lined pipes, the manufacturer has to
provide temperature derating factors to compensate for temperature over 23°C.
g. Joints and Fittings
Pipes shall have rubber gasket push-on joints or mechanical joints. Whenever rubber
ring/s is/are used, the ring/s shall conform to AWWA C111.
For fittings, only cast iron (Cl) or ductile iron (01) are allowed . All Cl and Dl fittings shall
confonn to ISO 13 and ISO 2531, respectively.
h. Inspection and Testing
All pipes manufactured shall be subjected to the following te.sts to assure compliance with
this standard.
1. Hydrostatic Leak Test
All pipes manufactured shall be subjected to hydrostatic leak tests as per AWWA
C950. For pressure class 150 (1034 kPa) the h)'drostatic test pressure required is
2,068 kPa (300 psi).
2. Stiffness Tests
Tlw rrwnufacturer shnll undertake stiffness t~ s ~s ss per AVW.JA C950. The pipe
stiffness requirement for 5 percent detlection is 496 kPa (72 psi). Requirements for
deflection Level A and B should be m2t. lniti81 1ing rieflection for stiffness clas3 of
tl-:39 I<Pa (72. psi) shall be 9% and 15% cf (li::\rneter fQr deflection level A amJ B.
10-.?2
SECTION V- PART A
10- PIPING
3. Hoop Tensile Stress Tests
The manufacturer shall perform hoop tensile stress test according to AWWA C950.
The pressure class shall be 2,068 kPa (300 psi).
4. Axial Tensile Strength Test
The manufacturer shall perform axial tensile strength tests as per AWWA C950. The
maximum axial tensile strength requirements for pressure class 1,034 kPa (1 so psi)
are as follows:
Nominal Minimum Axial

Pipe Size Tensile Strength
(mm) (kN/m of circumference)
100 63
150 63
200 102
250 102
300 113
350 132
400 150
-· 450 160
500 177
550 186
600 213
700 239
800 250
900 300
1000 325
5. In addition, the following tests shall also be performed by the manufacturer:
i. Hardness
ChecJCf6("complete curing of resin shall be done by acetone test and

subsequently by detection of Barco! Hardness under ASTM 2483.
ii. Visual and Quality Control
External surfaces of pipes and fittings shall, at any point, conform to the
requirements of ASTM D2563, lev1 II. Sutiaces shall be thoroughly smooth, and
no uncovered glass fibers, air bubbles. fixtures and fittings shall be allowed.
Surface of liner shall conform to lew II of ASTM 02563.
iii. Toxicity Test
Fiberglass pressure pipes shall be from non-toxic materials and shall bear the
seal of approval for potable water fr 0m an accredited testing laboratory approved
by LWUA. Determination of :oxicit] sll~ll be as per requirement of i\STM 3517,
Sse. 5, Note 4.
SECTION V- PART A
10- PIPING
i. Marking
Each Pipe shall be clearly marked with the following information :
1. Name of manufacturer
2. Year of manufacture
3. Nominal pipe diameter in mm
4. Classification
5. Pressure class
6. Any other marks that may be required by the purchaser that are not in conflict with
Items a to e.
The mark shall be without indentation so as to remain legible during normal handling and
installation practices. The information shall be arranged in one single line or several
lines.
j. Transport, Handling, Storage and Repair
1. Transport
Transport of pipes from the manufacturing plant to the delivery site/area shall be
through flatbed trucks properly supported with flatbed timbers ·or cradles. Timber
supports of sufficient width shall be located at quarter points and should contact only
pipe wall. Bells, couplings and other joint surfaces should have no contact with the
trailer supports or other pipe to prevent abrasion damage. Pipes shall be strapped
over support parts. However, only pliable traps should be used to prevent occurrence
of bulges, flat areas or other abrupt changes in pipes' curvature. Stacking height
recommended by the manufacturer should be strictly followed.
2. Handling
Pipes shall be handled properly to avoid damage that may cause rejection by the
purchaser. Wide fabric straps, belts and other pliable materials may be used in lifting
pipes as long as these materials do not deform or cause deformation on the pipes.
When cables, chains or forklifts are used for ~handling purposes adequate
padding/prot~<:~-iYe. r:r.w.teriaLc;hould be used to .avoid damage to the-·pipes.- ::Jse of
double slings in lifting pipe is highly recommended; however, single sling may be
allowed only if the pipe is properly balanced when being lifted.' Lifting pipes with
hooks or through ropes inserted thru pipe ends is not allowed.
Small diameter pipes (600mm and Jess) could be unitized or bundled and typically
handled with a pair of slings. Nesting of smaller pipes inside larger pipes is also
acceptable. However, pipes should be well-protected and secured to prevent relative
motion resulting to damage during transport In lifting nested pipes, two or more
straps are recommended. In de-nesting pipes, a paddled forklift boom should be used
and utmost care should be exercised in removing the inside pipe to ensure that pipe
being should not touch other pipes.
3. Stomge
Pip~ shall be stored with Rc1equate c;over or shed i11 nat timbers v;ith suffic;ient width to
facilitate placement and removal of lifting slings. Pipes should be checked to prevent
rolling in high winds. When stRcking, timh~r suppcrts are placed at quart er points.
M:-.:.{inwm $lacl<ing t1eigllt is nboul 2.4 fTl. '•'lh<::·, pi::es arf: stored directly on ~Jrouncls,
: ·ij;es :',ilct.~ld no·i be suppGrtl3d by the beli ~~c 1.1r!; r,g (:f <J;·. y othe,· j eir1! wn'nco. The
~'i·:..und :-.i~r. t \ lc! l::; rr!IAlivc ly fl::-!t .,.,.jth nc ;.:,raiQI. ,r.~'IG! Llls. : :;:.);:~· Nili dl rfl:JY clamaoe
\lie suif[lGe ur tile inte1ior part of the pipes.
~ 0-ZJ
SECTION V- PART A
10- PIPING
Only pipes with adequate ultraviolet protection shouldbe stored without cover or shed .
4. Repair
Pipes which are damaged during handling and transport shall either be repaired or
replaced. When pipe's structural integrity is jeopardized, the pipe shall be replaced
by the manufacturer at no cost to the purchaser.
Repair of pipes shall be allowed when deep scrapes and gouges on the pipes exterior
occurred. Pipe with scratches, scrapes, and abrasions that penetrate the entire liner
of the pipe also needs repair.
The manufacturer should recommend the appropriate method of repair at no cost to

purchaser.
k. Restrictions on the Use of Fiberglass Pressure Pipe
Hereunder are the conditions and/or site conditions whe re installations of fiberglass
pressure pipe will not be allowed:
1. Above ground installation, including bridge crossings, utility cross-overs and the like;
2. Agricultural areas and areas characterized with rugged terrain;
3. Soils that are soaked with aggressive petrochemical products such as acids,
gasoline, etc.; and
4. Where individual service connections shall be directly tapped to the pipe.
TABLE 1
DIMENSION FOR INSIDE DIAMETER SERIES PIPE
Nominal Pipe Size Inside Diameter Tolerance (+ , -)

(mm) (mm) (mm)
100 101.60 . 3.00
..
150 152.40 6.30
200 203.20 6.30
250 254.00 6.30
300 304.80 6 .30
350 355.60 6.30
400 406.40 6.30
500 508.00 6.30
600 609.60 6.30
- ·-
700 685.80 6.90
800 762 .00 7.60
900 914.40 9.10
L 1,000 990.6C 9.90
-
I.
SECTION V- PART A
10 ·PIPING
TABLE 2
DIMENSION FOR OUTSIDE DIAMETER SERIES PIPE
Nominal Pipe Size Outside Diameter Tolerance

(mm) (mm) (mm)
100 106.00 +1.8,-2.0
150 157.00 +1.9,-2.0
200 208.00 +2.0,-2.0
250 259.00 +2.1,-2.0
300 310.00 +2.3,-2.0
350 361.00 +2.4,-2.0
400 412.00 +2.5,-2.0
500 514.00 +2.8,-2.0
600 616.00 +3.0,-2.0
700 718.00 +3.3,-2.0
800 820.00 +3.5,-2.0
900 922.00 +3.8,-2.0
1,000 1,024.00 +4.0,-2.0
TABLE 3
WALL THICKNESS FOR FIBERGLASS PRESSURE PIPES
Minimum Wall Thickness"

Nominal Pipe Size
(mm)
(mm)
Filament Wound Centrifugally Cast
100 3.00 3.00
150 3.00 3.50
200 3.27 5.10
250 4.23 5.50
300 4.75 6.50
350 5.41 7.40
400 6.30 7.60
500 7.48 9.80
600 9.03 11.20
700 9.93 12.80
800 11.49 13.80
900 13.05 15.40
1,000 14.61 17.00
*. Thickness of liner not included
I. Definition of Terms
The following definitions shall apply in this standard:
1. Aggregate.: An inert granular material of a particla size range between 0.05 mm and
5.00 mm compatibl e with the resin.
2. Centrifugal casting: A process used to manufaclur& tubular goods by applying resin

and reinforcement to the inside of a mold that is rotated and heated, subsequently
polymerizing tl10 resin sy~t3rn. l11P. outside d iai'1eter (OD) of the finished pipe is
listermined by the inside clif:lm etor (10) of the mold tube. The ID of the finished pi(Y?.
i"' cJ;3tormined by the c.1mount of mHtcrlnl introduced into the mold. Other malarial:;
i(;~; vtill not fldvsrs0ly 8i'fccf ti)e laminate performance may be introducec1 In lite
process during manufacture of the pipe.
-I
SECTION V- PART A
10- PIPING
3. Constructor: The party that furnishes the work and materials for placement or
installation.
4. Epoxy resin (thermosetting): A polymer containing two or more three-membered

rings, each consisting of one oxygen and two carbon atoms. The polymer is cured
by cross-linking with an amine or anhydride hardener, with or without heat, catalyst,
or both.
5. Fiberglass Pipe: A tubular product containing glass-fiber reinforcements embedded

in or surrounded by cured thermosetting resin. The composite structure may contain
aggregate, Granular or platelet fillers, thixotropic agents and pigments or dyes.
Them1oplastic or thermosetting liners or coatings may be included.
6. Filament winding: A process used to manufacture tubular goods by winding

continuous glass-fiber roving or roving tape into the outside of a mandrel or core pipe
liner in a predetermined pattern under controlled tension. The roving may be
saturated with liquid resin or pre-impregnated with partially cured resin. Subsequent
polymerization of the resin system may require application of heat. The 10 of the
finished pipe is fixed by the mandrel diameter or the inner diameter of the core pipe
liner. The OD of the finished pipe is determined by the amount of material that is
wound on the mandrel or pipe liner. Other materials may be introduced in the
process during the manufacture of the pipe, which will not adversely affect the
laminate performance.
7. Fixed end: End of a pipe test specimen with an end closure configuration such that
internal pressure produces only hoop and radial stresses in a straight pipe test
specimen. Longitudinal thrust is absorbed by separate means such as tie rods, etc.
8. Free end: End of pipe test specimen with an end closure configuration such that
internal pressure produces longitudinal stresses in addition to hoop and radial
stresses in the pipe test specimen.
9. Glass fabric: A bi-directional fabric reinforcing material made by the weaving of

glass-fiber yarn.
I
., -;
10. Glass fibers: A commercial grade of glass E-type filaments with binder and sizing
that" are compatible with the impregnating resin.
11. Joint restraint: A separate external device or structure that is assembled or

constructed around a joint to provide restraint to lonQitudinal tensile forces.
12. Liner: A filled or unfilled them1oplastic or thermosetting resin layer, non-reinforced,

or reinforced that forms the interior surface of the pipe.
13. Manufacturer: The party that manufactures, fabricates or produces materials or

products.
14. Filler: A fine rnaterial compatible with the resin, of average particle size less than
0.05 mm.
15. rllat: A fibrous materJ.-,1 c;nnsi!Jting of random-oriented, chopped, or :;;'tirled filaments

loosely held together wit~l a binder.
1G. Polyester Hd n (U~errnosoti~ng }: An ·:':Hlylenic unse1tur,lt8cl pl)iyr:1&r v1iH1 \\'.•0 or

lrlore est\.'lr nrot:v' rJw~:QI'\J;~lj iq 8 fC'~dive .jilucnt with vinyl U l ! )l ill":ll·~:.n. "•'i>'
pc!ymer i:> t11rr.,j ~ !f ( ,·.y; ~ >- : : 11kint~ by- mel:ll1 5 of n ff<:8-r<·,(]j( Jt : ;~irr<rt -,:, ~ 1 u:,-:r-:!J
rnechani ~m. sucl1 .:.<:J ~ero;<idc c.a taly3t ::md i1eat.
'10-::1 3
SECTION V- PART A
10 ~PIPING
17. Purchaser: The person, company, or organization that purchases materials or work
to be performed .
18. Purchaser's agent: The authorized representative of the purchaser who is entrusted
the inspection of materials and production records and the observance of production
operations and quality-control tests to ensure that the products comply with the
requirements of this standard and of the purchaser.
19. Reinforced Plastic-Mortar Pipe (RPMP): A fiberglass pipe with aggregate.
20. Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin Pipe (RTRP): A fiberglass pipe without

aggregate.
21. Resin: Any of a class of solid or pseudo-solid organic materials, often of high
molecular weight, with no definite melting point. In the broad sense, the term is used
to designate any polymer that is a basic material for plastics.
22. Restrained joint: Pipe joint capable of withstanding internal pressure and
longitudinal tensile loads.
23. Rigid joint: A restrained joint that is not capable of axial displacement or angular
rotation.
24. Roving: A collection of parallel glass strands or filaments, coated with a finish or
coupling agent to improve compatibility with resins, gathered without mechanical
twist. Roving may be processed in a continuous or chopped form.
25. Supplier: The party that supplies materials or services. A supplier may or may not
be the manufacturer.
26. Stiffness class: The nominal stiffness of a specified pipe.
27. Surface layer: A filled or unfilled resin layer, non-reinforced or reinforced, that is
applied to the exterior surface of the pipe structural wall.
-
28. Surfacing mat: A thin mat of fine fibers used primarily to produce a smooth surface
on a reinforced plastic.
29. Tape: A unidirectional glass-fiber reinforcement consisting of roving t<nitted or

woven into ribbon form.
30. Thermoplastic resin: A plastic that can be repeatedly softened by heating and
hardened by cooling and that in the softened state can be fused or shaped by flow.
31. Thermosetting resin: A plastic that, after having been cured by he~t or other
means, is substantially infusible and insoluble.
3?.. Unrestrained joint: Pir.>e joint capable of withstancfing internal pressum, but not
longitudinal tensile loads.
2.:~. WQven roving: A gl~!>s-fibcr fabric reinforcing 1mterial made by t;18 waaving of
glass -fiber roving .
10-34
SECTION V- PART A
10- PIPING
10.11 DUCTILE-IRON PIPE
a. Pipe
Pipe shall conform with the requirements of International Standard (ISO) No. 2531,
"Ductile Iron Pipes, Fittings and accessories for Pressure Pipelines," manufactured by
either centrifugal casting in lined or unlined metal moulds or centrifugal casting in sand
moulds. Pipes shall have rubber gasket push on joints unless otherwise shown on the
drawings. Pipes and fittings shall have a bituminous coating approximately one (1) mil
thick and shall be cement mortar-lined in accordance with ISO 4179 uouctife Iron Pipes
for Pressure and Non-Pressure Pipelines - Centrifugal Cement Mortar Lining - General
Requirements" and ISO 6600 aDuctile Iron Pipes - Centrifugal Mortar Lining -
Composition Controls of Freshly Applied Mortar. " Certification shall be provided to the
Owner that the pipe has been manufactured in compliance with these specifications.
b. Fittings
Fittings shall have push-on type joints or flanged joints where shown. Fittings shall
comply with ISO No. 2531 -ouctile Iron Pipes, Fittings and Accessories tor Pressure
Pipelines."
COMPARISON OF DIMENSIONS
THICKNESS
SIZE (mm) AVWIJA CLA.SS ISO so

100 (4") 6.35 6.1
150 (6") 6.35 6.3
200 (8") 6.35 6.4
250 (10") 6.60 6.8
300 (12") 7.11 7.2
350 (14") 7.11 7.7
400 (16") 7.62 8.1
500 (18") 8.36 9.0
OUTSIDE DIAMETER
WEIGHT (KG) PER METER
SIZE AVWIJA ISO AVWIJA ISO
100 (4") 121.92 118 16.24 15.1

150 (6') 175.26 170 23.84 22.8
200 (8") 229.87 222 31.43 30.6
250 (10") 281.94 274 40.37 40.2
300 (12") 335.28 326 51 .85 50.8
350 (14") 388.62 378 60.19 63.2
400 (16") 441.96 429 73.45 75.5
500 (18") 548.64 532 100.57 104.3
10.'l2 SEi1VICE LlNl:S
a. Materials
J ;;c : .;?.N ic !?. lin2 pip:ng :50 mm (? i!l.) :1nli smaller shnll IJ<:- rr:<1d e of poiy•3lhyi,Jn.'J cr
pl-!:(~i 11yl81i8 hJjin£) :;:~; Sf>.:::;:i11-.;LI ! l•"ll ~ in ·3llt i in H-18 SilOS :;hown en JiJ,'J [•f :W,•i.l(l-3. ~:;e!ViC::!
SECTION V- PART A
10 ~PIPING
pipings having diameters larger than 50 mm (2 in.) shall be constructed of the same
materials approved for water mains of similar sizes.
Small tubing-size seNice lines shall have plastic or brass fittings using compression type
connections with compressive force applied on the outside surface of the tubing.
However, stainless steel or brass inserts may be utilized for bigger sizes.
Plastic fittings shall be injection-molded, compression type and suitable for use with
Polybutylene (PB) or Polyethylene (PE) tubings conforming in dimensions and tolerances
to ISO 161/1 and ISO 3607, respectively.
Plastic seNice connection fittings shall be molded from Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Syrene

(ASS), Polypropylene (PP), Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC), Polyethylene (PE) or other suitable
materials. The compounds used in the manufacture of plastic fittings shall be virgin and
shall be made from non-toxic materials and shall be certified as suitable for potable water
by _the Food and Drugs Administration (FDA) or any accredited testing laboratories.
All plastic fittings shall meet the requirements of the National Testing Laboratories for
Potable Water and shall be designed to hold a working pressure· of 1.1 MPa and resist a
minimum pull-out force of 20 kg.
Brass service connection fittings shall be manufactured according to AWWA Standard C-

800 "Threads for Underground Service Line Fittings" and shall be similar in quality to
those manufactured by Mueller Co., Decatur, Ill., U.S.A.; James Jones Co., El Monte,
California, U.S.A.; or Ford Meter Box Company, Inc., Wabush, Indiana, U.S.A.
The fittings shall be clearly and neatly finished and free from burrs or other defects likely
to damage or score the pipe, and the bore shall be free from irregularities which restrict
the free flow of fluid. The internal and external surfaces of fittings shall be clean ·and free
from grooves, pinholes, or other defects likely to affect the performance and seNice of the
system.
The fittings shall be designated by the sizes of the connecting pipes/tubings.
Where saddles are required, as shown on the Drawings, they shall conform with the
provisions of Clause 10.12.
Welded outlets on steel pipe shall be insulated from brass fittings with nylon bushings
approved by the Engineer.
b. Testing and Acceptance
Inspection and testing of plastic fittings shall be done by the manufacturer ir. accordance
with ASTM 2146; D 1598 and D 1599 for PP, ASTM 2581 and D 2666 for PB, ASTM D
2239 for PE, and AWWA C 900 for PVC as fitting materials. For materials other than
ti10se mentioned, manufacturer shall provide the specific existing ASTM, A'vVWA, ISO,
PSA or other internationally accepted standards used to Identify procedures by which test
can be conducted and results can be evaluated.
A!l plastic fittings shall he free of cracks or other injurious defects and !..hall h·3 srr..:; .; th
nnd clean before inspection.
For every 100 pier,es of any size of fittings, at least three pieces shall be ;_:rosen ::tt
mndom and ~a 1bjected to 2. pr~<ss ure of 1.1 IVlPd at 23°C. if ar.y ;;e1mple t:~stt<l C!·oKk.s ·jr
bJ:<~. ti~G f(Jt 1 epresenteci Y.'!il i.Je i'')_
;cuca.
.. ·;t)-3t)
SECTION V- PART A
10- PIPING
c. Installation
Att workmanship shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and

approved by the Engineer. Service taps for plastic service lines shall be made between
45 degrees to 90 degrees from the top of the pipe, and the tubing shall be laid in a
serpentine fashion along the service trench bottom to resist pull-out. Galvanized steel
pipe for service lines shall be installed only where specifically shown on the standard
drawings. Galvanized steel pipe and PVC tape shall be in accordance with Clause 10.3.
Where service lines are located under the roadbeds or in stony or rocky ground, sand
bedding shall be ;:;~ovided. The sand bedding shall be of adequate thickness to provide a
depth of cuver of 0.15 m.
Unless otherwise directed, all service lines shall be installed prior to the hydrostatic test of
the water main, and they shall be tested with pressure test of the water main. Each
stopcock valve shall be operated to thoroughly flush the service and remove any
accumulated air present prior to the hydrostatic test.
10.13 SERVICE SADDLE
a. Materials
Where saddles are required as shown on the Drawings, they shall be constructed of one
or a combination of the following materials and complying with the requirements as
hereunder indicated.
1. Brass
Leaded red brass, copper alloy with commercial designation 85-5-5-5 in accordance
with ASTM B584, UNS No. 83000 .
2. Bronze
Silicon bronze in accordance with ASTM 8584, UNS No. 87200
3. Ductile Iron ·=
Grade 60-40-18 in accordance with ASTM A536
4. Cast Iron
Gray iron in accordance with ASTM A48, Class 30
5. Plastics
Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Syrene (ABS), Polypropylene (PP), Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC),

Polyethylene (PE) or other suitable materials
All the me1terials used in the m~mufactureof clnmps shall moet \ll0 requirements of
Rl)plicable AST:'vl, A'vV'v'lA, I::;o or other internationally ac';':1f)ted ntanuaL1
~pecifications.
SECTION V- PART A
10- PIPING
b. Manufacture
Service saddles shall be supplied either with:
1. Clamp or single strap of at least 50 mm (2 in.) wide, bolted on each side, or bolted
one side and hinged on the other side. Bolts and nuts shall be 18-8 stainless steel,
brass or bronze as specified above.
2. Double or single strap, as shown on the Drawings, each with a width not less than 20
mm (3/4 in.).
3. Straps or clamps shall be made of any of the materials listed above or of 18-8
stainless steel.
All parts of the service saddle including the clamp or strap shall comply with the
following minimum thickness requirements:
Pipe Nominal Diameter Thickness
50mm 8mm
100 mm 8mm
150 mm 10mm
200mm 12 mrn
250mm 15 mm
300mm 15 mm
Saddles shall be shaped to the various outside pipe diameters to which they are to be
fitted and shall be provided with an approved resilient neoprene rubber gasket with a
minimum bearing width of 12 mm (1/2 in.).
The tapping thread shall be at least 30 mm deep and drilled in accordance with iron
pipe (I.P.) thread dimensions.
4. Shop drawings for plastic service saddle sh all be first submitted for approval prior to
manufacture.
10.14 MECHANICAL-TYPE COUPLINGS
Mechanical-type couplings shall be designed for a water working pressure not less than
the design pressure of the pipe on which they are to be installed, and shall be equipped
with Grade H rubber gaskets. Couplings shall be Gustili-Bacon or Victaulic Style 44
when pipe ends are banded, and Gustin-Bacon or Victaulic Style 77 when pipe ends are
grooved. Buried or submerged couplings shall be coated in accordance vvith Clause
14.13 (c) (3)(gg)- Paints and Coatings.
·10.15 SLEEVE-TYPE COUPLINGS
Gleeve-type couplings shall he provided where shown and s11all be Smith-Bl::~ir, Style 411
or Styla 412, equivalent styles manufactured hy Dresser, or npproved subsiitute.
Couplings shall be of ste~l with steel !Jolts, w ithout pipe stop, <~nd shall be r;f sizes to fit
th e pipe ancl fitting shown. The middle ring shall be not less than 6 mm ( 1/4 in.) in
thickness c:md shall bP. 125 to 175 mm (5 in. to 7 in.) long for standc:rd .steel couplinqs,
.~ ild ~00 1n111 (16 in.) lcn9 f.:.r !r· fl~l..~>lcfved ~ouplin~1s. Bolts for ~xposed c%pii ng .~hal! h0
lwr.rlirl ORiva nized. Buri tlil i:r1Hs w:rJ ~. k<;lv'>'l:trK! souprin~IS si'l<lll be -:oalo;)·] in '.IC',·':·j " 11 .;
i Ji ih C!nu·::a '14.ij ( C:) (:3) ~<JD.J· ::·::.,;~·;!. ; ::!r ri<:,,;;.li'ill{J~ .
~ •) .:_\0
SECTION V- PART A
10- PIPING
10.16 GASKETS AND BOLTS
a. Except as otherwise provided, gaskets for flanged joints shall be 1.5 mm (1/16 in.) thick
laminated asbestos fiber.
b. Wherever blind flanges are shown, the gaskets shall consist of 3 mm (1/8 in.) thick cloth-
inserted rubber sheet which shall be cemented to the surface of the blind flange.
c. Except as otherwise provided, bolts shall conform with the requirements of Clause 9-
Miscellaneous Metalwork.
10.17 PRESSURE GAGES
Pressure gages shall have 89 mm (3-112 in.) dials, 6 mm (1/4 in.) threaded connections
and shut-off cocks. Gages shall be calibrated to read 1.0 MPa (150 psi), unless
otherwise shown on the Drawings. The pressure element of the gage shall be protected
against excessive pulsations and surges by an external pressure snubber.
10.18 CONCRETE DRAIN PIPES
The Contractor shall furnish and install drain pipes where shown on the Drawings.
Concrete drain pipes shall conform with the Standard Specifications for Concrete Drain
Pipes of the Department of Public Wor1<s and Highways.
10.19 STEEL CASING
The Contractor shall furnish and install steel casing where shown on the Drawings. Steel
casings shall be of welded steel pipe of the diameters and plate thickness shown. Joints
In steel casings may be either butt-welded, lap welded, or welded using butt straps. No
protective coating need be applied to casings. Casings shall be installed as required In
accordance with details as shown, and subject to the approval of the agency having
jurisdiction.
10.20 WARNING TAPE
a. Material
The Contractor shall furnish and Install for each pipe above or equal to 50 rnm an Alu-Foil
warning/detection tape (minimum width is 5 em) (2") with the words "Attention Water
Main" marked in a continuous manner.
b. Installation
The tape shall be laid flat on top of an intermediate layer of backfill, after compaction of
se1me and prior to baci'.fi~Hng and compacting, the final top layer. The depth of laying the
tape will therefore be about 0..30 m (1 foot) from the finish surface or at about:
0.45 m from top of pi[)'3S with sizes equal to or under 250 mm diameter except for
Asbestos Cement Pipes.
0.60 m above the top r;f ?:f:-t<~ vtilh sizes equal to or larger th<m 300 mm di<Jrnetnr :,mel
for AC pipes of ali sizes.
SECTION V- PART A
11- VALVES
11 .1 GENERAL
a. The Contractor shall furnish and install all valves as specified herein and as shown on the
Drawings. All valves shall be new and of current manufacture.
b. Flanged valves may be plain faced with serrated gasket surface or raised. Flanges of
valves for water working pressure of 1.2 MPa (175 psi) or less shall be faced and drilled
to 125-lb American Standard dimensions; flanges of valves for water working pressures
greater than 1.2 MPa (175 psi) shall be faced and drilled to 250-lb American Standard
dimensions.
c. Each valve body shall be tested under a test pressure equal to twice its design water
working pressure.
d. All valves shall be provided with an exterior protective coating in accordance with the
provisions of Clause 14- Painting and Coatings.
e. When the operating nut of a buried valve is located more than 1.5 metres (5 ft) below the
ground surface, the Contractor shall provide and install in the valve box a stem extension.
The bottom of the extension shall be securely fastened to the operating nut of the valve,
and the top of the extension shall be centered in the valve box.
f. The Contractor shall furnish a minimum of six (6) tee-handle valve keys. of variable
lengths sufficient to permit operation of all buried valves regardless of depth, by operators
of average height working in normal position. Where the number of valves to be provided
exceeds thirty (30) units, the Contractor shall provide one (1) valve key for every five (5)
additional valves or a fraction thereof.
g. Operating nut shall turn counter-clockwise to open .
h. Shop drawings for all valves shall be furnished in accordance with Clause 2.2 - Shop
Drawings.
11.2 GATE VALVES
a. Valves
This Clause applies to gate valves 50 mm (2 in.) through 300 mm (12 in.) in size. All
valves shall conform with the "Standard for Resilient Seated Gate Valves" (AWWA C509).
Gate valves where the pipeline design pressure is 1.0 MPa (150 psi) or less shall be
designed for a minimum water working pressure of 1.0 MPa (150 psi) and shall be cast
iron bodied, with resilient seats applied to the body or gate. Discs shall be cast iron with
bronze disc rings , and the seat ring shall be bronze and replaceable. The valve shall be
non-rising stem with a minimum of two "0" ring seals (at least one above the stem collar),
or rising stem when shown on the Drawings. The valves shall have a 50 mm (2 in.)
square operating nut with a cast arrow showing direction in which the nut is to be turned
to open the valve. Valves shall be constructed to permit the replacement of the "0" rings
above the stem collar under full w orking water pressure with the valves in the full open
position. The valves shall be coated in accord<mce with Clause 14 - Painting and
Coatings.
b. Testing Requirements
E ~1 ch v nlve .':t':all Ge op ~r <>.teci in iiif:l po!>ilion for 'Nilf,·ll it rms d~sign ed to ensure ft·: •l
and perfect f unctionir,g of 8ll paris in the int0nded manner. Any defects uf
I.
SECTION V- PART A
11- VALVES
workmanship shall be corrected and the test repeated until satisfactory performance
is demonstrated.
2. Shell Test
A hydrostatic lest pressure equal to twice the rated working pressure of the valve
shall be applied to the body with the gate in the open position . The test shall show no
leakage through the metal, flanged joints, or stem seals.
3. Seal Test
A test shall be made at rated working pressure to prove the sealing ability of each
valve from both directions of flow. The test shall show no leakage through the metal,
pressure-containing joints, or past the seat.
4. Hydrostatic Test
One prototype valve of each size and class of a manufacturer's design shall be
hydrostatically tested with twice the specified rated pressure applied to one side of
the gate and zero pressure on the other side. The test is to be made in each
direction across the gate. Under this hydrostatic test, the manufactu rer may make
special provisions to prevent leakage past the seats. No part of the valve or gate
shall be permanently deformed by the test.
5. Torque Test
A prototype of each size should be overtorqued in the closed and open positions to
demonstrate no distortion of the valve stem or damage to the resilient seat as
evidenced by failure to seal at rated pressure. The applied torque shall be 250 ft-lb
for 3 and 4 NRS valves, and 350 ft-lb for 6, 8, 10, and 12 NRS valves (1.0 ft-lb =
0.736 Newton-metre= 0.66 kg-m).
6. Leakage Test
Two prototype valves of each size chosen by the LV\(UA quality control inspector to
represent the ext~e.mes 9.( -~-~~t 9ompression shall be fully opened and closed to a
seal for 500 complete cycles with sufficient flow that the valve is at 200 psi pressure
differential at the point of opening and closing. The valves shall be droptight under
rated pressure differential applied alternately to each side of the gate after completion
of the tests.
7. Pressure Test
One prototype of each valve size shall be tested to 500 psi with the closure member
in the open position. There shall be no rupture or cracking of the valve body, valve
bonnet, or seal plate. Leakage at pressure-containing joints shall not be a cause for
failure of the test.
11.3 IJUTTERFl..Y VALVES
u. V~ives
Butterfly vnlves shall conform with the "AVVIJIJA Standard fo r Ruhbe r-Se::Jted But.terfly
V;:!·.::: .-~" (iWh'\JA C-504) )llt~t,ct tc U1~ lollGWi(:!J requirements: V:1l•ms ~:hc:i ll bG of Ciass
-~ H.\F~ <:r!i::. : :rd ~:ss otlD r .'iiS & shown. may <: Hhr~r !}f;) short--b oc1ieri C •r l(•ll~-rn;di ecl. Sn=.lfr
;-.-r :A,;; ~-.; ;::.1 !.1_; cls~ig nGJ i'o; u~H wjtll sland;:u d .·;;l;t \1-·iy!;I-=J p<lckino ul · 0 " i 1nu ~eals. Tile
[,
SECTION V- PART A
11- VALVES
valve ends shall be either flanged of the wafer type except where otherwise shown on the
Drawings.
b. Operators
Operators shall conform with the above-referenced AWWA Standard, subject to the
following requirements: Valves shall be equipped with 50 mm (2 in.) square operating
nuts or with handwheels 600 mm (24 in.) maximum diameter as shown, and shall be
provided with watertight gear housings. The valve manufacturer shall furnish a written
certification stating that the operator torque has been computed and the operators have
been sized to meet the full AWWA Class specified in Clause (a) herein.
c. Testing Requirements
1. Performance Tests
Each valve that has the operator mounted directly on the valve shall be shop-
operated three times from the fully closed to the fully opened position, and the
reverse, under a no-flow condition to demonstrate that the complete assembly is
workable.
2 . Leakage Tests
Each valve shall be shop-tested for leaks in the closed position . The test shall be
conducted with the body flanges in a horizontal plane. With the disc in th e closed
position, air pressure shall be supplied to the lower face of the disc for the full test
duration as follows:
Class 25A and 258 25 psi

Class 75A and 758 75 psi
Class 1SOA and 1508 150 psi
The upper surface of the valve disc shall be visible and shall be covered with a pool
of water at 0 psi pressure . The length of test shall be at least five (5) minutes, and
there shall be no indication of leakage past thE\ valve disc (visible in the form of
bubpl~s in the water pool on top of the disc) during the test period: As an~JiterMtlve- __. ~
to this test procedure, Class 150A or 1SOB valves may be given a 150 psi hydrostatic
test. During the test, the valves shall be droptight.
3. Hydrostatic Test
All valve bodies shall be subjected to an internal hydrostatic pressure equivalent to

two times the specified shut-off pressure. During the hydrostatic test, there shall be
no leakage through the metal, the end joints or the shaft seal, nor st1all any part be
permanently deformed. The time duration of the hydrostatic test shall be sufficient to
allow visual examination for leakage and shall be at least one ('I) minute for valves 8
inches and smaller, three (3) minutes for valves 10 th rough 20 inches and ten (1 0)
minutes for valves 24 inches and larger.
4. Proof-of-Design Tests
Upon request, the manufacturer shnll furnish certified copies of the reports covering
the tests. One prototype valve of e8ch 5"1ze and class of a manufacturer's design
;;flail be hydrostatically te~tcd vi~!': :s11r~ U1c ~;pecified shut-off pressl!le applied to on()
side of tile disc an() ;r.:~ro 11rc.::;~. 1J! <.: c·n U1e <~til u side. "fhe ·i~st i0 to \)e marle in e":rh
direction ar:H"J.;.::; 1.i1(;; (isc ~md, in t:ie cne r1t nangccf vAlv8s ...h~ valve ho<ly shali m:
bolte{l to a flanged t(;;~ t lh3<..d. under til e llyurostatic t.est, 'the lll<:lnUl'act ur~r may rnske
I
I,
SECTION V- PART A
11- VALVES
special provisions to prevent leakage past the seats. No part of the valve or disc
shall be permanently deformed by the test. It is the purpose of th is clause to provide
evidence on the adequacy of each basic type offered by a manufacturer to perform
under design pressures within the applicable rating for a sufficient number of
operations simulating a full service life. The adequacy is to be proven by tests made
on valves selected to represent each basic type of seat design of a size within each
applicable group shown in the table below and in a pressure class or classes equal to
or greater than the valves being purchased. The required number of cycles appears
in the table below:
Test Cycles Required
Size Group 0n.) No. of Cycles
3-20 10,000
28-42 5,000
48-72 1,000
Every cycle shall consist of applying the differential pressure to the disc in the closed
position, then opening the valve (which will relieve the pressure) to the wide-open
position and then closing the disc. The valve shall be droptight under the rated
pressure differential upon completion of the cycle test.
11.4 CHECKVALVES
Check valves 1 00 mm (4 in.) and larger shall have flanged connections and be of the swing type
with outside lever and weight. The valves shall be designed for a minimum water working
pressure of 1.0 MPa (150 psi), and shall have 125-lb American Standard Flanges. Valve bodies
shall be cast iron or steel. The valves shall have bronze gate rings and seat rings and type 18-8
stainless steel hinge pins. The check valves shall be designed so that disc and body seat may be
easily removed without removing valve from the line. The valves sha ll be coated in accordance
with Clause 14- Painting and Coatings.
11.5 AIR-VACUUM AND AIR RELEASE VALVES

t
Air vacuum and air release valves shall have threaded connections. The bodies shall be of high-
strength cast iron, and the float shall be of stainless steel. Float guides, bushings, lever pens and
all other internal parts shall be constructed of stamless steel or bronze. Seat washers and gasket
shall be of a material insuring water-tightness with a minimum of maintenance. Valves shall be
designed for a water working pressure of not less than 1.0 MPa (150 psi). A11 valves sha ll be
designed to automatically operate so that they will: (a) positively open under atmospheric
pressure (as water drains from the body of the valve, it will allow air to flow into the pipe while it is
being emptied); (b) positively close as water, under low head, fills the body of the valve; (c) not
blow-shut under high velocity air discharge; and (d) permit the escape of accumulated air under
pressure while the pipe is in operation.
11.6 AIR VACUUM VALVES
Air vacuum valves of sizes up to and including 75 mm (3-in .) in cliameter shnll have thrc::aclecl
connections except where otherwise shown on the drawings. The bodies sllalll)e l)f lligh str~ng\i1
cast iron, nnd the float shall be of stainless steel. Afl internal parts such as float guicies, \)ushin(Js,
<lnd baffle retaining screws, etc., st1all be either stainless steel or bronze. seal washern ~111d
gaskets shall be of a material insuring w ater tightness with a minimum of maintenance. Vslvr:w
~-iFlll oe cle.si~1ned for a w<Jter worh<~J ;Jft;&,=ure of nc·t !::>:>5 th an 1 0 Ml-'c:l ('ISO psi). All vnlvc~> ;::hcdl
be de3ignGd to flutomatir.~llly op::;r((\2 so t~3t t:,-ey wi\t (a) pr:>!3ilively opr-n t~nr1 · ~r ;lh.~ (;::ri'•!Cli c
!;;\:J <)S L!i-~! (<Js wn!er c!,·~lins fl'om th e l:~.ci~" of ihe Vd i'i(';, it wili .:di•)W nit' tc fl£•w lflt C• t:;.; ::·!! a \Ji·,;: ;, E !:;
:, ~1-4
SECTION V- PART A
11- VALVES
being emptied); (b) positively close as water, under low head, fills the body of the valve; and (c)
not blow shut under high velocity discharge.
11.7 AIR RELEASE VALVES
Air release valves up to and including 75 mm (3 in.) in diameter shall have threaded connections,
except where otherwise shown on the drawings, and shall be designed for a water working
pressure of 1.0 MPa (150 psi). The body shall be of high strength cast iron and the float shall be
of stainless steel. All internal parts, except the seat, shall be of stainless steel or bronze. The
seat shall be of material insuring water tightness with a minimum of maintenance. The valve shall
be designed to automatically p~;mit the escape of accumulated air under pressure while the pipe
is in operation. The valvas shall be either direct or lever operating.
11.8 FLOAT VALVES
Float valves shall be as shown on the plans.
11.9 MISCELLANEOUS SMALL VALVES
Valves 50 mm (2 in.) and smaller, unless otherwise shown, shall be all bronze or brass with
threaded connections designed for a water working pressure not less than 1.0 MPa (150 psi).
Material specifications for brass valves shall have a commercial designation of 85-5-5-5 in
accordance with ASTM 8584, UNS No. 83000.
Valves for service connections shall be ball valve type with lockwing.
11.10 PLUG VALVES
Plug valves shall be lubricated 50 mm (2 in.) semi-steel straightway valves with a wo rking
pressure of 175 lb. The valves shall be wrench-operated, two-bolt cover type with screwed ends.
A complete locking device assembly shall be provided for each valve where indicated on the
Drawings.
11.11 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES

~
The pressure reducing yalve shall be of the diaphragm type equipped with a pilot spring to- -
· proviae a range of downstream pressure settings. The pressure reducing valve shall be designed
for a minimum water working pressure of 1.0 MPa (150 psi) and shall be factory tested under a
hydrostatic pressure of at least 2.0 MPa (300 psi). The vnlve body and cover shall be cast iron
meeting the requirements of ASTM A48. The valve shall have nanged ends, and the valve disc
shall be non-metallic and renewable. The main valve trim shall be of bronze as specified in
ASTM specification 862, and the valve seat shall be replaceable. The pilot control system shall
be of brass with type 18-8 stainless steel trim. The diaphragm shall be of heavily reinforced
synthetic rubber and shall be fully supported by the valve body. The valve shaH be coated as
required in Clause 14- Painting and Coating .
11.12 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES
The pressure relief valve shall be of the diaphragm type. The elise shall be non-metallic anLi
renewnble, nnd the valve seat shall be replaceable. The main valve trim shfJII be of bronze
confom1ing with ASTM Specification f362. The pilot control ~;llall be fully suppori.e(i by the valve
body. Tile valve shall be coated in accordance with Clause ·14 - Paintinu ancl Coating.
·1 1.13 ,!\.LTJTUD[. VAL VEG
TIK: V<lllfc stHlll control ~ lle l:i!'jll <ffM:r i~.!'.WI in t:1e 1\~se rv.-: i'. n
;:;nail t;;-: ~~~,:~i!Ji)l~: t0 fJ L 'tid·=: 1.N·1·
flow. Vcdvu s11all 1.:;:; a nur1-li1rutllii1U type vcll';o 31\G :ii';al l remni n i',i ily upGil t~n1:1 nwximL<ril
\H.1'}
11-5
SECTION V- PART A
11- VALVES
water elevation In the reservoir is reached. It shall close at high water level and open for return
now when pressure at the valve inlet is below the reservoir pressure.
11.14 FLAPVALVES
Flap valves shall be of cast iron, having bronze seating faces and stainless steel of low zinc
bronze hinge pins. The flap valves shall have flanged or spigot frames as shown on the
drawings.
. -· ..,..__,- . :,. ... -
.: ~i j .)
SECTION V- PART A
12 - PRESSURE AND LEAKAGE TESTING

AND DISINFECTING
12.1 GENERAL
The Contractor shall furnish all equipment, labor and materials, including taps, valves and
bulkheads as required and exclusive of water and water meter for testing and proper disinfection
of the pipelines and steel reservoir. The water and any water meter used for testing shall be
furnished by the Owner, but the Contractor shall provide the facilities necessary to convey the
water from the Owner-designated source to the points of use. All testing and chlorinating
operations shall be done in the presence of the Engineer.
12.2 PIPELINE TESTING
All pipelines shall be thoroughly flushed out with water prior to testing. The Contractor shall test
the pipeline in sections prior to pennanent resurfacing after the trench is backfilled, but with joints
exposed for examination except in heavily travelled roadways. Maximum length of test sections
shall be 500 metres for distribution mains and 1,000 metres for transmission mains unless
otherwise approved by the Engineer. Where test sections are approved which exceed the above
maximum lengths, the allowable leakage for the lengths in excess of the maximum allowable shall
be reduced by fifty percent (SO%). The pipeline shall not be filled with water until the following
curing periods have elapsed.
Description Minimum Allowable Time
10 Cement Mortar Linings 14 days
2. Cement Mortar at Joints 8 hours
3. Concrete Thrust Block

a. Standard Cement 7 days
b. High early strength cement 36 hours
The pipeline shall be prepared for testing by closing valves when available, or by placing
temporary bulkheads in the pipe and filling the line slowly with water. During the filling of the pipe
and before the application of the specified test pressure, all air shall be expelled from the pipeline.
To accomplish this, taps shall be made, if necessary, at points of highest elevation and after
completion of the test;_..anct..taps shall be tightly plugged unless otherwise-specified. After the line .~ -· I
or section thereof has been completely filled, it shall be allowed to stand under a slight pressure
for a minimum of forty-eight (48) hours to allow the escape of air from any air pocl<.ets and to allow
the pipe or mortar lining to absorb as much water as possible.
During this period, all exposed pipes, fittings, valves, joints and couplings shall be examined for
leaks. If found to be cracked or defective, these shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor
'<'lith sound material at his own expense. The pipeline shall then be refilled and all bulkheads,
joints and connections shall be examined for leaks. If any are found, these shaH be stopped. The
test shall consist of holding the test pressure on each section of the line for a period of two (2)
hours. The test pressure at the lowest point shall be 690 Kpa or 1.0 MPa according to the class
of pipe installed, class 100 or class 150, and as approved by the Engineer. Pressure gauges
shall also be provided at all ends of the section tested. The water necessary to maintain tile
pr<3ssure shall be measured through a meter or by other means satisfactory to the Engineer. The
l0n:<age st1all be considered tile <~mount of wflter Bntering the pi~eline during tile two-hour t0s~
period. The allowable leakage for cast iron pipe or du0tile pipe shall not e;-<ceed the values listed
in Table 3 of the AWWA Standard for lnstallalion of Cast Iron Water Main (AWWA C600). All
ot!mr types of pipes shall have an allowable leakage not exceeding 1.85 Umm of diameter of pipe
( H.:r kilometre (mile) per dr~:,•. ~-: ;wu 1 d a ll'! Jest of a .5ection of pipeline clisGI<l.~e joint !0<1K<lge
~·)r~·ntor \ ~1811 th:1t pecrnittatl, \rJiJ ( ..'·.Jntr8d or· :~11all, Cit tw,; •)Wn exr::ense, loco!:: <
lflcl t·-op a ir or :·~J J')Iace
12-'1
SECTION V- PART A
12- PRESSURE AND LEAKAGE TESTING

AND DISINFECTING
the defective pipe, fitting, joint, coupling or other appurtenance. The test shall be repeated until
the leakage is within the permitted allowance.
Closure pieces between newly installed and existing mains shall be tested after the pipe has
passed the pressure and leakage test specified above. The test shall include subjecting the joint
to a pressure of 345 KPa (50 psi) for a period of five (5) minutes and visually checking for
leakage. All visible leaks shall be repaired by the Contractor at no expense to the Owner.
12.3 PIPELINE DISINFECTING
Before being placed in service, and before certification of completion by the Engineer, all new
domestic water mains or extension to existing systems, or valved section of such extension or any
replacement in the existing water system shall be disinfected with chlorine in accordance with
AWWA Standard C601 "Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains." Disinfection shall be completed
not more than three (3) days prior to placing the pipeline into service unless otherwise approved
by the Engineer and care shall be taken to prevent recontamination of the pipeline. A
bacteriological test shall be taken, at the expense of the Owner, prior to acceptance of -the
pipeline disinfected.
The amount and concentration of chlorine solution applied shall be such as to provide a dosage of
not more than fifty milligrams per litre (50 mg/L) and shall be introduced into the lines as directed
by the Engineer. After a contact period of twenty-four hours, the chlorine residual of sa·m ples
taken at service connections or sampling points along the entire length of the pipelines shall not
be less than twenty-five milligrams per litre (25 mg/L) as determined by the Engineer. The system
shall then be flushed with dear water until the residual chlorine is not greater than 0.75 mg/L but
not less than 0.20 mg/L. All valves and appurtenances in the pipeline being disinfected shall be
operated several times during the chlorine contact periods.
The preferred point of application of the chlorinating agent is at the beginning of the pipeline
extension or any valved section and through a corporation stop inserted on the top of the laid
pipes.
'
Should the initial treatment fail to result in the conditions stipulated above, the chlorination
procedures shall be repeated until satisfactory results are obtained!
Where connections are to be made to existing watP.r mains, HTH shall be added at points of
interconnections as directed by the Engineer.
12.4 TESTING AND DISINFECTION OF RESERVOIR AND APP.URTENANT PIPING
a. General
The operation of testing and disinfecting the reservoir shall be combined. Any leaks
found after the reservoir is filled shall be repaired and the disinfection procedtJres
repeated to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
b. Cleaning
Prior to disinfecting. the reservoir shall be thoroughly cleaned by hosino down with a hifJtl
pressure lwse and nozzle of sufficient size to deliver a minimum flow of 3:15 Lis (50
gprn).
r:~-2
SECTION V- PART A
12- PRESSURE AND LEAKAGE TESTING

AND DISINFECTING
c. Testing of Steel Reservoir
The steel resef\loir shall be tested prior to the application of protective coatings by filling
the resef\loir with water to the elevation of the overflow. The resef\loir shall show no
leaks at the end of a 24-hour test period. Any leaks shall be repaired by welding. The
reservoir shall be retested and repaired until no leaks occur.
d. Disinfecting
A strong chlorine solution (200 mg per litre) shall be sprayed on all interior surfaces of the
reservoir. Following this, the resef\loir shalf be partially filled with water to a minimum
depth of approximately 30 em (1.0 ft). During the tilling operation, a chlorine water
mixture shall be injected by means of a solution-feed chlorinating device. The dosage
applied to the water shalf be sufficient to give a chlorine residual of at least 50 mg per litre
upon completion of the partial filling operation. Precaution shall be taken to prevent the
strong chlorine solution from flowing back into the lines supplying the water.
After the partial filling has been completed, sufficient water shall be drained from the
lower ends of the appurtenant piping to insure filling the lines with the heavily chlorinated
water.
Disinfection of the steel reservoir shall be done after protective coatings liave been
applied to the inside surfaces of the reservoir. The reservoirs and connecting lines
thereto shall be thoroughly disinfected with chlorine before being placed in operation.
e. Retention Period
Chlorinated water shall be retained in the reservoir and in the appurtenant piping long
enough to destroy all non-spore-forming bacteria and, in any event, for at least twenty-
four (24) hours. After the chlorine-treated water has been retained for the required time,
the chlorine residual in the reservoir and in the lines shall be at least 25 mg per litre. All
valves shall be operated while the fines are filled with ~he heavily chlorinated water.
f. Final Filling of Reservoir
After the Ghlorine residual has been in accordance with Clause (d), the water level in the
reservoir shall be raised uniformly to approximately 30 em (1 ft.) below the over11ow level
by the addition of potable water. Before final filling is commenced, the quantity of heavily
chlorinated water remaining in the reservoir after filling the piping shall be sufficient when
the water level is raised to its final elevation to produce a chlorine residual of between 1
mg per litre and 2 mg per litre. After the reservoir has been filled, the strength of the
chlorinated water in the resef\loir shall be detennined by the Engineer. If the chlorine
residual is less than 1 mg per litre, an additional dosage shall be applied to the water in
the reservoir. If the chlorine residual is greater than 2 mg per litre in the resef\loir, the
reservoir shall be partially emptied and addilional polable water added.
In no case shall v;ater be released through the drain lines prior to the expiration of tile
r2quired retention period.
!J. Lenl<age Allowance of Concrete Reservoir
/\f!er the reservoir hBs be3n fill ed continuously for a period of ti1irly 00) c!8'i'-·='i ieak8W: is
!::uch tllat the WCiler ~urfuc~ drops rnore !11an 5.1 Gm (2 in.i in ll 30-c.J ny pe1i cd. i: ·~~
Gonif()Ctor shall emr-:iy tile re:::.:;rvoir io parmit ~~l ost"! t~x<• m'r ':Jf ; 'Ji': f.:,;r r:Vki e11c;B r. '~ ~: 1 'I
<..·l'<"lt.Y.ing or other c:or:G!th1ns !i121 rni[Jil1 l;o m<JJ,:ons.Jblc; :'or me: J;; : ·t~ : J q::-. /1.ny :~m .::;lu U::.1~1
SECTION V- PART A
12 -PRESSURE AND LEAKAGE TESTING

AND DISINFECTING
be "vee'd" and sealed with rubber sealant in accordance with Clause 8.13 (b). Any
evidence of leakage through the joints shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the
Engineer. Following these operations, the Contractor shall again sterilize the reservoir in
accordance with this Clause, exclusive of the spraying operation .
-.
SECTION V- PART A
13 "SURFACE RESTORATION AND PAVING
13.1 GENERAL
The Contractor shall furnish all materials, labor, plant, and equipment for the removal of all
pavement, sidewalks, curbs and gutters, fences, poles, driveways, walks, other property, and
surface structures that are necessary for the proper prosecution of the work, but only upon
approval of the parties having jurisdiction thereof and of the Engineer. Unless otherwise shown,
the Contractor shall restore at his own expense all property removed or destroyed by his
operation at least equal to conditions prior to work under this Contract or to the satisfaction of the
property owner:
13.2 REMOVAL OF EXISTING PAVEMENT
a. In cutting or breaking up street surfacing required for the performance of the work, the
Contractor shall not use equipment which will damage the adjacent pavement. All
concrete pavement surfaces to be removed shall be scored with concrete sawing
equipment; provided, that any portland cement concrete based under an asphaltic mix
surface will not be required to be scored by sawing. Asphaltic-concrete pavement shall
be removed to dean straight lines.
The Contractor shall remove the pavement and road surfaces as part of the trench
excavation, and the amount removed shall not exceed the maximum width of trench for
pipelines as indicated on the Drawings, unless otherwise ordered in writing by the
Engineer.
The width and length of the pavement area required to be removed for the installation of
valves, valve chambers, spirals, or other structures shall not exceed the maximum linear
dimensions of such structures by more than 0.30 metres on each side.
The width of the pavement area required to be removed for the installation of service
connections shall not exceed the maximum width as shown on the Drawings.
b. Concrete sidewalks, curbs, and gutters required to be removed in connection with

performing the work under the Contract shall be cut to the nearest score marks and shall
be replaced with the same kind or better material by-the Contractor in confonnance with
the latest specifications, rules, and regulations, and subject to the inspection and
approval of the agency having jurisdiction. - -- - · --·
13.3 RESTORATION OF DAMAGED SURFACE AND PROPERTY
Except where shown on the drawings or otherwise specified, any pavement, trees, shrubbery,
fences, poles or other property and surface structures which tiave been damaged, removed , or
disturbed by the Contractor, whether deliberately or through failure to carry out the requirements
of the Contract Documents, mun!c'1pal ordinances, or the specifiC directions of the Engineer, or
through failure to employ usual and reasonable safeguards shall be replaced or repaired at the
expense of the Contractor.
13.4 REPLACEMENT OF SURFACE STRUCTURE AND PRIVATE PROPERTY
l·~xcept where shown on the dmwings, the Contractor shall restore all private property <mcJ surface
structures removed or disturbed as a part of the work t o a condition equnl to that before tll e work
began. He shall also furnish all labor and materials incidental thereto at. his own expense. No
payment shall be allowed for dirt road restorati on.
'!3.5 1'EMflOR.~.RY RESURF•.t:\CING /\1\lO REPAViNG
lmmcdiat"Siy U!'lln cnrnp!eticn r:f tHJr!\fillil:g c1f th:=: i- ~n·~n nr n.xr:av<=X·:;n i11 r:we:J -_c~•.V>, ~;.,a
Conlr.:~ctor
shall f)lac~ a i empor::lly pavement, at le8st 40 mm ( 1.5 ln.) in trucl<nass, over all
I
I I
SECTION V- PART A
13 ~SURFACE RESTORATION AND PAVING
disturbed areas of the streets, paved driveways, alleys, and other travelled places where the
original surface has been disturbed by his operation. The temporary pavement shall be of a
character satisfactory in all respects and safe for public travel. The temporary surfacing may
consist of compacting broken stone at such depth as is necessary to withstand the traffic to which
it is subjected. The broken stone shall be surfaced with "cold patch" or, if approved, sufficient
sand, soil, or other materials shall be spread to hold the stone in place and prevent ravelling. As
fill settles, new stone and binder must be added and compacted. The surface of all temporary
repaving shall conform to the street grades. Mounding up of the material over the trench and
covering the same with loose broken stone will not be considered as a compliance with the above
requirements. The temporary repavement shall be placed and maintained by the Contractor at
his own expense u11til permanent surfacing is completed. The Contractor shall immediately
remove and replace in a satisfactory condition any and all such pavement as shall become
unsatisfactory and not in accordance with the terms and intent of the specifications. Upon
completion of substantial parts of the project but not before the pipeline has been tested, the
temporary resurfacing shall be replaced with permanent resurfacing.
13.6 PAVING
a. General
Paving materials and methods of construction shall be in accordance with referenced

sections of the latest edition of the Standard Specifications of the Department of Public
Works and Highways, Republic of the Philippines. Thickness and extent of base course,
paving course and other construction details shall be as shown on the drawings. All
provisions contained in the referenced Standard Specification involving "measurement"
and "payment" are not applicable to work performed under this Contract.
b. Borrow
When sufficient suitable material is not available from the roadway excavations, additional
"borrow" materials shall be obtained from other sources. This "borrow" material shall be
in accordance with Item 107 of the referenced Standard Specification.
c. Subgrade Preparation
•
This itellJ _s_h~l,l_ ponsist of the preparation and conditioning of the subgrade to the full width
of the roadbed in accordance with Item 112 of the referenced Standard Specifications
and in conformity with the lines, grades, and cross-sections shown on the plans. This
Clause supersedes applicable Clauses in Clause 7.
d. Aggregate Base Course
This item shall consist of a foundation for the surface course, composed of gravel or
crushed stone and filler materials in accordance with Item 200 of the referenced Standard
Specifications. Grading shall be as indicated in Table 200~1. This shall be applied to the
gravel roadway and parking area.
e. Bituminous Concrete Surface Course
Tills item shall consist of <l pavement composed of bituminous concrete on R prepared
br1s0 in Hccordance with Item 310 of the referl9nced St:JilU~i·ci Specific<Jtions.
f. Portland Cement Concrete Pavement

f
. ·:·hi:; it 8 ,·n ::•hall consist of a p<1vement comrosed of l'o1tlanrj C•:- n·:,~nt •X·i.r.mtA en :1
r ,,;!,;<l~·~;:l L-·.1,;o in acc0rdanc~: with !t~m 31 Gof the rf:f(:~l"lm r.F.ri Jt::mdcli'Cl ~::.1x:c!riGntions .
.o; ., ....
I · ' ·/.
I.
CONSTRUCTION OF WATER SYSTEM FOR STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFIC/
SECTION V-I
14- PAINTING AND COATINGS
14.1 GENERAL
The work in cluded in this Clause consists of the furnishing of alf labor, materials, apparatus,
scaffolding, and all appurtenant worl< in connection with painting and coating in accordance with
these Specifications. Any subcontractor for painting and coating shall be approved by the
Engineer.
14.2 SCOPE
The following surfaces are to be painted, except where otherwise specified or shown:
a. above ground piping and other metal surfaces

b. all submerged metal surfaces
c. all exposed concrete excluding concrete reservoirs
d. all structural and miscellaneous steel
e. all equipment furnished without factory finished surfaces
f. all exposed steel mullions, ·tubular frames, door frames, steel sash, and metal windows
g. all sheet metal and ferrous metal \rim
h. all buildings, interior and exterior
i. all exposed concrete block masonry
j. all plain and corrugated G.l. sheets
k. steel tank shell exterior and interior surfaces
The following surfaces are not to be painted:
a. ferrous metals having approved plating or factory applied final pa int finishes;
b. non-ferrous metals; unless otherwise noted or indicated; galvanized metal shall not be
considered a non-ferrous metal; and
c. equipment with factory finished surface unless otherwise noted.
In no case shall any concrete, wood, metal, or any other surface requiring protection be left
unpainted even though not specifically defined herein.
14.3 RIGHT OF REJECTION
'
No exterior painting or inte rio r finish ing shall be done under conditions which may jeoparcfize the
appearance or quality of the painting or finishing in any way. The Engineer shall have the right to
reject all material or work that is unsatisfactory, and require the replacement of eithe r or both at
the expense of the Contractor.
14.4 PROTECTION OF THE WORK
The Contractor shall ta ke the necessary steps to protect the work of others during tr1e time his
worl< is in progress. The Contractor slla\1 be responsible for any and all damage to the work.
Paint shall be applied only during period of favorable weather.
14.5 WORKMANSHIP
All work shall be first ci<Jss and in accord<mce with best standard practices of the tmd e.
rh3 Contractor shall exnmine ct1refully all surft~ces to be painted nnd, before beginning any of t1is
work, shall see t11at the worl< of other trades has been left or installed in workmanlike condition to
receive paint.
~J1et<JI surf!lce~ ;,h.;Jil 1>3 c!1:::-i n. d !y . ;md frc·c f,.t,m m1ll $C<lle, ru st, Qr08 -~<:: . oil, ~,,. ::;ny ether
~ •.J.b.>tancas, '·Nhich could ~nf,-:.:,:i ii1J qual!ty :)f 1i11; p intin9.
H-!
CONSTRUCTION OF WATER SYSTEM FOR STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICJ
SECTION V- J
14 ·PAINTING AND COATINGS
Each coal of paint shall be applied at proper consistency and brushed evenly, free of brush
marks, sags, runs, and with no evidence of poor workmanship. Care shall be exercised to avoid
lapping of paint on glass or hardware. Paint shall be sharply cut to lines and finished paint
surfaces shall be free from defects or blemishes.
Protective covering shall be used to protect floors, fixtures, and equipment. Care shall be
exercised to prevent paint from being spattered onto surfaces which are not to be painted.
Surfaces from which such paint cannot be removed satisfactorily shall be painted or repainted, as
required, to produce a finish satisfactory to the Engineer.
No painting shall be done under conditions of weather, moisture, or temperature unsuited to good
work, nor until previous coat is hard and dry.
All painting materials shall be used in strict accordance with manufacturer's directions, spread or
flowed on smoothly with proper film thickness and without nuns, sags, or other defects.
14.6 STORAGE OF MATERIALS
The Contractor shall store all painting materials and equipment not in immediate use in a room
approved by the Engineer for that purpose. The receiving and opening of all paint matelials and
mixing shall be done in this room.
Necessary precautions shall be taken to prevent fire. Rags, waste, etc., soiled with paint shall be
removed from the premises at the end of each day's work, or stored in metal containers with
metal covers.
14.7 PREPARATION OF PAINT
Paint containers shall be delivered to the job site in the manufacturer's unopened containers and
shall be opened only when required for use. Paint shall be mixed only in the designated room or
space in the presence of Owner's representative. Paint shall be thoroughly stirred or agitated to a
uniformly smooth consistency suitable for proper application. Unless otherwise specified or
approved, no materials shall be reduced, changed, or used except in accordanca with
manufacturer's label or tag on the container. In all cases, paint shall be prepared and handled in
a manner to prevent deterioration and inclusion of foreign matter. •
14.8 PAINT TO BE PROVIDED TO OWNER
The Contractor shall leave on the job site a minimum of four (4) litres (1 gal.) of each type and
color of finish paint used in the project. Each gallon shall be properly labelled for identification.
14.9 CLEAN UP
Upon completion of his work. the Contractor shall remove all surplus materials. All paint spills
shall be removed and the entire premises shall be free from rubbish, debris, etc., caused by his
work. He shall present the work clean and free from blemish so that it is acceptable in every way.
All glass shall be cleaned of paint spots and polished, and the job made ready for occupancy by
t11e Owner.
'14.10 fv1ATERIALS
a. Mnterinls
Ti1G Contractor mny ~. t1b:st!tde c-tr.ci j:•:::ir,t rnaterials for t!1ose ~pac.ified in r: 1m1~e 1!1.:11,
r···o·.ddod :~e first rec.ei'/t<5 \\'(i:tc;;r, <"PPIC.Ifcti lfOm the f.r:£Jineer .·~taUng P'lrJt : ..liCI j)riJI' c.:;cd
:.: .i·;:.;!illrlcrl rnaleri &l ~ w:. r_(.;l' ::! i·1 :.n-Ti :· c·~·-. iilecJ 2.rj :1r.::. dppro\;\~d iur t.;S\~. · ( i'l8 !J~<iltlit1f!
l~o~{l.Jt iu1 ~;i·,c;B i.Je d ~hv-::1 eel to ~ :·. .:. j.:H.: i,J vnginal ccni8Hlers fJI'OpeJ iy l<rboll~tl hiiiaulli
I ,
SECTION V-I
evidence of tampering, substitution of contents, or of deterioration. A complete list of

materials proposed for use shall be submitted for Engineer's approval.
b. Colors and Samples
All finish colors shall be as selected by the Owner. In multicoat work using color
pigmented paints, each coat shall have sufficient variation of color to easily distinguish it
from preceding coat. Using specified or approved materials, three (3) sample panels of
each finish, including all coats thereof shall be prepared and submitted for the Owner's
approval. Completed work shall match approved colors and samples.
14.11 PREPARATION OF SURFACES
a. General
Except as otherwise specified, surfaces to be painted shall be clean, smooth, and dry.
The Contractor shall report to the Engineer in writing any surface which cannot be
properly prepared for painting. If work is commenced before defects have been reported
and corrected, any unsatisfactory finish shall be rectified by the Contractor at no cost to
the Owner.
b. Concrete and Masonry
All concrete and masonry surface shall cure thirty (30) days prior to painting. Dirt, dust,
oil, grease, efflorescence, and other deleterious matter shall be removed and surface
roughened when necessary to insure good paint adhesion. The method of surface
preparation shall be left to the discretion of the Contractor, provided results obtained are
satisfactory to the Engineer. Before application of resin emulsion paint, surfaces shall be
prepared in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Before application of oil base or
latex paints, surfaces shall be tested for presence of alkali. If alkali is present, surface
shall be neutralized as recommended by the manufacturer of the paint materials to be
applied.
c. Plaster
•
Dirt, dust, loose plaster, and other deleterious matter which would prevent good paint
adhesion shall be removed. All holes, cracks, and depressions shall be neatly filled with
patching plaster mixed and applied to match the existing plaster. Patches shall be
sanded flush and smooth and properly sealed before applying prime coat. After priming
surfaces, suction spots shall be touched up with additional prime coat material until
surfaces evidence a unifonm coating. ·
Enamel undercoats on smooth plaster shall be sandpapered by hand (with No.OO

sandpaper) and dusted clean before applying the succeeding coat.
d. Metal
Dirt, scale, and rust shall be removed by scrapping, wire bflJshing, :lllcl sanding or
sandblasting as required. Mill scales shall be completely remcJVed fn! rn 1'8bricated parts
of the new elevated s!eel tank. eitller in t11e shops or in the. f;co!C. Mill .. r.ales can be
removed in the shop either by Cll3:-tning or picklintJ. In such c.::1~ 3, lil t' ·Aeel rr1ust be
painted before rusting or surface soiling occurs with zinc dust, phenolic !Jtllners to effect
rroper adhesion of the first fi eld coal. If mill scales are rerr. ~v<.:d i:1 F''J fi eld P!'ior to
\'telding, 81l we !de~ j 'Jir.ts ~i10 u!ci lJc c:l ~<)r~d of slag ami welrJ s:J.~ t!'3r ~'Y :._, ·' oii i1J f;iU1\3r by
ilOl-ZI<.J 01' Wit h .-:,p.-A l: !r.~S'l !ii g Hl'-' ipiH~'Il!. Whef0 blnstill{J is l)i)t r. ;?r :IC'C.i, ('"· i rl•. :j , U lllCiinQ ,
or bru~ ~1 !ng al JY i)f: L; ~~' rl pro~:itl>)d ;;ulisfncto1y uerJm8 ol' f)G::mitiQ .s l '::',<<: . 'J.
SECTION V-I
Oil and grease shall be removed with mineral spirits or appropriate solvent. Before
painting, ferrous metal surfaces, including galvanized ferrous metal surfaces, shall be
pretreated with approved phosphoric acid etching cleaner in accordance with
manufacturer's direction to produce a chemically clean surface. Unless already
performed in accordance with specifications of other sections, abrasions and bare spots
in shop prime coatings shall be touched up with metal primer matching shop coatings.
Enamel undercoats shall be sandpapered by hand (with No. 00 sandpaper) and dusted
clean before applying succeeding coats.
e. Woodwork
Unless already properly sanded, woodwork shall be sandpape red smooth by hand.
Before priming surfaces, knots, pitch pockets and sap streaks shall be tho roughly cleaned
of residue and touched up with shellac varnish coating. After priming surface, nail holes,
cracks. and depressions shall be neatly filled with putty or other approved filler, colored to
match required finish. Enamel undercoats shall be sanded by hand (with No.OO
sandpaper) and dusted clean before applying succeeding coat.
14.12 APPLICATION OF PAINT
a. General
All painting and finishing shall be performed by skilled craftsmen. Each coat of pai_nt shall
be applied at proper consistency, evenly, and free of laps, sags, and runs and cut sharply
to required lines. Except as otherwise specified or required, paint shall be applied only
under dry and dust-free conditions that will insure properly finished surfaces, free of
defects and blemishes. Paint shall not be applied when temperature is likely to be above
32°C (90oF). Sufficient time shall be allowed between coats to insure proper drying. All
primer and intermediate coats shall be unscarred and completely integral at time of
application of each succeeding coat. The Engineer shall be notified when each coat has
been applied and is ready for inspection. Until each coat is inspected and approved by
Engineer, no succeeding coats shall be applied. Whenever two coats of a dark-colored
paint are specified, the first coat shall contain sufficient powdered aluminum to act as an
indicator for proper coverage when applying the second coat.
b. Methods of Application
Except as otherwise specified or when, in the opinion of the Engineer, a particular method
would produce unsatisfactory results, paint may be applied by brush, spray, or other
application method at the option of the Contractor.
c. Priming and Back Painting
1. Priming
Before installation, all surfaces of millwork which are to be painted shall be primed,
giving particular attention to sealing of cross-grained surfaces. In all cases, all work
shall be primed as soon as possible afttlr delivery to buildings, before or after
installation, as required, or, in case of prefabri cated iil3ms. at fabricator's shop or mill
before sllipment, if practicable. ~~e pt ~s c:!her.vis.:- specified, primings shall consist
of r;,·st coat hereinafter specified und€r Clause 14.12- Painting Systems.
?.. BC\c!~ Painting
Wr:cciwcr:-c. miii~Nork , ::Jnd C' 3S 8"//f;r~; to t)0 in~~a ll .::•j <1gainst concrete, m<tsonr:1. Ol"
r~l.:lUc-r ~-ilail be br~<.-1<: pa:ntej witl; on& c.o~i of 0xterior c;l paint.
SECTION V-I
14.13 PAINTING SYSTEMS

MANUFACTURER
or its approved equivalent
Dutch Boy Sherwin
Number: Williams:
Architectural Items
a. Exterior Finishes
1. On Concrete Walls
Two coats, Concrete

Masonry Paint 55 BOO A25WX1
2. Unprimed Ferrous Metal
First Coat:
Rust Inhibitive Ferrous
Metal Primer 20724 B16RX1
Second Coat:
Exterior Enamel 20-125 A'J7WX15
Third Coat:
Exterior Enamel 20-125 A'J7WX15
3. On Concrete Block Walls
First Coat:
Concrete Block-
primer sealer 130
Second Coal:
Concrete Masonry Paint 55BOO
Third Coal:
Concrete Masonry 55 BOO
or
Three Coats: A25WX1
4. On Wood
First Coat:
Exterior wood primer 25F
Second Coat:
Exterior enamel 10X
Third Coat:
Exterior enamel 10X
or
Three Coats:
Exterior enamel A'l'NX1
b. Interior Finishes
l.OG(ltions of the various fin lshes nre liste•i in t11e Finish Schedule on lhr-1 OiRWings or
else will be indicated t>y the Ow11ef.
Two coat~ of inl~·ri'~·r

semiglos~ Hl<lii.IGI 22101 A36WX7
I.
SECTION V- r
2. On Plaster
First Coat:
Pigmented sealer 103 A25XX1
Second Coat:
Enamel undercoater 103 A20WX1
Third Coat:
Interior semi-gloss enamel 22-101 A36WX7
3. Wood
First Coat:
Enamel undercoater -001
Second Coat:
Split coat enamel undercoater .001
Third Coat:
Interior semi-gloss enamel 23-101
or
Three Coats:
Interior semi-gloss enamel A36WX7
4. Wood Stain Finish
First Coat:
Oil stain with Filler 23-11 A48N2
Second Coat:
Boiled oil top coat 336-001 A48N2
5. Wood lacquer Finish
First Coat:
W ood paste filler
with natural oil 23-11 D70TX1
Second Coat:
Top coat of Lacquer 6~-064 T73CX10
c. Non-Architectural Items (Piping, Valves, Equipment, etc.)
Piping, valves, equipment, etc., in rooms are to be painted to match architectural

finishes as follows:
1. Galvanized Pipes and Duc ts
First Coat:
Galvanized iron-primer 37-744 B16YXL
Second Coat:
Interior semi-gloss enam el ?-2-1 01 A37WX15
2. Dlack Steel Pipes
First Coni:
Rust Inhibitive Metal ?nmer 041 B1GRX1
Second Coat:
I
I,
SECTION V- F
3. Mechanicalltems
aa) Ungalvanized ferrous metal
First Coat:
Rust inhibitive primer 37-745 B16RX1
Second Coat:
bb) Galvanized ferrous metal
First Coat:
Galvanized iron primer 37-745 B16YX1
Second Coat:
cc) Ungalvanized ferrous metal corrosive environment
First Coat:
Chemical and moisture
resistant primer 20-126 B69NX11
Second Coat:
resistant enamel 20-125 B69WX16
dd) Galvanized ferrous metal corrosive environment
First Coat:
resistant primer 20-126 B69NX11
Second Coat:
resistant enamel 20-125 B69WX16
ee) Submerged ungalvanized ferrous metal •
First Coat:
Anti-corrosion primer 60-709 B69NX11
Second Coat:
Epoxy ester enamel 369WX6
ff) Submerged galvanized metal
First Coat:
Anti-corrosion primer 60-709 369NX11
Second Coat:
Epoxy ester enamel B69WX6
14·7
I.
SECTION V-1
gg) Bu ried miscellaneous ferrous

surface, valves, and flanged
joints (excluding pipe) (As noted in 1/a & b below)
4. Steel Tank Shelf
aa) Exterior
First Coat:
Red Lead Primer
Second and
Third Coats:
Silver Finish Aluminum Paint
bb) Interior
First Coat:
Non-toxic primer such as Dutch Boy Red Oxide epoxy primer No. 20-742
with Nalcolyst or any approved equal
Second and
Third Coats:
Non-toxic white enamel such as Dutch Boy white epicote enamel No. 20-
125 with Nalcolyst or any approved equal
1/a. Adjoining coal tar enamel coated steel pipe - Coatings shall consist of coal tar
epoxy application in two coatings (15 mil. eacl1) and shall iJA Koppers Bitumastic
~Jo . .50, cold applied or approved substitute, follovving which .suc h .s urf~ce shall be
t:~lclosed in 10 mil thick plastic sheet with all joints and ed~e.s lapped ancl sen led
with tape.
b. Adjoining a!l other types of pipe - Rich c~ment mortar Goaling to r~ minimum
t11id <.noss of 6 mm , following which such surfnces shall be ~nUo:>01J in 10-mil tilick
f-·l:!::-.ti~; s heet ·t;ith ali joints .1nd eclge~ lapped a nd seaiG 1J wilh t~1pe.
'i4-8
l.
SECTION V- PART A
15- SECURITY FENCING
15.1 GENERAL
The Contractor shall furnish and install the fencing as shown and specified. Fencing shall be
topped with three (3) lines of barbed wire unless otherwise shown. Fencing shall be 1.83m (6 ft)
high unless otherwise shown.
15.2 CHAIN LINK FENCE
a. Materials
1. -Fabric shall be 63.5 mm (2-1/2 in.) diamond, type A, No. 11 yage wire.
2. Fabric ties shall be No.9 gage galvanized steel wire, spaced 0.35m (14 in.) apart on
posts and 0.61m (2 ft.) apar1 on rails. Aluminum ties will not be permitted. A
continuous No. 7 gage galvanized steel wire shall be interlaced with the fabric along
the extreme bottom of the fence, and shall be pulled taut.
3. Line posts shall be standard weight 63.0 mm (2-1/2 in.) 00 pipe, 5.44 kg per metre
(3.65 lb per foot).
4. End and corner posts shall be 76.0 mm (3 in.) 00 pipe, 8.63 kg per metre (5. 79 lb per
foot).
5. Gate posts shall be 102 mm (4 in.) OD pipe, 13.56 kg per metre (9.1 lb per foot).
6. Top rail and braces shall be 41.3 mm (1-5/8 in.) OD pipe, 3.38 kg per metre (2.27 lb
per foot).
7. Nuts, bolts, and screws shall be of galvanized steel, minimum size 9.5 mm (3/8 in.)
8. Swing gate frames, if any, shall be constructed of pipe at least as heavy as the top
rails for the fence and shall be fabricated by welding. Each gate lead shall be
provided with at leact one diagonal brace. Frames shall be galvanized after
fabrication. Galvanized malleable iron fittings for. latching the gate shall be provided.
Fabric shall match the fabric used in fence. Each, pair of gates shall be provided with
heavy drop rod latch assembly with a locking device for a padlock.
9. Concrete shall have minimum compressive strength of 13.8 Mpa (2000 psi) at the
age of twenty-eight (28) days.
b. Installation
1. Post shall be set plumb and shall be centered in concrete encasement. The top
SUifaces of the concrete encasement shall be sloped outward to shed water and shall
have a neat appearance. Line posts shall be spaced not more than 3.0 m (10 ft.)
apart and shall be set in the ground to a depth of 0.91 m (3 ft.). Post shall be set in
concrete bases not less than 0.30 m (12 in.) in diameter.
?.. Bracing shall be provided m ~II end, g.ste and corner posts, the latter in boih
directions. Horizontal brace rails shall be set midway between top rail and qrouncl
ltmning from the corner. end, and or gatf) post to rist line post. Diagonal tension
members shall connect tatltly between posts below !wrizontal braces.
3. 1\n'} Q<llvflnized co<ll;~~g <l:lr<12Q8d rl'.Jr'ng construction of tlv:; f~ncing ~;ha ll be rep8irorJ
h.y application of m0i;eil G<.=:lvc.-··.·V,;!d, ·::or B!~!Jroved equnl.
I I
15-1
CONSTRUCTION 0.-: WATER SYSTEM FOR STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION V - PART A
15- SECURITY FENCING
15.3 BARBED WIRE
Barbed wire shall be 2-strand, 4 point, No. 12-1/2 gage galvanized steel wire with 14 gage barbs
spaced at 13 em on centers.
15.4 CONCRETE HOLLOW BLOCKS
a. Materials
When part of fence is made of CHB, it shall be of 100 mm (4") CHB unless shown
otherwise on the Drawings. Masonry works shall conform wilh the requirement of Clause
19- Concrete Masonry.
b. Columns
Gate columns and fence columns sizes and details shall be as shown on the Drawings.
Concrete works shall confonn with the requirement of Clause 7- Reinforced Concrete.
c. Gates and Frames
Gates and frames shall be fabricated and of sizes indicated on the Drawings and shall be
of the quality and workmanship acceptable to the Engineer. The Contractor shall
guarantee the gates and frames against any defect due to fabrication and installation.
Before fabrication of the gate and frames, the inside surfaces shall be shop painted with
one coat of an approved rust-inhibitive synthetic primer. Fabric shall be the same as
specified above and welded evenly throughout the frame. The Contractor shall provide
all necessary hardware which shall conform with the requirements Clause 9 - Steel and
Miscellaneous metal work.
d. Installation
The Contractor shall erect the fence as shown on the Drawings so that the finished fence
is plumb, taut, true to tine and grade, and complete in all details. The Contractor £halt
stake down fence where required. Columns shall be sp~ced and constructed as shown
on the Drawings.
15.5 SHOP DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall submit, for the Engineer's approval, complete shop drawings which shall
include all details requested by the Engineer. The Engineer shall approve these drawings before
installation. ·
SECTION V - PART A
16 - FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
16.1 GENERAL
Fire hydrant assemblies shall either be of t11e conventional stand-up type or the underground
spring type, both of which shall be designed to withstand a minimum water working pressure of
1.0 MPa (150 psi).
The component materials and protective coating of fire hydrant assemblies shall be free from
toxic substances and shall not foster microbiological growth nor give rise to taste, color,
cloudiness or discoloration of the water which they come in contact with.
16.2 STAND-UP TYPF. FIRE HYDRANT
a. Commercial Type Fire Hydrant
Hydrant head is the part of the fire hydrant top section containing the valve mechanisms
while the below-ground section is the portion of the hydrant assembly referred to as the
bury section.
Hydrant head shall have a 150 mm (6 in.) flanged inlet, a 1 oo mm (4 in.) hose pumper
outlet, and a 63 mm (2-1/2 in.) hose outlet. The outlets shall have National Standard
Hose Threads with bronze or plastic caps with chains. The hydrant head shall have a
heavy duty body of grade A bronze conforming with ASTM Specification 8-62 or gray or
ductile cast iron in accordance with AWWA C503 and shall meet Underwriters National
Standard Specifications of fire hydrant heads. The bury section shall be made of cast
iron or steel while all working parts (valve mechanisms) shall be made of bronze. The
stem shall be provided with at least two (2) 0-rings. Hydrant heads made of C. I. shall be
thoroughly machined and cleaned on the inside and the outside. The inside surface shall
be coated with epoxy paint or approved equal, while the outside surface shall be painted
with at least two (2) coats of paint or approved substitute. Hydrant heads made of bronze
may be coated with a suitable clear sealer. The bury section shall be applied with the
required protection for C.\. or sleet (as the case may be). The design , materials of
construction, and fabrication shall be in accordance with AWWA Standard for Wet-Barrel
Fire Hydrants (AWWA C503).
b. Angle Valve Fire Hydrant (Residential Type)
Angle valve fire hydrant shall conform wit11 the Underwriters National Standard
Specifications. They shall have a heavy duty body of bronze conforming with ASTM
Specification B-62 or gray or ductile cast iron, in accordance with AWWA C503. They
shall have an inside threaded inlet size of 75 mm (3 in.) o r 100 mm (4 in.) and a 63 mm
(2-1/2 in.) hose outlet as specified or as shown in the' drawings. The outlet shall have
National Standard Fire Hose Coupling Screw Threads with a bronze or pl<~stic cap with
chain. The valve shall open counter-clockwise. Angle valve fire hydrant and riser pipe
(bury section) shall be coated/painted similarly as that of commercial-type fire hydrant
head.
c. Wrenches
Tile contractor and/or supplier (as t11e case m8y be) shall provide three (3) sets of
pentagon spanner wrenches that will operat;:: all valves specified in Clauses 16.2(a) and
16.2(b) above .
16.3 UNDERGROUND SPRING-TYPF. HYDRANT SYSTEM
Th(? unrie;-or••urxl r-prin~J-iypo l1ydrant ;,ystem shal! ccnsi~t of til e fo!lm•Jing: (a) undargroun(l
~·~-ri0q llycJra,n, (b) f~v;·i:CitJ!c shlnd-pip~. ;.lfld (c) wrfaca bo;<. T!IIJ spring t1ydra nt shall ::0
c-:,i1m~.:t::.t! uir-::ci!y to t:1e wnter rr1ain lim: as a new ii'.staiintion c.r can 0e used to repla~8 <1
10-1
I.
CONSTRUCTION OF WATER SYSTEM FOR STANDARD TECHN ICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION V- PART A
16 -FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
damaged or inconveniently located conventional stand-up hydrant using its existing underground
connections. The built-in spring action valve, when connected to the water mains, and subject to
its inherent pressure, will require the use of a special stand pipe actuator to access the mains,
thus functioning similarly as that of access valve and stand-up hydrant assembly. All components
of the hydrant shall be interchangeable between units.
a. Underground Spring Hydrant
The underground spring hydrant shall be composed of parts functioning individually and
in combination as a whole unit when assembled, e.g., body, bayonet bonnet, spring,
hydrant valve ar.d valve seat.
The body and bayonet bonnet shall be made of ductile iron or gray iron confonning with
AWWA C11 0 or equivalent standards. The hydrant valve and spring shall be made of
stainless steel, phosphor bronze or approved equal. The valve seat shall be of new
natural or synthetic rubber with minimum durometer hardness of 70 or approved equal.
Rubber seats shall be resistant to micro-biological attack, copper poisoning and ozone
attack. The body and bayonet bonnet shall be coated with epoxy paint or approved
equal. Hydrant valve and spring shall not be coated.
b. Hydrant Portable Stand Pipe
The portable stand pipe shall be suitable for conveying water from valve of the .spring
hydrant to a standard fire hose connection .
The stand pipe shall be made of stainless steel, aluminum alloy or approved equal and
shall be equipped with a bayonet connection for appropriate mating with the spring
hydrant. It shall have a nozzle of 63 mm (2-1/2 in.) in diameter with threads conforming
with the National Standard Fire Hose Coupling Screw Threads with plastic cap or cap of
the same material as the stand pipe. The stand pipe shall have interchangeable parts.
All 0-ring seals shall be neoprene or approved substitute.
c. Surface Box
The surface box shall be made of gray cast iron conforming to ASTM A48 -76. It sha ll
have a minimum hatchway size of 200 mm x 200 mm and supplied with chain lid/hinges,
locking device, key and lever. It shall be coated with black bitumen or approved equal
internally and externally.
The surface box shall be designed to resist normal traffic !Dad and shall be held in place
by a concrete pad of 250 mm (10 in.) minimum thickness and minimum of 100 mm (4 in .)
width from the side of the surface box.
16.4 TESTING, INSPECTION AND REJECTION
a. Mechanical and Hydrostatic Tests
While the assembled stand-up hydrant or spring valve/stand-pipe assembly is not W'(ler
pressure, it shall be operated through a complete c~en-and-close cycle of all outlet
valves. Assembled hydrants s~all ta subjectP.d to <1 sh0p ~est under hydraulic pressure of
2.0 MPa (300 psi). The test shai! be made with the complete interior of ttle 11ydrant
assembly under pressure and all outlet valves closed. During this test, there shctll be no
l ~:<lknw~ through the c2.sings or Jc i:.~s 0t u·e- 2ssenl bl2':1 hyrJrant nor t11rougl1 the 'til hi,}'>.
·;-he tcs'l :::\mil be conducted for a S\~~i1::.i ~ rt ·(• n~ t0 aHew ~·;r a t.n crot~')\1 :\wei< Gf C~h ~ ui: ts
c:f possibl0 lenkaoe whictr in no c.?:~.::l :;;n&li L::- = ~)ss thm·; fl'• c c~.~ minuh::s.
·. J · .~
I.
SECTION V- PART A
16 -FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
b. Inspection and Rejection
All works performed under this standard shall be subject to inspection and approval by
LWUA's authorized representative who shall, at all times, have access to all places of
manufacture where the materials are being produced or fabricated or where tests are
being conducted and who shall be accorded full facilities for inspection and observation of
tests. Any hydrant or part that he may determine as not conforming with the requirements
of this standard shall be made satisfactory or it shall be rej ected and replaced. Whether
LWUA has an inspection at the plant or not, the manufacturer is required to submit an
affidavit of compliance with the requirements of this standard.
16.5 MARKING
All hydrants shall have permanent markings that identify the manufacturer by name, initials or
insignia and the year the hydrant is manufactured.
16··3
SECTION V- PART A
17- ELECTRO-MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
17.1 GENERAL
a. The Contractor shall furnish, deliver, install, test and commtsston at site all
mechanicaVelectrical equipment specified herein. He shall provide the necessary
supervision, tools, materials, supplies and appurtenances for the proper installation,
testing and operation of the completely assembled equipment.
b. All equipment furnished and installed shall be brand new and non-obsolete (at most three
years ex-stock), unused and guaranteed from defects in material, design and/or
workmanship. Importation papers of ex-stock equipment shall be submitted. No
equipment nor material shall be delivered for installation on site prior to the return of
acceptable shop drawings submitted by the Contractor in accordance with Clause 2. The
Contractor shall submit, together with the shop drawings, a certification of the availability
of spare parts and service locally in case of system breakdown for a period of five (5)
years.
c. The woi'K under this Contract shall be done in accordance with the requirements of the
latest edition of the Philippine Electrical Code, the rules, regulations and requirements of
electrical and telephone utilities as far as their permanent services are concerned, and
the government ordinances enforced in the locality. In case of conflict with these
specifications or the drawings, the preceding clause shall govern.
d. The Contractor shall be responsible for securing all necessary permits ·from the
appropriate government authorities at his own expense both for the electrical and
mechanical construction and for the operation of the system upon completion of the work.
The Contractor shall furnish the Owner with the approved Certificate of Final Electrical
and Mechanical Inspection.
e. All electrical equipment, materials and components shall be as specified unless

specifically exempted, in which case they shall be the best of their respective kind.
Samples of material to be supplied shall be submitted for approval when required by the
Engineer. All electrical equipment and materials shall bear the manufacturer's inspection
label, unless exception to this requirement is inherent to a particular item.
f. The Contractor shall coordinate and work with all the 9ther parties with whose apparatus
he shall connect part/s of the work required herein. The Contractor shall prepare
drawings or details of the equipment he supplied, location of sleeves, conduits and
supports that may be required by other trades and shall furnish the Owner with at least
five (5) copies of these drawings, for the information of all parties concerned. The
approval of such drawings shall not relieve the Contractor in any way from the
responsibility of properly locating and/or coordinating his work with those of other parties
involved.
g. The minimum efficiencies specified herein are the minimum laboratory efficiencies for a
completely staged unit. The Contractor shall furnish copies of certified non-witnessed
performance test for the imported equipment. In the <1bsence of such certification and for
locally-manufactured/assembled equipment, a local laboratory testing shall be conducted
on the equipment in tl!e presence cf c1llthorizw LWUA representatives. In no case shall
tr.o Gontrftc!or be allo·.ved to deliver and install the lln;t until a satisfactory laboratory test
is att<lilhYJ. The cost of making the test shall be borne entirely by the Contractor.
"(tl~CC!i1tractor shall be r~spo:1~ibl.e for <JII co!Tlponents, and for satisfactory installation
and opemtion of the completely assembled unit, in~uding the motors, motor controllers
unci }H i~ np! ~.
:. ! ::·:, ''::;"ir ·~·, ;·,t 11:1:..! l!~E.'!t::l!:-ll.;0 .-, c:hr:l! ne au~rflnlee~i for a porioci of ctt lr::;1st one (1 ) yam nf
;, .'•·l;::-_, ;·: c;J :;~:::ll')iL T~.:; C~ml1sc10r shnll furni:>h ar.d ro3ploco, \Vithout cost ·i o tlJv
'j 7-1
SECTION V - PART A
Owner, any equipment or part that is defective or shows undue wear within one (1) year
after acceptance of the contract work. A warranty certificate shall be issued to the
Owner, effectivity date of which shall start on the same day the uniVs has/have been
accepted. A duplicate copy of the same shall be furnished to the Engineer. All incidental
expenses relative to the warranty work shall be bome entirely by the Contracto r.
j. All mechanical and electrical equipment shall be tested to the satisfaction of the Engineer
before any facility is put into operation. Tests shall be made to determine whether the
equipment has been properly assembled, aligned, adjusted and connected. Any
changes, adjustments or replacements required to make the equipment operate as
specified shall be carried 0ut by the Contractor as part of the work. In addition to the
mentioned testing conditions, the following field test requirements should be considered
for electrical equipment, materials and components.
1. System Test - Each panelboard shall be tested with the powe r equipment
connected, circuit breakers closed and all loads and fixtures permanently connected
for their intended operation for a minimum of 24 hours continuous operation in the
presence of the Engineer, at the expense of the Contractor. The entire installation
shall be free from any ground fault and from any short circuit. In no case shall the
insulation resistance be less than that allowed by PEC regulations for Electrical
Equipment of Buildings and/or manufacturer's recommendations. Failures shall be
corrected in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer.
2. Performance Test and Equipment Setting - It shall be the responsibility of the

Contractor to test the entire electrical system for the proper equipment operation.
Setting of all protective relays, pilot devices, and auxiliary systems shall conform with
the operating requirements of the Installations. The Contractor shall turn over the
entire electrical installation in a satisfactory working condition.
k. Upon completion of the contract work, the Contractor shall arrange that a field-testing be
conducted on the electro-mechanical equipment by the Engineers/s in his presence. The
test shall be made to show that the installed equipment satisfies its specifications and
operational requirements. The contract work will not be accepted and final payment will
not be recommended until satisfactory test has been ma9e. In the event of failure of the
equipment to meet the guaranteed efficiencies or to operate to the Engineer's satisfaction
during the first official field test, the Contractor shall make~ such modifications and repairs
and shall rec.eive no additional compensation therefore. Failure of the equipment to meet
the cont1·act requirements in three (3) official field tests shall be a ground for rejection.
Expenses to be incurred, including the travel expenses of LWUA Engineers, during the
second and last official fleld test shall be charged to the Contractor. The test run shall be
made within thirty (30) days upon receipt of the Contractor's request for such testing.
Provided, however, that if the Engineer/s fail to make tile test within the said period, the
field test shall not further delay the acceptance of the work.
Above field test shall be made only after the Contractor h<ls furnished the Engineer/s a
copy of satisfactory results of his initial or preliminar; tests on the equipment c1s part of
his work and without cost to the Owner.
During the testing of the equipment, the Contmc.tor shall ammge to h<Jve a'-' ~liJab1 ~
qunlified persons who shalf instruct the plnnt personnei in the open~tion and c~re ~hareof.
Only after 811 the equipment ~;8VG been tested and a.LijustGd shnil the new f<'~G ilities be put
into operation. Acceptanc~ te~ting of equipment ~hall not inch;de initial stmt-up <.nd
adjustment of equipment. All equipment shall be tested for proper oper::~.tion and undergo
;nHiCJ I m1justrnents prior 1o ac(..af)t~l ;•J;:).
!!, nt th0 i !me of acGap·~n cc t;:,rn.) . th:·: f'•l t ii;~p· ~- nl :s :vJt in •JJori{!i'lfJ i)i.flo:~r. ~!1e ::::c;ilc:J;·
:..lln!i di r,:cl H1e Contr._:Jctcr :c 1 n2.:.;~ ::rx<n:..:t : 3:.o8:'/ f\ ~' <: ! i''> or <Ji:ij u~:ill fllHi:i.
SECTION V- PART A
1. Before the acceptance of the work, Contractor shall furnish, for each piece of equipment
supplied, two (2) complete bound sets giving information listed below (in English
Language):
t. Clear and concise instruction for the operation, adjustme nt and lubrication and other
maintenance of the equipment.
2. Parts list of the equipment with catalog numbers and other data necessary for
ordering replacement parts in the future.
3. All equipment furnished under these Specifications shall comply with al~ applicable
mandatory safety codes.
m. Where materials of construction are not specified, the Supplier sh all use first class
commercial grades best suited for the particular use for which they are employed.
n. The Contractor shall employ licensed Mechanical and/or Electrical Engineer/s to

supervise the mechanical and/or electrical works as required by Republic Act No. 8495,
known as the Philippine Mechanical Engineering Law and Republic Act No. 7920 known
as the New Electrical Engineering Law.
17.2 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
a. Scope of Work
The Contractor shall furnish, deliver, install, test and commission in accordance with
these Specifications and drawings submersible/vertical/horizo ntal centrifugal pump and
motor set, complete with motors controller, discharge elbow/head, discharge piping with
valves and fittings; standby diesel generating set/industrial type, diesel engine complete
with combination right angle gear drive , chlorinating equipment and other appurtenances
as specified herein and shown on the drawings.
b. Submersible Pump
1. Operating Requirements - The pumps sh~ll meet the following operating

requirements:
Descriptions
1. Number of units
ii. Minimum capacity at design head, U s
iii. Design head, TDH, m
i\'. Minimum pump laboratory efficiency at design head exclusive of pump column
friction, percent
" · Nominal size of column pipe, mm
vi. Length of column pipe (from bottom of discharge elbow to top of bowl assembly) ,
m
vii. Design speed, rpm
y iii. Maximum diameter of motor/pump bowl including cable ouard, mrn
ix. Length of submersible cable, m
x. Maximum Motor Horse power, HP
There shall be no point ·within the operating range of the pu mp 'Nherein the req uired
horsepower exceeds the rated motor horsepowP.r. !n ()ddition to the nb0'te
r.~q uircments, lhe cJf;SiGn r oint ·;iwll he l•)cated wilhin the !Jt:;! flffic.ien·~Y t8n\iiJ of . :1G
fll.tmp. Ertkioncy r3ng:; shail !)O \'.litr!in the -6c;., l,f tt1e pucnp ..; [lf:2i\ dlici:m~y (l!.CJ':. x
F'Pf:=.).
SECTION V- PART A
2. Pump Construction
i. Pump Element - The impellers shall be of the semi-open or enclosed type,

constructed of bronze or stainless steel, accurately fitted, smoothly finished, and
dynamically balanced at normal pump speeds. Impellers constructed of
thermoplastic material may be used only when the computed down thrust at
design condition is less than 2000 lbs., with a motor rating not to exceed 5 HP.
They shall have removable wearing rings and lateral seal rings mounted on their
companion cases. The bowl cases shall be constructed of closed grained cas\
iron or stainless steel. Cast iron bowls shall be provided with non-toxic epoxy or
glass enamel lining. Pump bearings shall be at least 2-1/2 times the diameter of
the shaft. The pump shaft shall be of type 416 stainless steel.
ii. Column Pipe - The column pipe for the deepwell pump shall be seamless black
iron not lighter than schedule 40, furnished in 3.0 metres (10ft) maximum length,
and shall be connected with threaded couplings. The pump suction shall include
a stainless steel strainer. The inlet area shall be equal to at least five (5) times
the impeller inlet area. A non-leak check valve shall be provided and installed at
the top portion of the bowl assembly.
iii. The pump shall have a nameplate showing the serial number of the equipment
and the name of the manufacturer. The nameplate shall show the capacity in
litres per second, TDH in metres and rated speed in revolutions per minute .. Such
other information as the manufacturer may consider necessary for complete
identification shall be shown on the plate. The nameplate of the distributing agent
shall not be acceptable. The nameplate shall be securely fastened to the
equipment in a location affording easy viewing.
3. Motor - The motor shall be of squirrel cage, submersible induction type,

rewindable/non-rewindable, rated at (480V/240), phase (1/3),
3500 rpm, 60 hertz AC. The motor shall be designed for continuous duty operation
and shall have a minimum service factor of 1.15. The motor shall be water-filled and
shall incorporate a mechanical seal to restrict foreign matter from entering the motor.
The thrust bearings shall be of ample capacity to carry the weight of all rotating parts
plus the hydraulic thrust and shall be an integral ·~art of the driver. It shall be
equipped with expansion diaphragm to compensate for filling water
expansion/contraction due to temperature changes. It shall be fitted with a
permanent non-corrosive nameplate on which all NEMA standard motor data shall be
stamped or engraved in English/Metric. A duplicate of the plate shall be attached to
the discharge elbow to afford ready identification of the installed submersible motor.
c. Vertical Turbine Pump
1. Operating Requirements - The pumps shall meet the following operating

requirements:
Descriptions:
i. Number of units
ii. Minimum capacity Cit design head, Us
iii. Design head. TDH, m
iv. Minimum pump labcmtory efiiciency at design head ;.;xclusive of purnp column
friction, percent
v. Nominal ~;ize of column ripe, rnr:1
vi. l.9ngtll of c·~ lt:rnn pipe (fr )ITi br.-Horn of ;-;upport!ro :1an(p t·J li.'P of bov11
~ssernbly), lrl
'li·, . C\ :dQn sp:cd, r~m
·; .,. _I
!.
SECTION V- PART A
viii. Maximum bowl diameter, mm

ix. Maximum Motor Horse power, HP
There shall be no point within the operating range of the pump wherein the required
horsepower exceeds the rated motor horsepower. In addition to the above
requiremenfs, the design point shall be located within the best efficiency range of the
pump. Efficiency range shall be within the -5% of the pump's peak efficiency (0.05 x
PPE).
2. Pump Construction
i. Pump Element - The impellers shall be of the semi-open or enclosed type,

constructed of bronze, accurately fitted, smoothly finished, and dynamically
balanced at normal pump speeds. They shall have removable bronze wearing
rings and lateral seal rings mounted on their companion cases. The bowl cases
shall be constructed of closed-grained cast iron with non-toxic epoxy or glass
enamel lining. Pump bearings shall be bronze and synthetic rubber combination ·
type, which shall be removable. Pump bearings shall be at least 2-1/2 times the
diameter of the shaft. The pump shaft shall be of type 416 stainless steel.
ii. Column Pipe and Line Shaft- The column pipe for the vertical turbine pump shall
not be lighter than schedule 40 seamless steel pipe, furnished in 3.0 metres (10
ft) maximum length, and shall be connected with threaded couplings._ The joints
shall be bulled to insure perfect column alignment after assembling. The shaft
shall be furnished in interchangeable section not over three (3) metres (1 0 ft) in
length. It shall be coupled with extra-strong threaded coupling machined from
solid steel bar and shall have a diameter capable of transmitting the required
power carrying the necessary weight and thrust without vibration. The line shaft
shall be type 416 stainless steel. The vertical turbine pump shall be provided with
sta inless steel cone type strainer which shall have a net inlet opening area of not
less than three (3) times the cross-sectional area of the suction pipe.
iii. Headshaft - The headshaft to be provided with. the pump assembly shall be
designed to include adjusting nut and locknut and shall be type 416 stainless
steel. ·
iv. Discharge Head - The discharge head shall be of the above surface type of
either cast iron or steel and shall include a 16 mm (5/8") thick sole plate to be
grouted in place after the pump has been aligned. The well shall be sealed using
rubber gasket between the discharge head and the sole plate as shown on the
drawings. The discharge flanges shall be sized as specified and shall meet the
requirements of ANSI specifications 816-5. The stuffing box shall be constructed
with bronze bearing or bushing below the packing and shall be readily accessible.
The stuffing box leakage can be collected and drawn off through a pipe
connected to the discharge head.
v. The pump shall have a nameplate showing ti1e serial number of the equipment
clnd the name of the manufacturer. The namep:ate shall show the capacity in
litres per second, TDH in metres and rated speed in revolutions per minute. Such
c·Hler information as the manufacturer may consider necessary for complete
i11entitication shall be shown on the plate. Trle nameplate of the distributing agent
shall not be acceptable. The nameplate shall be securely fastened to the
e(] uiprnont in a locati cn affo1ding easy v:ev1in9.
3. ~l'~'.'i (\•' -· : h;.:> Contractor slwll provide and in:-;trlll a vartic:: l llollovJSiloft motor ln tlw
i-i' ~ .: o:·!.:~·-:1 r: ~tmf.!i n.o st<Hio,, <~S ::;ho•.vn on the urawll:gs. Th-3 motot sllall be mtcd a~
SECTION V- PART A
17~ ELECTRO~MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
per operating requirements schedule and shall be of the squirrel cage, induction type
with non-reversing ratchet mechanism, rated at (460/230) volts , _ _ 1/3
phase, 1800 rpm, 60 HZ AC with 1.15 service factor. The motor shall be NEMA
design 8 with drip-proof enclosure. Motor shall have Class 8 or Class F insulation
with temperature rise as specified by NEMA standard for class of insulation used. It
shall be fitted with a permanent non-corrosive nameplate in which all NEMA standard
motor data are stamped/engraved in English and Metric units.
d. Horizontal Centrifugal Pump
1. General - The horizontal centrif:..;gal pump shall be used to pump water from the
impounding reservoir to the distribution system, and shall be of the split case, end
suction or multi-stage horizontal type as required.
2. Operating Requirements - The pumps shall meet the following operating

requirements:
Descriptions:
i. Number of unitls
ii. Minimum capacity at design head, Us
iii. Design head, TDH, m
iv. Minimum pump laboratory efficiency at design head exclusive of pump column
friction, percent
v. Nominal size of column pipe, mm
vi. Required Net Positive Suction Head, m
vii. Location of pump suction strainer, m
viii. Design speed, rpm
ix. Maximum Motor Horsepower, HP
There shall be no point within the operating range of the pump wherein the required
horsepower exceeds the rated motor horsepower. In addition to the above
requirements, the design point shall be located within the best efficiency range of the
pump. Efficiency range shall be within the -5% of the pump's peak efficiency (0.05 x
PPE).
3. Pump Construction- The pump shall be (specify type) consisting mainly of casing ,
impeller shaft. The pump and motor shall be directly coupled (specify if chained
coupled or direct coupled) horizontally and shall be firmly mounted on a common
bed. The pump shall be designed to operate safely at all times without cavitation at
any actual head in the operating range. ·
i. Casing - The casing sh<JII be cast iron or stainless steel designed to withstand
internal pressure vibration. Cast Iron bowls shall be provided with non-toxic
epoxy or glass enamel lining.
ii. Impellers - The impellers shall be enclosed type of bronze or stainless steel
accurately fitted, smoott1ly finished and dynamically balanced nt normal pump
~;peeds.
1ii. Pump Shaft -The sh3ft shall be designed to have adequ<ite (li~H ,-~,;tor considGring
thG power transmission, pump thrust, criUcal velocity and denection CJild shall be
rrl')cisely fflbric a~ed <~nd finished. The pump st1aft shall he nKu111factur::::d of
6iainl~ss 0teel and .:::1all be provid•;rJ •sith l)J'On?G or ~>lainl c~:-s .~;h:;O'PS tiH1l n,-c
i..~:-t~ily 1em-:. v;;t:s .::-,;! I; rc·pi J.ceaoi 8.
SECTION V- PART A
iv. Accessories - The motor shall be mounted on a common base plate complete
with all related accessories for a completely assembled unit. Each pump shall be
equipped with shaft coupling, air release valve/air bleeder, pressure gauge and
vacuum gauge.
4. Motor- The motor shall be squirrel cage, induction type, rated (460/230)
volts, __ (1/3) phase, 3600 rpm/1800 rpm, 60HZ AC with 1.15 minimum service
factor. The motor shall be either a NEMA design B, or JEC B or its equivalent with
drip-proof enclosure. Motor shall be of class B or Class F insulation with temperature
rise as specified by NEMA standards for class of insulation used. It shall be fitted
with permanent non-corrosive nameplate on which all standard data shall be
stamped/engraved in English.
e. Diesel Engine
1. General - The engine shall be of the (air/water) cooled, heavy duty, 4-

cycle, (naturally aspirated/turbocharged) industrial type and shall develop the full
continuous horsepower required by the pump and the right angle gear drive using
diesel fuel when operating at speed not exceeding 1800 rpm. The engine shall be
rated and have characteristics as follows;
i. Design speed (rpm)

ii. Minimum continuous power rating at design speed (BHP)
iii. Maximum specific fuel consumption Obs/Bhp-hr)
The above horsepower requirement shall be the minimum continuous duty output at
the pump shaft. A certified periormance graph which includes the brake horsepower
curve and the fuel consumption curve shall be furnished. The data shall be corrected
for an ambient temperature of 100°F. The curves shall allow for all losses due to
engine-driven accessories including drive shaft and gear drive losses.
The engine shall have aluminum pistons, removable type cylinder sleeves, heavy
duty precision type bearings and other features common to heavy duty engines.
The engine to be furnished shall be provided wilh a Power Take-Off (PTO) clutch
assembly that shall disanoage in normal operation-and --shall pemiit the gear drive to
be engaged for the operation of the pump. The engine shall be manufactured by
Perkins, Cummins or approved substitute.
i. Starter - The engine shall be equipped with 12 volts DC solenoid engaged

electric motor starter. ·
ii. Lubri cating System - The lubricating system sha ll have a vane type oil pump, a
by-pass oil filter, an oil pressure gauge and oil level indicator.
iii. Exhaust System -The engine shall be equipped with a residential silencer, sized
in accordance with the engine manufacturer's recommendation. Maximum back
pressure measured at the exhaust header shall not be more than :350 rnm (14 in.)
of water column. The silencer shall be fabricated of carbon st&el designed for
1000°F and !>hall be shop-painted witfl silicon base high heat res1sting a!wninum
paint. Tile silencer slwll be inst8lled with flexible metal exp8nsion section of
stainless steel and not less than 450 mm (18 in.) in length as shown on the
Drawings and shall be tiesigned together with all pipBs, bends, hol t~. ~1uts and
clamps fer ternperah;rt: e;f not !ess lhan 1000"F. The .::ntire O<·lau.<:t <> s ;e rnt)J~/
Gxcluding e;-:ran~io ~·, jo,r.t shall he insui<Jteci with tv;o (2) ~/J m 1~ 1 l?.y.;rs •1f
tr.-:~g nt:st um i , ·,w ~ a!iNl•,o,ilh i 1.lQ~i nQ as $ho·Nn on the clr~win g~. "Tl1e s1:e,K3r si1 :~ il
n -7
I.
SECTION V- PART A
17~ ELECTRO-MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
be of the TRS series, Model 7548-TR32 as manufactured by Kittell, Los Angeles,

California or approved equal.
iv. Fuel System - The fuel system shall include an injection pump, engine fuel
transfer pump, flexible fuel connections, fuel filters and shut-off valves.
v. Fuel Oil Storage Tank- The fuel oil tank shall have a capacity of at least 8 hours
of continuous operation and shall come complete with all accessories. Inside
surface of the tank shall be pickled or sandblasted to be cleaned of all dust and
foreign matter and lightly coated with oil. All tank openings shall be sealed prior
to shipping.
vi. Fuel Level Gauge -The Contractor shall fumish and install a level gauge on the
fuel oil tank for visual indication of the amount of fuel remaining on the tank. The
gauge shall be either clear glass or plastic materials resistant to normal diesel
fuel corrosion. The level gauge shall be provided with valves on both ends for
isolation during routine maintenance and replacements. The gauge shall be of
appropriate length with graduations calibrated in both litres and percentage of the
total fuel tank capacity.
vii. Instrument Panel - The engine shall be equipped with an instrument panel
mounted separately with that of the engine frame. The panel shall be installed on
a suitable instrument stand in a location affording easy viewing and access and
shall include gauges for ammeter, lube oil pressure, water tem perature,
tachometer and hour meter.
viii. Safety Switches - The engine shall be equipped with safety switches which will
cut off the engine on low oil pressure and high water temperature.
ix. Anchorage of Engine- The concrete engine base shall be sized as recommended by
the engine manufacturer to prevent excessive vibration. The engine shall be attached
to the concrete base with anchor bolts. The number and size of the and10r bo~s required
and their location relative to the engine base shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
shop clra'Mrgs.
~
2. Drive Shaft~ A flexible-drive shaft of required length shall be provkJed and installed. The- ·
dlive shaft shall have universal joints at eadl erd and shall be provkied with su~able flanges for
connections to1he right angle gear drive and engine. The drive shaft shall be installed at a
maximum of 3° inclination from the gear drtve to the engine. A heavy gauge expanded metal
safety guard shall be installed around the flywheel and drive shaft and shall be galvanized after
fabrication. ·
3. Battery - There shall be installed a battery complete with cables for supplying 12/24 vons DC
power to the engine. The battery shall have the necessary ampere-hour rating for crnnking the
engine for 10 minutes.
4. Battery Charger- The battery charger shall be 12/24 volts DC oulfxlt, 220 vons AC
input. It shall have an amperage output suffident to recharge the battery in 4 hours when the
lmUary is 50% discharged. The charger shall incorpornte adjustable float and; equalizing
vo!tagc potentiometer. A current limit signal shall be supplied in the control circuit from
i i1e current sensing resistor. It shall be of the full wave redi1ier~ and shall include .all ti1e
r8quir~:.'d standard components.
U. GomlJim\tion Right Angle Gf.nr Drive - The combination right angle oear ctrive st1 all
i : ..... I !P and u f the 11ollows!1aft l.YJ-'G v1i1i1 n___ ~pee\J ratio. The genr shall include a l:uilt-
i, ' r:m :-r(We!siri\J device to prev~nl i~;::::c:<r,pin in the event of failure of the cllscl< vDI'/13. -nn
.. :j ,\j J :-llall be designed to transmjt liie ,·cquired power jneed ed by the pump and to wililstand
SECTION V- PART A
the total thrust of the pump. A flanged disconnect coupling with top and bottom keys for
motorshaft disconnection and a motor adapter suited for the gear drive and VHS motor
flanges shall be provided. The required opposed thrust bearings shall be provided to offset up-
thrust in the gear drive unit. The unit shall also include forced feed oil lubrication to all moving
parts. Minimum effidency shall be 94%. The combination right angle gear drive shall be
manufactured by Amarillo, Johnson, Randolf Gear Co or approved equal.
f. Diesel Generating Set
1. General - The generator set shall be (factory/directly coupled) mounted

·on a steel sub-base complete with all necessary engine and generator accessories,
ready for operation, manually push-button/key start type, rated fo r _ _ __
(standby/continuous) power supply under conditions specified herein. The complete
diesel engine generator set shall be free from critical and torsional vibration within the
operating speed range.
2. Test Requirement - The diesel generating set shall be tested to determine whether
the equipment has been properly assembled, aligned, adjusted and connected . All
incidental expenses relative to the testing shall be bome entirely by the Contractor.
i. Laboratory Test - The unit shall be tested under varying loads with guard and
exhaust system in place. Test shall include the fol lowing:
(a) Single-step load pick-up

(b) Transient and steady state governing
(c) Safety shutdown device testing
(d) Voltage regulation
(e) Rated power
(f) Maximum power
ii. On-site Test
(a) Checking of fuel and lubrication for conformity with the manufacturer's
recommendation, under the environmental conditions present and expected.
(b) Accessories that normally function white the set is standing by shall be
checked prior to cranking the engine.
(c) Start-up under test mode to check for exhaust leaks, path of exhaust gases
outside the building, cooling air flow, movement during starting and stopping,
vibration during 11mning, normal and emergency line to line outside the
building, cooling air flow, movement duting s\arting and stopping , vibration
during running, normal and emergency· line to line vollage and phase
rotation.
(d) Engine coolant tempemture, oil pressure and battery cha rge level along with
generator voltage, amperes and frequency shall be monitored throughout
the test
3. Diesel Engine -The engine shall be of the (water/air) cooled, heavy duty,
4-cycle, naturally aspiratedllurbocharged . industrial type equipped with _ _ _ (1 ?.i24.)
volt DC solenoid engaged electric mot0r slarter and shall clevelop tl1e full continuous
llorsepower required by tr1e ntternator using diesel fuel v1hen operating at a speed
not oxcee(Jing ·180t) rprn. ·;-;- e eng in~ sh all 11ave aluminum pistons, removable ·typ8
cylinder sleeves, 11eclVy-du1y replacaable precisi on type bearings and equipped witi1
vMe type oil pump, hy -~~ss cil fil! er, o!! level indicator, n residential type silei1C':lr
l:>;.t.IHWS1 sy~t~r: 1.
·, ~1~ O:i~;ine r_ i1?t:i t.c- ,~·~ ·1n u tc.c~u ~~ tj by F·~~ ~.;i.-res Curnn1in3. -:.~ n s r:~rr·ii; r.r. J o!·n ·-C' ::. r~ rc c ~·
<J:Jj)l"t)V8 cl t:qu<il.
'17-9
I.
SECTION V- PART A
17~ ELECTRO~MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
i. Starter- The engine shall be equipped with 12/24 volts DC solenoid engaged
electric motor starter.
ii. Lubricating System - The lubricating system shall have a vane type oil pump, a
by-pass oil filter, an oil pressure gauge and oil level indicator.
iii. Exhaust System- The engine shall be equipped with a residential silencer, sized
in accordance with the engine manufacturer's recommendation. Maximum back
pressure measured at the exhaust header shall not be more than 350 mm (14 in)
of water column. The silencer ~:Oall be fabricated of carbon steel designed for
1000°F service and shall ·be shop-painted with silicon base high heat resisting
aluminum paint. The silencer shall be instalfed with flexible metal expansion
section of stainless steel and not less than 450 mm (18 in) in length as shown on
the Drawings and shall be designed together with all pipes, bends, bolts, nuts and
clamps for temperature of not less than 1 000°F. The entire exhaust assembly
excluding expansion joint shall be insulated with 2-50 mm layers of magnesium
insulation with lugging as shown on the drawings. The silencer shall be of the
TRS series, Model 7548-TR32 as manufactured by Kittell, Los Angeles, California
or approved equal.
iv. Fuel System - The fuel system shall include an injection pump, engine fuel
transfer pump, flexible fuel connections, fuel filters and shut-off valves.
v. Fuel Oil Storage Tank - The fuel oil tank shall have a capacity of at least 8 hours
of continuous operation and shall come complete with all accessories. Inside
surface of the tank shall be pickled or sandblasted to be cleaned of all dust and
foreign matter and lightly coated with oil. All tank openings shall be sealed prior
to shipping.
vi. Fuel Level Gauge- The Contractor shall furnish and install a level gauge on the
fuel oil tank for visual indication of the amount of fuel remaining on the tank. The
gauge shall be either clear glass or plastic materials resistant to normal diesel
fuel corrosion. The level gauge shall be providea with valves on both ends for
isolation during routine maintenance and replacements. The gauge shall be of
appropriate length with graduation calibrated in both lilres and percentage of the
total fuel tank capacity.
vii. Safely Switches - The engine shall be equipped with safety switches which will
cut off the engine on low oil pressure and high water. temperature.
viii. Battery - There shall be installed a battery complete with cables for supplying
12/24 volts DC power to the engine. The battery shall have the necessary
ampere-hour rating for cranking I he engine for 10 minutes.
ix. Battery Charger- The battery charger shall be 12/24 volts DC output, 220 volts
AC input. It shall have an amperage output sufficient to recharge the battery in 4
hours when the battery is 50% dischargec1. The cilmger shall incorporate (111
a(ljustable float and equalizing voltage potentiometer. A current limit. ~:;ignal sl18l1
be supplied in the control circuit from the current sensing resistor. It .;;hall IJ8 of
trw full wave recl;fiar type and shall inclucle sll tile required standard c<;mponents.
4. Miscellaneous Equipment- The engine shall bn equipped with i.hs- fol lowin~:
i. l!1t:~keair clerr.H
ii. 8:?~fely s·.vitclle::; \\'G;l~:l \',]li Cilt ·:·ff Hw GnQlrio .:,n 1ow 0 11 pre~::1_r1·::- ;.1:~J !~;:!:i ·_-,~n: ,..lr
tZJ; nperaiure.
'~~. '10
SECTION V- PART A
iii. One (1) set of oil lube filters and fuel filters. In addition, the Contractor shall be
provided wiltl three (3) sets of spare oil lube and fuel filters.
iv. Battery and charger complete with cables.
5. Alternator
L The alternator shall be rated for (continuous/standby) operation at

...........----- KW/KVA, 0.80 PF, 1/3-phase, 60 cps, 1800 rpm, _ _ (240/480) volts,
50°C rise over 30°C ambient temperature at 75M a.s.l. and shall be _ _ __
(factory/directly) coupled to the engine. The alternator shall be salient-pole, 12
leads reconnectible, self-ventilated of drip-proof construction with amortisseur
windings and skewed stator for smooth voltage wavefonn. It shall be single
bearing, synchronous type with brushless exciter and shall be built according to
applicable NEMA standards. The insulation shall meet the NEMA MG 1-22.40
and 16.40 for class H insulation and shall be further protected with 1 00% epoxy
impregnation and overcoat of resilient insulating material to reduce possible
fungus and/or abrasion deterioration per MIL 1-24092. Temperature rise of the
rotor shall be limited to NEMA class F ratings.
ii. The excitation system shall be of brushless construction controlled by a solid

state voltage regulator capable of maintaining voltage within +/-2% at any
constant load from 0% to 100% of the rating. The regulator must be isolated to
prevent tracking when connected to SCR loads, and provide. ·individual
adjustments for voltage range, stability and volts-per-hertz operation. The soild
state regulator module shall be shock-mounted and epoxy-encapsulated for
protection against vibration and atmospheric deterioration.
iii. Upon one-step application of any load up to 100% of the rated load at 80 PF, the
voltage dip shall not exceed 20% and shall recover to +/-2% of the rated voltage
within one (1) second.
iv. Alternator shall be capable of sustaining an overload capacity of 300% full load
current at zero power factor for a period of ten seconds without damage to it.
Output voltage recovery after sudden application or rejection of rated load shall
be within 0.3 second.
v. A resettable line current sensing circuit breaker with inverse time versus current
response shall be furnished to protect the generator from damage due to its own
high current capability. This breaker shall not trip within ten seconds specified
above to allow selective tripping of downstream fuse or circuit breaker under a
fault condition. This breaker shall not automatfcally reset, preventing restoration
of voltage if maintenance is being perfonned. Field current sensing breaker will
not be acceptable.
vi. Alternator shall be open, drip-proof construction with an overall efficiency of at

least 85% at full load.
\;li. Alternator windings and electrical compone:11s shall be trop·rcalizecl.
viii. Alternator shnll be manufactured by Stamfo-:, ~/! arE~thon, Onan. Kohler or

<rpproved equal.
(). Generator Control Panel
r:;8ii0fP. l -· P.. 0:3t mourted 8lt6r..-:Jt,)r-'.:> ri:1 in~ c;:, rtrc: ~:::ner shu!i h8 .s~ r p~lieclr ;ii:ll
·t l ~:; fj:.:: ~-:'": j~-! t~; ;· ~
oL 'Th 3 LJnt,·G! !:& r~ e. : S(lJI1 cs v : C ~"fH ion - ~so; ·Jt~U . ~:1 r:!~-K1 fn.~nt
1i - j 1
I.
SECTION V- PART A
17 ~ ELECTRO-MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
construction, 14 gauge steel NEMA.1 enclosure. Cabling and control wiring shall
be either side or bottom
ii. Instrument- Panel shall contain, but not be limited to the following equipment:
(a) Circuit breaker, thermal-magnetic, industrial type rating as required.

(b) 1 voltmeter with phase selector switch
(c) 1ammeter with phase selector switch and current transformers
(d) 1 frequency meter
(e) 1 hours operation counter
(f) Panel illumination lights and switches
(g) Indicating relays and fault indicator lamps for low oil pressure, high engine
temperature and overspeed.
(h) Engine ammeter
(i) Engine lube oil pressure gauge
0) Engine water temperature gauge
(k) Tachometer
iii. Operating Switches and Pushbuttons shall include:
(a) Manual start/stop pushbuttons/key switch

(b) Emergency Stop Button
(c) Control lamp test
(d) Selector switch
(e) Test switch
iv. Operational Controls- During operation, the generating set shall be monitored fo r
the following disturbances.
(a) Loss of lube-oil pressure

(b) Excess engine temperature
(c) Alternator overload
(d) Alternator short circuit
(e) Overspeed
~
Should any of the faults listed under (a) to (e) arise, then the individual signal
relay installed for the special task shall respond. To avoid lasting damage if
operation were to continue, the generating set shall be automatically shut off and
a subsequently new starting effort shall be blocked and corresponding fault
Indicator lamp shall be on.
v. At protracted overloading of the alternator, the thermal over-current release with

time delay shall cause the alternator main circuit breaker to trip. The set shall
continue In operation unloaded to obtain cooling of the alternator.
vi. In case of feeder short circuit during <ln emergency supply operation, the
alternator shall immediately be disconnected from the fault location by means of
the electromagnetic trip relay of the main circuit breaker.
'l. Manual Transfer Switch
A mnnual transfer switch, 3-phase, 60 11eriz, 3 poles witil solid neutral for voltage
specified herein and for 1he current rating indicated on the dmwings shall hP.
provided. The switch shaii rwve n single, free--wl1eeling handlt~ mount:?.d in front (){
·; ,-')·-:, mcctJanically interlocl;c.:! ·······-- Al .. _ ... _ /\F inciustri~J I typo (':rcuit breakers.
SECTION V- PART A
g. Chlorinating Equipment
1. Gas Chlorinating Equipment
i. General- The equipment to be furnished shall be_ unil/s of vacuum-operated

gas chlorinator/pressure feed type gas chlorinator assembly with pipings and
installation details as shown on the drawings and specified herein.
ii(a) Vacuum-operated Gas Chlorinator
(1) The chlorinator shall be of the vacuum operated type with a rated capacity of
_ _ pounds of chlorine per day (PPD) and shall operate over 20.1 rang e
with an accuracy of 4% over the specified range. The unit shall be mounted
directly on a 150 pound/one (1) ton chlorine cylinder by means of positive
yoke type gasketed connection.. The vacuum operated chlotinator shall
operate satisfactorily over the specified feed range against the maximum back
pressure of _ psi L__ft). The vacuum operated gas chlorinator shall be
similar to Advance Model 480/201 or approved equal.
(2) The chlorinator shall be provided with the following
(1) Vacuum regulating valves to isolate gas under pressure from the control
system should there be a loss of vacuum.
(il) Diaphragm actuated pressure relief valve to prevent the build up of

pressure within the gas control system.
(iii) Gravity actuated indicator directly connected to the main control

diaphragm to provide visual signal when the chlorine supply is exhausted
or interrupted.
(iv) An Ejector-diffuser assembly to receive all chlorine and ejector water and
discharge the resulting solution at the point of application. The diffuser
shall be of the spray type and shall: be equipped with check valve to
prevent the water from backing up into the chlorinator.
(v) Accessories - the chlorinator assembly shall be provided with the

following:
10 ft. - ~" ejector supply hose
25 ft. - 3/8" vent and vacuum tubing
60 pes lead gaskets ·
2 pes - %" hose clamps
(vi) Standard spare parts kit which shall include:

For chlorinator
1 set -diaphragm
1 set- all 0-rings
'I pc- meter gasket
1 pc- tubing connector
1 pc -·inlet filler
For :~j~ctor/Diffuser 8~Se!·,1f:·ly
1 fJC -· cliapf1 r~g m
1 pc - valve s~t
"1 ;.~L · • ~,upr:r-': t dL8pl1rWj rrl
1 :j('-- J/3" i 'Jbinn Gcr;necto;
., ~ -- :: · · (r:l:lli· ~iL: rn c.:,.r; 'NI'E:..-!1:: .1
·: ~ii kJJ; i .0 ie:<!k t.ss' kit \ a.Tunoni ~t)
~7 -I J
SECTION V- PART A
(3) Booster Pump for Chlorinating Equipment
(i) General- The Contractor/Supplier shall furnish and install one (1) booster
pump at the proposed pump station complete with necessary steel base
as shown on the drawings and specified herein.
(ii) Operational and Dimensional Requirements- The pump shall be used for
boosting the pressure of the water from the well discharge line to provide
pressure and supply for the chlorine solution ejector. The pump shall be
capable of sustaining the pressure and capacity required by the ejector-
diffuser assembly supplied with the chorinator.
(iii) Pump Construction - The pump shall be of high head , low capacity,
centrifugal, end-suction type that should satisfy the operational
requirements of the system chlorine ejector supplied herewith. It shall be
close-coupled, factory aligned to a heavy duty motor and mounted
together on a common steel or cast-iron base. The suction and discha rge
connections shall be cast integral with the casing. The casing and
bearing housings shall be of 30,000 pound tensile cast-iron . Pump
impellers shall be of enclosed type constructed of bronze, stainless steel
or thermoplastic or any other materials suited for the particular application,
mechanically and hydraulically balanced, securely fastened to the shaft
with keys, taper bushings and locknuts. The motor shall have a
horsepower (Hp) rating as specified in the contract documents, 230v, (1/3)
phase, 60 Hz, 3450/1750 RPM and with minimum service factor of 1.15.
The motor shall be interconnected with the well pump motor control so
that they will start and stop simultaneously.
(4) Motor Control for Booster Pump - The motor controlle r shall be of the full
voltage magnetic starter type with circuit breaker, overload protective device
and on/off buttons suited for the booster pump to be supplied.
ii(b)Pressure Feed Type Gas Chlorinator
The pressure feed type gas chlotinator shall only~ be used for application where
there is either no electricity to run a booster pump or no. pressurized water supply ·-
offering a sufficient differential for vacuum operation and shall be operated by the
inside pressure of the chlorine cylinder. Back pressure at the point of application
shall not exceed 1o psi.
The direct cylinder mounted pressure feed type chlorinator shall be similar to
Advance Model 611 or approved equal. The unit shall be provided with a cylinder
mounted pressure regulator, wlth gas flowmeter, rate valve, relief valve and gas
filter assembly. An emergency relief valve in the chlorinator shall continuously
prevent excessive pressure build-up \'lithin the entire system . A manual exhaust
valve, installed in the pressure line b-etween the chlorinator and !he check valve,
shall be used to exhaust pressure from the system, prior to removing the
chlorinator from the cylinder valve . The unit shall be provided with a cl1 ecl~
valve/diffuser assembly with porous stone diffuser or with finz l1 ole spray d1ffu3er.
1'i18 chect< valve/diffuser assembly shati be submerged at least one metm '.o <1
maximum of 7 metres below the water ievel and I he maximum feed distance shall
not exceed 8 metres.
SECTION V- PART A
iii. Chlorine Gas Cylinder- The chlorinator shall be provided with three (3) 68 kg
(150 lb) cylinders/one (1) ton container of chlorine gas.
lv. Chlorine Test Kit - The test kit shall be of colorimetric type and the residual
chlorine shall be determined by a simple visual comparison between permanent
color standards of known value and sample color. The test kit shall be capable of
analyzing for total chlorine using orthotolidine solution method. The unit shall
have a range of 0-5 miL or ppm with increments of 0.1 mg/L or ppm.
Orthotolidine solution shall be provided with the test kit.
v. Chlorine Gas Mask -The Contractor/Supplier shall furnish one canister type gas
mask with full face lens for the proposed pumping station complete with canister
suitable for working condition for short periods of time in the presence of less
than one percent (1 %) chlorine concentration. The mask shall be provided with
carrying case, manufacturer's instruction manual, two (2) extra canisters and
shall be of the type recommended by the Chlorine Institute Standard.
2. Hypochlorination Equipment
i. General- The hypochlorite reed pump shall be of the positive displacement type
with all parts constructed of materials non-corrosive to wet chlorine service.
ii. Capacity - The feed pump shall have a maximum operating capacity in gal/day
(gpd) of hypochlorite solution, as specified in the contract documents and shall be
equipped with manually operated knob control mounted on top of the pump
suitable for the above maximum feed rate. A feed indicator shall permit visual
monitor of fluid rate at any time.
iii. Operation -The rate of hypochlorite solution feed shall be set manually and shall
remain constant until manually changed. Feed rate adjustment shall be permitted
while the unit is in operation. The hyphochlorite feed ptmp shall be rated 230 VAC, single
phase and 60 Hz.
iv. Standard Accessories - The hypochlorinator shall be supplied with lubricating oil,
suction and discharge tubings with awuprtate Jittings, anti-siphon varve. foot varve,
. strainer, check.vafve with pipe fittings for injection into the water main, plastic solution
-·-tank whh cover to hold _gallons of hypodllorite solution arxl pastic measuring cup.
v. Powder Chlorine- The unit shall be provided with _ drums (45 kg) of caldum hypochlorite
p:mierwi\h 7C'f/o avaiat::le cHorine.
vi. Chlorine Test Kit - The test kit shall be of colorimetric type and the residual chlorine
shall be determined by a simple visual comparison bet'-Neen permanent color standards
of known value and sampe color. The test kit shall be capal1e of analyzing for total chlorine
using 01thotolidine solution method. The unit shall have a range of 0-5 miL or ppm with
increments of 0.1 rrzyL or~· Orthotoli::iine solution shall be provX:Ied with the test kit.
:3. Flowmeter/Totalizer
i. Tho Contr<~ctor ~ hall

furnish and install. in accordance with these specifications,
tlowrn e ter/totr~lizer
r.ornplete with compatible steel ring flange, bolts, nuts and
gasket and necessary appurtenances.
r:. II tes! rom will bP. cot~c~ucteci in the prosenr:;e of the Engineer, Owr.er and tile
Cc·ntr2ctor. In th o event of the fJilure of !IH=: flowrnater/totalizer to opera\ e to me?.t
u; sp e·::ifh.~<,tions, tile supplier sh<lil replace the unit and shall recJivo no
;;,iuition<il compensation thereof. For ti1a purposa of payment, the work wiil not
SECTION V- PART A
be accepted until the test has been made to the satisfaction of the Owner and the
Engineer.
iii. The flowmeter shall be magnetic drive, propeller type and shall be furnished with
integral cast body grained high tensile cast iron faced and drilled with ANSI
flanged ends, and shall be designed and manufactured according to ISO 4064/1-
1977, with a nominal working pressure of 150 psi and shall be furnished with non-
corrosive, non-toxic liners which shall have straightening vanes. The flowmeter shall
be suitable for normal flows for the required capacity and shal l register with in two
percent (2%) of true flows at all flows within the rated range. The register drive
shall be completely isolated from the water pressure by an 0 ring sealed bronze
housing. The propeller drive shall be magnetically coupled to the register drive by
use of pennanent type ceramic magnet. The propeller shall be fabricated of
thermoplastic material resistant to normal water corrosion. The meter shall be
furnished with a six-digit straight reading type of totalizer indicatinq flows in
cubic metre and a dial or flow rate indicator incubi<:: metre per hour (m /hr) with
graduations from 0 to 360 m%r.
iv. The flowmeter shall be fitted with a permanent non-corrosive nameplate on which
all relevant data shall be stamped or engraved. Data shall include but not be limited
to the following:
Name of Manufacturer
3
Nominal Flow (Qn) in m /hr
Year of Manufacture and Serial Number
Indicator of Flow Direction
Working Pressure in bar
All flow measurements shall be in accordance with ISO 4006.
-17.3 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
a. Scope of Work
The Con1factor shall furt:Jish, deliver, nstall, test and corrrnjssion in accordance with these
SpedficaUons ~nd .drawings 'h'ires and cables, conduits and fittings, outlet boxes and fittings, wall
switches and rece~cles. lighting fixtures, panel boards, motor controller/s and its auxiliary control
devices, grounding system,·controltransfooners, level relay, electrodes and feeder, kilowatt-hour
meter, distribution transformers and tts prctedive devices and o\her appurtenances as specified herein
and shoMl on the drawings.
b. Wires and Cables
1. A!l wires shall be of copper, annealed, sofl-<irawn, of 98% conductMty, illSulated for 600 V
wooong vottage, type ''THW' or ''TI-IWN'' illSulation unless otherwise noted on the Drawings.
Insulation shall bear the manufacturet's name ard trademark, type, voltage, ampere raUng and
size of the conductor.
2 . Cable for submersible pump operaUon s11all be oil and water resistant. C<1ble sl1all hrNe a
minimum of two insulation jackets. The inner jacket silall r..e of n1bber or e!a5"ticjsed ruboor
in ~te1ial vAlilathe outer jacket shall be of neoprene, PE or PB m:\terial. The outer jacket :.hall
bear the manufacturets nome and tradema1k, illSulauon type and application, volt aml
empere.rating and size of the conductor. Ceble conductor sh<~ll bs uncut ancl•. Jn~plicl3<1 from
ii •:J .nc,tcr pig!e~ilto tile junction t ox or termin<JI for ll1e motor ~arier. it shall be /ix~<l il l pl81./~ with
~·imps of acceptable rn.<Jterials for sucil ~~cr.•ic.:)!'·- 11.
:; ·: ;--. 1 c.
SECTION V- PART A
Cable tennination to motor pigtail shall be by means of heavy duty, pennanent type
splicing kit. Splicing paste shall have a minimum expiration period of one (1) year.
Gable shall be as manufactured by American Wire and Gable, Columbia, Duraflex, Philtlex, Durex,
Phelps Doclge or app-oved equivalent
3. For lighting and pQWer systems, no wire smaller than 3.5 mm2 diameter shall be used. Building
wire size 8.0 mm2 diameter and larger shall be stranded. Wires for the control system shall
be 0.75 mm2 (18 AWG) mrwmrn, ~Jnsutated unless otherwise spedlied.
4. . Conductors shall not be pulled into the raceway until::

i. raceway system has been inspected.
ii. plastering and concrete have been completed in the case of concealed work; and
iii. raceway has been freed of moisture and debris
5. Conductors shal be handiXJ!Ied usi~ JUing luOO:ant v.OOre neressary.
c. Raceway
1. Conduits for interior systems shall be rigid steel or made of uPVC material. Joints of
steel condu'rt. cast in concrete shall be made up with a conductive waterproof compoond.
2. No condu~ smaller than 15 mm electrical trade size, nor havi~ more than three 90° bends in any
one run shall be used in any system. Bends and offsets shall-be smooth and symmetrical and
shall be accomplished using tools designed for !he purpose intended.
3. The ends of all conduits shall be tightly plugged to exdude plaster, dust, and moisture while the
installation is in !XOQres5.
4. All raceway above ground shall be rigid steel condu~ and shall be secured over concrete
surfaces, the screws shall be held in place by expansion sleeves. Conduits on exposed
work shall be run at right angles to and parallel Vwfth the SUITOunding walls; no diagonal runs shall
be allowed and all ends and offsets shall be avOided as far as possible. Where necessary,
conduit fitlings shall be furnished and installed. •
5. Junction boxes and pull boxes of code gauge stee' shall be.provided as indicated in the
Drawings vmt1 suitable fitlings to fad~ate calle p..~Uing.
6. Flexible liquid-tight conduit shall be used for connection of equipment sucll as motors,
transformers, flov.r and pressure switclles and other plot devices. Erickson coup'ings shall be
used at interconnection with rigid cx:n1.rils. •
7. All conduits installed underground shall be provided with at least 75 mm thick cona-ete envelope.
cl. Grounding
1. Ground continuity throughout each facility shall be maintained by installing an electrically

continuous raceway system. Metallic rareway shall be installed with doutle lo•:knuts or hubs at
( rtclosures; non-metallic mcewuy for lxnnch rjrcu~ when sped!ied shall contain t:YJp~r grounding
' onductor, either bare or lnsu!<lted. Su•11 C'.onductor 5hall be L'onc1r:d w te!T'P.inal nrK!
iqts.mooiale ll18tnl!ic t~nC:.osui'r:.. Un!e:=;s olh&f\·~se specif.'ed, gf'Ound cat~es ,:>J>::11I t:0 endO$t:d in
uJnduits, G~ncl ccnnecliom ~iL~II b:: mCJde readily accessible ·l or inspeciion. For pumping
stations/pump houses, pastic corduits shall not te a\IONed.
:?.. r~rounc~r.:J c.::Uc 3 :!':JI i · 1 r'ird :.: m·:•.:'l,jenO:> dlh PEG ~~\1lllit'nt<;r,Js w~·.sn nr) :-..rn·;:n 1.\t 1 r.~
( .!! ~\·lfrfJS. G·:C~;r .{!;. ( .~i-: ..:. · ~ J -s..·~ .J i-: l : J t_c, a ..:ornrnon ~)rti.Jf.Ji~ 1r·1~cl rnad~ (A e~J...~~ c,· ;.):~( 1\...":!.~:' ( ·
~A ,cpcr welt ex: I :;t.·; J .
SECTION V- PART A
e. Splices and Tenninations
1. Control conductors shall be spliced or terminated only at the locations indicated on the
Drawings and only on terminal strips or terminal lugs of vendor-furnished equipment. As used in
these Specifications, "control conductors" are defined as conductors that control the electric
energy delivered to a po.,ver oonsuming device.
2. Branch circuit conductors may be spliced in suitable fittings at locations determined by the
Contractor. Conductors shall be splioed or terminated only at equipment terminals shown on
the Drawings. Wire in panels, cat:Xne!s, and gutters shall be neatly grouped using nylon straps
and spread out to tooninals.
3. Control conductors shall be terminated under terminal screws with pre-insulated fork tongue
lugs or approved equal.
4. All external control wiring shall end on the internal wiring terminal !jock on the control console
and shall be properly identified or coded to fadlate servire and repair.
5. Splices to motor leads in motor tenninal boxes shall be taped with varnished camooc
tape overtapped Wt.h a high temperature vinyl tape or~ equal.
f. Wire and Cable Identification
1. Compjeted electrical installation shall be provided with adequate klentification to facilitate the
proper control of drruits and equipment and to IOOure mairtenance.
2. Control devices within enclosures sllall be identified in accordanoe with the drawings,
Kientificalion shall be emOOssed plastic tape.
3. General purpose control conductors shall be red. Wtre markers shall be plastic impregnated
doth or approved equal.
4. Control conductor identification legend shall be in accordance with approved shop

dravvings as well as with the construdioo d!'a'Mngs. INhere these dra~ngs do not stale the
required identification, the Contractor shall assign numbers., Identification shall be attached ' ... .. .
within 75 mrn of the conductor termination. Sur>Pier may use imprinted plastic, split-sleeve·
markers cemented together after installation, at his ofXjon. Motor control conductors shall be
identified at each termination, induding intermediate temina stJts.
5, Terminal strip shall be identified by imprinted varnished market strips, attached under the
terrrinal strip. ·
g. Circuit Breakers
Circuit breakers shall be molded case type, manually-operated, shall llave trip-free operating
mechanism of the quicK-make, quid<-break type, shall have an earth leakage tripping/ground fault
rrotective device unless olhefWise specified, The circuit treaker shall be of atrtomatic tlip type with
combinatJon thermal and instan!<meous magnetic trip un~s. Circuit breakers in combination wi!h
motor starters shall oo of the industrial type with instantaneCLIS magnetic ttip, 0 8ilh
leakage/ground fault protective devica and provided vmh standard operating ll8nJ!e ,nountu.l 01l
U1e panel.
The thermal-magnetic time delayed over current protection and instantane~u'J shL1rt drcuff prffierj(on
s!Kl!! operate n commun ;rip Of;J' Vli".!r:i) ·.viii open all poles in U3!ie of ovrJr10<:d or shos'l d1~' 1.1il cum..'ll! u1
.:;ny nne fD~~ .
17·1D
SECTION V- PART A
The Earth Leakage Tripping Device/Ground Fault Sensor shall operate and interrupt the circu~
if the leakage current exceeds ~s rated sensitivity. Earth leakage tripPng device shall eliminate
erroneous operations due to rush current JXO(iuced at the time of starurg the motor.
Circu~ breaker shall be trip indicating, with tripped position of breaker handle l'l'liaNay bet\.\.€en "ON"
and "()f=p' positions.
h. Distribution Transfonners and Accessories
1.. General -The Contractor shall supply the required distributions transfonners, its protective
devices (fuse cut-outs and arresters) and metering equipment to be installed by Local Power
Company/Cooperative. Expenses for the installation and testing, prior to and after the
installation shall be borne by the Contractor.
2. Distribution Transformers - The transfOJTTleffi shall be oil-immersed, self-cooled, double

bushing pole mounted-type with the fdlaMrYJ spedfications:
No. of units
KVARatirg
Primary Voltage, KV
Secondary Voltage
Temperature Rise, Degree CerrttJmde
Frequency, Hz
BIL
Turns RatioTolera!"lre,%
Min. Insulation Resistance, M ohm
Notes:
i. The units shall CXXlforrn to Local Pa.t.er Co.!Coopetaive's maximum alowable copper and core
losses;
ii. Expenses for the calibratie>Mestirg of meter arx:! transfooners and its p-otedive devices shall be
borne by the Contractor.
Each transformer shall be furnished VviD12-ncHoad manual y,;ndirg taps at 2 Y:z% above and below
normal voltage. It shall have groul)di~ p00s located diagonally on opposite romers of the tank base,
mounting lugs of transformer pole rnountirYJ trnd<et duster. The oore and wnding of the
transformer shall be ~ned arx:! <XXlstruded to give1he minimum core Joss and shall be designed,
fabiicated and tested In sbict compliance to aM ®icable standards prior to delive!)', installation and
acceptanoe. Required fuse-rut outs and arresters assemblies shall be su~ied by the Contractor.
3. Distribution Fuse Cut-Out - Three (3) units of open-type distribution fuse cut-outs complete
with NEMA type K or T fuse link as defined in the latest ANSI C 37.43 standard shall be
provided for each Pump Station. Cut-outs shall be su~able for pole cross-ann mounting
rated 15 KV ~ fuse link ofthe required ratirg.
4. Distribution Ughtning Arrester - Distril::x.tion IP'Jhtning arrester shall be provided for each
di!Jiribution transfonner forequi~nt surge volt~Je protection. Each un'rt shall be of the valve type
re~t€<1 10 KV suitable for transformer dose coup:~.
S. }\i:owatt-.'-tour!Demand Meter and Accessories· }(iloo.vatt hour/c!emand meter ~hall be of self-

conl8im~d type, 3-phase, 3-wire, of the sc-d<et type, IW0/240 V, dass 100/20Q/300 etc. and
equipped with 15-minute inteN<ll cumulative demand rngister. The unn shall be complete with
:;\ n~~((:!l' socl<et aw.t weatherproof stA.::I ·~iiCI0~'ur•). The st::lt•x tmit sh?.:l be calibrated,
f:·:!;t<~!!r:;d and s~~led !)y tile locnl rower coq:f.n:;. Tiloj 1neter shCJil 1:-.<; slrnil:2r to GE ~JIV..iel VM-
;·,JS or ::ipprovsd ~qu al.
SECTION V - PART A
i. Motor Control Equipment
1. Genern.J - The fuU or reduced voa.age type magnetic starter unit shall consist of magnetic
contactors in combination with an industrial-type drcuit breaker with three over1oad relays for
three-phase motor load and two overload relays for single-phase motor load, one in each
phase, for motor protection against excessive overloading on starting and in operation.
Contactors shan be rated for AC21AC3 awlica\ions according to applical]e NEMA or IES
standards. Magnetic starter unit shall consist of all necessary relays, timers and motor
protective auxiliary devices as shown on the Electrical Drawings (Sheet SCCD 1/2/314/516;
Minimum Requirements of Reduced or F~ Voltage Motor Starter Control Circuit ~ram).
2. Components
i. Circuit Breakers - Cirruit txeakers in rornl:jnation 'Nith motor starter shall be of the industrial
type, molded case type, manuaVy-opercted, shall have trip-free operating mechanism of the
quick-make, quick-break type, shall have an earth leakage tripPnglground fault protective
device unless oU181Wise spedfled. The circuit breaker shall be of automatic trip type
with combination thermal and instartaneous magnetic trip units and p-ovkled with standard
outsk1e operatirg handle mounted on the panel.
The thecmal;nagnetic time delayed over-a.Jrrent protection and instantaneous short

circuit protection shall operate a common trip bar which will open all poles in case of
overload or short drcuit current in any one sx>~e.
Circuit breaker shall be trip-indlcaUng, with tripped position of breaker handle mKJway
between "ON'' aoo "OFP' positions.
ii. CNerk>ad Relay- OVeOOad relay shal confolm to IEC 292, IEC 947, VDE 0660. Rated
operational insu!OOon volage shal be aco:xdng to IEC 292-1 , VDE 0110, UL CSA or better.
Over1oad trippng shall be according to UL SO&'IEC 947-4 (Class 10) or better.
ii. CNe!load Protection for Sul:mefsil:)e FUnp - Overload protection for submersible pump
operation shall be of the ambient-compensated, extra-quick trip type with an operating
trip response time of frve (5) seconds or better at stalled/locked rotor corditions.
iv. Circuit ~I'Ml- Lamnated cootro1 drca a~agran iooicating ' termination numbers on code shall
-be fastened inside the oontro1 uni rex- rea:1y referenre.
v. Relays
(a) In general, relays shall be of the electro-mechanical or electronic type su~atje for
panel mounting aoo industrial a~ons. Relay coils shall be rated for continuous
operations at .220 volts AC 60 cps or 48 votts DC as required by their applications.
PermissU1e coil J)d;-up vo!tage shall be minus 15% and ~us 10% or broader. Drop-
voltage shall be minus 25% to 40% of rated voltage. Coil burden shall be
compatible with each a!)PicatXn Operating temperature shall be minus 5 degrees
Centigrade or better. Control relay shall conform to EEC 158-1, 1337 and 255, VDE
0060, or better. Amb<enl tempsr~ure for operation shall be from -40 to +60 de(jrees
centigrnde. Control voltage ranQe st..RU be from 12 to GOOV. Mechanical life shall be
e~ minimum of 5 million operaticns. Ratect insulation vottage shall conform to VDF.
011 OC, IEC 15e-1, BS 5452 or tELB·.
(!)) General application relays shall re instantaneous, non-Ume dBiay, of the electro-
mechanical or &1~::::.1:·.:.:-!:c tjpEl ~L: 1:. :.::e for panel mot.:ntir.g and indusl.Ji<ll applir:aticns.
Rele~y ac!ion \•,tlt.tllE-1 (,~ J~~r.g Oi' ·.-;.·c·::ing of i~o cor:tact si:a!l,-cmairl sJ,:;~·~iy \!11til p./..vcr
[:.Up~'y ~ .·emo;sd.
·:i-i.•.i
1.
SECTION V- PART A
17 ~ ELECTRO~MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
(c) Electronic timing relays shall be used where time delay requirements are of short
durations. These relays shall have a repeat accuracy of plus or minus 10% with
adjustable time setting as indicated on the plans or as recommended. Reset time
shall be as specified. Timers shall conform to IEC 255-5. Dry ambient temperature for
operation shall be from -25 to +55 degrees Cerrugrade. Rated insulation voltage shall be
acx:ording to IEC 158-1 and VDE 0110. Degree of protection against direct finger
contact shall be according to VDE 0100. Reset time shall be 40 milliseconds or less
unless otl"lerMse specified.
(d) Motor operated time delay relays shall be used where time delay is three minutes or
longer. These relays shall be syndlronous with elapsed time indication. Repeat
accuracy of relay shall be +2% or less with adjustable time setting as indicated in the
drawing~. Automatic resetting shall be upon removal of supply voltage in case of time
delay on energlzation and upon application of supply voltage in case of time
delay in de-eoergization. For interrupting timing cydes, the timirg relay shall reset to its
original slate v-.ihout operating the outpJt rontads and ready for a ne"N timirg cyde.
Timer reset shal be as specified.
(e) Relay contacts shall be 220 volts, 60 hertz rating or 48 volts DC as required by
their a~icatioos. Continuous current ratings of contacts shall be compatible with the
load output requirements and load application, resistive, inductive or motor
switching. In the case of inductive a~. make and break currents shall also
be consk1ered for the kind of load ronneded. Contact material shall be silver; good for a
mechanical lifetine of minmum 5 milion opemlions. Response time of rontad shall be
20 miseconds or less.
(f) Phase monitor relay shall be provided to protect the system against over/under
voltage, single phasing and phase reversal power supply rondilions.
(g) Level actuated relays shall be used to actuate reservoir and deepwell water levels to
control pump operation at any p-e-determined hgh or low level desired.
(h) Relays for use with mo\or prct.ective devices shall be as required for their Intended
operations as shown on the Drawings. Relay control sensitMy shall be matched to the
specific corditioos to be controlled.
Vi. Control Transformer - Control transformer shall be" of suitable capacity as required by
control components, rated 60 hertz, dry-type, tv.o-Y.inding and mounted ins.ide the control
panel or as shown on the Dra'lvings. Control transfooner must be capable of maintaining a
high degree of voltage regulation (not less than 95%) from no load to full load through
the worst momenlary inrush requirements of the Control oomponents. tt shall have an
insulation good for 800°C rise over an ambient of 400oc and a hot spot temperature of
1500°C with a BIL of 1o kV. Control transfamer witi~ and terminations shall be accessible.
The unit shall be manufactured in accordance Ytilll U.S. NE.MA. or IEC Standards.
vii. Panel Meters
(a) Ammeter- All arrmeters to be provided she.ll be of the quadratic panel IYJX.l v-1it11 sl:da~J~
dial and sh<JU hc-i\'8 rn~nim11m dimensior.s of 70 mn x 70 mm. Scale range shall be ns
required fcru~e p..-mpir.g stalion load Cl..irrent ~t S'j~em voitage adoptee!; w~h c-1 minimum
ao:;uracy of plus £'r minus 2% of full scale. l'r.~s for three r-hase <IJJplie<~tion sllall be
p10vidoo with a 2-postuon selector svvitch ronnEded ~o phase :~. s, and T. and three (3)
r.urrent transformers of suitable rating for each phase vmi'e tho~e for s!ngle ph3se shall
hr.ve en on·off ~;:- .;;;!of ~witcll 01·~.
0) \'o.'f!n£.:;;r •·: i' ~··..i':t ·:i~: ·nx:qu:;c \r-/q'..?.!"!Clt;_.J:.3 V,ih ~e-iK~i ar:d ~l'z.H.:.Nr, na 'n:tY;16a~::'fn:c: ns
ci YOml~ x iu ,,., n .:..~c:o.:~· i:?J~o :~halt:e::.s:ap'Ed fertile :i)~(m'.,~c-:cq.XGJG:i:OO Hz,v11h
lf-21
SECTION V- PART A
c:n OOJJ'OOf cf Ji.!s a- rrtus c>!o ct fiJ ~ or b:tEr. The tri shal re povX:lOO v-.ih a ~
seleda-sMdl cx:rnOO.oo rooss RS, RT ard ST.
viii. Handle-Operating Mechanism - Operating handle for the main drcuit breaker shall be
designed with the operating handle fitted to the panel door of the control equipment It shall
be used for operating the door and effecting the "ON-TRTP-OFF" operation cf the
breaker.
It shall be designed sudl that the door cannot be opened wnen the breaker is at the "ON"
position and shall be provided with a door locking mechanism. A release screw shall
be provided to permit the inter1od< to be cancelle<1 if it is necessal)l to open the door with
the breaker at the "ON" position. !Jimensions shall be as recommended by the
Manufacturer.
ix. Terminal Bocks - Terminal blocks shall be rated 300 vofts AC, 60 cps of molded
thermoplastic material. Terminals shall be screw-type, tinned and rated for the mrudmum
continuous current carried among the control ~ at 75 degrees Centgade
temperature rating.
x. Hour Operation Counter - Hour operation counter (elapsed time meter') shall be rated
220 volts, 60 hertz suitable for panel mounting. Counter shall have six (6) digits hour
register, the last digit of which shall indicate tenths of an hour. Hour operation counter
shall have &JUare dust-resistant case of 65 rrrn eadl sk1e. Counter shall be non-resetting type.
xi. Selector Switches - Three-position selector switch, where required, shall have three
operating positions: manual, off, and automatic. Rating of selector S'Nitches shall be 220 volts,
60 cps or 48 volts DC as required by its application and with a current capacity suitable for
the type of load connected. They shall be of thetluffl>.operated pointed type.
xii. Pushbutton Units - Pushbutton units shall be standard-<luty type, with silver
momental)l contact-type provided with springs to insure return to their original
position. Ratings of pushl:x.rtlon units shall be 230 volts, 60 cps or 48 volts DC as required by
its application with a current capacity suitable for the type of load connected In series with
them. Pushbutton units shall be roncave shaped Ytith a minmum diameter of 20 mm. Text
printed in front of pushbutton shan iootcate its function. ·
xiii. Pilot Lamps/Indicators - Pilot lamps shall be rated 220 volts, 60 cps or 48 volts DC as
required by its application. They sha!l be dear glass incandescent type.
All pilot lamp Indicators shall be designed for front mounting and of a square, round or
rectangular type. Text printed on the face of the lamps shall indicate the function of the
lamp. Changing of the lamp shall be frool the front
xiv. Nameplates - Nameplates shall be of hard plastic matenal at least 2 mm thick Words as
indicated on the plans shall be etdloo on name~ates in white on a black background.
Letters shall be easily readable and in no instar.ce smaller th<:m 10 mm in lleight.
Nameplates shall be affixed on control panel by means of flat head screws or glued on.
:<V. Auxilial)l Protective Devices - The Contractor shall fumi~h nnd inst<tl! all auxiliary
rnotor protective devioos inte00€d fer their aw,ication as shoiN!l on tile dravf.ngs:
F1zs.sufe Svlitcll: TI¥.:1 Cootr"cdor sroa!l fumish and install a pressure switch of Ule required setUng
range. The exact settiNJ shall oo detemined 'of the Engineer in the field, testing and
(OP1miss:onln-Q. Tne switch ;:t,·;:l ce Single po!e, :-~ngle U1row, t!lc.cury ~:ctm:lcd f<ir
;!;c~cor/ouic!cor ins!al~iorl.
SECTION V- PART A
18 ·WATER METERS
18.1 GENERAL
These specifications cover the requirements of water meters of various metrological classes
3 3
which can withstand permanent flow rates from 0.5 m /h to 20 m Jh, maximum admissible working
pressure equal to or greater than 10 bars and a maximum admissible temperature of 30 degrees
Centigrade.
The water meter shall conform to the requirements of ISO 4064 Part 1: Measurement of Water
Flow in Closed conduits-Meters for Cold Potable Water, subject to the following additional
requirements.
18.2 METER BODY
The meter body (or casing) shall be brand new, manufactured from copper alloy containing not
less than 75% copper; or a copper alloy containing not less than 57% copper, with an anti-
corrosion treatment. Meter bodies shall be smoothly finished and free from defects. Bodies
which have been repaired are not acceptable. All coatings shall be free from defects of any kind.
Meter bodies shall have a common inlet-outlet axis and shall be suitable for horizontal installation.
All external fasteners and seals shall be designed for easy disassembly, after a lengthy in-service
use, without the need for special tools or equipment.
18.3 MEASURING CHAMBER ASSEMBLY
The measuring chamber of the meter shalt be a self-contained unit manufactured either in copper
alloy containing not less than 85% copper with suitable amounts of tin, lead and zinc, or in a
suitable synthetic polymer, that will withstand all normal condrtions of operation without change in
form or dimension. It shall be firmly seated and easily removed, and be secured so that the
meter's accuracy will not be adversely affected by any distortion of the meter body.
Rotors shall be smoothly finished, of vulcanized hard rubber or suitable synthetic polymer having
sufficient rigidity and strength to operate at the rated capacity of the meter. Rotor spindles, thrust
rollers and thrust roller bearings shall be made of phosphor bronze, stainless steel, nickel alloys
or suitable synthetic polymer.
The movement of the measuring element (rotor) shall be trar1smitted to the register magnet by
means of a permanent driver magnet on the upper end of the element's spindle. The magnet
shall be of suitable non-corrosive, magnetic material. The magnetic coupling shall be protected
from external magnetic fields of 1,500 gauss by suitable shielding.
18.4 REGISTER
Register compartments shall be self-contained and hermetically sealed. Register compartments

that rely upon a compressed gasket for the hermet'1cal sealing and which can be opened to repair
the gear train, shall incll!de an approved desiccant capsule. Lock and side gears shall be
securely fastened to the number wheel discs and hubs. Tumbler pinions shall mesh accurately
with the lock and side gears of the adjacent wheels at the turnover points. Frames, shafts, gears
and pinions shall be made of suitable non-corroding materials.
18.5 DIAL U:.Ns
T~lB IGns covering th3 register dial shall be securely fasten8d to achieve hP.,n1e!ical ·"ealinn nnd
shall be of clear tempered glass of 5 mm minimum thickness (or of suitable synthetic polymer
wi1lt';h ~hall of be of lligh impr1ct ultra violet stabilized polyc.:~rbon5te rasin film of clear
U::-~n~;p:1i C' lil-:y). [lial Ism:-. :;hall be msistant to impact ancf ahrasion. lri-ir)2·~i :t":.i__:,~8'1Ge shnll be
:::-:<f'n 1.·:. ·.t,,,; c. .~ : ) ·.;; _ it iiy ·;o r,3 <,i~.t il1e !r,·w<K t ui rt 12 mm diant<:: 1 er ste01t:P.I~ d10pper ;·.·c·i·• R :1<:dqr1t of
1
,:,: -. ·~-:- (.1) :1:. i• ·: \·.·: : Lo~ l ~- u ~- t o ;: 1 ii1J Wl:l ,,, 1i r.Lnt !1nma~H~. Abr.Jsion .-cs i s~<. 7"·L~: shs!i l:s :. l!:i,.n 8J ti tc
18 - 1
SECTION V- PART A
18 -WATER METERS
capability to resist permanent scratch mar1<s using a material not harder than a Philippine one-
peso coin . Meter dial lenses shall be held in place by a hinged lid or similar holding device of
suitable synthetic polymer.
18.6 REGISTER BOX RING (BONNET) AND LID
Register box ring and lid shall be of the same material composition as the meter body or of
suitable synthetic polymer.·
18.7 METER COUPLING (TAILPIECES)
Each meter shall be provided with a pair of tailpieces. Tailpieces shall be of the same material
composition as the meter body.
The end of the tailpiece joining the meter spud shall have a shoulder and shall be provided with
gasket. The opposite end of the tailpiece shall have external tapered right hand pipe threads in
accordance with ISO recommendation R7.
The length of the tailpieces shall be such that the overall length of the assembly (meter length-
face to face of spuds-plus length of two (2) tailpieces) shall be as follows:
Meter Designation Overall Length of Assembly

3 3
1.5 m & 2.5 m 311 mm
3
3.5 m 356 mm
3 3
6m & 10m 406 mm
18.8 COUPLING NUTS AND GASKETS
Coupling nuts for joining the body spuds and tailpieces shall be of the same material composition
as the meter body and shall have internal parallel pipe threads compatible with the meter spud
threading . The co upling nuts shall have sealing wire holes of not ~ess than 3 mm diameter.
Coupling gaskets shall be made of paraffined leather, rubber composition fiber, or of suitable
synthetic polymer. -
18.9 SEALING
Each meter shall be supplied with 2.5 mm diameter copper wire and other suitable type of sea l
system to discourage unauthorized opening or removal of the meter and also to indicate if such
unauthori zed act has been made. All elements of the sealing system including length of wire.
location of wire holes, etc., shall be suitable for covering all possible means of tempering in
particular, disturbance of ttle coupling nuts of the accuracy adjustment device , if there is any; and
of the register assembly. The sea l shall be blank and suitable for sealing by a compression tool.
Th e sealing elements shall be provided in such a way that after sealing , both before and after the
wnter meter has been correctly installed, there is no possibility .Jf a1te1ing or d ismantling the meter
without damaging 'the sealing elements.
13.10 PRE83URI:: LOSS
The maximum pressure loss shall be 1 bar over the entire flow range.
r ~.) - 2
SECTION V- PART A
18- WATER METERS
18.11 TEST METHODS AND EQUIPMENT
The methods and means to be employed in determining the compliance of water meters shall be
in accordance with ISO 4064/3 (Test Methods and Equipment).
18.12 WARRANTY
All meters shall be guaranteed against defects in workmanship and materials for a period of one
(1) year from the date of acceptance. Defective meters or parts discovered within this period shall
be replaced without charge upon their return to the manufacturer/supplier. This warranty shall not
apply if the meter has been modified by using replacement parts not made by the manufacturer of
the meter or if it has been exposed to service conditions exceeding those of normal operating
conditions.
The manufacturer also guarantees that replacements (whole meter), replacement parts and
service shall be made available within thirty (30) calendar days from notice during a period of at
least five (5) years from date of acceptance.
18.13 ACCREDITATION
The accreditation process shall be as follows:
a. The water meter manufacturer shall have ISO 9000 and ISO 9001 certifications.
b. A sample meter, preferably a cut-away sample, together with the manufacturer's technical
brochures re: the meter is evaluated as to conformance with the requirements of these
specifications.
c. If it does, the following tests may be conducted on five (5) new sealed samples:
1. Initial accuracy test

2. Pressure tightness test (static tests)
3. Head loss test
4. Accelerated endurance tests
5. Final accuracy test
CONSTRUCTION OF WATER SYSTEM FOR STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIOI
SECTION V- PART
19- CONCRETE MASONRY
19.1 SCOPE OF THE WORK
The work includes all labor, materials, tools and equipment necessary to install concrete masonry
and all appurtenant work in connection with the work as shown on the Drawings and as specified
herein.
19.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Concrete masonry unit work of the type indicated shall be provided and shall be properly
coordinated with the work of other trades. The source of supply of materials which will affect the
appearance of the finished work shall not be changed after the work has started.
19.3 MATERIALS
a. Concrete hollow blocks shall be standard machine vibrated and shall have fine and even
texture and well defined edges. Units shall be non-load bearing and shall conform with
the requirements of ASTM Specifications C-129, with minimum compressive strength of
2.45 MPa (350 psi) (average of 5 specimens). Samples shall be submitted to the
Engineer for approval.
b. Mortar and Grout. Mortar shall consist of one (1) part portland cement, one-fourth (1/4)
part lime putty, and three (3) parts mortar sand. Grout shall be of the same ma~erials and
proportion as mortar to which additional water shall be added to produce a consistency
for pouring without segregation of the constituents. In concrete block wall construction, a
portion of the sand may be replaced with pea gravel up to not more than two (2) parts by
volume of the cement used. Such pea gravel shall be graded with not more than five
percent (5%) passing the No.8 sieve and with 100 percent (1 00%) passing the 3/8-inch
sieve.
c. Cast-in-place concrete lintels or beams shall be made from concrete having a minimum
28-day compressive strength of 20.68 MPa (3000 psi) and in compliance with Clause 8 -
Reinforced Concrete. Exposed surface shall have a smooth dense finish.
d. Reinforcing steel bars shall conform with Clause 8- Reinforced Concrete.

~
19.4 LAYING CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
a. Workmanship
Units shall be set plumb and true to line with level horizontal joints. Hollow units shall be
laid with full mortar coverage on l1orizontal and vertical face shells, and at least 50% of
the cells shall be filled with grout, the cells containing vertical reinforcements to be among
those to be filled up. All cells of CHB walls from fJoting up to at least the ground floor
level shall be filled up. Solid units shall be laid with iull head and bed joints. Joints shall
be uniform and approximately 10 mm wide unless othe1wise indicated.
Unless otherwise nhown on the Dmwlngs, jointB of exterior concrete mnsonry units that
v'lill be exposed and painted si1all be cut flush ::tnd tooled finished with a 6.5 mm deep "V"
joint for horizontal joints. Vertical joinis between tha horizontal joints shall be tooled flush.
Joints of inler!or concrot~ rnasomy un\ls s11ali be c.ut. Ou5h, and th€ blocks shnl\ be given 8
cement plaster finish except as otherwise shown on the Drawings . The minimum
thiclmess of cement pl~stcr sll~ ll b8 1o mm.
1:?-1
1. '
CONSTRUCTION OF WATER SYSTEM FOR STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIOI
SECTION V- PART
19- CONCRETE MASONRY
b. Setting Embedded Items
All anchor bolts and miscellaneous metalwork embedded in masonry shall be set in
accordance with setting plans or instructions furnished by trades supplying the metalwork.
Care shall be exercised to insure that all anchors are completely surrounded by grout.
c. Masonry Lintels
The Contractor shall provide properly shored supports for construction of masonry lintels
for open ings in walls. Shoring shall not be removed for at least seven (7) days after ·
lintels are placed.
d. Placing Reinforcing Bars and Grouting
All reinforcing steel, except dowels in concrete, shall be accurately set in strict
accordance with the Drawings and the notes thereon . Vertical steel shall be secured
firmly in place by means of frames or other suitable devices. Horizontal steel may be
placed as the work progresses. In any core containing reinforcement, the distance
between any masonry and the reinforcement shall be at least 12.7 mm (1/2'') at all points.
The masonry contractor shall furnish all tiles, spacers and supports required to hold steel
in position during grouting. Cores shall be grouted in lifts not exceeding 1.22 m (4'-0") in
height. Grout shall be thoroughly rodded. Splices in reinforcing bars shall be lapped al a
distance sufficient to develop the stress in the bar, but no! less than 40 bar diameters.
Concrete hollow blocks shall be laid with all cells completely grouted from !he wall footing
up to the ground level. The rest of the concrete hollow blocks above ground shall have at
least 50% of the cells grouted, including those containing the vertical reinforcements.
e. Protection and Cleaning
Corners shall be protected from damage with substantial board covers. Mortar or grout
stains on masonry work shall be removed immediately. Any masonry work showing
stains from mortar or concrete, or grout at completion of work, shall be replaced or the
entire masonry surface sand-blasted to provide unifo'rm approved appearance . In
cleaning the block, only stiff fiber brushes and wooden scrapers shall be used. Metal
implements or ·acids shall no! be used for cleaning blocks. All imperfect joining, na il
holes, chipped edges of comers, ar.d similar defects shall be corrected or replaced as
directed .
.I
II
CONSTRUCTION OF WATER SYTEM FOR STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION V- PART A
20 -CARPENTRY AND JOINERY
20.1 SCOPE OF WORK
The work includes all equipment, tools, appliances, labor and materials, together with the
supervision necessary and incidental to performing all carpentry and joinery work required and/or
herein specified.
a. Lumber Grades
Lumber shall be of the best grade available of the respective kinds required for the
various parts of the work, well-seasoned, thoroughly dry and free from loose or unsound
knots, cup shakes or other imperfections impairing its strength, durability and
appearance. All exposed surfaces shall be smooth unless otherwise indicated or
specified .
b. Substitution of Lumber
Any lumber equally good for the purpose intended may be substituted for the kind
specified upon prior written approval of the Engineer. However, a reduction of th e
Contract price equal to the difference in costs of the kinds of lumber shall be made.
Manila market prices shall be the basis of sale in reduction of price.
c. Delivery and Storage
The Contractor shall deliver materials to the site in undamaged cond ition. Lumber shall
be stacked in such a manner as to insure proper ventilation and drainage, and shall be
supported at least 150 mm above ground. Lumber shall be protected against dampness
before and after delivery, and enough protection shall be provided to prevent damage
from the weather. Lumber shall be stored under cover in well-ventilated enclosure, not
exposed to extreme changes of temperature and humidity, and in a manner as to provide
air circulation around all surfaces of each pile to insure thorough air seasoning. Lumber
or millwork in buildings shall not be finished until concrete, masonry work, and plaster are
dry. Lumbe r shall be delivered at least thirty (30) days before use.
d. Grading of Plywood
Each sheet of plywood shall bear the mark identifying the plywood as to wood species,
glue type and grade.
20.3 MATERIALS
a. Lumber
Lumber for various uses shall be one of the species listecJ for the purpose ind icated
unless othe1wise indicated on the Drawings. For any use not specified, the lumber shall
be the best commercial grade normally used for the purpose, subject to the approval of
the Engineer.
2 0-1
SECTION V- PART A
20 -CARPENTRY AND JOINERY
SPECIE USE
Yakal All door jambs, headers and transom bars, wood plates, and all
other woodwork in contact with concrete or masonry and where
indicated
Apitong All truss members and rafters and, where indicated, all wood
framings and carpentry, except when in contact with concrete
Tanguile All exterior and interior millwork, siding, finish and trim,
(kiln· framework, and all other woodworks not specifically
dried) mentioned; except when in contact with concrete
b. Plywood
Plywood shall confonn to Commercial Standard PSI and shall be of local manufacture .
1. Plywood to be varnished shall be tanguile or Kalantas veneers (as indicated) , ribbon-

grained, water-resistant, Class Band of the thickness indicated.
2. Plywood to be painted shall be tangulle veneer, ordinary rotary-cut, water resistant,

Class C and of the thickness indicated.
3. Plywood exposed to the outside elements or where indicated shall be waterproof or

marine plywood and of the thickness indicated.
4 . Pre-finished plywood panelling shall be 3/16" thick "Danarra" plywood panelling or its
equivalent, which design and features shall be approved by the Engineer.
5. Wood slats partition shall be tanguile kiln dried, fanned and fitted by glue to the
designed pattern. The design shall confonn with the detailed Drawing.
6. Laminated plastic plywood or particle board, where required by Drawings, shall be

equivalent to product of "Panelite" of Exporters International Inc. All horizontal
surfaces where laminated plastic covered wood are indicated on Drawings shall be
cigarette-proof grade. - "'
7. Wood finish materials shall, in g'eneral, confonn with minimum standard requirements
for kind, quality, function and characteristics of local standard specifications as
approved for use and specified herein:
i. Stains, if required, shall be those approved by the Architect for various types of
finishes.
ii. Linseed oil, pure, thoroughly settled and either raw or boiled as required.
iii. While Lead, Associated Lead Manufacturers Ltd .. or other approved equivalent.
c. Nails
NElils sh~ll be of the smooth shank, zinc-coat.ed, t.~ommon wire nails of loce11 manufacture ,
and of types and sizes suited for the purpose.
d. Wood Screws
'Nr:otl screws shall be brass cr radrnium platGd, (:f tht~ best 8VC!ilahle commmcinl q l:a fil_y,
'-'•::(i ..;·: 'i)!)'~::; and sizes suil3d for til e p•JrpCl:,<: .
SECTION V- PART A
20- CARPENTRY AND JOINERY
e. Bolts, Nuts, Tie Rods, Lag Screws, Plates and Connectors
Refer to Clause 9 of these Specifications.
20.4 PRESSURE TREATED LUMBER
a. Preservative Treatment
All lumber indicated to be pressure-treated shall be so treated and shall contain any of
the following net retention of solid preseNatlve.
1. Boliden salts - 45.5 kg dry chemical per cubic foot of wood
2. Wolman salts- 0.31 kg dry chemical per cubic foot of wood
3. Tanalith salts - 0.34 kg dry chemical per cubic foot of wood
b. An affidavit signed by an official of the preseNative treatment company shall be furnished

by the Contractor to the Engineer. This affidavit shall indicate the net retention of solid
preservatives obtained and shall certify that pressure-treated lumbers have a moisture
content that does not exceed seventeen percent (17%) upon shipment from the treatment
plant.
c. Where it is necessary to cut or bore pressure~treated lumber on the job, two coats of
prepared concentrated preseNative solution shall be applied to the end-cut or bored
surface.
20.5 ROUGH CARPENTRY
a. All work shall be well-frtted, accurately set, and rigidly secured in place. Anchors and
bolts (with nuts and washers) . straps and tie rods shall be provided as required.
b. Cutting and fitting to accommodate other work shall be done as required and in a neat
workmanlike manner; and cut or damaged work shall be patched and made good .
~
c. Framing and structural lumber shall be well-seasoned straight, square-edged stacks, and ·
free from loose or unsound knots, bark edges or other defects that will impair its strengt ~.
d. Plates for walls and partitions shall be of the same width as the studs and shall form
continuous horizontal ties.
e. Truss members and other roof framing members (if required) sl'lall be assembled , fitted
and set to the exact slopes indicated on the Drawings. Tops of trusses and purlins shall
form a true plane. Structural members shall not be cut . bored or notched for the passage
of pipes or conduits without prior approval.
All members damaged by such cutting or boring shall be reinforced by means of specially
formed and approved sheet metal or steel shapes, or removed and replaced wilh a new
member as directed.
f. ,~nchors, connectors Md fr.31enings not indic~ated or specified r:tl~e rHisf-> ~ i1 all be of the
types and sizes necessary to suit the conditions encountered. Size, type and spacing of
nnils . scrcw/s or belts f.-:;r !nstallntion of rnanufactureri buildir.q l'n.ateri<Jis ·;iBII l~e ns
t\)Cumiflend ed i:;y t.J.') pr,yi :lc( manufnGturf~r unless inrJicatf;d •,r sper;ifiP.cl :-..h ervl'se.
f~ I'JIJ(IIl i12 fl1 1.w :re, ex!·1o~ e ·:J ' ! , 'N0<1t~cr nr in r0ntact t.v:tn ex:· ~ J :·J f ,.,~1 1! _ c1 ; .;:~::.1r;' l'J r
!:-lnbs, sil ::l!l iJe zinc-ce;~·~ic<! c·.~ ~l.'~>l r!'?- :·,r :~t.i ri cd olherwi!;E'.
I
I -
SECTION V - PART A
20- CARPENTRY AND JOINERY
g. All lumber surfaces in contact with concrete or masonry shall be given a brush coat of
bituminous paint before installation.
20.6 JOINERY WORK
a. All lumber used for joinery work shall be of the kinds and grades specified and shall be of
the contours, patterns and profiles indicated.
b. All joints shall be made in an approved manner, installed tight and securely fastened.
Exterior joints shall be mitered and interior angles coped. Panels shall be fitted to allow
ior shrinkage, avoid swelling, and insure that the work rem;1ins in place without warping,
splitting and opening of joints.
c. Interior trims shall be of approved standard stock moldings, except where special patterns
or profiles are indicated.
d. Joints for cabinet work shall be glued aside from nails or other fastening device required.
Nailing shall be concealed where practicable. Where face nailing is used, nails shall be
set for putty stopping.
e. All exposed surfaces shall be machine or hand-sanded to an even smooth surface ready
for finish. No hammer marks or other unsightly marks shall be allowed on any wood
panel or veneer.
:?.i\ -i
I I
SECTION V- PART A
21~ DOORS~WINDOWS-GLAZING
21.1 SCOPE OF WORK
The work includes all labor, materials, tools and equipment necessary to furnish and install doors,
windows and glazing as required and as specified herein. Doors, windows and glazing shall be
products of reputable, nationally known manufacturers approved by the Engineer.
a. Doors and Windows
Doors and windows shall be factory fabricateu units of the types and sizes herein
indicated and shall be of the quality and workmanship acceptable to the Engineer. The
Contractor shall guarantee lhe finished doors against twisting, warping, cracking and
other defects due to construction and installation for a period of sixty days (60) after the
final acceptance of the building.
b. Shop Drawings
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval shop d rawings of all doors.
Approval of all shop drawings shall be required before start of fabrication. Shop drawings
shall indicate elevations of each door and window, details of each frame type, location in
the building for each item, typical and special details of construction, method of
assembling sections, location and installation requirements for hardware, and size, shape
and thickness of materials, joints and connections.
21 .3 DOORS
a. Wood Door Hollow Core, Plywood Flush Type
Hollow wood core shall be of dimensions shown on drawings and 50 mm thick. All
framings, lock blocks, cores, edging strips, plywood veneers shall be of select grade
tanguile and free from loose or unsound knots or other imperfections that may impair its
strength ar.d appearance. All lumber sha ll be kiln dried with moisture content not to
exceed 12%.
Plywood shall be 6.5 mm thick, tanguile, ribbon grained,' of select grade and color.
Framing joints shall be mortise and tenon. Hollow core doors shall be provided with ribs
equally spaced inside the door core. Tanguile edge strips shall be provided around sash.
Door frames, cores and plywood veneers shall be glued together and hot-pressed into
one piece panel with approved waterproof glue. Edge strips shall be glued around edges
of doors. Doors shall be held in retainers until glue has set. The assembled door shall be
drum-sanded, then be belt-sanded into a smooth flush ready for varnish or paint.
The Contractor shall provide all necessary hardware and lockset for all doors as approved
by t11e Engineer.
b. Extruded Aluminum Door and Frame
i. All aluminum entrance doors and frames and related work shall be completely pre-
fabricated , of bmnd approved by the Engineer.
2. All aluminum extrusion shall be 60G3-TS alloy; flat or formed sheet shall be #32
nnd/or 1100 alloy; and all castin!:)s st1all be 43S alloy .
~. . Fr.:-~iY1C-'3 \lrtrl c!o.')J s ~1hall b8 f.:;c ~ory pre . f:1brica!~ti entfanc.8 uni1s r:0n F;truct•?d of fully
t:;:·: r~~·je•.:i <'ltUlr.;~-.. ,~m ~-3~tions 1 f cl c:~.: SJn ~wo liimeri <;tr;ns ;J~i ~~wvm . Ad jc i!'i\!3 in ti1c
2 1-1
.. -
SECTION V- PART A
21- DOORS-WINDOWS-GLAZING
frames shall be factory made, securely reinforced, weathered and joined by means of
concealed fastenings wherever possible.
4. Door stiles and rails shall be securely joined by means of concealed aluminum
brackets and 1/4" diameter steel tension rod which can be tightened on both ends.
5. The removable section of the extruded aluminum glazing stops shall be on the interior
side of all doors. An adjustable setting block shall be furnished in the head rail for
clearance adjustments after glazing, and pile cloth weather stripping shall be installed
in the stiles of all center hung doors and in the meeting rails of all pairs of doors.
6. Sealant: The exterior joints between door and frames and the surrounding masonry
are to be jointed with secomastic joint sealing compound as manufactured by
Expandite Limited or approved equivalent and applied strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
7. Finish: Aluminum shall be given the pre-anodic finish specified and a Class I
Architectural coating of not less than 0.0007" thick, not less than 30 mg in we ight and
a minimum density of 2.55 grams per cc. Color of Kalcolor amber and developed
without the use of dyes and processing shall be in st rict accordance with the
standards and procedures for Kalcolor Anodizing established by Kaiser Aluminum
and Chemical Corporation.
8. Protection: The Contractor shall protect all aluminum in this section coming in
contact with dissimilar metals and materials by application of asphaltum paint.
It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to protect the exposed surtaces of all

installed aluminum work against staining during construction.
9. Cleaning. The Contractor shall be responsible for cleaning of all aluminum work upon
the completion of building construction.
10. Factory pre-fabricated units shall be within the limits of transportation facilities,
shipped intact for field installation by authorized installers. Installation shall be in
accordance with procedures recommended by the doors and frames manufacturer.
21.4 WINDOWS
a. Windows
All windows shall be jalousie windows of aluminum frame construction and lever
operated. All necessary hardware shall be provided by lhe Contractor.
J <~ lousie windows shall be of the approved kind , meeting the requirements of government
specifications.
b. Window Frames
All window frames shall be of best grade Yakal wood, free from loose or unsound k.n ots.
All woocJ in direct contact with concrete shall be coated with approved pres eNatives.
2i ,{) HARDWARE
f' 'l '~'1 :lri-;r's

hardvm re ;uit~l i:l! e for ~i1 s st.; rvi cc: r&r1uir{;d 10 full:t eq'.1i;1, ir, 1 :-:<1ti:·.;\wtnry
Of.-c i'UtiVJ condition, all doors, cabiii &is, loc.ker.;;, arawers and other operating me111bers
....-:_ ~ ""
I- / .
SECTION V- PART A
throughout the project shall be provided. Where exact types of hardware are required,
suitable types having as nearly as practicable the same operation and quality as the
corresponding individual types shall be furnished.
The Contractor shall provide and fit in place all hardware not herein specifically
mentioned but necessary to leave the work complete. All such hardware, should there be
any, shall confonn in every respect with the balance of hardware herein specified.
After all hardware has been fitted, all exposed items such as knobs, plates and locks shall
be removed until the final coat of painter's finish has been applied, after which the
hc;rdware shall be re-installed.
Items of hardware shall be delivered to the site in their original individual containers,
complete with the necessary appurtenances including screws, keys and instructions.
Each individual container shall be mat1<ed with the manufacturer's name and catalog
numbers.
b. Hardware Types
Hinges. Each leaf of single door or double doors shall be provided with four (4) full
mortise brass butt hinges, "Stanley", "Hager'', or equal, indicated as follows:
1. 4" x 4" hinges- for all door leaves more than 2'-6" wide
2. 3-1/2" x 3-1 /2" hinges- for all door leaves 2'-6" or less in width. For Aluminum Doors:
One (1) set "Jackson" brand or equivalent overhead type door closer (with or without
hold open) on every door leaf;
One (1) set double cylinder deadlock with 1-5/32" diameter cylinder and duplicate
keys (for active door leaf in case of pairs of doors);
One (1) pair top and bottom flush bolts (for inactive door leaf in case of pairs of
doors); •
One (1) pair solid aluminum, push and pull bar handle with decorative wood;
One (1) set adjustable top pivot;
One (1) set extruded aluminum threshold.
Cabinet Hardware. Cabinets shall be provided with cabinet hardware of polished chrome
plated finish. Each cabinet door shall be provided with one (1) wooden cabinet pull
approximately 4" long and two (2) steel hinges. Each door leaf shall have one ('I) self-
adjusting spring action catch.
Loc:<sets. Locksets stwll be "Schlage" or approved equivelent for exterior doors and
"Sargent" or approvocl equivalent for interior doors. Submit sample for approval.
Door Bumper. Ear::ll <!oor sl1all be provided with ~1 door bump2r ns ;.1pproved by t11e
Engineer.
1 I
SECTION V- PART A
c. Keys
All locks shall have two (2) keys with the lock number stamped upon them with the
corresponding number as stamped upon the face of the lock. Blank keys shall be
provided for a minimum of 10% of the total number of keys.
After all locks have been installed and upon completion of the work, the keys shall , in the
presence of the Engineer, be shown to operate their respective locks and shall be tagged
correspondingly .
d. Application of Hardware
Hardware shall be installed in a neat workmanlike manner following the manufacturer's

instructions. Fasteners supplied with the hardware shall be used to secure the hardware
in place. Wood screws shall be used to secure hardware to wood surfaces. Appropriate
and applicable fasteners shall be used for hardware secured to metal parts of the work.
After application, hardware shall be protected from paint, stains, blemishes, and damage
until acceptance of the work.
Hardware shall be properly adjusted and checked in the presence of the Enginee r or his
representative to show that hinges, locks, latches, bolts and door closers operate
properly.
After the hardware is checked, the keys shall be tagged, identified and delivered to the
Owner.
21.6 GLAZING
a. General
The Contractor shall be responsibl e for the correct sizes and grades of the glass to be
used. Improperly set glass or glass which does not meet the requirem ents as to grade
and size will not be accepted. Such glass shall be replaced to the satisfaction of the
Engineer at no extra cost to the Owner. '
~
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval samples of each type of glass ·
and other materials required under this clause, together with such other evidence as he
may deem necessary to establish that the materials meet the requirements of the
Contract Documents.
b. Materials
Materials to be used shall be locally manufactured as approved by the Engineer.
Clear Window Glass - Except oth erwise indicated, glaze windows with clear window
glass.
Glazing compounds shall be non-hardening and shall be of a type that does not req uire
painting. The compound shall be pigmented with aluminum o r bronze powder tu m<ltch
tile metal unit without staining or disco loring.
Mirrors in comfort rooms shall be selected 1/4" polished pla te glass. Edges shall be
square, not beveled, and highly polished with silvered backs. Silver shAll b;~ deposHcrJ
u·JGnly on selectt: d q:.~ality poh.::hed plHte and protected with eler.:tro-co()!Jr-:r !)acf;illg.
t;i'181I O•~. v .:l fllish and !)Bir.t !n &:1 8~·prt.:·V·2C1 standard rn 1~th m1 . f::f :;!1 n:i1 ,-r,r .>hnll !K:N
iltclihlf<1Ctlll .:r's li>:}ei 9ua1e> :~ i ee; r.;:) qu<illt:J .:m d ~ompliance Vtlt ll ~~-~ r:i·;,~::!tioP <.!:'!d
SECTION V- PART A
guaranteed for five (5) years to be free from any defects that impair full and complete
reflection or that present an unsightly appearance.
c. Installation
Glass shall be accurately fitted and carefully set without springing, using setting or spacer
blocks in accordance with the recommendations of the glass manufacturer. Set all glass
before painting. Precaution shall be made to insure a first class glazing installation in
every respect.
Glass shall be free from edge chips, cracks or other defects and all glazing materials
installed to meet approval.
Windows shall be glazed from the outside. Glass shall be secured by metal glazing clips
properly bedded in a glazing compound and secured. Sash shall then be face puttied to
fonm a triangular fillet with neatly mitered comers. Excess compound shall be stripped off
from both sides of the glass at an angle.
All mirrors shall be provided with 3/8" chrome plated brass and frames with mirror mastic
or approved adhesive or by other securement devices as approved by the Engineer.
Broken replacement. Prior to final inspection or when directed by the Engineer, any and
all broken, damaged or imperfect and/or unacceptable panes of window glass and mirrors
shall be removed and replaced with intended kind and quality, as specified, without cost
to the Owner for either material or labor.
Washing and cleaning. After all glasses have been inspected thoroughly and approved,
wash and clean all glazed surface inside and outside, including all mirrors, utilizing
experienced window washers and complying with all safety requirements set forth by the
applicable Building and Labor Departments. Particular care should be taken in washing
and cleaning so as to clean comers of all muntins and sash frame angles of glass and
along muntins and sash edges.
21.7 WROUGHT IRON GRILLES
a. General
Wrought iron grilles shall be installed at all windows.
The Contractor shall verify all measurements in the fi~ld, submit shop drawings to the
Engineer showing sizes, gauges, details of construction, method of assembly and
erection. Fabrication of work shall not commence until all shop drawings are approved .
b. Materials
Wrought iron shall confonm to ASTM Designation A-41.
l::lectrodes for arc welding shall conform with the E-60 series of ASTM Specification A233
latest edition.
c. Shop Painting
Shop painting shall con form with Clause 14 ·· Painting a!·.:'l Co;.1ting of th0se
~pcciliculi o n s .
SECTION V- PART A
22 - ROOFING AND TINNERY
22.1 SCOPE OF WORK
The work includes all labor, materials, equipment, plant, and other facilities and the satisfactory
perfonnance of all works necessary to complete all Roofing and Tinnery works as shown on the
Drawings and as specified herein.
The materials supplied by the Contractor on this item shall confonn with the US Standard or with any
other International Standards of equal value.
22.2 CORRUGATED ASBESTOS CEMENT ROOFING
a. Materials: (Piaca Romana Sheet)
Asbestos cement roofing materials shall confonn with the latest Standard Specification ISO/R
394. The sheet shall have a natural cement gray finish with external smooth surface texture.
The minimum corrugation per sheet shall be four (4) with minimum thickness of 4.5 mm
(3/16"). Ttle size per sheet shall be 1.20 rn x 0.81 rn; galvanized iron strap complete with
stove bolts, nut, lead, and felt washers shall be used for wood purlins.
Accessories:
1. Ridge rolls in pairs, top and bottom pieces, used for ridge covering
2. Ridge end caps in pairs, top and bottom pieces, used for ridge end covering
3. Lightweight ridge rolls, used as hip rolls for covering the hips, in pairs, top and bottom
pieces
4. Eave flashings in pieces , used for covering the gaps of the corrugations at the eave
5. Plastic cement, apply on all overfappings, joints, and around the head of the fasteners
after installation
b. Materials: {Standard Corrugated)
Asbestos cement roofing materials shall confonn with the latest Standard Specification ISO/R
393. The sheet shall have a natural cement gray finish with external smuoth surface texture.
The minimum corrugation per sheet shall be seven (7) with thickness of 4.5 mm (3/6"). The
size per sheet shall be 0 .98 m x 1.83 m • 0 .34 m. Galvanized iron strap complete with stove
bolt, nut, lead, and felt washer shall he used for wood purlins.
Accessories:
1. Ridge rolls in pairs, top and bottom pieces, used for ridge covering
2. Ridge end cap in pairs, top and bottom pieces, used for ridge end covering
3. Hip rolls In pairs, top and bottom pieces, used for hip covering
4. Plastic cement, apply on all over1appings, joints and around the head of the fasteners
after installation
The materials shall be stored in such manner as to prevent damage to the materials.
c. lnstallation
I11Stal!ation of Asbestos Cement Roofing sh C!il confonn with the manufactu rer'!> instructions
and specificfltions. Tile Contractor shnll err.ploy skilled workers only on th is specific item of
work. Any damage caused by erroneous laying of roof rnaterials shall be the responsibility of
the Contractor.
Ti 10 !':ilnim!lm side lap for i-IIC~ca Ro:na.n<J :;h:;et :'.hail lJ0 T?. mm and tlln minirnl!m oncJ !op
:!·:nil l~:J ~ ' 1JCl mm. 1 !"le l l':i n~ r:wrn ~;de !3p \·~.- ~ktndmll CoHugs, ed ~h~e' s\1~lll ;Je ·; ..~.2 r:1m,
<.~ncl ·(iH:l r,·llnir,lum end tap sh81l D 8 30J r.·~rn.
SECTION V- PART A
22 ~ ROOFING AND TINNERY
22.3 TINNERY
a. Materials
All galvanized iron sheets shall have a minimum thickness of gauge #26.
1. Gutter shall be formed strictly in accordance with the detailed Drawings.

2 . Facia cap
3. Soldering lead- Nikolite brand or equivalent
4 . Rivets- copper rivets, imported brand
b. Installation and Workmanship
Gutter shall have a slope of 3.18 mm per 30 em towards the downspout. Joints shall be
riveted and soldered that will ensure a watertight workmanship.
22.4 WATERPROOFING
a. The wate11Jroofing membrane shall be cold-applied self-adhesive rubberized asphalt coated

to a high quality polyethylene sheet with a combined thickness of 0.07 inch. The materials
shall conform with the following specifications:
1. Permeance - 0.003 penns

2. Elongation - 25% (min.)
3. Cycling over cracks (0 to 1') no effect after 1000 cycles
4. Resistance to hydrostatic pressure-75ft of water
b. Application Procedure
1. The concrete surface shall be cured for a minimum of seven (7) days and shall be surface
dry. Surfaces shall be broom-cleaned and shall be free of voids, loose aggregate, sharp
protrusions, form release agents, or other contaminants.
2. The concrete surfaces shall be primed as recommended by the manufacturer. Prim er

shall be dried one hour or until tack free. Surfaces not covered within 36 hours shall be
reprimed, but shall be clean, dry, and free of greB.se, oil, -dust or other contaminants.
3. Membrane shall be applied to primed surfaces which are dry and free of dirt. Membra ne
shall be laid from low points or drains toward high points in shingled fashion. Each strip
should overlap a minimum of 6.35 em and should be rolled down firmly and completely.
4. All inside and outside corners shall be double-covered with membrane by applying an
initial strip of minimum 30 em width centered along the axis of the comer. A cant strip
shall be used in inside corners. Outside corners shall be rounded.
5. Construction and control joints shall be double-covered with membrl3n e; O'ter properly
sealed expansion joints, a double thickness of membrane shall be applied.
6. Tile perimeter of tfle rnembmne placed in nny day's operation <Jnd 3!1 outside edges of
membrane shall have a trowelled bead of manufacturer's re>.commar.rJa•:i m3stic applied
<tfter th e membrane is plm;ed.
·1. Areas around drains, posts, or other protrusions shall have a double layer ot membrane
and sht~ ll be liberally Goaled \'lith mnstiG 3ftor the application of th2. m"3mhi -Jne.
0. lmmf.c.liately b~f-:-:ri) cr.,· <ri;' ~t $; 1 ; H~:·r·1br·:m a, A <:arclul :nsp;;Uinn !': ;l a!l ~ }··.
r.::rJr·.· nf'i r;r•y
ii ole~> , 'l8ms, r,li ··::-, :i ('pl.~cl, ~·; ·,.-;tt;·, ~ : ;;;d ::·::,;1JJ1:i t 'l otil~:.! i rJist:on ti tllli :i ~·:> .: :~:. :1:. ~' :. .:i ·.r,c·•J w;til
JY1ernbr.:~ n e or mdslic.
h
SECTION V- PART A
9. The specified covering material shall be placed on the membrane within five (5) days after
application.
10. The Contractor shall perionn the work in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed
recommendations.
11. Immediately prior to covering the waterproofing sheet, a careful inspection shall be made
for accidental damage and any damaged area shall be cleaned and patched with fresh
waterproofing sheet.
12. Immediately after the waterproofing sheet is placed and ~ept intact, wire reinforcement
shall be laid . Wire mesh shall confonn with the Specifications for welded wire fabric for
concrete reinforcement AASHTO Designated M55. The type of mesh shall be approved
by the Engineer.
c. Finishes
1. Mortar Topping - Over the entire surface thus fanned, 1 :6 mix neat cement mortar shall
be spread with a minimum thickness of one (1) inch with expansion joints in both
directions and not greater than six (6) metres on centers.
Concrete mix shall be steel troweled and finished smooth. The finished surface will slope
towards the roof drains.
2. Roof Drains - Roof Drains shall have cast iron body, installed in locations ind icated on
plans. Drains shall be provided with flashing ctamp device for making watertight
connections with waterproofing membrane, unless otherwise specified.
22 .5 COVE LIGHT: ACRYLIC LIGHT DIFFUSER
a. The installation of acrylic ceiling light diffuser shall be as shown on the Drawings or as
directed by the Engineer. Acrylic Light Diffuser shall be provided with 1" aluminum T-runners
and other incidentals necessary to complete the work.
b. Materials specified in this particular item in U.S. Standaro acrylic plastic 1/16+ thick to be
measured by machine .by .qualified technicians according to the detailed drawings.
1. Aluminum T-runners and hangers shall be of commercial quality and of proper alloy, free
from defects impairing strength and durability.
2. Plastic shall be acrylic confonning with Federal Standard.
c. Construction Requirements
1. All parts of the work shall be of th e materials. design and dimensions as shown on the
Drawings and t1erein specified. Unless otherwise specifically di rected, however, methods
of fabrication, assembly, and installation shall be at the discretion of manufacturer.
2. Pre-moulding shall be done in one piece of acr;lic: shaet in the f<Jc!o1-y tc o:msurG qunlily
vJorkmanship.
3. 1\lurninum T-runners shall be cut on the site to fit properly tile required cover.
d. PrrJtccti on of Light Diffusers
! . ::·r·it8c.!k·,n ~:h :JII ba pro\'icled wilJre vor n :=ce:.s~ ry ~~) pmv<T,1 :iw :i•J'lt difft1!:' ."Jr h,,,.,.,
lm.!akagc.
~
I
SECTION V- PART A
2. No light diffuser shall be installed unless the necessary finish on the ceiling has been
completed.
e. Installation
1. All work shall be installed by skilled workmen specifically trained in this type of work.
2. All units of light diffuser shall fit in and out conveniently especially when repair work shall
be necessary.
\-.
I
SECTION V- PART A
23 -WALL AND FLOOR FINISHES
23.1 SCOPE OF WORK
The work includes all labor, materials, tools and equipment required for the installation of wall and
floor finishes, in accordance with the Drawings and as spedfied herein.
23.2 PLASTER
a. General
Surfaces to receive plaster shall be clean and free from defects. Where necessary to
reduce suction, masonry surfaces shall be dampened, but not soaked, w"h a fog spray.
Regulated ventilation shall be provided. Keene's cement plaster finish coats shall have a
reasonably uniform thickness of approximately 3 mm and not less than 1.5 mm in
thickness at any point. Ceilings shall be level and walls straight and plumb. Comers and
interior angles shall be square which arises slightly rounded. Thickness of plaster, base to the
finished plaster surfaces, shall not be less than 20 mm over metal lath and masonry and/or,
except as required otheiWise, shall oong plaster surfaces in line with a<Jjacent masonl'f materials.
Prior to the removal of scaffolding utilized in connection with installation of ceiling plastering,
Contractor shall notify the Engineer of hls intention to do so in order that final inspections may be
accomplished while they are in place. They shall then be removed, as plastering of side walls
shall be performed with trestle scaffolds on hcxses.
b. Materials
1. Plaster Exterior - Portland Cement Plaster- Where iooicated on Drawings and/or Schedule of
Room Finished, such surfaces shall be plastered with a 2-<XJat portland cement plaster finish, the
finish coat being troweled to provide a fine sand float fillsh.
All portland cement plaster shall be mixed one (f) part portland cement, three (3) parts
sand with 4 lb of PUDDLO waterproofing compound per cwt of cement, applied in two (2)
coats to a total thickness of not less than 20 mm. Each application shall be kept moist or
damp with a fog spray for a minimum of forty-elght (48) hours between applications, and last
coat (finish) kept moist for seventy-two (12) hours.
Trowel to a hard, smooth finish, free of waves Of blemishes that would preclude a
uniformly true, smooth surface both vertically and horizontally. ·
2. Plaster Interior - Interior plaster shall follow specification noted herein before for
exterior plaster, with the exception that the waterproofing compound is to be omitted.
c. Laying
1. Surface Hacking - Contractor is to insure permanent bonding of cement plaster to all

concrete surfaces required to be plastered by hacking surfaces to required degree of
roughness.
Note: It is important that concrete masonry required to be plastered be thoroughly soaked

with water prior to the application of plaster to insure satisfado1y bonding.
?. rtastered ceilings shall include beams, soffrts, furred spaces, drop panels, !'lnd ;:'lily other
nvarhead plaster v;or1<, including plastering over furring around exposEd pipes n:?.xt to
beams, ducts below ceiling IGvels, mouldi~s. soffits etc. All girders or beams projecting below
underside of ceiling shCJII be plastered unless noted otherwise.
::-:2stered walls shall inc1L.;c!e CJ!i vertic~! su:face:-., p!asters, pk1st:1rnri i<Jmi>s, ~c1;.~2:~'G~, d!"<'P
r ·u1el ~~rcan:3, etc.. ! :C>::lC:<, i)f l·;:, !ciO'.-'i.S nr .j m ."Jrs. Pla~tGr on wal!::; -stt~ll bC! carr!;~d ~~J f!'1v(
!, ~ ·(i'Jee;1 g10und.s or b.:,,:;e :..,~fc.,e.:J and oll~er itxed <:oquipment unless indicated oU1erwise.
.-.
\-
'
SECTION V- PART A
3. Cutting and Patching - As work progresses and as required by other trades for proper
installation of their work and after completion of all work of this Clause, the Contractor
shall do all patching replacement or refinishing of any defective material or surface on either
exterior or interior of building to the Engineer's satisfaction and approval.
4. Cleaning - After completion of work herein, the Contractor shall move all of his
scaffolding, surplus materials, rubbish and debris, and dean or remove all plaster daubs and
stains from all floors, windows, stairs, or finished surfaces, to the Engineer's satisfaction
and approval.
23.3 CERAMIC TILES
a. General
All tiles shall be installed by competent tradesmen and in accordance with the best
practices of the trade. Finished surfaces shall be produced in the true plans, free of
damage, scratches, or otherwise faulty tile in all places solk:lly backed up and firmly secured.
All tiling work shall be laid out so that field or pattern is exactly centered on the area to predude
the use of tiles less than full size; do any cutting along edges of area. Joints of uniform
standard width and in true alignment shall be maintained throughout; completely fill with
grouting or pointing mortar and finish smooth and flush with tile. Cut and drill without marring tile,
smooth cut edges with a fine stone. Fit carefully around pipes, outlets and similar items so that
cover plates or trim will cover the cut edges. Remove surplus mortar and grout from tile surfaces
before these have set.
Samples: Duplicate samples of each color and kind of tile shall be submitted to the Owner
for approval. AU materials installed in the work shall match the approved sam pes.
b. Materials
1. Ceramic tile for toilet walls shall be wh~e glaze ceramic tile, size 106 mm x 106 mm (4-1/4" x 4-
1/4'), Fii-Hispano, Mamvasa, or approved equivalent. Gaps, inside and outside comers, and
other moldings, as required, shall be provK1ed. ·
•
1. . Ceramic til~ for toilet floors shall be vMfied unglazed mosaic tile, Fii·Hispano, Mamvasa, or- "--- ·· -· -
approved equivalent.
2. Add resistant vitrified tile shall be used in the laboratory
3. Portland Cement shall be standard brand per ASTM C-150
4. VVh~e cement shall be of approved brand and quality
c. Installation
1. All tiles shall be delivered to the site in sealed containers with labels intact.
2. All tiles shall be set in full mortar bed with all joints plumb and ; o indicated heigh\s.
Mortar bed for floor tiling shall be spread until the surtaco is !evel or sloped f0r
drainage and as large an area that can be tiled before the moria·· nAs reac11ed initi<~l
setting. Verlicnl tiles shall be plumb. The back of all tiles sh all be covered with
mortm to mnke the bed full and even. All tiles shall be soaked in water for twenty-
four (~4) hour~ before le1ying.
:?.. 1-::c,r V.i;"l\l ~-J:~, ~ u ::Cl\1 Pori13nd C~m~~ r.t 1"<1FA 3 1 \iHh ;.·,trowel 0 !\ til.:: I ·:·-_'; :::V. ~- r/ :o"l8 ti:,! ,;. _-,
and set on ~rw pr€part.u ·11ai:s, trL0 't;; Hn e ~mll plumb.
I
1 ,_
I
SECTION V- PART A
Set wall tile with slight twisting motion to assure suitable contact with the wall.
4. Caulking. At completion of tile work, clean cut joints between tiles of excess adhesive
and finish with cement paste.
5. Cleanup. Excess adhesive materials shall be removed from face of tile with soft cloth
dampened with water or kerosene as the case may be.
23.4 ASBESTOS VINYL TILES
a. Ganeral
Where so indicated on Drawings, the concrete floor to be finished with asbestos vinyl tiles
shall be constructed 2.5 mm (1/1 Ol below the finished floor level; surface shall be trowel-
finished leaving a smooth, even surface free from pits, visible joints or marks, and other
imperfections.
b. Materials
1. Vinyl Tile - to be of first rate quality 1/12"thick and 12" x 12" in size (beige color),
- to have the same factors of durability, hardness, resistan ce to alkali,
acids and water;
- to be free from lump and mixed color matter or stains;
- design to be approved by the Engineer, samples to be submitted.
2. Nosings- Rubber step nosings of approved design shall be used to protect

exposed edge of tiles.
3. Asphalt Primer- As recommended by the manufacturer of tiles.
c. Installation
1. Surface to receive tiles shall be smooth, level, free from dust, grits, grease,
thoroughly dry. All cracks or uneven spots shall oe repaired.
~
Moisture on slab shall be eliminated before instaltatlori'offl.oo r ti les'.'
2. Prior to spreading, the siting bed, the lines of bo rde r tiles, if required, shall be
established and the work centered in both directions to permit the pattern to be lakl >Mth a
mirlfT1um of art Iiles.
li!e installation S'lall start frcm the midpoint of the axis of the room so that the opposite end tile will
be of equal width. Width of the tile shall be suqect to the vartation required by the dimensions of
the room aoo the Sz:e of the tile used. Scribe end tile to the wall and cut in a manner that will
ensure dean shorp edges.
3. \/vtlere manufad.ure~s instruction requires pfimirYJ of ooocrete floors, v.Drl< tile primer well into the
surface of the concrete with ~1itf bn.rshes or a straight edge steel ~rcwvel using the minimum
quanttly that will assure o::mpete Wv'ef'"'c:J9e. AJkm primer to dfY thorough!}!.
lle sha!l be irlSta!JW in such a manner that ead1tile is in contact wlth enr;h adjacent ii!e <lnd that tho
entire undersurface of eadl tile will be securely l:rrdOO.
.. !(lints shall hs strflight trroughout. th8 widl.ll aP('\ length of thG :-lr,nr :-md pnr{:endi~ular
'> r>"ll 0 1.. h"
i...n ,;,;.;."~v · l\.
_v L .1.·!·"':. •'1"11
"''J.O!
U .:.. 'l-lu b\, '.I ' 1ol·r· h"n
0 V((\_. .~~ 1. O' · ,.d~rl
,n- (1 /'~~
,.) ' ) ,
SECTION V- PART A
4. Do not begin work until works of other trades, including painting, have been
completed.
5. Cleaning, waxing and polishing- The Contractor shall clean flooring of adhesive and
other soiling. The use of solvents and wet mopping shall not be allowed.
Two coats of water emulsion wax shall be applied, and each coat shall be polished to
produce a well polished finish.
6. Protection -Before traffic is permitted over finished floor, the Contractor shall
cover the floors with building paper and layboard walkways on floors that are
to be continuously used as passageway by workmen. The Contractor shall
remove cracked, broken or damaged tiles and replace these with new ones.
7. Adjustment - The installation shall be thoroughly inspected, and all necessary

adjustments made within one month's time. Cut-tile misfits shall be replaced with
properly cut tile.
8. Tiles that have not yseatedn In level place with surrounding tiles shall be repaired by
application of heat focally and the tile quickly rolled to surrounding floor tile level.
Repair tile showing minor facture shall be similaliy treated as above.
9. Factional changes in dimensions without varying the uniformity of joint widths shall be
permitted. Where required, tile shall be cut with suitable cutting tools and rough
edges shalf be rubbed smooth.
23.5 PLAIN CEMENT FINISH
a. General
1. Colored cement shall be delivered in cartons, cans or kegs to the building site with
the labels intact and sears unbroken, subject to inspection by the Engineer before
being opened .
2. Sample. Where colored cement and colored floor hardener cement fin ish and
surface finish are required, samples shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
Final choice shall be his.
b. Materials
1. Fine aggregate shall consist of sand, stone screenings or other approved inert
materials with similar characteristics or a combination thereof, having clean, hard,
strong, sound, durable, uncoated grains, free from injurious amount of dust, lumps,
soft or flaky particles, shale, alkali, organic matter, loam or other deleterious
substances.
The use of beach sand is prohibited without the written consent of the Engineer.
Gradation shall be as follows:
Percent Passing Sieve
No. 10 (/..00 mm) 1 oa

r--10. 16 (1.18 rnm) 9 5lo 100
f\iu. 1 00 ('I t~Q pn) 25 :'118X
i\k~. 200 Cl 5 r•rn) •j 0 ,118>:.
l_
I
.; 23-4
SECTION V- PART A
Fineness modulus 1.6 to 2.5

Water demand, ratio by weight 0.65 max.
If the fineness modulus varies by more than 0.20 from the value assumed in selecting
proportions for the mortar, the aggregate shall be rejected unless suitable adjustments are
made in proportions to compensate for the dlange in grading.
2. Portland Cement: In accordance with the requirements of Clause 8.3 of the Technical
Specifications.
3. ·Water. In aro:xdance v.;th Clause 8.8
4. Floor Hardener: Non-metallic aggregate hardeners, inorganic pigments and binders,

non-slip and colored by Armor top or approved equivalent at the rate of 60 !b per square
foot or equivalent, to medium traffic mixture.
c. Installation
The concrete sub-floor shall be cleaned and then moistened but not soaked, after which dry
cement shall be sprinkled over the surface and the mortar spread on the setting bed. Tamp
to assure a good bond over the entire area and screed to provide a smooth and level bed at
proper height. Mix mortar one (1) part Portland cement to t'NO (2) parts sand.
To finish the surface with color, sp!inkle enough quantity that will assure average. Finish with
mason pallet joints. Keep free for 48 hours.
23.6 VINYL TILES
a. General
1. Submit one piece sample of vinyl tile to be used.
2. Deliver all materials in good condition to the job site in manufacturer's original
unopened containers with label infonnation clearly marked thereon.
~
3. Install flooring after all other trades, including painting, have been completed.
4. All surfaces to receive resilient flooring finishes shall be dry, clean and smooth.
b. Materials
1. Provide 3/32' gauge 12" x 12" tile.
2. Tile shall be resistant to alkali, grease and oils and shall withstand static loads of 50
psi.
3. Install tile with conventional full spread system with S-89
c. Execution
1. Inspection- Examine sub~tr~te and conditions under which flooring is to be installed.

Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
;.~ . Pr0pnmtion - Concrc·te ~ha:i ~e ~r.noth with no more than 1/ll.. vmiation fr~Ml :he
~k1 ns Wi1.hin 2ny ten (10) 'f~e!. v;·:r.d Clf)'t'in <lll 1id~W> ;md O'(h Oi irrc gul<JritiE'<;. r:il' 3\1
f •'dGk~.. hor~~c f.n-:i ':if;;rc--o:<.:ior : '<·:·~~~ !~it:...;x ;~ern0nt undr-rl<:;ymcnr (f'C:!l~fliil:;J ·~l:mpe:vn.-:)
~:s recon~m ~ndc·j L; i.h~ ,·,.;c;:ng nwnuiae;tui'Dr. Hern ov0 8ll jJ<Iint, c.iis, ·>J<Jxt!s,
SECTION V- PART A
sealers (and curing compounds not compatible with the adhesives employed).
Organic solvents are to be avoided.
3. Moisture test - Determine the suitability of the concrete subfloor for receiving the
resilient flooring with regard to moisture content (curing compounds) by a bond test
as recommended by the flooring manufacturer.
4. Subfloor cleaning - Broom or vacuum clean subfloor prior to the insta llation of the
flooring material.
3. Installation
i. Layout - Lay flooring material with A minimum number of seams consistent with
prudent use of the materials. Avoid cross seams.
ii. Adhesive application - Mix and apply the adhesive following the manufacturer's
instructions, observing the recommended trowel notching, spread rates and open
times.
iii. Flooring installations - Install the flooring in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's written instructions. Seal all seams in the flooring, using tools,
materials, methods and sequence of work in conformance with the written
instructions of the flooring manufacturer. Finish all seams flush to the floor and
free from voids, recesses and raise area.
iv. Cleaning and protection - Remove all excessive adhesive from the surface of the
flooring.
23 3
SECTION V- PART A
24- PLUMBING
24.1 SCOPE OF WORK
The work shall include all materials, labor, tools, and equipment and the performance of all the
work necessary for the complete execution of all plumbing works as indicated on the Drawings.
This will include the followi ng:
a. water distribution system and supply lines fo r the pump stations;
b. building sanitary drains, waste, and venting systems, including floor drains;
c. sewage collection and disposal system in cluding sewer junction boxes and connet:lions
to septic tank;
d. building storm drainage system, including roof drains and junction boxes;
e. testing for press ure and leakage of all water supply and distribution system; leakage
tests for drains, wa ste, and venting system; disinfection of the water supply and
distribution system;
f. securing and payment for all permits and licenses as required ; and
g. preparation and submittal of As-Buill Drawings.
a. Drawings
The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer for approval drawings of the
proposed arrangement. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper fitting of
materials, equipment, and accessories.
b. Connections to Equipment and Fixtures
The Contractor shall provide all necessary mate.rials and labor to connect to the
plumbing system all fixtures and equipment having plumbing connections. All drain age
connections to these fixtures and equipment shall be trapped.
c. Cutting and Repairing
The work shall be carefully laid out in advance and any cutting or construction sha ll be
done only with the pennission of the Engineer. Culling shall be carefully done; and
clamage to buildings, piping, wiring , or other equipm ent as a result of cutting for
installation shalf be repaired by skilled mechanics of the trade involved at the expense of
ttle Contractor.
d. Protection to Fixtures, Materials and Equipment
Pipe openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during installation. Fixtures and
equipment shall be tightly covered and protectecl against di1t, water, and chemical injury.
At the completion of all works, all fixtures. mate1ials, and equipment st1alf be thoroughly
c,laaned and delivered in a condition satisf<-v:tory to the Engineer.
e. A pplicable Standards
T: ~ e in<Jtalf<1tion nnd vtori< requirocl si1:rll co~1fom1 with Hto .:1ppl!c::lbl.:> .c.tunll\?.:·ds ~;0t fott~ l
l·y ti1'7. f:.!l!o·Ning:
SECTION V- PART A
24 - PLUMBING
Philippine National Plumbing Code

Applicable Building Code
Local Fire Department Regulation
Applicable Local Ordinances
American Waterworks Association
or any International Standard of equal value
f. Approval of Materials
Within sixty (60) days from Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit for the
approval of lhe Engineer, the names of suppliers of materials he p~oposes to use,
including trade names and/or samples of the materials if deemed necessary.
g. Coordination
The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper coordination of the work with other
trades and shall provide all necessary clearance drawings where necessary.
24.3 MATERIALS
a. Soil, Waste, and Vent Pipes and Fittings
All soil, waste, and vent pipes and fittings shall be cast iron pipes, service weight for pipes
above ground and extra heavy for pipes underground, or unplasticized PVC with
specifications recommended by the manufacturer engaged in the production of such
materials.
b. Downspout and Drainage Piping
1. Downspouts- Black iron pipes, Sch. 30, ASTM-A53-69a or C.l. Soil pipe, Serv. wt. ,
WW-P-40 1. or polyvinyl chlorine pipe, PVC Class 100
2. Under building structures- C.l. Soil pipe, extra heavy
3. Underground pipe, outside building line-concrete drain.pipe, T&G, ASTM-A53-69a
4. Horizontal runs, roof to D.S.- Black iron pipes, Sch. 30; ASTM-A53-69a.
c. Water Pipes and Fittings
Domestic water supply -galvanized iron pipe, Sch. 40 , threaded connections, ASTM-A-
120-66 and fitting shall be malleable iron (exposed location only), or PVC (Polyvinyl
chloride) pipe and fittings - ASTM-D1784, D-2241, and ASTM-D 2466; fittings shall be
Sch. 40 ASTM-D-2466 (exposed or non-exposed locations).
d. Cleanouts and Plugs
Cl ca nouts shall be the same as the pipe except that cleanoul plugs larger than four (4)
inches will not be required. Cleanouts installed in connection v1ith cast iron !Jell ancl
spigot pipe shall consist of a long sweep quarter ter.d cr i/4 bencJ extended to e~n easily
accessible place or where indi cated on th e Dmwir.gs. An extra he::~vy cnst brass ferrule
with counter-sunk screw cover shall be caulked mto lhe hub of ihe fitting and shall be
flu~hed with the floors. Where cleanou~s in connection with threaded pipes ~re indicated
;:;mf Jro ncr;essible, illey shall t~ heavy bmss rJiug ·~ ci ihe ~a mH sizt! as the p!fJe.
SECTION V- PART A
24- PLUMBING
e. Pipe Sleeves
Pipe sleeves shall be made of standard steel pipe, Sch 40 or cast iron, Class D of
sufficient diameter to provide 13 mm (1/2") minimum clearance around the pipe. The
space between pipe and sleeve shall be made watertight by caulking with oakum and
poured lead.
f. Pipe Hangers, Inserts, and Supports
1. Pipe hangers shall be wrought iron or other approved commercial hangers or as

detailed in the Drawings. Chair straps, perforated bars, or wire hangers will not be
permitted. Hangers sh&ll have short turnbuckles or other approved means of
adjustment. Turnbuckles may be omitted on hangers of soil or waste pipes from
individual toilet rooms to main stacks where space does not permit their use.
Trapeze hangers may be used in lieu of separate hangers of pipes running pa rallel to
each other and close together.
2. Inserts for piping shall be of a type which will not displace excessive amount of
galvanized steel or fish plate of sufficient area to support twice the calculated dead
load.
3. Wrought iron clamps or collars shall be used to support vertical runs of pipes.
g. Valves
Size 64 mm (2-1/2") and smaller
1. Gate Valves - 21.09 kgf/cm2 (300 psi) WOG, bronze, gate valves, solid wedge disc,
ferrule threaded ends, rising stem, bronze body and disc conforming with ASTM
Specs. 862, "Crane" No. 431-UB, or approved substitute.
2. Check Valve- 14.06 kgf/cm2 (200 psi) WOG, bronze swing check valve, bronze disc,
ferrule threaded ends, "Crane" No. 34, or approved substitute.
2
3. Globe Valve - 21.09 kgf/cm (300 psi) WOG, b.ronze globe valve, plug type disc,
ferrule threaded ends, "Crane" No. 314-1/2 P, or approved substitute.
h. Unions
Unions on ferrous pipe 50 mm (2') in diameter and smaller shall be malleable iron.
i. Floor Drains
Floor drains shall be chrome-plated cast or forged bronze or brass fixtures.
j. Hose Bibbs
Hose bibbs shall be bronze with 18.6 mm hose connections.
~~·~.4 EXCAVATION, TRENCHING, AND BAC.<FILU NG
Cxc£~vations, trenching, and backfilling for all underground pipelines stwll be in accordance v;ith
Clause 7 - Earthwork of this project's specifications.
;;_.·1-1
SECTION V- PART A
24- PLUMBING
24.5 INSTALLATION OF SOIL, WASTE, DRAIN, AND VENT PIPING
a. Horizontal Drainage Pipe and Vent Piping
Horizontal waste pipe 76 mm and smaller shall have a minimum grade of 20.33 mm!linear
metre and 100 mm larger, 10.16 mm/linear metre. All main vertical soil and waste stacks
shall be extended full-size above roof line as vents, except where otherwise specifically
indicated. Where practicable, two (2) or more vent pipes shall be connected together and
extended as one pipe through the roof. Vent pipes in roof spaces shall be run as close as
possible to underside of roof, with horizontal piping pitch down to stacks without forming
traps in pipes using fittings as required. Vertical vent pipes may be connected to a vent
line carrying other fixtures. The connection shall be at least 1.20 m above floor on which
the fixtures are located to prevent the use of any vent Jines as waste lines. Horizontal
waste lines receiving the discharge from two (2) or more fiXtures shall be provided with
vents, unless separate venting of fixtures is noted.
b. Fittings
All changes in pipe sizes on soil waste lines shall be made with reducing fittings or
recessed reducers. All changes in direction shall be made by the appropriate use of forty-
five (45) degree wyes; half wyes, long sweep quarter bends, or elbows may be used in
solid and waste lines where the change in direction and flow is from the horizontal to the
vertical, and on the discharge from water closets. Where it becomes necessary to use
short radius fittings in any other locations, the approval of the Engineer shall be obtained
before they are installed.
c. Cast Iron Pipe Joints
All joints in bell and spigot cast iron soils, waste, drain, and vent pipe or caulking ferrules
shall be firmly packed with oakum or hemp and caulked with lead at least 25 mm deep.
In lieu of lead, any other valuable joint system may be used.
d. Cleanouts
1. Cleanouts at the bottom of each soil stack, waste ~tack, interior downspout, and
where less indicated, shall be the same size as the pipe up to and including 100 mm
and 150 rrim for larger pipes.
2. Cleanouts on floors shall be cast iron ferrule caulked into cast hub and fitted with cast
brass screws plug finish with the floor.
e. Flashing
All pipes passing through the roof shall be provided with lead flashings. All flashings ::,hall
be rna de watertight with 2. 72 kg sheet lead or 16-ounce sheet copper and shall extend up
to the pipe and down over to the top of the pipe at least 0.15 m, and along the rr:;cf not
less than 0.30 m and shall lap over flashings to make a weatherproof joint.
f. Traps
r:uch fixt11re and piece of equipment requiring connections to the d r-:Jin:ege spte.-:1. 0x•-::sp1
fixlures VJith waste shall be equipped with a trap. Traps are specified to be 5upplied wilil
the fixtures. Each trap shall be placed as near to the fL-'<lures as possible. Trups inst8lled
on ttJ,·o<lded pi;Jes stw!l hnve fecessecl dr<linage pattern.
SECTION V- PART A
24- PLUMBING
g. Pipe Sleeves, Hangers and supports
1. Pipe sleeves shall be installed and property secured in place at all points where pipes
pass through masonry or concrete except unframed noors on earth. Pipes shall not
be permitted to pass through footings or beams unless noted on the Drawings. Pipe
sleeves in floors shall extend no less than 25 mm and not more than 50 mm above
finish noor elevation. After installation of the pipe, the space around the pipe shall be
packed with plastic material and made watertight. Flashing shields for sleeves
passing through waterproofing membrane shall be thoroughly mopped into the
membrane.
The space between the pipe and sleeves shall be made watertight by inserting
oakum gasket and by immediately caulking the remaining space with poured lead .
2. Horizontal overhead nms of pipes shall be hung with adjustable wrought iron pipe
hangers spaced not over 3 m apart. Hub and spigot soil pipe shall have hangers
spaced not over 1.5 m apart and located near hubs.
3. Inserts used shall be installed before the concrete is poured in such a way as to
permit adjustment of the bolt in one horizontal direction.
4. Vertical runs of pipes shall be supported by wrought iron clamps or collars spaced not
over three metres (3 m) apart.
24.6 INSTALLATION OF WATER PIPES, FITTINGS, AND CONNECTIONS
a. General
Gate valves shall be installed close to the point of connection to the existing service line
outside the building. The piping shall be extended to all fixture outlets and equipment
from the gate valves. Outlets, where indicated, shall be capped or plugged and left ready
for future connections.
b. Mains, Branches, and Runouts

•
All runs of piping shall be installed . as indicated on the plan. Th e- piping shall be cut
accurately to measurements established at the building by the Contractor and shall be
worked into place without springing or fo rcing. Care shall be taken not to weaken the
structural portions of the building. All piping above ground shall be run parallel with th e
lines of the building unless otherwise shown or noted on the drawings. Branch pipes from
the service line may be taken off the top of the main or ·sid e of the mai n, using such cross
over fittings as may be required by structural or installation condition. A ll service pipes ,
valves, and fittings shall be kept at sufficient distance from other work to permit a finished
covering not less than 12.5 mm between finished covering on the different services. No
water piping shall be buried in noors or masonry walls unless approved by the Engineer.
Changes in pipe sizes shall be made with reducing fittings. The use of long screw and
bushing is prohibited.
c. Joints
.A.fter cutting and befo re threading, all pipes shall be reamed and she~ll have burr.:>
rcrnoved. All screw joir.ts shalf be made with graphite and oil or with an approved
f)raphite compound applied t'.) male threads rmly. Th reads shall be f u!l cut, and not more
tt;an t11ree threads on th(; p:f:-<3 s·,1all remair. <"xposerJ. Caull<ing of tll re3d jr;u1ls t~ !jlf. ,,·~nt
ho 'lks shnll t: e rermi'led. Unions sh:-lil te provided where 18(.Jiiiie'.l ft.·r cu·:.c-Jnr;<)C'k•n .
·; ·uemled sw1ng to:ts ~j·, a fl b& u:>cci for ln~~ n.:11 C.:'Jni!r.-•;iion to ri:.cr._; r:> n (~ :r <.~ i :r:> .
."
, "
L-r·.._
CONSTRUCTION OF WATER SYSTEM FOR STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECfFICATIONS
SECTION V- PART A
24- PLUMBING
d. Valves
Valves shall be provided on all supplied fixtures. Where valves are indicated on the
drawings in connection wilh runouts, risers, branches, and mains, they shall be in
accordance with these Specifications.
e. Union
Unions, where required, shall not be concealed in walls, ceilings, or partitions.
2-t7 FASTENINGS FOR FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT
All "fixtures and equipment shall be supported and fastened in a satisfactory manner.
a. Where secured to concrete or hollow block walls, fixtures and equipment shall be
fastened with 6 mm dia. brass bolls with twenty threads to the inch, sufficient length to
extend at least 76 mm into solid concrete or hollow block work. Fasteners shall be fitted
with loose tubing of sleeves. Inserts shall be securely anchored and installed flush with
the fin ished walls, and shall be completely concealed when the fixtures are installed.
b. Where secured to wood partitions, fixtures and equipment shall be fastened with brass
screws. Screws shall go into wood such as wood inserts, floor joists, studs, or solid
pieces not between studs.
c. Where through bolts are used, they shall be provided with plates or washers at back set
so that heads, nuts, and washers will be concealed by plaster. Bolts and nuts shall be
hexagonal; and exposed bolts, nuts, capnuts and screw heads shall be provided with
chromium plated brass washers.
d. Upon completion of the work, all fixtures, trimmings, and equipment shall be thoroughly
cleaned, polished, and left in first class condition for final acceptance.
24.8 PAINTING
All exterior surfaces of ferrous piping to be installed in or through concrete floor fill or tile floors
and underground sh~ll be given. o.ne coat of acid resisting paint having a bituminous base.· Finish-
painting of exposed pipe, pipe covering, hangers, supports, and other iron work shall conform with
the requirements of Clause 14 - Painting and Coatings. ·
24.9 PERMITS
All construction permits, inspection fees, licenses, and taxes due to local/national government
necessary for the prosecution of the work shall be secured and paid for by the Contractor who
shall solely be responsible should there be any delay or reason of his failure to comply with t11e
provisions of this clause.
24.10 AS-BUlLT DRAWINGS
Upon completion and before temporary acceptance of tile work, the Contractor shall prepa~e c1t
his own expense Rnd submit to the Engin&er <lS-fJuilt drawings indicating in all de tail~ ihe actual
as-built conditions of the work requir{;d. As-bul!t drawings sl1<1fl be prepared in reproclucible fo1n1.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the reproducible originals, together ~vitil three (3)
printed copies.
SECTION V- PART A
24- PLUMBING
24.11 GUARANTEE
Upon completion and before temporary acceptance of the work, the Contractor shall furnish the
Owner a written guarantee, stating that all work executed under this Clause are free from defects
on materials and workmanship. The guarantee shall be for a period of one (1) year from the date
of temporary acceptance of the work. All work that become defective during the term of
guarantee shall be replaced, renewed, and/or made good by the Contractor at his own expense
and in a manner satisfactory to the Owner.
24.12 TEST FOR SYSTEM
a. The cold water piping system shall be tested in the presence of the Engineer in
c onjunction with the pump discharge line before being put into operation. Any defect or
deficiency discovered as a result of the test shall be immediately repaired, and tests shall
be repeated until the test requirements are fully complied with. No caulking of pipe joints
to remedy leaks will be permitted.
b. The entire drainage and venting system shall have necessary openings plugged, and the
entire system shall be filled with water to the level of the highest vent stack above the
roof. The system shall hold the water for 30 minutes with a d rop not g reater tha n
100 mm.
c. At the completion of the work, all parts of the installation shall be thoroughly cleaned of
grease, metal cuttings, and sludge which have accumulated during the testing operation.
24.13 DISINFECTION
The entire water system shall be thoroughly flushed and disinfected with ch lorine in conjunction
with the pump discharge line before it is placed in service.
24.14 PLUMBING FIXTURES
a. The Contractor shall furnish and install all plumbing fiJflures and accessories ind icated on
the Drawings complete with trimmings and fittin gs, unless otherwise specified under each
item.
b. All fittings and trimmings for fixtures shall be chromium-plated and polished brass, unless
otherwise specified. Where corrosion-resisting metal is mentioned, same shall be either
chromium or shall contain not less than 13% chromium ·and less than 8% nickel alloy.
c. Generally, fixtures shall have the water supply discharge above the rim, equipped with
angle stops or straight stops. Stops integral wijl1 the fau cets sha ll be furnished and
installed with fixtures. Exposed traps and supply pipes for all fixtures and eq uipment shall
be connected to the rough piping system at the wall unless otherwise specified .
. \
STANDARD DRAWINGS
zz
i ~-
CDO
,.. (71
oQ
NORMAL INSTALLATION
WHERE SAND BEDDING/
¥
0 ..
BACKFILL NOT REQUIRED ~~
. Y!
I~ LEGEND:
I
.....•
z z·
:1 ' 2
CD 0(71
,..
0 0
>
ACPP a
PVC INSTALLATIONS . . 0..
a..
<1:
IN NON-GRANULAR SOIL AS
DETERMINED BY ENGINEER
NOTE: ALL DIMENSIONS IN METRES EXCEPT WHERE OTHERWISE SHOWN.
SPACE SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR PIPE JOINTS TO PREVENT z
BRIDGING. Q
,_
a..
oc
-~
OF TRENCH D1MENS tON
TABLE ( IN METRES) ~o
F=~======~=r==~==~==~;:=?~~==~==~~~~==~==~~u
3 11 a · a:
ln. UNDER 4" I
I
-6" 8" lO,'I 12''
I
14.11 16" 18" 20 11 24"
PIPE DIAMEI"ER
~,11NlMUi\1 I w I
,,
~.-- -- -- - --·- ---- - --~ ... - --- --
·l=:~~~ 'WJ
··-.·:: · . . : . ·.· .. · . . . _
. -:·._.
. ~-· .
ISOMEtRY OF
THRUST. BLOCK
AREA
L REDUCER*
PIPE TEES goo

SIZE DEAD BEND
mm(:in) f;ND
75 (3") 0 .05 0.07
100{ 4") 0 .09 0 .12
150( s" > 0 . 20 0 .28
200( 8'.') 0 .35 0 .50
250(10'') 0 .55 0 . 77
300(12") 0 . 79 I. II
350'(14"> I. 07 I. 52
490(1S'~ 1.40 i.98

'450(18") I. 77 2.51
------- --.- . . .-
~00(2<1') 2 .19 3. 10
--~-- - - - •a--•.
I =='\·~
--... ......_._
-... _
3 . 15
~ · ... -·~AG
- ... __
... _ __
__..._.,~ ~,-·--· - -=---- · ~ · r"'l< · . ...... ~ -·-·------ ~-· . ....._ . .,. ....(.
. '' ·
,' :· · . . . . - ...·: .
.~·
--...·-···
RENCH WIDTH
"W"
12 · :J
....:::>
a:
w
POURED AGAINST 1-
UNDISTURBED SOIL
(TYPICAL) ~ 'Q
C>
..J >
A <( 0 .•
... Cl
0 CL . .
9 <tO
CLO
E LE.VAT ION SECT. ION
w
w
TABLE OF MINIMUM THRUST BLOCK, DIMENSIONS FOR I-
PIPE SIZES 75 mm TO GOOmm 0. I-
~
:>1
PIPE THRUST BLOCK BEARING
8
II C" 0
SIZE 1-
AREAS IN SQ. METRES (/)
W:i :r
zowu
mm <1r:.. > METRES 90° BEND 45° BEND 22 I/2°BE~D OW::>W
ZI-JI-
75 C3"l a 100(4• · 0.25 O.i4 0.12
1~0 ( 6 .. ) 0.2~ . 0 ; 31 :o.n *
0 . 12
.. w .
0 ..
0
. 200(8") 0.2~ 0 : 64 .0 .30

-0.15---- wZzW
•.J~ ~ 5
<{ w
.:X (/)
250(10") 0.25 0.85 0 . 46
-- ~
owa:::x:
0.24 Vl 0 0 0
300 (12") . 0 .30 I. 23 0.66 0 .34
350 ( 14") 0.30 1. 67 0.90 0.46
400 ( 16") 0.30 2 . 18 1.18 0.60
450 (18") 0.35 2 .'7.6 I. 49 0 . 76
5 00 (20") 0.35 3.41 1.84 0 .94
GOO {24") OAO 4 . 91 2.6~ I. 35 z
0
* THRUST BLOCK NOT REQUIRED 1-
U)tl.
z~
NOTES : oo
_(I)
(f) Ill
(i) f.1D OVl=. 1\R!;AS OASED ON AN ASSUMED SOIL 8EJ\{'H NO· PRESSURE 9 G kPo
_o.
( 2000 puf). · >
llJ I
® H~OU CE OR INCREASE AREAS PROPORTiONATELY . TO SUIT 'A CTUAL .qELD 0::
I
®
r"Zi:\
'.!.'
CO;\IOIT !ONS UPON APPROVAl.. OF .. ENOINEER.
CONCRETE FOR T~RUST BLOCK SH.ALI.. Bl:: 13.0 MPa (2000 p~·l }
"~ ~2UBT :Jt.XXS NOT REQUIRED ON STE!::L PIPELINE 3 \'liTH WC:LDED
.~-l·t- -·
¢. !
.:·n f."Li\N E>E:U ~OINTS OR ON SOLVENT WELDED PVC PIP£ .
~. ; ·~t~n;:; i~!;>:.! CONtlECTS 70 A FITTI~IG Cltl II STf.t::L PIPE LIN:; i'HE ST't::EL 3 -.,-L. _.
t..;:;:: J..J':l: 0HAL:.. DE DLOCl<ED AS SHOWN HEREON .
o~ . I. I ,
BEARING .l\REAS BASE D Oil ltlTERN,\l. PfiE!>~t;iiE o~: lOS m ( 150 p~J)
J~__Til_ ·~
···.· .· ·
·...~... .
.·:.. :·
. .·
z ·C:
(!)~
a. ~0
w
·"i'
a. ~8
GROUT IN FIELD ..J
0.089 LAP
-
z lli a:::
~ 1- ~
0 C/) ct
<( z
a:; ct
en :l
-
t.J ~
UJ
•:.J
~
0 C/) w
z
....
:;:)
0:
-
..J
~
~
UJ
w
CEMENT MORTAR J---.-J ~ 0
LIN lNG (SEE SPECS.) ~
MORTAR: 400mm PIPE AND SMALLER, .J
DAUB INS IDE OF BELL ENO OF oct
LININ.G BEFORE' STAEBING THEN 0
SWAB SMOOTH. 450mm AND
LARGER, . POINT AFTER BACKFILL.
9
BELL a SPIGOT JOINT WITH
STOP ALL. COATINGS AT
0 .063 FROM PIPE ENO RUBBER GASKET
WITH" ALTERNATE OF
~GROUT IN FIELD
COAL TAR COAT.ING (TY .
CEMENT MORTAR
t.
.
_ ...·
INSIDE WELD AT CONTRACTOR'S

OPTION FOR 4~0 mm PIPE AND ' t.
LARGER'
BELL a SPIGOT SLIP 'JOINT

NOTES:
CD it'ALTERNAT IVE: Wl-IEN SPEC If' lEO: COAL TA R ENAMEL COATING.
tta..
® ALL DIMENSIONS IN METRES EXCEPT WHERE OTHERWISE SHOWN. ct
@) OMIT COAT lNG ON ABOVE GROUND INSTALL AT IONS . PAINT INSTEAD. (SEE s·PECS.)
@) COATING AT JOINT TO MATCH PIPELINE COAT I NG.

0.00'32 MIN.
z
0.0016 MIN . PENETRATION 2
- - ·,
...·.·.
w
a..
.0125 x 12 GA. WELOED WIRE , MESH a..
-'
w
w
1-
GROUT IN FIELD (j)
~ ·
CE MENT~
MORTAR 0 . 102
&
COATING
~
~
w ·
0
1-
z
MORTAR: 400 mm PIFE AND ..,
0
CEMENT MORTAR SMALLER, DAUB E£LL AT ~C
LINING 0.004 76. STEEL PLATE OF UNING BEFORE STABt I NG·,
THEN SWAB SMOOTH.
PIPE SHELL 450 mm PIPE AND LARGER,
POINT AFTER ASSEMBLY.
BUTT STRAP JOINT DETAIL

w
...w
l
1-·
~
~
0
MECH . CPLG. NOT SHOWN

w
CO LLAREC' END z
0
z
CONT. WELD· -· - ) I
PIPE SHELL 0 . D,... _.. =-_)
COLLARED DETAILS
-----------------------
FOR MECHANICAL COUPLINGS
FOR 3\JOmm PIPE AND SMALLER, IN USE WITH MECHANICAL
COUPLING PIPE ENqS, GROOVEO OR GROOVED END SECTIONS
WEL DED TO PIPE, M/>Yf<E us::
.:.T CONTRto.CTORS OniON.
NOTES:
(j) ·~ 1\LTERNATIVE 'v'IHEN SF'FC:IFIED : C:CA1... fAR E'NAMEL COATING
-~
<!><D
~0
o_
01
1-0
(f)(.)
NOTES: I
~ffi
<D ALL DIMENSIONS !.N METRES EXCEPT WHERE OTHE~WISE SHOWN.
® I.D. OF BUTT STRAP EQUALS O.D. OF PIPE. :~
I<{
® SEE SPECS. FOR COATING Ai>m LINING OF BUTT STRAP AND REPAIR OF PIPE L IN ING. I:;:E
..J
<{ ·
a:
UJ
;;
II
0> ••
a.~
c.o
<{0
"c " DIA.· 0.0127(112") THICK AFTER REPAIR OF LINING,

It PLUG. PLACE PLUG AND FULL
WELD. (DOUBLE PASS
0.0063 MIN.}
"b" DIA. STD. SCHED. 40
STEEL PIPE
rULL WELD (DOUBLE PASS)
It THI CKNESS
SECTION®
z
Q
.~
2
0 .30
~
fTl
0-:z:,
~zr
Is:;r
gmo
~~ 6v/jJB~~
_:::0~ u~~~.·
<nrrtm
m"'z
<nc(j)
0
::1:
2
orz ~~~
:f~(j) :x>-:::0
.z (/) l> X~ITI
"oI Z
::v -o-u0
fT1
------+-'1--H----·+ II I ~i ~W;t
=u:ui
ITIITI~
oo-
.. 0
0 0 ~
f..+. I
(nt,.J
00
·.(·
J.15l..,. I I I ~~
(/)t:
oz
.rQ
-·
(j)()
rno
rnz
I ~NP>
·"3
l>(;)b-..
(j) 3 I?'
~
tJ)3
(/)()
-o:::O
23 5g
:::0
CD fll.~ o:i :fz
·(") fTl
E:J ~(Tl ·U)
-·
z~
REVISIONS NOT TO SCALE LOCAC WAtER UTILITfES -ADMINISTRATION ·

:-.!0. I DATE llN:TJALI.. · DESCRIPTION
METRIC CONVERSION CONCRETE ENCASEMENT DETA!L
Approved: ~:TD. OWG.
Date: CD-107
~ ~~
, I
PIPE ~
.I / . SUI;IPOOTED PIPE c( ..:J ~8
...~
a: (I)
I LAYER OF 6.3mm.
( V4") EXPANSION
JOINT FILLER ,___ _ _ ___.,_ _,__ ___,_
\ -z
<t
t-
w
0
~
a::
0 ~
a_ -J
a_ <l:
a:
.... • , I '
:::>
C/)
w
z
-; ____. -. -:- -+-• -~
• 4 CONCRETE · PIPE 1 _ · ·_. t. ·
.. ....
- - ---'--t--i SUPPORT r w
a_
.6 •
19 mm;(~4' ) CHAMFER
1
•• ' . A '·
6 • a_
(TYPICAL . .. .. ~0
~----~ ~~----~----~~
AU. CORNERS ) .•
"A •• 0.30'
----------------- ~- ~
t/)
a:
w
us
SUPPORTED FLANGE z
DIMENSION "A" IN METERS <3
.- zw
PIPE SIZE SUPPORTING
mm (ln .) PIPE 'FLANGE
100 ( 4") 0.30 0.30
1~0 (6") 0.30 0.3~
200 ( 8") 9 -30 0.45

2~0 ( 10") 0 . 3~ 0.50
!()() ( 12") o . .. o 0.55
3~0 (14") o :45 o:ao
400 ( 16") o .oo
• e. 0 .. . . .. '
0 -70 I • . · ·. b. . _' '-"-'-f-..-- CONe. PIPE
. .. SUPPORT
4~0 ( 18") o. ~~ 0. 715 .. ~
500 ( 20") 0 .60 o.eo

. ·. . . )- . . ..
19mm(3/ 4")
600 0 .70
.· ... •"
• • I CHM«R
0 .90 - - - - 4(TYPYCAL, ALL 1--+....+-+-+-i--i
+------~~-----+ CORNERS)
0.30
NOTES:
(!) ALL CONCRETE SHALL BE POURED TO AVOID INTEFERENCE
wrTH BOLTED ·coNNECTIONs,
~ PIPE SUPPORTS TO BE LOCATED_ AS SHOWN ON THE· PLANS .
@ SPECIAL PIPE SUPPORTS SHALL BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE
WITH DETAILS SHOWN ON Tt£ PLANS.
@) WHEN SUPPORTING PIPE AND FLANGE ON THE SANE LINE OF
PIPE, CONCRETE PIERS FOR ALL PIPE SUPPORTS SHALL
11
HAVE DIMENSION A '' AS A FLAN<:E SUPPORT•.
. ... ---- .. .. .. ----------------------- - ---- ------------------ -- - ---
.· .. :: ... .... ..
z
0
~
<EJ
cc ~
a: 0
1-
- a::~
(/)
z
~
cc 0
(/)
~
·'- -- w
t= 0
:J z
<[
~
:l
. 6 a:
w
~
w
1-
cc ~
:1; 0
_.J z
·- JCONCRETE ANCHOR BLOCX cc 0
g
_.J
0
TABLE OF MINIMUM ANCHOR BLOCK

VOLUMES IN CUBIC MET RES FOR
P.IPE SIZES n TO '30.0 mm
PIPE . SIZE PIPE OEFLEC"f ION ( ti)

mm (In . ) 45° 2Z Vzo II 1/4 °
15 ( 3.) 0.2..3 0 . 12 0 .06
100 (4") 0.41 0.21 0 .10
1~0 (6
11
) 0. ~ 0 .47 0.23
200 (8") 1.63 0.83 0.42 1
11
2ts0 (10 ) 2.!:5~ 1.30 0. ~
11
300(12 ) '3.68 1.87 0.96
·-
NOTES:
CD EMOCO
CONC~F.T r:: .
ENO OF ClARS A MINIMl:JM OF Q,'j(J :,,1ET RE li\110
(0 CONCR~TE fOR AN::HOR BLOCK!> SHALL GE !3.9 MPo ;1\

( 2.000 ptl ).
G) ".NCH'OR BLOCK DIMENSIONS BASED ON rNTERNAL PRESSURE
HIALIST BI.OCKS NOT Rl-mUIR!;;D ON STC::EL PI P EU~IES WITH \'/ I~LUED
C1) 011 FLMlGED .!O iNiS 011 _0~1 !::>OLV!:N T WELOED i' 'i C !) JF;~.
I
J
I_ ,.. . • .,,_....,._ ._. __ _ ,. . .... ,...,.,. ....._. .. _ ,...._. •· ··- .. ~- - --·•·•·•-----·-•- ....-•···- ·-·· · •• ••• . _,, _.,..,.,. _ _.. ____..,. ..,. .... , .. ,.- _....,., , -· • • , •··-•• · • .. -- · • ... ... ·• - --•~ n=-
B
28mm EACH FACE
TYP.
c
C/2
CONC. ANCHOR
BL.OC~.
ELEVATION SECTION
-~
. . ......
......
TABLE OF
~IMEHSlON
MINIMUM ANCHOR BLOCK
FOR PIPE SIZES ~~0 T,O
.· ~
.~Omm ~8
~ci
PIPE SIZE DEFLECT\ON ANCHOR BL.OCK DIMENSION
mm (In.) ANOLE A A B c
~0 (14") 4r:5• 1.68 0.156 1.66
.. " ·22t/2• 1.29 0 .~ 6 1.29
.. or II 114• 0.915 0 .156
..
·o.~
400(16") ~~· 1.82 0.~1 1.82

.. .. 221/2• ~.4·4 0.~1 1.44
"
.. II 11~• 1.07 0.61 1.07
>
h.
a..
<(
4W (18") 4~· 1.98 0 .66 1.98

.. .. Z2 112• 1.~4 0.66 I.M
. .. 111/4• 1.17 0.66 1.17
~00(~") 4~· 2 .13 0.71 2.13
II 22112. 1.68 0.71 1.66 z
" II 1/4• 1.28 0.71 1.28 0
" It
·- (/)~
600(24.) 415• 2 . 42 zq;
..
2.42 0.81 ou
II 22112• 1.90 ~.81 1.90 -~
.. "' 11 114• 1.46 .0.81
~
1.46
Cho
>
L!J
' Cb
NOTES:
CD ALL DIMENSIONS IN . METRES EXCEPT WHERE OTHERWISE SHOWn ,
~2) CONCHil'if.:: FOfl ANCHOR BLOCI<S SHALL re 13.9 ~.1P~ \?.000 ~!:II )
M·lC\10~ ~JLOC\{ OIMEHSIONS eASED ON mT~m~t<\L
tO 3 r.1 {;,}0 ;>al. j. AHD .fl. 3AFETY fACT On OF l.l3 •
f~ S~I.mZ ·,; ;;
~ _;_l_M
: ·---· ......... ·-· -... - · ·-.. - -·-·-·--~-~- ----~--~-·---..··- - - ·---------· -· - ---·- ._.. ·-· . ··--·- .. _,_.... _... ·-···-·· -· ·- ...J
. . . ·· ·:·· ··· ·
.·. .·
·. ' ·' ·.
·-:·. :·
z
0 ~...J 0
~
0 :
0 j
a
w
w (/)
f- '<.
t>
FOR CASING LENGTH SEE DRAWINGS
COATED AND LINED

STEEL CARRIER
l ~ :.
PIPE <.!)
z
C/)
......J
8 ..
"'C
<t
(..)
d 0
>
0
...
.
C:. •c
0
......J ~
(/).
C:. c
G: c
ANY VOIDS CREATED BY BORING,

JACKING, OR TUNNELING SHALL
BE FILLED BY PRESSURE
GROUTING .
I.O.OFSTEEL CASING SHALL BE

0.20 m MINIMUM GREATER THAN
0.0. OF BELL OF CARRIER PIPE FILL ANNULAR SPACE WITH SAND
OR GROUT
&
<!
NOTES:
Q) ALL JOINTS OF CARRIER PIPE WITHIN CASING SHALL BE WELDED . z
0
@ .CASING SHAL.L BE SMOQTH STEE.L PIPE .
@ CARRIER -PIPE S~ BE TESTED B~ORE FILLING CASING WITH SAND OR GRO'JT (/)~
zet:
@ SKIDS s·HAU. BE SECURELY ATTACHED TO CARRIER PIPE WITH STEEL BANOS. g~
MJN11.4UM TWO BANOS PER SKID. (J)O
@ S~t.lO S SHALL BE NOTCHED TO RECEIVE STEEL BANDS. >
IIJ
C§> !:l XlO S SHALL BE ROUNDED 9 R BE~LEO 00 LEADING EC~. fr':
(l) S:<!DS ~AL L BE GREASED DEFORE PIPE INST/l.LLATl ON .
_l
•'l:
PLATE THICKNESS OF CASING PIPE F-
- - ·- -·-- -- UNDER '3~ 0 mm 3~0mm f :> 7~Crr.mi-7c-'-o'""'.,-,.,,.-
., . -G-OV_E_R--; ;~
;:, --- -- ~- ·r··

j l)i~;~:;l:~.~- - ~ .3 rrm. -?.5~... J~- !.2.7_~ J ~.~
' SHALL Df: SM OOTH SH:t-:L i:i;::::
I :; .
1.......···-· --·· ---- ... ··- ··- ··-- ·-- ---- ·.. .. ··- --·- -· ·-·-~·.-·- --- -- ... . l .. .
· - · - ·- ..... ... . ... . • . . ~ .L ..... t_.J __
r·
~
- ~--~ ._...
,,,....
~
~·
~ VARIABL£
~ SEE STD. DWG. CD- 201R AND C0-202R
r,
~
,,~ I VARIABLE 4
:I
I'• 0.15 MIN. ·
~
~
~
g I I
'
;j 3
H 3
I
I
"'
3
3
1 ~- ~- o:z::
; l>"' )>(ll o-
<z
-i(ll -ic
,,~ {TI3 rn3 rnC>
::tim
::tl3 ::tJ3 0
~
,,~ "01)
-< "''t.l
-<
3:o
l>'
~I' "'o ~0 ;:o::-
·i
1I
tTl
0
I
. 0
I
,.;:
rTI"TI
o::o
,, )> J> l>
t/) (IJ =3:
t/) (IJ ;ErTI
~: -
(1l
-
Ul
=l>
z
0 0 0
I _ __
~ - REViSIONS - SCALE: NOT TO SCALE DATE LOCAL WATER l.Jfl.DTIESADMTNTS-TRATTON
:: i·,c;_! :)AE! !:~i"fiALl DESCRIPTION APP"VD DESIGNED TECH. STD. COMMITTEE 6/77
:-.D. :!:Vm! . sc 1 ADDi:D ·w~ o·RAWN RSB 6/77 VALVE BOX AND COVER
'1~"'--'--i~ CHECKED TE:CH. STD. COMMITTEE 8/78
~~ 1
!
! I Recommended: ??'*>v /7~ ~oved :
Date:
STO. DWG.
I JAMES M, MONTGO C0-201 A
• Q:;
~-
oO
d (\1.
1- I ·
(1)0 '
Q
HINGED C.!. FRAME AND
eOVER MARKED "W11
(SEE DWG. co~ 201A)
0.60 m x 0.60m CONC. PAD

IN PAVED A .C. AREAS
lJ ..
6 - ·
0 .9 DIAMETER CONC. PAD

IN GRAVEL OR DIRT 50mm (2") SQ.OPERATING
ROADWAYS a OUTSIDE ~1--1 NUT TO BE LOCATED (/)
OF TRAVELLED ROADWAYS IN CENTER ·oF CAN a:
w
w
150mm PVC CLASS 150 z
3. 2 mm (I/8")FLAT PLATE WATER PIPE az ·
w
CENTERING GUIDE WELDED
TO VALVE STEM EXT .
l~mm (314") EXT. STRONG
GALV. STEEL PIPE
t--
CRUSHED ROCK (0.0127 MAX.)
ABOVE AND AROUND VALVE ,---...,_"""
FOR BEARING AREAS ~ ~ WATER

O.'J SIDE FACE,$, USE
VALUES REQ D. FOB MAIN
TEES AS SHOWN ON
STD. DWG CD -102 R POUR ~ ~ 12nJ..m.. REBAR AROUNQ
AGAINST UNDISTURBED - 1VALVE
SOIL .
CONC. BLOCK FOR VALV
'----~ 200.mm (8" ) .a LARGER
·.
N0 T E S :
(j) ALL DIMENSIONS IN METRE S :Ji'J LI:SS OTHERWISE SHOWtl.
® VALVES SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM COVER OF :3.0.m MEASURED

TOP OF THE OPERATING NUT .
TO THE
® VALVES SHALL BE INSTALLED r)~J EXTEN SION OF PR'OPC:RT'f UNE~;; ~·
(4)
®
E XCEPT WHERE OTHERWISE ::3HOWN OR SPECIFIED.
USE F'LANGED END GATE VA~;.<;~. ON STEEL. ANO PVC-PJPELiNE INSTALLATKiNt

f
gr4.5r·-- -· ~·-.
I
CAST IRON OR STEEL COVi:R Sl-l.•'.L.L BE AOEQUATELY DESV)I\!E) . !'(:
CARRY T FU\F :: Ir, l.O;~DS
·j
~ ~ il 1··T~r
I
.9.._1·-·l··....
I® CONe. BL-ocl< l,1_Aynrr c·•·11·r ·r ·~··) ,.... ; · ~· ,.,.. nr.o ·- r~t.~ "l!'.ii: L ' ·' ·!-··:· C ~y;-·:r· :\\ 1;
<)F CONTHt\C~I~O:·~ ~- _,,y t.L J•• •·'·.•. ~. ~ ~ ~~
•• •• r ~~-~~·-·:·:.·:... ~
' 1-:·
·~---~-~~
_: _ ... _· __ .J=~L.~-..L,L.1
.. ...
·.·. :·:.:·.
CRUSHED ROCK-- FLANGED· OR

(0.0127 MAX.) ri...,..---1WAFE R TYPE
BUITERFLY
... . VALVE
SECTION
~ I
0.60 x 0.60 CONC. ~D IN
PAVED A.C.' AREAS
g
>
0 ..
!~
0.90 DIAMETER CONC. PAD

IN GRAVEL OR DIRT
WAYS AND OUTSIDE OF
TRAVELED ROADWAYS
3. 2 mm ( l/8") FLAT PLATE N----.w+----1125 rm1 PI/C CLASS 1!50

CENTERING GUIDE WATER P.IPE
TO VALVE STEM EXT.
PROVIDE VALVE STEM EXT.
19mm(3/4") EXT. ST~ II.Q-~---IW~RE DEPTH OF OFERATOR
GALV. STEEL PIPE NUT EXCEEDS 1. ~ m
BUTTERFLY STEEL,D. I. OR C.J.

WATER MAIN
ELEVATION
L
0
(/) ~
NOTES: za:
0 ~
- w
(I) a
Q) ALl-. DIMENSIONS lN METRES EXCEPT WHERE OTHERWiSE SHOWN. >
!11
- ~
@ VALVES SHALL BE INSTALLED ON EXT. OF PROPERTY LINES EXCEPT
WHERE OTHERWISE SHOWN . OR SPEC!FIF-0.
I
~'""-i) C:\ C-'1'" l II~o=--r
-~·l •:)l I~ ,on "'-'E!::L cov-R
i'\ ~ ~ '1:. 1.:. '"''lAU ;\1"\r-OU'I"',....
- ;J[~. / l i.'L".
,_, l')~''!~ "'/~Nt;D ··l n•'
...J
......
3
:'::=
I
'l J··-)'
• --. / .:.!.. t
I [
<")I- I
I.._;:J - ::Ji j .71• '-
. , ·· e (H'ifrt Tr1A ;; FIC LOADS. ~· I! ,
'i 4_
il - ,1. !1I
l .. ·- ...... -.- -- ·------- ·~ ~----~-~~----·'-·~· ·~ · -~ -···- -----------·--·~-~-- ·~~~-~ -· -. ~~---- , ,. ,.~. --l~L~ ~.J..I.~t_J
..... .. .. ._.. ---..
r'J 0 T E S : I "
--~IOOmm (4.} x63mm<2/2 )ANGLE
II
Q).i;i..L DIMENSIONS ARE lN METRES EXCEPT WHERE FIRE HYDRANT VALVE

\J"t HERWISE SHOWN . 1
I (SEE SPEC.)
@ r.;1-:;::~E NO CURBS OR GUTTERS EXIST, THE HYDRANTS
. SHALL BE LOCATED WITHIN 1.50m OF THE ROAD ~ PLASTIC CAP WITH
1
R!GHT- OF- WAY OR AS DIRECTED BY THE ENGINEER a 0
(0
CHAIN AND RING
5ARR1CADES SHALL BE INSTALLED AS PER STD. 0
I
i
DR.~Wii-J .G . CD-205
.
21 END
COATING
j(~)i-:·::;.p,;;.;..;rs AT INTERSECTIONS SHALL BE AT THE
! CURS RETURN.·OTHER THAN STREET INTER- CURB a GUTTER
j - SECTIONS, HYDRANTS SHALL BE INSTALLED
I Oi'-J LOT LINES.
~@t·)':'~· RANTS SHALL BE PAINTED IN ACCORDANCE
I
WITH THE SPECIFICATIONS. COLOR SHALL BE
'.'ELLOW UNLESS OTHERWISE DIRECTED BY
z!
~
TWO LAYERS
PLASTIC SHT
0 . 6 SQ. cdNC. PAD IN.
'----tNON.;SIDEWALK AREAS
~ "ir:t: OWNE::R. ,.._
<D ·
I
IOOmm· (4'}S::HED.40 STEEL
l·:§:) t;.:c; .D .t\LL .;8 ti<JTS EXCEPT
I
WHERE SEE STD. DWG. CD-2010
FOR VALVE a
VALVE
,,. 1 PIP.E W/ CEMENT MORTAR
~ 0Yr!~RWISE SHOWN. LINING 8
BOX INSTALLATION , COATING*
CONC.BLOCK MAY · BE -
l-----1
OMITTED. LATERALS INSli
UNDER CURB a
GUTIER SHALL
BE BORED
-
1
.I
I'
Si "f:EL _j
PIPE ~
I
· STEEL PI?E ALTERNATIVE

TEE WITH
FLANGED
BRANCH
\
---·-
\ JIOOmm (4") WELDING
\cOMPANION FLANGED
jIOOmcn '(4") FL·ANGED

GATE VALVE ,& ~ ' &! IOOmm (4") x 90°
. '-I FABRICATED ELBOW
100 mm ~ 4' } STEEL PIPE ( 12 GAJ
1
W/CEMENT MORTAR L.IN!NG 8 .

COATING*
11
USE 100 mm .(4 ) FLANGED SADDLE
OUTLET FOR JNSTALLATJONS ON
200rnm {8") OR LAP.GER .P1PEUN E.
·* .ALTERNATIYE: WHEN SPECIFIED: COAL TAR
ENAMEL COAT JNG
"'r
:REVISIONS .. I SCALE: : DAJE . I lOCAL WATER UTILITIES ·~OMINISTRATION
•.-rfliN:r:ALf -- .- --DESCRIPTION
fi.'O.ID.~
TSC J MODif'IED CALLOUTS FIRE HYDRANT INSTALLATION
·\• (RESIDENTIAL TY.PE)
!f-t-
.t _l__j__ I I I JAMES~- MJNTGOMERY. CONSULJIN,G ENGINEERs I
Appro~:
Date: --..-··~- ··--··.7-~ srI - :t!!j

- ~ -Jt: '~- . -
.; _::,. - r! - " . . I "
bvrrnrr (6 11. r-o3trrn ~(: V2 }
~\ru. L D~~NS,ON~ a
....-----1 HOSE OUTLET 1-IOOmm (4")
__.. ~H~ 07HERWISE SHOWN.
ARE IN METRES EXCEPT
I L . ,,
. ~
J I HOSE PUMPER OUTLET
·....
...
::g} i<i!HERE NO CURBS OR GUTTERS EXIST, THE HYDRANTS
SHALL BE LOCATED WITHIN L50 m OF THE ROAD
RIGHT- OF- WAY OR AS DIRECTED BY THE ENGINEER, AND WO LAYERS
c.o PLASTIC SHEET
BARRJCA::>ES ~~LL BE INSTALLED AS PER .STANDARD 0
OR A\;ji~(; CD-205.
.--.
\~);-: YO:~.:;.~TS ,~T iNTERSEg"IONS SHALL BE INSTALLED
-
0
- - - E N D COATING
. AT T!~: CtiRS RETURN. OTHER. THAN STREET INTER-

St::CTICH\lS, ~l YDRANTS SHALL BE INSTALLED
ON !..JY L; NES.
(:0:-:vo:;::.~.:·;-:-s SHA!...L BE PAINTED IN ACCORDANCE '----~ 0. 6 SQ. CONC . 'PAD IN

1.-V:TH l'HE SPECIFICATIONS. COLO~ SHALL BE NON-SIDEWALK AREAS
·~·'2U...'0".iJ ~NLESS OTHERWISE DIRECTED BY LATERALS INSTALLED
·;i-iE m~jr'I!E ~. UNDER CURB ·. 8 GUTIER
SHALL -BE BORED \.~ WELD ALL JOINTS EXCEPT
SEE STD;OWG. CD- WHERE .OTHERWISE' SHOWN.
201 R FOR VALVE AND
VALVE BOX INS1AL -
LATION. CONC. BLOCK 50mm (6") STEEL PIPE(12
WITH CEMENT MORTAR
MAYBE OMITTED .
LINING aCOATING *
I •I
~
!
--1
\ I
mm ·(6") x 90•
ABRICATED ELBOW
ST EC. ~ TEE WtTH 150mm ( 6") WELDING
?IPE ["---' FLANGED . COMPANION FLANGED
j' I BRANCH
i
150mm (6") FL,.ANGED
.!
i
STEE!... p ;pE ALTERNATIVE
'-----J
GATE VALVE&
FOR 100m!'T1 (4•) MAIN, INSTALL
*
ALTERNATI 'IE WHEN SPECIFIED: COAL
TAR ENAMEL COATING
'
liSE f50miYI (6")R-ANGED SADDLE
OUTLG FOR INSTALLATIONS ON .......__----liOOmm (4'~) ;.J50mm. (6") REDUCER BET. TEE
:300mo.; {12'') OR i...ARGER PIPELINES. AND VALVe: OR USE 100 x 150 mm TEE
! ~t=V~SQONS SCALE: NOT TO SCALE l
DESCRIPTION DESIGNED TECH. STD. COMMITTEE
MODI FIED. CALLOU-,:s DRAWN RSB
FIRE HYDRANT INSTALLATION
(COMMERCIAL TYPE)
' ~~~--------------------~--_j
i I ~ommoodOO·
. tr1Jt'-B. ~#A • ..
•
Approved:
Date:
STD.DWG.
CD-20:4R
~~-~
- -------=------------------;----~
d/d/ LEDGE!. ROADWAY

~---=
~w0~
W- d ~
I
4-16mm
&VERT. o~ T
~~R1CAOE ~O~ BARS _.;
~~ol 0~~~,.
~· ~co
BARRICADE
..,, " '\,:"T

~-
!'
- ~
0.15 in j "'-._' .,IOmm &, TIES

AT0.20 m
- 2:._;;nm C.YAMFER, TY!? E
0 0 .15m x 0.15m
(\J
CONC. POST
·BARRICADE
PLAN FOR .SETTING BARRICADE ELEV. OF CONC. BARRICA
SCALE: NOT TO SCALE I DATE

,_......,_ .... ~·. DESIGNED TECH. STO. COMMITTEE FE 8 . 7 5
~D NOTE 81 ME"FRIC REBAR ·ORAWN RSB FE 8 75 BARRICADE INSTALLAT~ ON
rJ. u:rJCF=n TJ:'l'.J.I ~Tn ..-.'C)t.At.AITTE"E: MAR 75
Approved: STO. OWG.
k-----t---i--+------+----'i Date: co.:..ro~
·~-......,..__
~mm (I") G.l. 9o- STREET ELBOW 63mm(ll4"] e. COVER, GRIND EDGES SMOOTH
2:5mm(l")G.I. NIPPLE-----~
2:5r=lm(l") G. I. 90• ELBOW---~
~ 25mm(r")COPPER TO I.P ~AD CPLG..

!!""!! (FORD# C28·44)
~~~~~~-
' , ~T.STRAP
I~
+-;; ~
132mm(H/ 4") I.P. x 2:5mm(l")
J.P. NYLON INSULATING BUSHING
II>_DR~N ~":~
25mm ( 1"1 AIR VAC:JUM 1 25mm(l )COPPER m I.P Tl-iREAD
8 AIR ~£LEASE VALVE CORP. S:fPe(FORO#F-700) .132mm (H/4"l SCHED.40
A?COA 143COR APP'RQI.IEO SU3Si. , 25mm(l )SiD. G.I.PIPE COUPLING WELDED TO PIPE
'"'-'- ""'" IN HO.E FUSH WI 00 I'AOCOCK REPAJR PIPE COATING.
STEEL PIPE
[..,.._. . . . . .I... I ·. I I,l,-. \:: ·~. I EYE WELDED TO.PIPE:
·:-! wac ::.:~ ~ ~~

~
1.:..
C..,.- :x
Th'E IZM."'I!PIPE
10 GAGe: STUB PRIOR TO 1--_ _ _ _ _ . ,
!Y'~~'iG COl\~ ~- -~
0 .!0 ROD W/EYE _...__ _.;..._ _../ @ 25mm (I"] COPPER TO I.P. THREAD
;-.S;:vn (l"l?OL':'8"h'YI..c~ OR 1----------+ ! CPLG.(FORD # C 28·44)
t=vLYi3iJ"TYL£r:C: 5£~ LINE
: ISO. SIZE) ~
§-,;DIES:
(i) ,~ C:/.:ll\."; lC.:-<S A.~:;: l:-1 M£TRES ::~a:PT WHERE <m<ER_WISE SI10WN.
(2) ~.c.x~-=·; WlZR'S NAloltO SHOWN or."LY FOR ILLUSTRATIVE PU:POSES.CSE"E SPECS) - C. I. 8 0 I PIPE
@ t_;__ r':7'!'l\.\.~ BETWEEN AN:) INCLUOIN(l TI£ OOUPUNG AJ0 CORP. SToP StiALL: MiN. SLOPe:= .00:1
,-~-~ !JE M..:..o£' OF" 8~S OR BRONZE.
I>) C£ CESIGNEO. FOR A ~tN.OF 106mii!)OPSl)(COU>lWATER WOili<ING PRESSURE.
Q f·<:~~.:;~~E TII:ST SH~L ClE ~lA[)( PRIOR 'TO BACKFII..UII.'O.
~ :...C.,\/OC::: ~:iO::: SHALL BE LAIO ON A CONSTANT SLO?£.

v!P'~ ~ POp<ETS WILL NOT ~RMITTEO.
® !\!l:•TATION S::
Lr".· t"'~~ ~J)£ "n< ~~O~ ~~0 S!:.::E ~ 25mmp"l COPPER TO I.P THREAD 'CPLG.(FORD #28·44)
<D \'.~<~ROO: NO CuRBS OH CIJTTERS EXIST. THE AIR V~VE SHAll. BE ~NSTALLEO
'.'.~f:ill\ 1.~~' OF THE ROAD RICMT•OF·WAY.OR AS OIRECTEO BY THE ENGINEER
M~u l'~<O Br..RRICAl)ES SH~L BE INSTAlLED SMI..AA 'TO STD. r:NIG. CO- 205.
@ a AIR REI..EA$:;: ASSEMBI..Y ABOVE CROIJNO SKALL BE PAIIO'EO
11'.C: A!R V;.CUIJI,I
~ jFLAT STRAP BRONZELBBASS,.OUCTILE OR CAST IRON
!1! ACCO~NCE WITH THE SPECIFICA.TIONS.
ECtJIV!.U;;NT 25tnm !SO SIZE TUBING ANO SERI/ICES Ffl'nNOS WILL BE AU.OW£0 IN
SERVICE CLAMP, l.P. 1AP (SEt:. SPECS)
® l..IE\J OF BRITIS!i IJN1''S SHOWN. .
@) IJSE COPPCR 'TO I.P.· n<llEAO CORP S'mf'(FORO..rF·100l iN LIE\! OF
AC. 8s P.V.C, PIPE
COP!"CR TO ~P. TliREAO .:PLG. FOR 'i!'£T TAP.
(\) ~ !NIIlUiol TIJBING T""!\'C~: '.YIOTH SHALL BE 0.15 MtTRE . Pt.YMEifT FOR ANY
P.ESIJRFAC!o{() WILl.. BC DAS~il ON 0.20"' TRENCH WI~TH.
REVISIONS SCAI.. E : NOT TO SCAI..E DATE LOCAL WATER UTILITIES ADMINISTRATION

~ OESCRIPTION APP'VO. I OESIGNEO :
DRAWN: ' 25mm (I") AIR VACUUM AND AIR RELEASE ASSEMBLY
CHECKED :
.· .:;.
... ~~:
f~
!, ~mm<:f'JG.I. 90" STREET ELBOW- - - -- - •MIN. 200 mm (8 ") PIPELINE
50mm(2")GJ. N I P P L E - - - - - - - - - . . . _,----6.~mm(l/4")!t. COVER GRINO EOGES SMOOTH
I
•l
I'
\ DRILLI8 - 12.7mm(I/2")HOLES IN 3 ROWS - -. ..
i fi:r 6 HOLES PER R(}ll EQUALLY-sPACED 10 450mml18 ) iO GAGE STEEL PIPE GRIND ENOS $1.\00TH
50mm(2")GJ. 90° ELBOW - fi!
Ii
50mm(2")AIR VAOJUM a
AlR RELEASE \ru..VE SUPPORT STRAP. - - - -50rmili":LP.xC.tS. Ct:A-JP. TYPE· CPLG.(FORo# C84-T7l
(APCO # 145C OR A?PRO'IEO SUSSTITlJTE) 25mtn(I")STO. G.l PIPE· ---~f~m(i~LP. xBUSHING
63mm(2-li2")1.P. NYLON
~
50rttn (2") i.P.x COM?. TYPE CORP. STOP EYE WELDED TO PIPE INSULATJNG · ;
( FORO t F 1100) PJmL00< 63mm(2·112") SCHED. 40 CPLG. WELDED
TO PIPE: (REPAIR PlPE: COATING\
~
•STEEL PIPE
•
!
~
; c.:-"''LL 25mm(l") OAAIN HOLE FLUSH W/ P A O E i· ~0.01 ROO W/EYE ~
TAO< WEl.D 12mm REBAR ACROSS BASE-OF~
n ~(2")1.P.l c.ts.
j TWO LAYERS. · a..
~~ifEPA~ PRIOR TO~ OF PLASTIC SHEET ~
i .
COMP. TYPE: CPLG.(R)m#C84-nl
!
I
50r.vn (2)POL'I'BUTYLENE OR PCX.n.&HY-
!..ENE SERVICE UNE l TUBE SIZE)
.
· .55 MIN. RAOUS(TYP.)

~
i
~
~INSTALL OOUBLE FLAT STRAP JRON
SERVICE CLAMP ON 200mm (8 )ANO
1 -t- 250mm(IO")PlPE:UNES(I.P. TAP)
1 hiCTES:
i> 5
I. ( ) AU. [):MEI'(Sf~'S All£ Ill METRES EX<:a'T ...,..ER£ OTHERW<SE $HOWH. C.L 8 O.L P1PE
; G) MAM.r.'JIC'T\.IRER'S ~ $HQ:\'N' FOO ll.l.USTRATI\IE ~ ONlY.(SEE SP£CS.)
.::
~ (}) ALL F'r.TlNcs r;..COWEt:N l>1<f> IHQ.UOIIIG TNE COUPUHG AKJ COW. Srol' SMALl.
o.l 8E ~tlli: S<ASS OR ~:E ''
::· • 1> l OC OC!:!Ct;l:]) f\:>1 A ·~M <Y IOCm u~,,.Q(COLO) WATEI! WORI<r«; PRESSVIlE.
l ~:-.0 ~(:;!..okt:: -ra~~ PR"lR TO &\.OCF''L.UNG. . -
l
0 ~ALL
~
POCKl::;. 'WU. NOT BE P£RMIT'TED 50mm(2"\I.P.xJSOSIZECOMP. T't'?E CPl.G.
!I G
S£1!\'"ICC. UllC
NOT AJ ~ ~N$:.
8E I.AJO ON A C(A<$TANT Sl.DPE. 0tPS AIIO
(FORO# C 84-77)
I
( :-;o m~F. Pl~C TI!W,,')
~ cdl.4P. • ~tP•~"':l~N CXlU8l£ FLAT STRAP BROHZE, 8RASS ,OUCTLE RON OR
' G \YHERC: ~ t:\ll'ios (oil rA!TTE'I<$ EXI!:T, n:E
J,JA \IWIE SHAU. BE 'ti<STAU.ED 'Win.oN 1.50<n ($ THE ROAD * CASTIRON SERVICE CLAMP.I.P. TAP (SE:E SPECS.)
i G
@
~ -r,F · WAY OR ~<; ·04R£CTCO bY "I Ht. O<G!I'4E:ER,AKJ TWO BAA!IICAOE'S SHALL 0C INSTAU.ED SIMilAR
TO s--ru. t.-.YG. co- :!<>,,
n€ AIR V;.t:WM ~ -'\OR R€UA~E ASS£M6LY AOOIIE
~.S.r<::.Cf':f!;nt'Ff~ :;HAU. &€ U::EO. ATQ>O< ~TYPE ~CTIOH
~SHALL 8E PliJN1'B) w ACCOROANCE WITK S!'ECS.
~c~~ - .
fl'lll---.v.;;;mm~'!~~-~<Jr-iJ1Y?E
@ USE LP. • CONP. TYPE~ sfop(I'ORQ # FUOOl IN LIEU r$1ISO SQE.COMP. TYPE CPI..C. RlR WET TAf-
@ FlARE T"''fE ~~ MATSE USED WHEN POt.YliUTY\..EN( 1$ INS~LEO
@ EOUIIU.EN:r !llmm ISO ~T\JB>NG AND SEJMC.Efl'TnHGS WU. BE ·~ t4 LI£U r$IIRITISHII,.T'S :S~
~--!:FlAT~: STRAP BRAsS , BRONZE, QOCTILE ~ OR .
@ Wi lL l'UoiHG TREHQi WIOn. SI<AI~ 8 E 0 . " METRE. PAYMENT FOR,AHY R£~NG 'W'U. 8 E 'eASED O.N IRON SClMCE 0-N*>. LP. TAP (SEE~)
0.20 • . TH£Hetl WIDTH . -
P.v.C. PIPE
REVISIONS SCALE : IIOT TO SCALE I DATE
r -LOCAL WATER UTil:.ITlES AOt.IINISTRATION
HO~lOAiE-1 INITlAL DrsaliPTiON APP'WI OESICNEo: T£CH-. STD. c:Oiii""-TTEE - . I SEP't 19711
I .I 1 I I I DRAWN: - - R0\..~'1' S. SAUZON
CHECK£0: TECH. ST,P. COMMITTE£
f ocT. 19711
M.<1RCH '79
romm(2.).AIR vACUUM AND AIR RELEASE
.. ASSEMBLY
t=j"=-j~---t--------_:=========!==:j Roooiilrnondod :,JAM£ / ../ ...' 4't.:::r_______
,<.1'~~{ ,.-;;,
- ·- •- --- Af'PR<:NB)':
DATE: • •
"
OENERA~ --~~~AOER r~~:
- - ·- -·· - - -- - ---
/ IOOmm (4") x 63mm ~~~~)
1
_n. ANGLE FIRE HYDRANT W..VE
(SEE SPEC. )
~
ONCRETE PLASTIC CAP
<?_Of :~~~TI l E"f - - ----''-0 BARRICADE· W/ CHAIN
SEE STD . DWG a RING
G ~/ _cD-205
-:..-1''- (
~f - - ~
~
..
•
.45 to .60 . 00
AS DIRECTED
I'"Y?_3...-- _o '-" BY EOONEER
I - ~
I •
I \ .
.ljt .PLAN ·FOR SETTI-NG BARRICADE
SEE NO.,_..E #3 TWO LAYERS
·--~NOTES
ALL Di~NSK>NS ARE. IN METeES
...... '-----0.6
PLASTIC SHEET
SQ. CONC.PAD
Z -
EXC8'T WHERE OTHERWISE StnWN.
~ IOOmm (4")S0£0. 40 STEEL
-~ LA11::~~LS iNSTALLED UNDER CURB PIPE WI CEMENT MORTAR
I & t:;t;TTERS SHA LL BE so RED SEE. STD. DWG._<l>-20lR ,..._ <.0
...-- --i LINING AND COATING~
® ~t-~£~ ~0 CU~SS M GUTTERS
; l::xtS"(; YH~ BLOW- OFF SHALL BE
FOR VALVE a VALVE
BOX INSTALt:.AT.I ON. 0-
C0~ . BLOCK MAYBE
i
-~
LOC~i~D ·W!THI :~ i.50 m
Of T~--iE wOAD RIGHT- OF-. WATER
OMITTED.- I.0CONC. THRUST BLOCK.
.12-SQ. MET!£: BEARING
-~ WAY 0~ .e.s OQR£CTED . MAIN IOOmm (4")FLANGE AREA. POUR AGAINST UN-
SY TI-{t !::1-fGINEER DIST-URBED SOIL . (MAYBE.
A ND SAR~~ CA'DES SHALL:~ Ill H 1t-l++IIF~--,,---~- OMITTED ON WELDED
STEEL .- PIPELINES.)
i3E !&~S'"'i~U.. EO AS
SH0i.rJ~\l -:-IEREON. /1 K>Omm {4'') . 3.o ·m 11
IOOmm (4 h 90•
. FLANGEDGATE
;f; COLOR SHALL ·Be: VALVE l00mm(4")_STEEL PIPE _( 12 GA.) WITH '-----; FABRICATED ELL
; -Y ELLOW UWlESS OTHER- CEMENT MORTAR LINING AND (CEMENT MORTAR LINED
; WISE_DiRECT£0 BY I"'HE COATING * AND· COATED> *
I OWNZR.
[@ i$JELD ALL JOINts EXCEPT WHERE: OTHERWlSE * ALTERNATIVE~ ?/HEN SPECIFIED : COAL TAR
ENAMEL COATING
1 -SHOW~ .
I
i TE;
r -1\:0. 1oA INITIAt.j
.
REVISIONS
DESCRIPTION
- -- I SCALE1 NOT TO ·sCALE I DATE I LOCAL WATER UTILITIES ADMINISTRATION
r]Sl ?mi -rsc_f . TITL~ AND FL~NGEDVALVE I j ~RAp£ Rsa IFEB :751£ DEA-D ·END BLOW-OFF ASSEMBLY
AprxOWJd:
Date:
Alternative t
DUAL S~RVICE . ~<;)~-<'~·
CONNECTION .I @~
/
i~
19mm(3!•fl COPPER TO IP
~..l--'-----jl9mm(:Y4''JCOPPER TO I.P. CPLG. THREAD COUPLING
(FORO-#' C 28-33)
19nvn(3/4") POLYETHYLENE ~ PQY9JT'Yt.ENE (FOOD#~-~
25mm(t")I.P. ~ 19mm(3/4")1.P. NYlON
PLASTIC SERVICE Lf.l£ ("!..SO...'S'i.?'.f_ IJ +~~-
INSULATING BUSHING
.,A~nr.;;:.:...: ~m(3/4/G.I.
"W'E.
TEE WI
25mm (I") SCHE:O. "10 CPLG. WELOCO /EKD Of COKTRACT Pv'C WRAPPH:>
· '10 PIPE ( RE:PO.IR PIPE: COATING) .
I ~19!m1(3/4''1xl3nwnUt2"')G.I. BUSHING FOR 3m3.(5/8"l ~ c
I9CM1(3/4")G.LP!PE WlTH Pv'C TAPE
WRAPPJNG
• ( r t,£TER OOLY(BY lNA~ ClC:S"mCT)
ANGLE Of SERVIC£ INSTAU.ATION '
NOT TO EXCC:EO 45~{TYPICAL) ~...., NOTES:
19trm(~" l G.l. STREET~ CD ALL OIMENSI\JNS IN MITRES UNLESS Oll£RWISE SHOWN.
~
. 1$ m<;~(3/~")SRASS STOP COO< I - - -
@ ~\) NAME SH~ FOO LUJS'Tll.a:rt\IE f'IJRf>()S(S OtO' (SEE SPECSl
OR GATE \ALVE
19mm (3/-t'') COPPER TO I. P. 'Tf-READ
@ THE COPPER TO t.P. THREAD CPLG. SHALL:
CPU>.(FORD-#' C 28-33> ~SSlJRE.
- o) BE: DESIGNED FOR A MIN. Of 106m(1501>$1lCOU> WATER WORl<tlG
b l 8€ M~ Of BRASS 00 BRONZE_
@) PRESSURE TEST WITH WATER MAIN PRIOR TO BACKFILLING.
j TYPE ·s~ l[jl '
"Tz
0~
r C.l. 8 D. I. PiPE rl9mm(3; 4")POLYETHYL.£NE <>R
@ St~ LINE TO BE LAID ON A CONSTANT SLOPE UP FROM Tl-£ WATER MAJN
TO ~ METER. NO DIPS 00 POCKETS IN THE LINE WILL 8€ PERMITTED:
i
I
POLYSUTYU:NE Pl..ASTIC SERVICE.
UNE(1SO SIZE.) @NOTATIONS:
=
l P. IRON OJPE THREAD G. I.= GALVANIZED IRON
! '
MIN. SLOPE: =0~
19mm(3/4") G. f. ELBOW W/PVC WRAP
ISO ''7.E - -
~ (f) THE~ eofol£CTION SHALL 8€ LOC. AS OCTERMINED BY THE DtSTR1CT.

fl-30 MIN. RADIUS ~19,mm(314")COPPER TO lP. THREAD CPLG. @ USE ~L SERVIC£ CONNECTION ONLY ON .:sm~-5/8") METER
~l (FORO# C28-33l
~19nvn(3t4"JCOPPER TO·t.P. THREAD INSTALLATIONS AND WHEN DIRECTED BY DISTRICT.
- C?LG.(FORO #C28-33)
11 FLAT STRAP SRONZE,BRASS. OUCTILE IRON OR CAST IRON
@ USE CCW£R TO t.P. THREAD CORP. STOP(FORD #F700)lN LIEU Of COPPER
· SERVICE. a...AMP-, I.P. TAP(.SEE SPECS.) TO I.P. THREAD COUPLING FOR. WET TAP.
t
I @> EQUVALENT 20mm ISO S1ZE TUBING AND SERVICE ATTINGS WILL eE: AlLowED N
LIEU Of' ENGI..lSHUNITS SHOWN.
I TYPE •c•
i(. @ .MIN. TUSING TRENCH WIDTH SHALL B~ 0..15 METRE. PAYMENT FOR
PV.C. e. ~..C. PiPE RESURFACING WILL SE BASEO ON 0.20m l:RENCH WIDTH .
Arrf
@ INSTALL GJ.PIPE AND FITTINGS PRIOR TO v.RAPPING WITH PVC TAPE.

@ ALL G.l. PIPES AND F I TTINGS SHALL S£ SCHEDULE 40
(@> INSTALL PVC TE£ IN L1£U OF SADDLE ON 25 mm p;p£
REVISIONS SCALE: - - NOT- TO SCALE ~---LOCAL WATER UTILITIES ADMINISTRATION

NO. IOAH: rli<rru:L OE:><.."RIPTION OESl<lNEO : TEOi. STD. COMMITTEE
SERVICC: CONNECTlON FOR 3m'! (5/8") 8. -5m3 (3/4"lABCNE
i - GROUND MEl'ER SEts .
r· 1 APPROVED:
DATE:
STD. DWG.
co-30rR
Alternative I
_;·· ·:·
~
25mm(t")COPPER TO LP. THRE'AO CPlG.
{FOOD# C28-44)
~
32rrvn{H/4")1.~x 25mm(I'')LP. NYLON
INSUI:.ATING BUSHING
TYPE "A~ "'- 32mm(I-I/4")SCHE:D. 40 C?LG . WELDEO

STEt.L PIPE ""' TO PIPE (REPAIR PIP£ COAnNGl
25.711!1(l"l G1STREE1' aaow NOTES:
/} tr
ANGLE a: SERVIce INSTALLATION
NOT TO "EXC€ED 45"(TY?ICAL)
~•:D a: CONTRACT (!) .ALL DIMENSIONS IN METRES UNLESS OTHERWISE SH<Nt'N.

ri ..r==\ ( TAIL .Pte:CES ® MAN.FACTLA'lER~ NAME SHOWN FOR ILLUSTRATlVE PI.IRPOSES ONLY.(SEE SPECS)
...
.~.
if ~
TYPE " ..·"

·~· '·
a t>
0.!. PiPE
IC1'LG.{RlR0~2i"~; T><REAO
25mm(t")
Q)
@)
®
THE COPPER TO I.P. THREAD CPLG. SHALL :
o) BE MADE OF BRASS OR BRONZE
b l ee: CESIGf£D FOR A MtLa= 06m(eDpsiJ CCX.O 'MTER WORKING PRESSURE.
PRESSU'!E TEST. WITH WATER MAIN PRIOR TO BAO<FIL LING.
SERVlCE UNE TO BE LAID ON A CONSTA('(T SLDPE UP FROM TtlE WATER MAIN

TO THE METER NO O!PS ~ POCKETS IN THE LINE WILL BE PERMITTE.q .
25rm:(l") POLYETHYLENE ~ _______] 25mm(r') G.l.PIPE 'MTH
@
POLYSUTYLe£ PLASTK: SERVK:E
UNE (TUBE SIZE) cicDIZi - - -1 ~TAPE WRAPPING.. NOTATIONS:.
I.P. = IRON PIPE TtlREAO
ISO SIZE. •
MIN. SLOP€ =0.005. G.l. = GALI.ANIZED IRON
(J) THE: ~ ~<:TION SHALL BE .UXATEO AS t:.ETI:Flr.IINEO BY Tl-£ CXSTR!CT.
\o.30 MIN . RADI~ , , 125nvn ct'l coPPER TO I.P. @ IOOmm ( 4'_') MI~IMUM SIZE MAIN TO 8E TAPPED.
~
25mm(I")COPPER TO l.P. nf*:AO • THREAD COUPLING (FORD•
CPLG. (FORO #C28-44) • c 26-44) @ USE COPPER TO I.P. 11-IR£AD CORP. STOP(F~D# F700)1N LIEU OF .COf>P£R
·To LP. THREAD COUPLING FOR WET TAP.
FLAT STRAP BRASS,BRONZE ,DUCTILE IRON OR CAST IRON
·· SERVICE ClAMP; J.P. TAP(SEE SPECS.) (9 EQUIVALENT ~ISOSQ£AN01U3flG~ FITTINGS WILL BE ALLOWED
IN LIEU ~ ENeiUSH UNITS .SHOWN.
; -yp£ ."C" (ij) MIN. 1\JBING TRENCH wtDTtl ~ALL 6E 0.)5 r.ETRE. PAYMENT FOR AHY
;~:v.c. a A.t. Pf~t:. RESURfACING WILL. SE BASED ON 0.20 m TRENCH WIDTH.
@ INSTALL G.t.PIPE AND FTTl'1n:)$ PRta:i TO
WRAPPING WITH PVC TAPE .
@ (>J..J... G.l. PIPES .AND FITTNGS SHALL BE s::HE:CIJLE ' '10.
@ INSTALL PVC TEE IN LIEU OF SADDLE ON 25 mm 1>1P£

~-::
- I ~.Y~1~2.)\IS - - .~ - Tsc.<oLE: NOT TO SCALE DATE - - - - - - - LOCAL wATER UTILITIES ADMINISTRATION
. - O!O>:C"WTION .1 APP'I/0..1. OESIGNEO : TECH. STO. COMMITTEE SEPT. 1978 . ~
_DRAWN: ocT .1978 SERVICE·C~ i=QR 7m {1-~AOOVE GROUND METER SETS
I I l I CHECK~O: TECH. STO,.COMiotiTTE~ MAR 11)79 . . J
";";:·;~
I
l___l j_
· '
_( J
R•comm•nd•d : L.-'..· _'• /::1--.L/.'... ·~..L-o
JAMES M. MONTGOioiERY, CONSU\.TING ENGINEERS
APPROV£0:
DATE:
· ·
GE14ERAL MANAGER
I STD. DWG.
C0-302R
I
Alternative I
r~
I
~ r
-..,---1138rnn (~!/Z'') I.P. riSO SIZE
...- o:::u'UNG ( FORO .. C64 -66)
l ---- I :IOrnn (2') I.P. • 38 mm I,P. NYlON
.~
"- - - - - - , INSULAT'f.IG 8U$HING
'- ~~~·?o~·~~COA~) COMPANION FLANGES - - . -- --..

NOTES:
'----lAHQ.£ CF .sERV'CE !NSTAL..LA'T10N Q)ALL DIM:NS!Cm IN lv€TRES LN...ESS O'nERWISE ~.
N:)T TO Exx:EEO ~·(1'(?.)
E~ CF CONTRACT-------!
@ MANI.f'ACn.JRER'S NAA£, SHOHN FOR tt.,LUSTRA'I'IVE
~S ONlY. r<:a;: Sf'£CS.) .
@'!HE I. P. x ISO SIZE COMP. TYf'E ro.tPLI~ SHALL:

38rnm (1-1/2'') I,P.t I SO SlZE o) SC: MADECF 8RASS OR BRONZE.
COuPU'lG (FORO •C84-G6). bJSC: DESIGNED FOR A MtNlMU.( CF 106m(~ll$IJO:X.O
F\.AT STRAP SERV:a.AMP.CSEE
DOUE!LE STRAP( l.P. 11>.f)FOR iOOmm 4'
SPa::$:\ WATER'WOflKING PR.ESSURE.
- t sr-IGl.E STRAP (I.P. TAP) FOR I:IOrrrn
a
!s· @ PRESSURE TEST 'MTH WATER MAN PRIOR BAO<'FUJNG.
~ 2001M1 (8'1
STRAP NOT~.
LARGER Plf>ELI'IES, @) saMCE L"'E: TO 9E LAID ON CONSTANT SLOPE UP
FROM nE: Ylt>.TER MAIN TO THE: METER. ·
NO DIPS OR f'OO<ETs IN THE LN£ Wll..l.. 8E PERMITTED.
T'':'PE~B< @NOTATIONS:
lP. • IRON Pl?€ THRE.AD G.l.•GA~MZED IRON
C.!. or D.!. PIPE ISO StZE
~ s COMPRESS~
{? ~ MIN. SLOPE :0.~ "'" Q) THE sER\I'lee CONNECTION SHALL
. ~ 38mm (HiZ") ro..Y9.JTY1.£t£ ~
3emm ( 1-i/2" II.P. xCTS
COhf> 'tYPE COOPUNG
9E l..OCAT€0 AS DETERMINED BY TH£ [)STRICT
'~ POLYElliY.LENE PLASTlC SERV.LM (TU9E SIZE) <R>RO•c S4-66l' @ i!!O 1TWT1 (6•) MINIMUM SIZE IAAJN TO BE DIRECT TAPPED.
@ S.S. INSERT S'TlFFCJ'lERS SHAU.. SC: uSEO If!( ·EAa-t

38trm (l-l/2")~.?..tt1SOSIZC: COMP. COMPRESSION ·TY?£ ~ECn~.
TYpS CQUPUNG (R)RO • ce"-Ebl @ USC: l~ :r. COMPRESSON ~ <DA.P. STOP (FORO ll F 100)
NUEUOF I.P.:r:ISOS1ZECCM'.~ COUPLNG R:R'tlr'ET 11<P
A.C. PIPE OC>LQ..EF\A' STRAP~BRONZe:,CAST IRON OR @ ·FLARE TY?E SERVICE FITTINGS MAY BE USED 'M-£N
OUCTl....E R:lN SERV. Q.AMP (LP.TIIP)(SEE SPEC.)
.- PQ~ IS INSTALLED.
USE C.I. TAPPING, TEE FOR IOOmm("'') A.~. Pf'E
/7 @ EQUNI.l.B~T :SS mm ISO SIZE iU3t'K; AND FITTINGS WI..L BE
II ~Q,
~~
----->)/
AL~ IN LIEU CF ENGt.tSH UNITS SHOWN .
@INSTALL G.l. PIPE AND F!'Tn-KlS PRIOR TO

38 mm (1-V2'1 I.P. •ISO SIZE: COM TYPE WRAPPING- WITH PVC TAP£ .
OOJP\..~ *C64-66)
.
BRASS.BRONZE,CAST IRON OR DUCTILE IRON
SI:RVICE CLAMP I.P."a<P (SEE SPECS)
@ MINIMW SEIMCE LfiE 'TR£NC;H WIDTH SHALL SC:
0.15 loETR£. PAYlo!ENT FOR ANr RESURFACING WV...L &
TYPE'\:;" BASED ON 0 .20 m TRENCH WlDTH.
P~ PiPE @ALL GJ. PPES AND FITTINGS SHALL BE SCHEDU\...E -40
I·
!
r---··
'"Nii:wA~f~1loOL I
R~V:SIONS
D(SCRIPTIOO.
SCALE:
OESIGNEO:
NOT TO SCALE
TECH. STD. COMMITTEE
LOCAL WATER UT ILITIES ADMINISTRATION
._::::
OAAWPC • ~K.MARCELO SERVICE CONNECT'ION FOR 20n?tl-ll2")
CHECI<£0 : TECH. STO. COMMITTE!': ·
.I -"'•M•d lf/ld.ji~./h,;,~ JooPPf'11(11,'£.lJ; ~-
,_!_, ' .IAME:s IA,MONTGOMERY,(X)NSULTIN<l ENGINEERS OAT£: GENERAL MANAGER
-~----·-
.:::.;:.;
··: ·,
~
'!'>Orrm(2")1.P.~!SOStZEC0MP. TYPe
CP'~G. ( ~ # C84- 7'7)
~~~=-t
:.-----.:
____j63mm(2·li2"}1.P. 1 ~mm(2"}1.P. NYLON
. ftNSULAnNG BUSHING
'------i63mm(2·1/2")SCHED.40 CPLG. WELOCO
iO PIPE (REPAIR P1f>E COATING)
ANGLE OF SERVIC:E INSTALLATION
'-----1NOT TO EXCEED 4~0 lTYPICAL)
~ :SO rnm(2") G.l. NOTES:
STREET El..OOW
\
0 ALL DIMENSIONS IN ..ET!IES UNLESS OTHERWISE ~ -
~
t :SOmm(2")1.P.~~:tSOSrt:ECOMP. TYPE~
- CPLG.(FOOO .# CM-77) o ® MAN\IFIICTURER"S NAioiE SHOWN FOR IU.USTRATIVE ~S£S Ot<I..Y (SEE SPECS.)
! :··
I
( ~~wn~T~ ~- 0 THE I.P.liSOSI!i!CO WP. TYPE CPLG . SHALL:
:-· : FOR 300mm(l2) a LARGER Pf'U.~E 4) liE IIU.DE OF 811ASS OR BRONZE
l ..,-vp-
' t:..
·s" THE SERVICE ClAMP CAN BE Ot..!TIED
:50mm(2").POLYWTYL.ENE OR
b) liE DESIGNED. FOR AMJN. OF.!Ofiodt~po i) COLO WATER WORKING PRESSURE.
•',
·-~ ... o:- D.I. PlPE POLYETR'r'LENE PLASTIC SE:RV!Ct
U>
d 0 PRESSURE TEST WTnl -TER "A" "RIOR TO 9ACKF1l..LING.
LINE l TUBE SrZE) :SOrnn (2''J GJ.El..BOW G) SERV!C£ L~ TO BE L AIO ON A CONSTANT SLoPE UP FROM THE WATER
MIN. SLOf'E ~o.<X>:l l w1n1 Pvc TAPE.

@
..Ale TO THE ..ETER. NO QII>S OR POCKE~ IN T><E LINE WILL eE PER><lT TED.
N O TATI O N S;
. .nu f50mm(2")1.P.xrSOSCZE:COM?. TYPE .• J50mm('Z'') IPxCTS COMP LP. a IRON PIP": THR£A'l
-vu CPI...G (FORO ., CSq-77) ·•·• · · 1T YPE C()RLING rro sa:e ·
· <FORO e c 84-77)
~~~G~~
'J. DOUBLE FLAT STRAP BRONZE.BRASS.DUCTI!.E IRON OR CAST IRON
' SERVICE Cl.AMP.I.P. TAP (SEE SPECS.) 0 TOlE SERVICE CQN<ECTION SHALL B€ LOCATED AS OETER"'lNEO SY THE OCSTRICT.
@ 180 .... (6 " ) MIN. SIZE WAIW 10 eE DIA(CT TVPED.

· t··(?E "C0
G) VSE C.L 1APPI!fG TEE ON IOOmm(-4") ANO 1501Nn(6"1 A.C. PIPES .
f-1.C. PIPE
@ S.S. INSERT STIFF"ENEI!S SHALL 9£ USEO AT EACH C()t.(P. TYPE CONNECTIO!'I.
<iJ) USE I.P. , COMP. T'n'E CORP. STOP ( FOSO # F"IIOO) t< UI;U OF t.P xiSOSI!E. GOMP.
TYPE CI'I..G. FOR wtT TAP.
~50rrm (2'')1.P.xiSOSIZI:.COM?. TYPE
~~ . jCPLG.( FORO#- G84-77) @ FLARE TYPE SERVIC£ FITTINGS "AYB£ USED WI'<EH PQ..YllUTYLEN€ IS
IWSTALLEO.
ljf ls:RONZE . BRASS,OUCTILE IRON OR CAST I RON
SERVICE CL:AMP. I .P. TAP{SEE SPECS. ) @ EO...VALENT :11oM1 ISO SIZE T\AliN(; AND FITTI'ICS 'ln..L 6€ AU.ONEO IN L E:V Of
EP"OUSH \1141TS S.:owN.
T YPE "0• e f'jSTAU. OJ. Pl?£ AND RTTlNOS PR!OR TO WR.ti'PING WTTl1 PVC TAPE .
P.V.C. PIPE @ ~ IN.• SERW:E LIN€ TR£10< WIO"n<

~~FI>oCINO "IWIU. BE BA:I ED ON A
S>iAU.eE 0. 13WETI!£ . PAV" (r<r FOR•AHT
0.20 '" TAEHCH WIDTH
@ AU.O.I . f'IPES ANO FITTINOS SW.U. :IE 9:HEOUL.E 40
__ REVISiONs L - - f SCALE : - . . or ro SCALE - - - - - .--r-oli"rE: 1 - LOCAL WATER UTILITIES ADMIN ISTRATION

wo. 1 o.>TE t '"·-· .. I -
.~~~~~~~t-~------~O~E~S~C~~~~P~T~,OH~-----------4~~~~0ES~~IG~HE~D~:~T~E~C"~H.~S~T~O-~
.~
GOM~M~I~T!T~EE~------~~~~~~ 3
: ORAWH : ROLLY s. 8At;ZON SE~E CONNECTION FOR 30ni (2")AB0Vl:. GROUND f.AETER SETS
' CHECI(ED: TECH. s.f.O. ':OMMI TTEE
r-;::t::=t'======--==========~=:j APPRCIV£0:
DATE:
0 0 0
<8Cls>"
NOJES:
<·};~~:
tSlr:.:Jii/4")FC~ H~Lt.A"I R F
<,t.; ECUAL WA"i~i< FAUCET ::::;:. CONe. PAD ---:-+- (!) ALL OloENSIONS IN METRES UNLESS
OTHERWISE SHeWN .
SC:·f.O:i SO ~ :>;_ F<?E """-----i-1!----+ ® MANt.IFAC1URER's NA),I£ SHOWN FOR
ILLIJSTRA~ PURPOSES ONlY SEE SP8
-i--+~1-e®
ALL Fm1NGS ANI> ~ PIPE SHALL
BE DESIGNED FOR A MINIMUM COLD
WATER ViORKJNG PRESSURE OF 106m
(150 PSI).
G) PRESSURE TEST PRIOR TO BoQCKFILLING.
. REINF. PRECAST CONC .

..,,._ @ NOT..r.toNS :
. DE'TAILEBA
I< _
~o~ETER Box wt c. 1.1~--'-l~:......."
LOCKABLE COVER
LP. : IRON PIP£' THREAD
C:T.S. = COPPER T UBE SIZE
.:.::!~\ .: @ EOU~LEHT 20mm ISO
~
i 1'3nvn~I.P.~
0 SIZE TUBNG AND
SERV1CES FlTTINGS WILL BE: ALLOWED
.
i 1. ~P. STOP(FORO# F-700) (j)
IN UEU· OF BR1TlSH UNIT SHOWN
THE LOCATlON OF THE f'UEU..IC FAUCET
~
1 ~ 19trvn(314~)
2.5mm(l") t. P. x SHALL BE AS SHOIYf:l ON DRAWINGS.
l
t
\":/;
~
tP. II.'YI..ON INsu..ATlNG BUSHING
2!5tr.m(t)SCHED. 40 .COUPLJNG PLAN ® SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS FOR APPROVAL
PRJOR TO ORDERING MATERIALS.
:t- WELD TO PIPE(RE?AIR PIPE COUPliNG)
1
STEEL PIPE
WATER METER TAIL PIECE
BY DISTRICT
t------.....
__..;- ::1 '19mtr.(Y4")COPPER TO l.P. THREAD WATER METER BY DISTRICT-----.....
~·~;~CORP.
. STOP(FORO#F-700)·
t
~ ~'«>t.C: OF SERVICE INSTALLATION A~T~~E%;1jf ~~~NG,f----.... ·.·
<:~c;::._ 111.-oT TO EXCEED ~·(il'P.)
1 '/'
(FORO #KVC-IW) 300mm CONC. DRAIN PIPE
-::.
~/ fl..LED W/CONC.
'
,..,.. I ·. ,
L.,.w ,
~' r-, I
·:S1~--- ,_}.. •
P\~,:::>C
li ",.\! ' -
20brYrn LAYER
OF GRAVEL
I
PVC TAPE WRAPPM
~L.:"':''~·...,~~..=:"'1:=-----!
l.OOm AJ..L SIDES I
r~--- =~1~
,.~'~_;,:J~
%7":''\~
f
~/
•
•-)-f~(FORO~CZ2-33>
q :~ $PUCE: WHEN REO'O. USE
COPPER TO COPPER CPLG.
a:
~
.• . ··«:· .
IOmm REBAR AT 0.30m O.C.

~ 11Smm(3/4~) COPP£R
TO I.P. THREAD
j_L:::::;j 19mm SCHEO. eO GALV. STL. PIPE
-1 '\. ~P. STOP(FORO# F-700)
\ I FLAT STRAP OUCTl.E IRON OR BRONZE. BRASS OR CAST IRCN

S£RVICE CLAMP,t.P. TAP(SEE SPECS.)
'9mml3t 4") POLYETHYLENE SECTION@
P.\.1~G. and A.C. PIPE OR POLYSlJT'fLENE PLASTIC
SERVICC: LINE (TUBE SIZE )
.REVISIONS SCALE : NOT TO SCALE ·DATE LOCAL WATER UTILITIES ADMINISTRAT I ON ~:;:~:.~:;;:
kO. IDl>l'E T..,,-Al: 0($CRtP'IION APf>vo. I OE:SICN£0 : 1'ECK STD. COMM<rrEE JULY 1978
DRAWl< ;- - RS8
-CHECxEO:
.JULY 19iS
AUG. 197 9
PUBLIC
RacJAMdEfM .. ~--{Jh;&~.r.f):_~.'!.....- --- APPROJ£o·
OAT£:
STo:CiWG.
C0-305
I ...-----:: o _._...;t:. U::.. d EHS_WtTH W.t:li.J:" BAC.J.(C.OOUI\1t:' .1 .. -
!
I -
f II 0.91 m I
I
-l-\i~::c ~ ~~~~J-E_C_T__ --- ~ ---- -

1
[ jl .51 1
E
<!)
DETAIL A
i : ~~f
~
DRINKING-WATER SUPPLY 0
I:
1 r
75
~~+
1 FACILITiES
FOR
"·i I 35J:
E' I GO ' WATER DISTRICT
ol ' '
"!. I
so-
257
' - - - -+.+- -___, WHITE LETTeRS W/
BLUE BACKGROUND
ASSISTED BY:
-1 II 351
l l r so LOCAL WATER UTILITIES AOMINISTRATION
j, :. •, ss
2511 AND
1 35 +
I I
~ : 50i
lr ~sT
Jr
it
i !t 100 I
. ,
::>0
U.S.-AGENCY FOR INTERNATIONAL DEVELOPMENT
CONTRACT AMOUN I
- .
~ -------
.
SEE NOTE
.
'
I
i
_j__i L : : - - - .:_ - -- - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ----- ~
l SEE NOI"E _ 2 _~0m I
J
PROJECT SIGN DETAILS
N c·; c ~ :
- -CD
· -~LL LINES SHALL BE KEPT IN VERT. ALIGNMENT AT lEFT @ EXT. TYPE HIGH DENSITY OVERLAID PLYWOOD OR OTHER ·
60RDER OF SIGNS. LEFT BORDER SHALL BE DETERMINED USING APPROVED MATERIAL SUITABLE FOR SIGNS SHALL BE USED.
THE LONGEST LINE CENTERED ON THE SIGN PROVIDING EQUAL
BORDERS. THE RIGHT BORDER FOR OTHER THAN THE LONGEST @THE STYLE OF LETTERS AND SPACING SHALL BE IN
UNE SHALL VARY AS REQUIRED. ACCORDANCE WITH THOSE SHO\"- N
@ ?ROVIDE -~DECUATE SUPPORTS FOR SIGN AS SITE CONDITIONS @ PAINT LE_TTERS B~UE, BACKGROUi-JD AN 0 A~ L ')iHER
r'I;AY REQUIRE AND KEEP SIGN AT PROPER DISTANCE ABOVE COMPONt.NTS \:/Hi · £ .·
PREVAILING GRADE TO PERMIT PUBLIC VIEWING· (j) DUPLICATE STAI-.ID~RD SAfE WATE1 : C~eLi= ~-i sn·:..E SH~LL
@ ~-LL Dliv;Ei'I!SlONS ARE IN MlLUMETRES EXCEPT WHERE OTrERWlSE SHOWN. BE AS SHO'NN. PROVICE SUPPORTS FOR Ri'-'lO iNSlALLATION.
! REVISIONS - --
•:c At F: -
NOT TO SCALE !)/\ :' I LOCAL- WAT-ER - i.Tt-IES-~_DM INI STRAT!_9N
- - Ufl ~:::::·
[~
'-j"
.. , . . - .. "/\1
- ·- · I ._,. .I '
ul !:.U<If· ! KJfll :.: •!• • ;_I ! ll ~,ICNr I 1 TECH. STD. COMMITTEE SEPT.'~
SAMPLE F ~OJ~C~ S!·3N
f!- l--., I
I tW\WN RSB
Ull CI':IO TECH.sT_,.O: COijMITTEE
SEPT. '78
~CH 19J9l _f
l
f(, .. C/fiHOt~Ht ~:d Jf./~A ""fl.. •f) .... -~......~ '"'1"'".-1'1
~----· - -~----~
I .i ; 11\":'ll :, M ·_._'v'!tlN~()'vl! IIY LON:;l_ll_flNG ll\j(_iiN! I fl:~J P.!h" -- -
(;I ~I ·;1\1 M·''\·\! :1 . --
····:
! C,D 401R
- - - -- 2!5mm'(l'') GALV. ~TL. ELBOW
.,.----.--- 2!5mm (I") GALV. STL. PIPE
, . .
PRESSURE SNUBBER . -
25mm(l" ) x
13mm(ll2")
GAL\1. STL. TEE
------13mm(l/2") GALV STL . NIPPLE
-H~-----l2omm (I") CORP. STOP MUELLER

H- 10012 OR APPROVED SUBST.
32mm(l·l/4") x
25mm(l") ~2mm'(I·I/4")SCHED. 40 HALF
INSULATING BUSHING_ CPLG. WELDED TO TOP OF PIPE
_z
Q
(f) ~
z x
o u
-(/)
~~
>
ill
- r..~.U.....'.i TEEL PlP:::

""
~
50mm(2") MIN. AND
75mrn(3" ) Mt1 X
AIR GAP
.. :-.:··:... ::-
0 ~(\j
0 z ~0
o-
i=
<
<08 . I
m~ t;:E
0"0
11 ~
50mm.(2 l 1-
GALV. STL. ELL.(TYP.l
!a <UJ
z UJ>
!50mm. (2")
Gti.LV. STL. PIPE &_ - irlg
~ O:< a:
c I . r
'-
(.J
< g; ~- <
:z
(J)
w 1-m <
;:;
;:: :E~
1-
a < " . z<
:J ~ (1)
fjl,
•.
c=
:::> ~UJ ·.. (3

~ o::<!>
w <t<
-~ ..
GALV. STL. NIPPLE
~ ;--<!>
~ NUJ
~a::
-J
< E~ . "ia-
&s·o mm (2'')AIR VACl!U
8AIR RELEASE VALVE ·
glt)f
513 ~ csi
't
RESSURE GAUGE
(SEE SPEC.)
PRESSURE GAUGE w
w
ADAPTER I-
I-
w:§
wmm (2") x ----+~ ..J~
13mm (112")
GALV. STL. TEE 13mm (1/2")
L - - - ----GALV. STL. NIPPLE
1
\/..,.,_tit-------- !50 mm (2' l CORP.
STOP. MUELLER H-10012
OR A.PPROVEO SUBST.
>
Cl.
<
X
~
Cl.
<1: a.. a..
0
z<{
...i
1-
1,/)
:z >:
:.J
Ill
Q ·o
PIPE SUPPORT
,_
(J) c..
z x
Ill
<(
ILl •~w
..., ~
..J
AS REQUIRED L-- - - - - - - C,M.L. STEEL PIPE ;.,)
Q Vl... ILl 0
5
d z
CL
z
!a ~ « u
Q @
>
w <(
0
w 0
<!>
a: 0
\!J
z<{ ~
NOTF.S: 0
0 ~0
L.--~Omm 1.2"lMIN. AND CD GALVANIZED STEEL PIPE ·sHALL
~
75mm (3") MAX . BE SCHEDULE 40

P.ln G.~P
' ; "•" .. ······· · --·

.. ·.· · ·.· ·-
(!$,_,
~
...J
~2
L ~ • I
~
00
~ t;::f
~ t- ~
~ w
tn
~--------~~~·==~~~~-==~··~.r- 1m--~ ~ a:
w
--------- ~ "4'.76mm. f<

CJ)
~( ~ , <:>
-,. _ _,. ~if

.., r--1-
~
<{
~ ·-i''~---
z ' ~
a: I~ ....J
<{
~
<(
~ a:
w
! - -- -- - - " " ! ;
i= :r~ z
- t----+t-fo"'//A.~t~,., - - - - -+-+-----~n--- d ::, Q
w
<:>
~. ~ I
'"~ ~'
;j~~~~ ~~ 0
~
..-:
z
~
~ :J
<.!>
._''-------.. Aj t~
r--;-:;::11:1_~-~-~·'":lr----4 J....:.:-----_--- ~-A~
z
1
~
-...1----~~-lillf-IE·~-~~~~:::·::===:~· -Jm-~m. Q_ t>
~
!
0 ..
0 a~
1
(.) ~8
STEEL PLATE G
'l
"" SLEE:E TYPE COUPLING
(SEE SPEC)
STEEL BOLTS 6 J
NUTS . N 0 T E S:
0 DIAMETER Cf' BOLTS
c I. DRILL BOLT HOLES = BOLT
N " NUMBER OF BOLTS DIA. + 6.35mm (1/4")
COAT PIPE UNDER CPLG. AND CPLG.INTERIOR 2. PIPE END SEPARATION, G =
WITH E,POXY OR COAL TAR ENAMEL COAT 2 5.4mm (1").
PIPE AND CPLG. EXTERIOR AND HARNESS
SET ACCORDING TO SPECS.
219.1
273.0
I!
323.8
\
i
I;
DIMENSIONS IN IN c·H E S
.·.. .' .·:. . :.:·· .

1--- TO SUIT
z
Q
·v
~0
o-
, I
~ -..J oa
til:
J-
(I') ~
z w
..... 0
~
0
oct (!)
SHIM AND SPACER BLOCK DETAIL z

~ t-
E z
..J :::>
ENGINE BASE i= 0
';::) :;
a:
w
FLAT WASHER J- w ~)
oct ~ c.'
STEEL SHIMS FOR LEVELING ~
_, z(!)
CONCRETE ENGINE
FOUNDATION
g w
'..J
'0
~
~~
. 4 ·.
FILL W/ NON -SHRINKING 4 . . <I
TYPE G~OUT,AFTER "( t:
MOUNTING AND LEVELING ... .. · .- .
ENGINE z 4
0 D
0.075 DIA.x 0.15 SCH. 40 ::E
GALV. STL.PIPE SLEEVE, .E
TYPICAL t<">
t<>
0
ANCHOR BOLT - - - - . . < . : . .:
NOTE:
I .
CD ANCHOR SOL T s
l ZE AND NUMBER OF SOLTS
PER ENGINE MANUFACTURE
l
~
~,,· .
. 0
Lo=;..:.s--.•.-·.·-·~·" •~-•--·· ,··- ·~·~~·~"--~-··~~·,-·--·~ ·-•-·•·-.~·~·~----·~·..,.- .~~-·~__.,.. . ,,,., ~.~. . ~--,~·-~-~=·a~..·~~.-.:....,~ ·· ;nLJ
; ·.·:".: .·.. . .. . , . . ... .

~-~--------------------------------~------------~
- (jl
:::x:N z.
l>"..,J (f) VI
~g
C:::l
r~
o- !:>3
0(1) ~><
.:::~::::.-: co z-
-o:r G>~
.·.·... r- m-..J
-~
zo
G>
c: 3
(/) 3
G>
l> ~z
[< z-<
G>r : :'
0
~· ..../::.~.
~,.---· -- --
.. z
-~
l
i
/
! -o-o-o
~
} l.:n
\
. ()(jl ""06>
~
'
o· ::o · r:::o:::o
I~ -
I rnVl
I 0
I
l>
()(JJ
7'3 <1>3
J>IT11T1
z <~><l>
.t
·l
i:D
3
_,.
r 0
rn
s
~
-.J
3 Cll3
C-
(/)(/)(/)
c:c
C0:::0 -:::0
l' 3 3 :::0 ~
0 rn mm
--'w
)
i+ z 3 ~
fTI '-
~ ::0
0
c ~
~
(/) ::. ~U'>G'>
-o s ~ z- rrl:El>
! 9
l>
r 0
I
:;:o cro
w::o
fh-C
-I G)
~ - z .:_..orn
() l>
:::0 A CDl>
~
(/) I
C>
~- (/) fTl(/)
~'
-< (/) ·- 0
:u :::0
r
-I
rn
G'>
l>
::0(/)
-rn
( /)
:;:o
.. ; z
z
fT1
r
-o
c
G>
1'11
rn
. .-::··. -~: t C> -o
·..
-::··· ..·:
'i IT1
RE~ISIONS -~-~ -~- --Hc.AL.E:- -NOT- TO SCALE DATE LOCAL WATER UTIUTIES ADM!tiiSTRATION
O~IPl'l<'X-4 lAPP'VD~ESIGNED TECH. STD. COMMITTEE
~;\ ; ~; ~:;
SEPT.'7-8.
. DRAWN RSB SEPT.'78
PRESSLRE GAUGE I PRESSURE SWlTCH
OiECKEL TEC~ S}Q. <;OMM!TIEE. ~ARGH~
ASSEMBLY ,
:. ~ ·. -· : - - - ·- - II ~ -
$TO. OWG.
M·O-·f05
----···- - - - - -- - - ' - - - - - - - - - - -' - - - - - - - - - - . . .
::·. ..:
(j)
3
3
--i
-<
-o
0)
0
--i
:r.
·.:-.
•.. -~
..·..
0 0
0
z() "'
C>
l>
l>
c
r
I c: ;;r;:
C>
0
r IT1 ~
=i
5 (/)
--i ::r::
~ fTl
rrl l>
OJ r (/)
_(/), ]!
"U
G)
:u 5
()
];1
OJ
IT1
(J)ITl- fTl 0 ;;r;: -o (/)
J>r c rn --i
0
-o 1 --i
~
fTlr --i
r I
(/)
J>
(/) rn~~ :u
c:
r :u
--i -1""0 r 0
rn - 0 "U
::u (/)~[( ~ IT1
l>
, -o.:'UC r
- OJ:u r
-z
(/)
rn o_J
rn
()-(.,
::r::
•
:r.
(/):r.J>
--i . mZ
·.· -< -zrn
! :0 0
' :';; ~; ~~---r--:- AEVIS!ONS sc:~f: Not To- scALE - - - - - oAfr- t::ocACWATEFfOTILITIESADMJNISTRATtoN ,
( .·,c, i JA ::·~::..::i L'.•:J D~SCHIP TION APP·v o IXSIGNFD TECH. STD.r:OMMITTEE SEPT.'78 . .
1
j ~ i ORAWN Rse · SEPT. '78 STEEL PIPE SLEEVE THRU CHB WAlt.
~-=-l--
L.
;
1 .
1·---- i
'
r-1
:
I I ;.~~:;;~;,:nd~~~· ..~: :;::..;)•'. AtJJL:~. Apt>" '"~1·
CH~CKW
JJ\MfS M M(l'Nl"GOMERY. CONSULIING E.NGINEERS {\H· ·. GfNER/\l MANAGER

STD.OWG.
MD-106
------DISCHARGE HEAD
CAP . SCREWS
<t_ ?\.IMP
- - INSERT 50mm LAYER DRY

PACK AFTER PUMP AOJUST
MENT .
PUMP BASE
SEE PL.ANS
L . ,'. . .. . • .
3.2mm THICK
RU 88 R GASKET
a·. 17 • ... .~/~{:·: .. ·.
. .'''•.. :··.
...__-ADJUSTING NUT .
. 6 l> 0
:·:·:+.
. . . ·. . ·.·::·:;.~·-.
. :.. ·.:o·>
0 C\J
0
0 .. ·: :-·:·..
I.
ANb10R BOLTS ( 4 REQ'D.)

. ···1· ..,.__ __ -l SEE PLANS
·. . .: :· :·.0,·.::.,
··Js······
·.' .. .·.:
•
WE
25mm THK MASTIC

ALL SIDES
NOTES :
Q) SEE PUMP MANUFACTURER'S SHOP ORAWIN~S FOR '3 1Zt:
AND l.OCATION OF DISCHARGE HEAD · BOLTHOL=: ~3.
I DRILL HOLES 3.2mm LARGER THAN BOLT$,
I '
@ EXTEND CASING WITH PIPE F.:QU.l\L TO EXI ST '.NG OFl
CUT BAGK CAS lNG AS REQUIRED.
@ DIMENSIONS MAY VARY S\JB.JES:T TC Tl iE ,(q:·;-·G OV~L o;= T~ !~~
ENGINE ER.
1--------------------------------------------------rr--11-,
I z
0
cia>
3;0
o-
oo'
I OA5m SQUARE X Smm
~ ~
C-
THK. SPLIT PLATE :n~
.I 0::
t-(!)
r
12 ·GAUGE STEEL· PIPE l2.5mm0 x 75mm(MIN.)
(/) ~
z w
(/)
:E (/)
0
12.5mm PLATE c(
ALUMINUM FLANGE <!(
(/)
w w
!= a..
:J a...
t= r-
::>(/)
0:: ::::J
w <!
t- :r:
I VARIES ~ X
_. w
~~mm HIGH ALUMINUM LAGGING.
METAL RIB '-+-- --1 SECURED WITH . c( l
~«0
.' ATH ALUMINUM BANDS 0
I g <{
I )mm LAYER OF ~ NUT
INSULATION SULT-
·ABLE FOR 537 C '-+- ----1 GROUT
i
!:.Jmm LAYER OF
INSULATION SUIT- ~---'
I'I qLE FOR '982 °C
i
E
Na.:
B>-
0 t-
+
SPLIT PLATE
E E
([)
co If)
r<> v
0 0
I
0.032m -t--- 0.386m 0.032m
0.45m
ELEVATION
l•J
:·-
~(
· o
·-··:·
ROOF SLAB
..... ··:·...· ··..:}; .

.•,:•
. . •.:·-:
0 . ·0 .
I 50 mm LAY!;:R OF
I 0
6mm x50mmSTL.F.B. ~
HANGERS 2 REQ.
INSULATION SUITABLE
FOR 537 °C
...J FOR SILENCER ASS. ·
w
50mm LAYER OF
I lL
z
INSULATION SUITABLE
FOR 982°C
a::
w
I >-
I.L 19mm HIGH. METAL ;
I a::
w
RIB LATH ...J
ct
> ENGINE EXHAUST g
PIPE .J
ALUMINUM LAGGING,
SECURE W/ ALUMINUM
BANDS
16mm DIA. x 100 mm

EXPANSION SHIELD,
W/ LOCK WASHER, TYP.
0
...J
w ·
lL
~
>-
I.L
C2
w 12.5mm OIA. x 25mm BOLT W/
> ~.,__---l HEX NUT S LOCK WASHER
----~~EXHAUST SILENCER ~
OR PIPE Ch !i;
~~
~
Q:
NOTE:
(j) INSTALL ADDITIONAL HANGER 3
.L\S REOIJIREO TO SUPPORT
r ::..;H.Q.IJS'( PIPING.
,_-)) ;::of1 '.:;O~lNECl' 'fJ~ Of :·IANGE~-< :3
- .., 0 ROOF SLABS OTHER THAN
CO NCRETE, 'SEE DRAWINGS. 0
·-·~ .~ ....... ------ ___. ··-----·-·----·---·--· ----_________·_____l:~_._...__.
z c>o
0 ~=
c.
do
!< 1--:::i
(/)
~ ...J
NOTE: l: ~
CD FOR OR lEN TAT ION w
AND
LOCATION SEE DRAWINGS
!
c(
a
~
f3 z
i=
J ~
13 mm SCHEWLE 40 BLACK
STEEL PIPE VENT W/ 8UND FLANGE t=
:::>
...J
FLAME CHECK . 0
-IOOmm FLANGED CONNECTION · ~ ...J
"FOR FILLING. . UJ UJ
~ =>
IJ..
19mmSCH.40 BLACK STL ~
HALF CPLGS. WELDED TO ..J
g< ~~
TANK 0.4~ 0 . C. TYPICAL
FUEL OIL SIGHT GLASS,

SEE SPE<;S .
TANK SUPPORT LEGS .13 mrn SCHEDULE 40 BLACK
FURNISHED BY TANK STEEL PIPE 1 FUEL OIL
MANUFACTURER ~ETURN LINE
, I
I
i I /
1SCH. 40 BLA.CK .STL. HALF
CPLGS.WELDED ·TO TANK,
TYPICAL
w
w
~
'=::E
I 13 mm PLUG VALVE LLI
..J :E .
~ 50mm PLUG VALVE WI <{
u 8
II COMBt-4ATION LOCKING .13 mm. SCHEDULE 40BLACK (/)
0
DEY ICE AND WRENCH STEEL PIP~ .• OUTLET TO
ENGINES
E
0
0
(FI~ISHED SURFACE
0
PLATED BOLTS IN SELF. >
3-12rnm 0 BARS
I EACH WAY ,EQUALLY DRILLING ANCHORS SIZED
FOR TANK CAPACITl' ~
SPACED
CONCRETE PAt>
,I
I. ~
~5
2 fQ
~ 0
)
~_, !:}I ---I
NOT TO SCALE
.
;.:; j
I !·xi l
I ::,rt--H
1
,
' ~ ~ ~--~-~.- - - - · - ------------------- -·-·-----------·--··---------- -·-·-----·---- --·_j_t~[± t ·.
.. : :>
CHLORit-£ CYLINDER
CHLORINE CYUNDER SCALE '<
I
I
I
PAINT,
J TYP.
a:
w
' ~
2-6 mm BAR EVERY ~
l()t."JOl.---'-"1 OTHER C~SE ,TYP. ...J
< ¥
0
g 0
~~
..
0 IOOmm THK. CONe.

HOLLOW BLOCKS
.'," .
CONCRETE
PAD
ELEVATION
: •·
SCALE r:2o
'
CYLINDERS r----,~-.
NOT SHOWN ;..........: -·~
0
<!J
0
l9mm MARINE PLYWOOD

6
CJ)~
za:
tiQ..I.J~..S.. : 0 ~
CD ALL 'D1MENSIONS IN METRES !Q ~ .
SECTION UNLESS 011--I!::I~NISE SHOWN ~
SCALE f2\ DRILL I 2 0 HOLES IN
\!:J PLYWOOO ·ro FIT REBAr<
mm a:
0C",'I£L.S.
(J) 'IER lFY F'L:'-/WO<)i) CJ.:F Ti r.)G
DIMENSIONS 'y'/:'fH C'fUNDEHS
AND SCALES FURNISHeD. ,_
UJ
2.
·-·---~·- --------------------------------------------------------------------- ~,-~----~--
z ffi (.') -
8END WATEH sror" ON 125mm.
(5") RADIUS, MIN.
I·- -·----1 WATEHSTOP CONTINUOUS IN ALL
ROOF SLAB CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
001-.10 WATER STOPS AT ALL ROOF
Q ~~ ~~'
~ ~<'-{ ~6
JOINT INTER SECT I ONS BY HEATING. a: · ~~ V)(f)
WAT ER STOP AT CEN TE R OF WAL Ll

SEE STD. DWG. SD - 102
t; . . . .~ f--
IN ALL VE RTICAL CONSTRUCTION
JO(NTS .. SEE STD . OWG. SO-t02
--........_
~
, ,
',,~!-~'-:::_-=-·=-:;;,
z ~(/) I' ~\
, I p.. • ,. SEALANT GROOVE CONTINUOUS Ar oo:;:0 :::>
.::; "? 0
BONO WATERSTOPS IN FLOOR AND WAl L I
CONSTRUCTION -JOINTS WITH WATEHSTOP
'It
. II •
I
FLR. SLAB CONSTRUCTION -JOINTS.
CONTINUE GROOVE TO CENTER OF
WALL a FILL W/St:ALANT SO AS Tn
Q
~ O Z
zW oa: ·
<t ·
UNDER WALL OY HEAliNG. BOND W/WATERSTOP. SEALANT rJ) <! Z
UNDER WALL SHALL OE IN PLACE W ..... ...l.J
U I ~
OENO WATER STOP PRIOR TO PLACEMENT OF CONCRETE
NOTES : ON 125mm(5'}RAOIUS MIN. FoR ¥.'ALL. -t-- => w I~ I""'
-;;""
_. ~u 1.\ a:
WATEnSTOPS SHALL OE CONTitiUOUS wATER STOP IN
FLR. SLAB CONST. JOINTS. 80Nu
coNTu~uou:; A~iL E
.J
(/)._.z ~~~~
~~ ~
'~
..:::: .._,
THROUGH FUl., WALLS f.\ ROOF OF
RESERVt>IR EXCEPT WIIEHE OTI tE!lv.~S ~"-'"'-..,...'""' ~:="='!=====i · I WATERS TOPS AT ALL FUl JOINT CI:
FOR WATCRSTOP TYPE REQUIR[D
INTERSECTIONS ElY HEATING . 8 oJ
l!J
SEE DRAWINGS. ~ 0::?:
WATERSTOP SAMrLES SHALL BE ~ 0~
SUBMITTtD FOR APPROVAL BY THE .....! >LL TI
ENGINEER .
DIMEN SIONS ARE IN MEl H[S UNLESS OTHERWISE SHOWN
~
0
ilia..
(/)0
~
0 ..
0 a.~
TYPICAL WATERSTOP INSTALLATION .....! ~~ ;{ 8
~Q QI.~~ffi ___j/
~~( 5 /S".~ .
I SEAL AI•JT I IIWTCH OUT AT
( SEE SPECS)·--.......__ ;.r-CRACK 1\S
· cO NC.SURFACE -- - '\... _SHOWN
I
llll;:iH:,ilill!l l!l i!:l l ;~, I 'l r'lillllllllil' llliJIIj':il :ll ·. ~-~:-)
----..<1. rn ..
. . :
. - :: . . .f..f·;t :'
C-f. -· 1--~
;:. ~ ' .·.-:
1.:.-:.i I
l*IL ll'i t:: -----
PLAN
.
l•j!:l !.•~!.l: n ·..~·riiAI
-IIIIi
isl,rKIII'N''Gl, . l "Af)E
.·.;:._.::__'_
·. . . ,
:___;_;_.·
._,_
:: : .. .
· -
.. <~;/-:: g~
..;·~-.. · ~- ,
·'· · Ott')
.:•'···'": d
5t,-~ :~ ~-; .:~) ·>
o.:: ··. :~z:r
- ·
i i; ·
•·j •.,... I t
.,. . ; I . :
.,,.~ CONST. I -- ·; ._;_·~ :::-::•: CRAC!< L IN~ ·.· ;-·~
N 0 T E .
I,,II· '1':~J -JOIN T ......._ •. _.,. .... <---- · -
"..;f( ::.~~- :.. • ..-~t'
0.0095r~
-
.0032 ( 1/0')MIN EACH
SIDE OF CHP.CI< · /
/ .
. AT CONTnACTOi l '$ OPT JON GI~OOVES l-f3ii3 ,·,) NOli ·

MAY COf.JTINUt STHAIGI!T ACHOSS 0 ET A I L PHIOR TO FILLING RESERVOIR WITH
CON STRUCliON JOII·I r ll·l'rt:n:;ECTION WATW.REPAIR ALL CRACKS IN 1-"LR .
OR BE STAGGERED A:5 SHOWN IN P L AN SLAG( WALLS €\.,ROOF SLAO AS PER
DETA L ABOVE
FO~M EO SEALANT GROOVE
TYP!CAL __ CRACK REPAIR
t--· SAW CUT Of{ FORMI.O GnOOVE' AT OPTION

OF CONl !'<ACTOR. f' ILL WITH GRAY "-:t
0
I
'1
!-1
7.9mm! I.Gmm
(5ti6''TTli6"i
r-
j
.•- SEAL ANT . ( FOR SEALANT SEE SPECS.)
( FOR LOCAl'ION & LIMITS OF GROOVE , SEE
., RESERVOIH Fl,-0011 PLAN .
I lz9mmtl.6rnn•
-- r-· ~~ jl REOAR
--i G SPACES. MIN
. 0
o, ~
.. ..J
~ :·' /
~ , ~-- ~ -- ~~-~·zi·~---~J
I . . :. \,... .,
: ---··· .. -~ ____,
SEE RE SE ilVOIIl TYP SECTION
CR/J.CJ< CONTfWL DE TAIL
' .
·' . :··
·i (rt
EQUAL COLO JOINT. APF'L Y 2 COATS
OF BOND BREAKER~ AVO ID.
FOR DE T /\ILS 01: fOP
REINf.' BAHS AT CO N ST. :
JOINT,SF.t: ROOf- SLAB ;
STRIP HEIN F. DL rAILS i
..
i
I
I /' __ ___ , _
I COATING WATERSTOP.
FOR BONO BREAKER 1
; SEE SPECS.
FOR W.S TYPE REO'D . I

IN RE SERVOIR Fl.R SL /\A
SEE RF.SEINOIR TYI~;,ECT
I . )I:ORMEO SEALANT GROOVE.
SEE STD. DWG. SO. Hll
FOR REINF., SEE RESERVOIR TYP. SECT.
V)
a:
~
w
w
·: · : ~ 0 • • ; • :. ~d z
aZ·
.06'35(21/2")CL.i~
w
~
DOWEL 8/\RS:I
SAME SlZE AS ·.. r.------.----...~o------..:.-+-JCOLD JOINT. APPLY 2 CO/\TS OF
SLAO REINE BOND BREAKE8. AVOID CO/\TING
SPACE AT .610 ( 24'') FLOOR S LAB CONS T. W S. 6 SEAl. ANT GROOVE. FOR
0 C. BOND BREAKER, SEE SPECS.
,JOINT
.., NOTE
( I .! AT ALL SL/\B CONST. JTS . CONC. SHALL. BE
'-./ WORKED U NDER WS . flY HANDhMAKING SURE
* APPLIES TO RECTANGULAR RESERVOIRS
ONLY. HORIZONTAL RING TENSION BARS
__ THAT AIR 6 R()CK POCKETS A1(E ELIMIN/\TED. IN WALLS OF CIRCUL AR RESERVOIR S TO
( 2 ) ALL DIMEI:IISIONS IN METr~ES EXCEPT WHERE BE CONTINOUS THRU CONSTRUCTION JOINT:
· · OTHERWI SE SHOWN
&
'fs~t;~~c~~r~E t-.. ·-------
=~===~~;e=~
TOP fl/\RS
BOTT O M
01\ R S
I'
BAR CHAIR TOP REINFORCEMENT SUPPO RT
N OT E :
FOHM TO BE BEVELED l\S
SHOWN 1\T ALL P I./\ CE~
WHEf<E HOR. 6 VERT.
SURFACES INTERSEC T
, ... I F BOTH SURFA CES M<C:
IN SAME POUR
I
I lo
• .1
;: ' ) R tvl 1·1E 1/ E: L lJ r:: ,. fl. I ! ..
. i .... -- '"'-·-----··-·-·-···- -·--- -· ------ - - - - ----..- ---- - - ---- -- ----- -··· - -- -- -- -

NOTES:
CD ALLDIMENSIONS ARE IN METRES
EXCEPT WHERE OTHERW ISE SHOWN.
.' RESERVOiR ~·- - - - - - . . &
:· :;:
.;: FLOOR SLAB :
I
DRAIN ROCK :...___.....,

i !
;
l i
~ ~
I i.! ; .. 6.35 mm(l/4") HOLES ON 76mm(3"l ,
CENTERS. DIAMETER TOLERANCE
A t> 6 6 v
1. . l '4\
'' ."' . ' s

I l> • b
. t . 4· . . • 6.
... .. ± 1.59mm (± 1/16") 4 R0WS PER - -1
t.
.·.· ... .
'J
·
..·. -· . .. ·'
• . •- · . ~
p . LENGTH OF P IPE I
r
c ·i . c:¥ .. . . ·. .
. ..
.·
~ ~ . , . ..
.,
. . ...
. .·
.__.."· ~t
.· .... \ ·.. ··<.-:::_-.. . ~
&
!'
. "· : .. . : .
~:) z •'
. :$ .
I . ll .
l .
c). :! SPIKE
_t______
t. VARIES
I
I
:; & 01 '
20 MIL TH ICK FLEXIBLE POLY- ~
·: . <' e ·rYL£:.NE OR P. v. c. WITH I Ot
-.~: . .>
t .C:.Pi't;:;) JOINTS. I lsoo + 0 .,··
~~:~::~ I
~/
.·· \Of
1'- j
Or
02?"'. :
I
~ _; ~ ..... : ..,..__. - - '---PEA GRAVEL SECTION THRU HOLES
!<::::.mm (4"} BELL 8
SPIGOT
PCRFCRATE:> P. V. C. PIPE
~
~ ~:-·iTi-; OPEi'~ JOINTS. PLACE ;
!..; ;::m::-..:~ATl JN 'OOWN.
s
t
~
•
~
~
~ -~
. REVISIONS SCALE: NOT TO SCALE DATE LOCAL WATER UTILITIES ADMINISTRATION l
j NO. {DAIC: jiNITiAL ! DESCRIPTION jAPP'VO DESIGNED TECH. STD. COMMITTEE FEB 75
~
is-nel Tsc !• G£ 1XERAL REVISiONs I DRAWN RSB FEB 75 TYPICAL UNDERDRAIN DETAIL
1 1 I · ·
L-_L_j
I
j
l
r--j 1 t<ecommeoded:MiJ.L ~· ~
JAMES M. MONTGOMERY. CONSULTING ENGINEERS
I Approved:
uate:
( >
'
I ·· .'..
~·
r
I
---'\ - - -\.- - - ,
I
(8\HASODET
'li·.;. '
I:' G-ol.. P- COVSR,
1CONCRE TE CURB
~ GA. • cov" :lU I . ~:---~~i\
!r-
ji I
. -,
I
r
,: r - - - -;,---L-.------------J1
J
1) :l\ .
gt 1
~/,
-~ ~-:1;-~
' ~n-~--::--'J
!i ! :-.
. ,. !
li I
o.c::; ~ -=-~ro. ;
Rev ():.'<· :..o;v-:;.
r;
I I
r-f--1 0.91 CLEAR
OPENING
1
r t I : I . 1 • \
t---~jI
i! ~
I" I
i_ --" .'"
RESERVOIR ROOF
~
~l
SLAB R£SERVOIR ""ALL
LADOER- SEE' SEE STRUCT. CM'GS.
It
~.,
~ I
r _' : I
liD
,,1--
,, \...HAS"
STO. OWG. S0-105:
t"1- .•.
..
~
.:~:::?
c), e.===iJ ::I [::w:~;
; I I !
·-------' llH & CD~EC_TIONS. (.
B::
c. •
;·
..-·.;.
~-··· · ..-..
..·
. .
I f __________ j:lj \::;,)

;_..
<·
f'. •r
__jO.Or3 0 THRO. ROO 0.74LONG

\1 PEEN ENOS AFTER Pl.. ACING NUT
10 GA. ft. COVER \ LIFTING HANDLE 7
'. 0.038 0.006 X 0 .038 ft. \ 0.025 • ,:'
- -\: "v~----l \ l TYP. I ·,-- 10 GA.~ COVER ANCHOR -,\ \ j j 0.012 /
p 0,006 .\ . . . .:-·,:·-
·" "\ ::~\ ) N : ! ~
~~-.2.~
N.
L AN
T. s. t\ . :
.. .....
I :• ·
.•. . J;g . ' .\
!~
I
0.006 ..... ~-~
-~
"I
~
'
r:.::::
c .-·
0 .15 ---'
CB ~lFTING HA~?LE DETAI~-

EB ~-INGES PETAl~- Q) ~?CKING H~?' DETAI~ .
t=~:·:·
r-r~:- ~.·-
·-:·
~- . ·::... -~ .
;~:>·.';::~. -
- ~:;r::·::;"'
j ---- Rei/ISIONS SCl-:.E: I(OT TO SCALE - - 'LOCAL'WMER UllLITIE~ADMINISTR.niON
I15.TI-;:m.....:::.::-- O(SICN(O TECH. STD. COMMITTEE
.F.\ C.:.:._.
. .I
I
I 'j
I
I
I I
OAAW"-
CHCCX!.C
~.
BENNIE
TECH. STO. COWIIITTE
~.: ..· .::!. :'- .. 7
. ] .. MARCH
/>ct:II<Ht!d"
, RESERVOIR ACCESS HATCH
-~~--
ii
"
' I
'i
' . I I jAWS "'- M'lNIGOMfRY. <:clNSUlTil'G f~'GINf'E~ c...· GI'NEAAl. MANAGE~
. .
:~. -.
AS DETAILED IN PLAN · i• cBOTTO= 1 OF HATCH, COVER OR GRATING
~ ~~~ C TOP OF SLAB ~RWALL

l lL:J
X _J
<! <!
:E u
on...
If) >- L_._ I-------· 50 mm X 9. 5mm FLAT
- r- V BAR RUNNERS
I ,_~-
-- SYM. ABOUT
/G
BRACKET •==•L
'-~ :
NOTE: GALVANIZE
AFTER FABRICATION .
ALL DIMENSIONS IN
10 a.; METRES EXCEPT
, .
r--1): WHERE OTHERW ISE
. ~~ SHOWN .
~~~
oi:?: c::FLOOR OR FINISH GRADE
·.·:::';·~~-~-:-.·;;,IT,)··:-.:~:-:· ·~:·;~·:?:~~~·;;~;:-. ~~.:-· ~-·~K:-.·~-;

ELEVATION
19mm(3/4") STAINLESS STEEL 19mm(3/4") PLATED BOLT
SELF DRILLING ANCHOR FOR : IN 19mm SELF- DRILLING
INSIDE OF RESERVOIR .ANCHOR FOR OUTSIDE
OF RESERVOIR
Rl)NNER .0 75
f----
r
0.40
· BAR 0 .050mm x 9.5mm BRACKET

·...;.
·JTT-f-+- ..._
g
PLAN ~-~ - --~:- . -
'4
! -=._.: .<:-· -~~- -··~--·· ~-~----~v·-~--·-~-------~ -~·---........,..___________._. .l'..~.·. ._..·-.r_·. ..

_..•• • ·f-...,
· ·-
I
:· .. I
\
- !. -
·. =·-~= . ..,
. - 0.15 SEE PLANS
2 .00m MAX.
0.15
.---1
!
...:. ~-
i~~
r
i
I
I I
I
I
.
I
STEILL FRAME
~
I PhC:- CAST
I I
I CONC. SLAB, J'YP.
Li I
!
I
I
I
I
I
I
CON:. TOP CURB
HEIGHT AS REO.
lOr.om Hlll-(-...
..• ..· I I
I
I 2-6nwn BARS EVE
-:~tfi:} I
SECOND COURSE
CEMENT PLASTER
.. I FINISH ON .INSIDE CIIX
z~
:._ - \ - - - - - - - .J
~~
,EXPAI'Il S ION .JOINT • ""--FOOTING E
Cl.
0.15 CHB I
J31NT fR.LER, TYP..
A N --
wg
p L
w.
(J)N
MOTES: FOOTING (TYP.)
(!}FOO PANG AND EQUPMENT SEE PLANS.
@ALL OI!ENSIONS IN METRES.
0 .20
..rl-( s. I 12:'16mm PLAIN BARS ?ER SLAB,
oil I • Lr 0.10 m FROM EACH END
IOmm@
t.;--iVD5 .1 0.05 l 0.0063 .
S'IELL ANGLE ~AI.£ (ALL SIDES)
MITER NfJ WELD CORNERS .
GALVANIZE AFTER FAB~CATION
SECTION@
·:·:
0 .037 x 0.0063 BAR ·ANCHORS,0.45 O.C. (MAX.~)
·.·:~:r::.:·:-/~
::~: : ....... ~
NOT TO SCALE LOCAL 'WATER UTILITIES ADMINISTRATION
:;~~1~iJ:~;:;1 i..:O. i DATE I lti!ITIAL DESCRIPTION DESIGNED TECH. SID. (;()t&C!TTEE
.,DRAWN RSBAUZON
>=:-:i? CHECKED .TEeM. STD. CCMAITTEE
.: ·. -~ Appc-oved: &ro-D¥~G
Date: S0-106
..· J . --- -..J.- - - - -- ·

- - ·· - ------- - ---
~----
~:
~
~ r-"·- ~ein Circuit B~eaker
GrOtHld Fault·Sensor
I
..
~
UJ.
~~
·t~~~:
Ai-r~~~
I
r
r , 0 , ., •. , ) .. . ' .. ,.. .u •v ••• , .••
··ro·C«J(r.ol
,~di~uJ(':. ~,..;~~~{9-~i~.·~
tA
<(
I "I
a. :~
.:'E
.=:
>~ --: ~: . ·l~:::~n~:;:Si}·::~_K.-¢1;
1----o.~·.:i&.?
::-
ll , ._ .,..,
I J.:.· -
• t .. . ....~-.
:i:, .
g§ o=.
Q' •
0_:,~ $~~ 1:: ...... 1·.... .. . r· ~f:'~ ~--·
0
~··.~ ~-
0 ' ,. .Pfs:..:·1<P:Jnise ~·r. Mohit0f',~·$uit861e:fi>r ·

·N O ·.:·' .,.;or.·~e;:t~n~i~·~··o~eiAM1it~;¥rilt•~
NIL. :•· · :
J
I
I ·..Po'wer·'Monittn:·~li"f~
I . .. •
!')
~
I~ L " ... "•ft ·r,; <ooo:or
. Ci.r:Cuit' .
:'.~#.:
~..-.~r ' ·~~~(arf.YS:JS::t;C:te:JI1(~~
,~;~_~bt.~~·...,.·,· ...
·~
~ ·. .<-: $ ti. ~~:a:~~,kfer:~oll~:~.bett'

B ~~~-
f.S~Ni8)~~Jkt~~-U#REMENt$·o:F.~.A;{f.Y..PtGAl .FU't;,~Q..by:AG.e::_;two~,ftO.R:::J$~·te~t~lN.;WJ.mfiG.to1A¢;RAIVf
D~;g;-;~ by.
~ecorn:r~Gr.ded by: Approved by: Agency: I Sheet Title: Electrical Plan Sheet No.
Local Water Utilities Administration Full Voltage Motor
L
1
Owner: Starter Main Circuit SCCD1

Mgr. PP'O/A -Operntions Mgr. Area -Operations Diagram
,-
\ .
I
N
0 c
- z
Q)
Q)
.s::.
C/)
()
()
en
~
::I
'- 0
c
..!!l
0.
....
0
0
.!::::
u
1j::E
·r:
4)
e
......
~ C) c
0
w~
~ 0 ~ E
Cll E
f- >t= C)
~ -::::J (/)Q
II)
ns ns
...... ·-
LL.
c
0
:p
l!
.....
Ill
:£;
E
~
Ill
Cll
:e
~
'-
.!
~
cv
~ 0
;,.:
IU
8, 0
< ...J ~
"'c
t
0
~
~
~ <
j ~
~
g_
0..
<
(/)
...,0c:
[
0I
k !'f
0
~
a.
a..
5,
~
§
oc
~ ~ ..-- - ._ -~ - -- - - ,._.,.. -- --- - - - - ·-· - --·- --- -- - -- ----·~- - -- -·--
~---·
~ ~-~
!J Ground' flWit:.Sensor
B .--·-··- uam Cir~ifBreBkei
ij .§
"5s
.-:
I
...:
·~
~! >),.,..'<
.'!=i
'::l· .• · .. ·
t:::.1 ' ,_ r
,,.
8-! ~
~ ;t
Pf: ~")
~~ ~ R i.. -.-----~,~.----~~~'kl·J·,~··AG !.
e·
"-'
:a ~: ::.;,
·s...:
<·P · .
t,
~·
,·>
.. . '··
~~~
c_·.. ~:
. ....... '.
.;:J._.-~r=.............WL~
~·
~:r--'¢. :6
.·. ~:=
~ .. ....
~;
T r-~=
.,, ..
~
!~
~
~
~
I .:!
~
~'--- ~ ,
I
I
c::Pro..ii~(eQitr.ottr~o~~f~y·: .
WJL~~-t~~J~~- ~~QWR~Mi:NtS· Or ·A,:TtP.I l:AL.RV$· ~tJTO.~;:JlmNSFORMER'i,l:~f!i~}lft.OON~WIRING' D.lAGl~~;.,.:.

t~
iJ~ n ,.,.:...-~..; h r
....,~._....,.,....,,~ .... U J •
R5:c;r.T.e.-:d<:;d ey; Approved by: Agency. Sheet Title: Electrical Plan I Sheet No.
~ Local Water Utilities Administration Reduced Voltage Starter-
-~
Owner: Auto-transformer type ISCCD3
ivigr. ?PO/A -Operations Mgr. Area - Operations ,Main Circuit Diagram
....:::
I
'i r• ~::.:
<:'I~
~~·
,~
I:4
~
'
'I
=~
~
•
~
._:
'I
~
~:k-{JSi:
.:.:1<:.
).
<
<
{1.
~: ~
~ ~
::t.·
I•
h,
.'li''
. ~:
:-:
~· .
t; .
1.. ...:-.;.:t . :~l: . " .;~.. . :....' I •_, .•..'f· ;
~h..,..,.~.'"~ ,~.c ·'·~· ... . ~j~

·'''
,•
*"WL
..
ldt.
·,
> .• ..... =*·:'' '] .,.,·.. : ~~:;· :;~J"'·
:: ;<:~'\1.{&. t
M ~-: . . :.:::-.:·d: l ...:lr<·. ,.:'Mi: :P-t .
1 ~ ,.~,.; .·; ·;, .. ·
r -:,..;..:~ .
:z;#~c. ~<(J: ~Jt

~ , . ,
1 -~-:
' 'liX~:.w.z;:.;_•:.. <!'..I·

'
i;~; . :-:
'£.~; ~":-·"""*
'-~:
.,. p·$~ : .... '•.,
. f ,• :
?. ~
. 'i·~'
~~ ~~i
~J l •-:'
(;
~ ~ .. ~ ·, ..... ~ '!. ; . .
;:;;.R·{.S '! ·: ·: :.· ;-:,
:1:"""-' ~·· ..'I . ::.. . :,:,.: ~:·~:
;., "}
~'#m.
'I '
·.
l ~. (~· ·:r:
(
tJ;~~js:r~
~·· .
':b. :·\ (:t,.:. 1£-f 1~1
' . ,.
i f~ ·'{M., l ,,
. ~.,..
~ y ·::."f'" ..• :·~:
-',;
'f.....S.0:·1o:..
~ ,. ~·..g.·• : 1~:
~
I
; ~WEU...
. LEVEL':Ri§LAY
~ ·sbf.l .. · · ·rr·'d .
'l . - •.. :'·::fi.~~:: :
~ ~~·:a ' ...·-~ .. · ~·, ~:~' ~3 ·J' ; ~~ .£: :'-~ ·~:~;· ,..--.
~~ .i»-. •- . .•,·,0=. :~a ~ ~
.~.'•., , ;:...,.; ·:; ' ~··~i
.:,g=~·: ~,... , ·$.<!:·· ;~··=' (~:o ~ ;;;.;:
t~· ~~
:~~.:. ;~j~~.
'<"i)IO.·
/·) ... '··Ji!
.~ :;.~: .~ ~! ~·:.• ·~· ld-:· '~·-·'l
••.•; :· : •• ·.:
li . \! -d.i. :. :; :>J
~o; ...,... ''~i: '.,...
~ ~·. ~~~ ~:<' It! .:~ j'f' !-' . ..~~<
•
._
•I ,. · .. .. j'·.:...·:··;;.;, · ~. . ,.:; ·s; ..·. . :'·~·
...,.
::· '·\j$
·~' ·~ :'.1... ~ ~~1i. '¢~ci~
~ t~ :~.;~:~ :s~ i,j · :~ ;l:.i;1 ~~· · • t-l. ~. · ~~ . .!; ~
I~ I
~:~ ·:'l~iJ:5.·
.,._
'4. ..~~: . .';'
·~ < ·: . ·. i' m;~, ;:~
3.';,, ,....
II'
fi;f; •
,
~
!:
; ·t
I~<
•j:t:!
. ~ ::: : ,;.§
.Q~.'1 :.·~~:: ;:::~~ ~:
:
:~·
C?:~~ ~1i ~~~r
~J.a.· ,~~~~
~ it :a;,~-,
·~ ~: ..;.v ~·~ i:~ ~~
~:~} ::: . ~- . .
:. Ifi ~o3
~~"
~: }'1. ::.ioiiOI ~i ~;f.
.:.¥-t . J :fflGiftEER:
.... .... ·.·...
~-~;:~~..
w .j;
..,.,,§.
-~:.· ~-:-:-·
t: '>-': .
H ' • • ,••, I' ._ ,:0.1;>. ·•···' '(~' •• •• .:;~ ~~ :l .· :~ ~ ~{· X. ::m:.~. ·ik;.·-
~
~
E.,
l i l'<f;l.Wutii;SI:!dU.#~l;\Qii!t:s'fl"PN~AL1iJlii"'i·· ~t~-~4111it.a~M'sR
. .., l ~ .,. ,.
:•. , .... .... . . •. · .. :. ... .. : .~, t .">. ·. ::; 1· ·,,. ,••f.' :.:~..1, ·~·::~ --U~.,.:,/'~ ~. :·.. ', .:'. .... \ . « ... - ·,. --~ ·1··.::. . ·.· .']t.J .... .:: '· ::'..-. ·~ ,,: ..·... ,.,.. --· r YP.Et
.., · -'' '':. .) . . , .
. ~ De--~ned by: Recommended· by: Approved by: Agency: Sheet Title: Electrical Plan Sheet No.
d
. 1\ Local Water Utilities Administration Reduced Voltage Starter
:;
(1 Owner: !Auto-transformer type SCCD4
tl ... -.. =-= -· __ _.. ,..L.., . !~~,',;,, PPD/A -Operations Mgr. Area - Operations Control Circuit Diagram
"--. -- ,_-· ~- am
t';
f)
r-1
;;:;
(j t:;: Ground FaUltSen.sor
li s
~
r--·-"----
i
Main Circuititre~r
:J
i
'J';.,.:-,......tr AJ· Q~tt
~:·
~(.)
~
;i~-
~-
~
~- ~:
0 _.,_ I I ct
~.~
~~
.... !" ~
I -~I
l~-
-~~<l'
R· t.t.,.,.- • .4.il
........- - -............. I .l:P
,~.·.i
~!~ ~( ' :·;·:_,;~~\~, ''' . ~~
~ - ·
- ·- ~
-I
; '
I. ~ I I
i
;~i.,o!\ll..wi<{1f.s};m;r-~~~~-~~*'
I ·---.
. )
l~::==~~§j
i.J
~
tj
I.
c. P.~i:M~~ .cOr-ti.cil:~~~:ft:,f.)eC:es:t~= ,_
tj
~
:iI. wt~~~fiM.u~- R~~U~REM'ENTS
.•. - . . .-TY~U;AL,RVS
OF -A- .. .
1 UT:o·~::J·RANSF.ORMER'~lY.'P;e\_:MAJN~lN-lRING DIAGAANf
. . ' .• . '-A
" ' . .... '•. '• : . . .. . ' . . ·. . . :!J: . . .. . . .....
~
'I
- --·-- -- 4<··-.--
't wc!l:fjr.od P•( •• RQ{;(I11)1Ylo1){~ by: Approvod by; Agency: Sheet Title: Electrical Pl8n I Sheet No.
.
\
t. Local Water Utilities Administration Reduced Voltage Starter-

~
Owner: Wye-Delta type Main I SCCD5
~ -··-·=-r-- --
L.- ... :V.~r PPO/A -Oporatlon:. Mgr. Aro.s • Opor~~Uons Circuit Diagram
- .. _... ·- ---- --- ---.... - -- - - ..- -· - --...:
~
I H
~
P.
'1
,:I~
~ t~
~, - '
~ -f.IS~..
·r /)
I~
R.~...J
Hr~v~~~~·l?,
~:J~. ~:-_;74 o I
~ :$,~~~
;}.; . .
I
)~ .
:~
~l ...-..
-~-«<,,..
:.:..' ~
.... .·
;;,t.L ·
I 'i~
• ·.:d =.t:· .d t::J:1\' ·

.J,;&;!T.I;;-~~g,.f.:·
I ....I'
.~.·
-~·' '-
~~ ·:(>
-~- _i:.' :~?·

->
-~·
- '· ~i~·
• 'J!',.
· i )...:' i~~
..J:,
i l~-
~~;,~~4~i¥¢.~~-
r \
. ..
~ - t-.
i
il~··
>
~
't :~:g 1l :·~;: :,i ·i
1f~ ; 'i. ·~~' :·:~~~:·~
A
~~: .·f.~;·
,,. .,,..,,,, ..,ow.;J::..,
.h>S·
~~: ; =s:/ :i·. -"·=--c
-~-·
~I ..~"!'
..~,:, ;~~:~ :!~,'
g
il t·
:'1:.:,
€:~
·Ei:~
~. n
........ ~-~-=
--~.. ~;
(-
·.;i:f.. ·r~~:'·
~:·
:~--~
,~ '
.;il;,;
i
~
.i' ;:t;.
- ~·=~-
;~~
-
~i.:
~!;: f : ·;i ~~~i t~f~·
;:~1 !~ ::~' ·!:. >:~; If;<'
<
u : ..~ -. - ~~~ . .. -~- /
v
;~~::~~
~
~ll~,~~: ·~C:~f~~~~ ·~~~:ff~~@- =9S\!I;~~''¢l~~Jilt~:~~!M~~~~~tf~S~~;t·
~
- ~~-;~~~~:~~b=r.==:==-~R~~~=~
~--~--:--------~A--
~~---~-.--------~~A-g-en-c~-.------~-~--------------~~s-~ --T-m-~-E-~-~-~-1-PI-an------~------i
- Local Water Utilities Administration Reduced Voltage Starter-
-~" Owner. 1wye-Delta type Coltol I SCCD6
'L ... _ , ivlgr. PPO/A -Operations Mgr. Are& - Operations Circuit Diagram
PARTB
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SECTION V- PART B
SECTION V -SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART B -SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1. PROVISIONS TO BE ADDED TO SECTION 1 (PART 11) ................................... .. 1
1.1 Construction Schedule and S-Curve .... .... .... .. ........... .................. ... .. ........ 1
1.2 Construction Methods .............................................................................. 1
1.3 Organization and Key Personnel.............................................................. 1
1.4 . Manpower Schedule................................................................................ 2
1.5 Equipment and Utilization Schedule......................... ................................ 2
1.6 Cash Flow and Payment Schedule.......................................................... 2
1 .7 Construction Program........................................................................ ...... 2
2. PROVISIONS TO BE ADDED TO PART II, SECTION Ill -GENERAL CONDITIONS 3
2.1 Logbook...... ............................................................................................ 3

2.2 Sanitary Precaution and Control/ Fire Protection at Site Office ................ 3
2.3 Construction Drawings.............................................. ............................... 4
2.4 Weekly Work Schedule............................................................................ 4
2.5 Suppliers I Manufacturers of Material and Equipment............................... 4
2.6 Provisional Acceptance for Section of the Work ................................... ,... 4
2. 7 Field Tests, Adjustment and Operation.................................................... 4
2.8 Operating Instruction and Parts Lists .................................................. ..... 5
2.9 Contractor's Construction Equipment, Tools and Appliances .................... 5
2.10 Tools and Other Equipment to be Provided by the Contractor.................. 5
2.11 Workmen's Identification Badges............................................................. 6
2.12 Contractor Superintendence.... ................................................................ 6
2.13 Traffic Coordination............................................................................. .... 6
2.14 Extraordinary Traffic ................................................................................ 6
2.15 Clearing of Routes in Roads /Streets ....................................................... 6
2.16 Interference with Existing Works.............. ................................................ 6
2.17 Verification of Proposed Intersections with the. Existing Mains.................. 7
2.1 8 Interconnection with Existing Mains................................................... ...... 7
2.19 Protection of the Environment......................... ~........ . ..... .. . ............ ....... .. .. 7
2.20 R igt1t to Operate racilities ......... .'.............................................................. 8
2.21 Taxes and Duties..................................................................................... 8
2.22 Details Confidential.................................................................................. 9
2.23 Procedure of Claims...... .......................................................................... 9
3. SPECIAL PROVISION TO BE ADDED TO SECTION V, PART A- TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS FOR WATER SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION ............................ . 10
3.1 General Requirement.......... .................................................................... 10

3.2 Provisions to be Added to Clause 7- Earthwork .. .................................... 15
3.3 Provisions to be Added to Clause 8- Reinforced Concrete...................... 17
3.4 Provisions to be Added to Clause 10- Piping...... ............... ................. .... i9
3. 3 Provisions to be Added to Clause 12- Pressure and Leakage Testlr.g ~-Hld
Disinfecting.......... ......................... ................. ........... ...................... ..... .... 23
3.3 Provisions to be Add ed to Clause 1d - Painting and Coating............... ..... 23
•• 7
'·. ' Previsions to t€ AdtJed to C!aase ·17-· Elcdro-Mechanlcal Wei k'>..... .... .. ............. ........ .... 24
SECTION V- PART B
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
This division describes specific provtstons, complementing the Standard Specifications and
basically, fonns part of this Contract. However, certain provisions are elaborations of other
divisions in the Standard Specifications, but are within the scope of work as called for in various
worl< items.
The following provisions refer to the other clauses of the Contract Documents and describe the
additional requirements specifically related to this Contract.
1. PROVISIONS TO BE ADDED TO SECTION 1 (PART II) -INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS
1.1. Constn.:ction Schedule and $-Curve
The Bidder shall submit with his Bid a detailed construction schedule in the fonn of a bar chart,
showing the order in which various components of the Works are to be implemented, the planned
rates of progress and the estimated period or time to their execution and completion.
S-Curve
The Bidder shall submit with his Bid, S-curve representing his forecast of the cumulative value of
physical accomplishment at any given time within the contract. The forecast of the acceptable
physical accomplishment shall be based on the construction schedule. Acceptable
accomplishment shall include only those passing the required factors, laboratory, field tests and
complying with the specification/drawing as to size and other description. The S-curve should
have the following:
Tille
Contract Designation
Bidder's Business Name
Monthly Value of Accomplishment in Percent and in Pesos, and Time Scale
1.2. Construction Methods
The Bidder shall submit with his Bid the information in tabular form as described below:
First column a listing of major construction activitie~ shall be entered.

. -
Second Column for each activity listed in the first column, the method to be used, whether
manual or mechanized, traditional or non-traditional shall be entered.
Third Column for each activity, the number and description of equipment to be used
shall be entered.
A Bidder proposing to use a method other than traditional method shall submit with the bid a
comprehensive description supported by drawings, discussing the methods to be adopted in the
execution of the Works. The tabulation of construction methods should have the following:
Title
Contract Designation ; and
Bidder's Business Name
·t.3. Organization and Key Personnel
The Bidder shall submit with his Bid the Organization Chart intendP.d for the implementation of the
Works. 8ti ef desc!'iptit)ll of tile proposed organization shall include rJuties ami fi :J!<.:tions nf lwrne
r,lfico m<m<lgoment,· site office rn<~ 11':1gem.~nt, and t.he relation b~ i·Nel':ld horne:: 'JFf(';7 mqnC\qernt:.nt
[-l, Jcl ~ite ofric<~ rrl~"\IKlqemonL TlJ m::~jor ;:]r;tivity :J r~c,~ in the impi.?mer;tat•';n •>f :II(' \jrJor1t :-:hBI! t0
!:i::n!il:ul. n :. i-1.1 1i i.:.::P.rtc ci',:..; ~.~.::.ivn atol:t ue:eg_8t1cn of ollli1ori'1 y ·:.: thu ~l(C ld i': G ~ ·~u~ nm·;diiri 0
SECTION V- PART B
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
expeditiously and effectively matters related to the construction, personnel administration,

procurement and contract administration such as purchasing local supplies, acceptance of
variation orders, billings, assignments of staff, etc.
The qualification, education and past experience of proposed personnel for key positions such as
project manager, assistant project manager, supervisors, engineers and other senior staff shall be
submitted.
Key staff personnel should be fluent in English and only minor modification of the proposed key
personnel in the Bidder's pre-qualifications document will be allowed. In case of any personnel
replacP-ment during the implementation, new proposed personnel should be at least equal if not
better in qualification as the one originally proposed during the pre-qualifications.
1.4. Manpower Schedule
The Bidder shall submit with his Bid a Manpower Schedule enumerating the number of
professionals, technicians, skilled and unskilled workers to be employed in the Works indicating
the calendar days the above personnel will be working in each job classification.
1.5. Equipment and Utilization Schedule
The Bidder shall submit with his Bid a list of construction equipment and plant for undertaking the
construction of the Works. The submission shall include the following infonnalion:
Type Model, Make

Number for each type
Year of Manufacture
Power Rating in kW/h
Capacity in tontm3
Owned or Leased
Or any infonnation that the Bidder deems necessary
The Bidder shall also submit a Schedule of Utilization of abovementioned equipment indicating
the calendar of usage of each of the equipmenl In case of any. equipment replacement during
implementation, newly proposed equipment should be at least eq11al if not better in capacity and
efficiency as the one originally proposed in the bid proposal.
1.6. Cash Flow and Payment Schedule
The Bidder shall submit with his Bid a forecast of the quarterly expenditures. The forecast shall
be presented in tabular form showing title, contract designation and Bidder's business name. The
first column shall show the montllS, the second, third, fourth and fifth columns shall show the
expenditures for materials, labor, equipment and engineering and administration respectively and
the total for each quarter in the last column. Eight (8) certified copies of final cash flow chart by
quarter shall be submitted by the successful Bidder within fifteen (15) calendar days from the date
of receipt of the Notice of Award.
1. 7. Construction Program
In addition to Section II (Instruction to B:dders) of Clause 29 (Signing of/he Contmct), tll8

prospective Contractor sl1all:
a. Within ten (10) calendar days from the receipt of Award, the Contmctor sh<tll submit 1o
l.he I..WUA. fc~ 8pprov.:11. tnr:: Con~ll uction Pro~ ram tog':lth8r w;tn th~ Dar Chart ,lnd ~~
Curvt-, rJl<lll/=OWCr ~i~d t'~qui!)nieilt litiii.~ s!ion SC.}H~ctu! e CCNerir•tl 2.1 ::· ··.t.• ,· it;o~; tc• ('(' r:pletG
tb8 '.iVorl', \11 :ill 0.f>!) 2 ( l.:. !:1 <.i C t':crd ~dl( ,:o.. ,.j.t\1 ·lJv..: tnrrns an!J ~vr.rJil~ : .-.~ ::.·' '.;'"! (! r,.;mtr•··•.i. 'tl:·:-
i.. ~illStru ;, ( !·~·li ~:;'t'J !~'!.l :~.:.u :; ~;.:. <l :_.;:;,co Lne i.:'asea on il'. ·.: .::.· ~ •. .;tructi.:.n I·Tugl'<.~f•l
?
SECTION V- PART 8
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
submitted with Bid incorporating all agreed understanding reached at contract

negotiations. Detailed control of progress on all activities of section included in the Work
is to be achieved by the use of the Program Evaluation and Review Technique (PERT)
and Critical Path Method (CPM). The construction program shall be of suitable scale and
shall cover all activities to which the Contractor and his Subcontractors are responsible.
It must also show activities for which the LWUNOwner is responsible (for example issue
of drawing, approvals, right-of-way and permits).
The following information shall be indicated for each activity in the PERT/CPM Network
program:
1. Brief description and exact location of the work to be done.

2. Duration in calendar days.
3. Earliest and latest starting and finishing dates.
4. Total Float
In preparing network, the Contractor must ensure that the total resources required for the
execution of the work according to the Program are at all times within the resources he
can make available. The Contractor must also ensure that the sequence and estimated
times for subcontractor's operations are fully taken into account. The approved
construction Program shall be the basis of the Contractor in completing the Work in the
prescribed period of time.
b. If at any lime it should appear to the Engineer that the actual progress of the Work does
not conform to the Approved Construction Program referred to in Clause a. of this
Section, the Contractor shall submit at the request of the Engineer, a revised
construction Program shall show the modifications to the approved program necessary to
ensure completion of the Work with the time for completion prescribed in the Contract.
c. The submission to and approval by the LWUA of such Construction Program or the
furnishing of such particulars shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his duties and
responsibilities under the Contract.
2. PROVISION TO BE ADDED TO PART II, SECTION IU- GENERAL CONDITIONS
2.1 Logbook
A logbook shall be provided by the Contractor and ·maintained by the Engineer at all times
reflecting the weather conditions, time extensions, work suspensions, change/extra work orders
and circumstances, affecting the progress of work, to be signed by the both the Engineer and the
Contractor. ·
2.2 Sanitary Precaution and Control/Fire Protection at Site Office
The Contractor shall submit a plan of the general construction camp and the Engineer's Office in
triplicate for approval by the Engineer. The Contractor shall Indicate in said layout the location of
all buildings, housings, equipment, tools, sanitary facilities and detailed sketches of the types of
sanitary facilities proposed. The Eipproved sanitary facilities shall be complete and in ooorl
working order before any work is commenced or the constn1ction camp is occupied. The
Contractor shall be responsible for, nnd shall exercise all :>anitary precautions cmd control at ti1 0
job site to safeguard the public he ~l!h ~nd tile living conditions of r1is men. The :.::nnit::lry
regu!nt'c·ns issued by the Engineer st1all be strictly complied with.
N I N1:~ C\l~ 1 fi-lb. Po~Rh\ c fire e::-:l !!"UI ~i~!1er Lor C'~ s.sas A, ~3 ar.<i C lir~ s sin \I t1~ in~·.tnller.l .:;;_ ·.: ~·~.:1
:~i! :) oifif J ;1nd all buildin[J'3 in Hl8 C'.:ns i,·::c:lwn U:l np.
SECTION V- PART B
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Class A Fire - Fire involving, ordinary combustible materials such as wood, cloth, paper, rubber
and plastics.
Class B Fire - Fire involving flammable liquids and gases.
Class C Fire - Fire involving energized electrical equipment
2.3 Construction Drawings
The Contractor shall maintain two sets of blue prints of the construction drawings on the job site.
These prints shall be marked and updated to indicate current job progress and shall show
deviations from the Contract. These drawings sh<lll show the actual location and depth of all
mains, fittings, thrust blocks, valves, fire hydrants, se1vice connections (if any) and all other items
shown and specified. Valve locations shall be tied-in by reference to two or three existing
permanent or semi-permanent ground features. Before final inspection, the Contractor shall
transfer all as-built information from these construction drawings to a set of reproducible tracings
and recorded under AutoCAD Release 2008 on ROM, which shall be delivered to the Engineer
prior to acceptance of the project.
2.4 Weekly Work Schedule
The Contractor should submit to the Engineer a weekly work schedule. Submission should be
every Friday of the current week for the schedule of the incoming week. No new sites shall be
opened if the Contractor failed to subm~ the said schedule and unless safety arrangement, traffic
coordination has been worked out and approved by the Engineer.
2.5 Suppliers/Manufacturers of Material and Equipment
Procurement of materials and equipment intended for the project shall be supported with all the
necessary documents, shop drawings, technical brochures and literature and satisfactory test
results (laboratory or non-witness, wherever applicable) showing that such material and
equipment conform with the specification and applicable local and international standards. No
procurement shall be allowed until the requirements have been reviewed and accepted by LWUA.
2.6 Provisional Acceptance for Section of the Work
Provisional Acceptance of Sections of the Work will be decided py LWUA during the course of
construction so that sections may be immediately s~t into operation by the Owner as envisaged in
the Program of Work pursuant to Clause GCC 30- Program of Work.
After Provisional Acceptance of a section of his work, the Contractor shall not be responsible for
any failure due to defective operation of said section by the Owner. However, the Contractor shall
be held responsible, for any failure due to defect of the material and equipment furnished by him
or of the installation work performed by him, during the life of the guarantee period.
A Certificate of Final Acceptance shall be issued by the Owner with LWUA's approval upon
completion and <lcceptance of the last section of the work. The guarantee period shall start from
the issllance of the Certificate of Provisional Acceptance for each section of the work except for
the last section completed in which case the guarantee period shall start from the issuance of the
Certificate of Final Acceptance.
2..7 Field Tests, Adjustment nnd Operation
n. All mech<lnical and electrical equipment sl1all be tested by the Contractor to the
satisfaction of the Engineer before any f-acility is put into operation. TE's!.s sr~ ~~ ll he r-:1ac!e
to \le!ennine whe!hE.r thl3 eq11ir-ment 11.:::; been properly assemblej, aligned, :jojustEC! :~r.d
r.on!lcGkli . /\n'J cl1 :''li0f-!S, 80.}t::.tmcnu: 0r rcplacnment require<! to ma:(e lh :~ <F:u(;~·: .1ent
oprHil!e ~1!3 sp<:dli0d ~ ll<tll iK r,.mi::(J r ..:1 :;v t:10 C:Oi"ltraclor ns Polt of !11e v..-or:.; .
.\
SECTION V- PART B
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
b. During the testing of the equipment, the Contractor shall arrange to have avallable, as
necessary, representatives of the manufacturers of all the various pieces of equipment, or
other qualified persons who shall instruct the plant personnel in the operation and care
thereof. Only after all the equipment have been tested and adjusted shalf the new
facilities be accepted by LWUA/Owner and put into operation. The pipeline shall be
tested according to Clause 12 - Pressure and Leakage Testing and Disinfection of the
Technical Specifications.
c. The suppliers of equipment in Clause 17 - Electro-Mechanical Equipment of the

Technical Specifications shalf spend a minimum of ten (1 0) days for instruction and
training to local personnel and acceptance testing of equipment. Acc::~ptance testing of
equipment shall not include initial start-up and adjustment of equipment. All equipment
shall be tested for proper operation and undergo initial adiustments prior to acceptance
testing. If, at the Ume of acceptance testing the equipment is not in working order, the
Engineer shall direct the Contractor and his supplier to make necessary repairs or
adjustments and that time will not count toward the ten (10) days of testing and
instruction/training.
2.8 Operating Instruction and Parts Lists
Before provisional acceptance of the work, the Contractor shall fu rnish, for each piece of
equipment, three (3) complete bound sets giving the information listed below (in the English
language):
a. Clear and concise instructions for the operation, adjustments and lubrication and other
maintenance of the equipment. These instructions shall include a complete lubrication
and maintenance chart.
b. List of all parts of the equipment, with catalog numbers and other data necessary for
ordering replacement parts.
Such instruction and parts lists shall have been prepared for the specific equipment furnished and
shall not refer to other size and type of models or similar equipment.
2.9 Contractor's Construction Equipment, Tools and A.pp1iances
The Contractor shall provide transit mixers, crane with concrete bucket, bulldozer, dewatering
pumps, buggies, concrete vibrators, dump truck, welding machines, vibratory type plate
compactors, sheepsfoot roller with prime mover and/or other construction equipment, tools and
appliances necessary to perform and insure a rate of progress sufficient to complete the work at
the specified period and at the same time effect a satisfactory quality of work. If, at any time, in
the opinion the Engineer, the construction equipment and tools appear inadequate and insufficient
to maintain the quality and quantity for proper execution of the work, 1he Contractor shall provide
the additional equipment and tools at no extra cost to the Owner. It is being understood and
agreed upon that the cost of providing and operating all equipment and tools required and
necessary for proper execution of the work and of maintaining satisfactory quality are included in
the unit bid prices.
Failure of the Engineer to require the Contractor to provide addition-a ! equipme nt to propsrly
mwcute all the work under this Contract sholl not relieve iht; Contr t~ cAor of !1is f)bliga"ti0m> to
:·: 3clJrc !i1~ (]Uality and quc.HHity of the work required ar..j of r;ompi etin{l ihe work wit!liil trw
~;pecified tim e.
~-~.10 ·ro\)13 ::lnu other Equipm;::)nt to be Providetl by ~h~ Contrac·~or
·!":~·"':! Cr;q!_r:-Jr.tor ::lwll ma}~e ;w<~ilnble at H1c site during ~r.B l if~ c.f r-,::; c-Jr~trar:t, S lii!J;· e:~ U; :h~i
;r.·. :~ ~('- ~i.·1, !~i ~\{ ~h8 CV..'i1 8;~ ~H ,(~ ~{l(: ~::.nuin ;Jt:~ ~H· -':t-'5 rn.ay bt=; fGl~t{i:~d ty ti,=-:: t-. nu~:-~e:.: r, Fdl ::-~JLh~l,11 Cg )
SECTION V- PART B
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
and electrical tools to be used for installation of pipes, hydrants, service connections, valves and
fittings, pumps, chlorination equipment, mechanical piping, electric power and lighting and other
appurtenances.
2.11 Workmen's Identification Badges
The Contractor shall provide all his men working in the project with proper identification badges.
2.12 Contractor Superintendence
For superintendence of the works, the Contract shall engage the full time se1vices of a Project
Manager who is an experienced licensed Civil or Sanitary Engineer acceptable to the Owner and
the Engineer. The Project Manager shall have full authority to act on behalf of the Contractor. He
shall have overall control of the construction. The Project Manager and key personnel of the
Contractor shall be capable of communicating fluently in English language.
2.13 Traffic Coordination
Coordination with the local police department and agencies concerned with vehicular traffic
problems shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Prior to the start of pipelaying activities, the
Contractor shall show proof to the Engineer that the aforesaid coordination was made and shall
present to the Engineer for approval the safely arrangement and traffic deviation or rerouting
program. The Contractor shall provide traffic aides and watchmen/Oagmen, when necessary, to
ensure smooth now of traffic.
2.14 Extraordinary Traffic
The Contractor shall use every reasonable means to prevent any of the roads, highways or bridges
connecting with or on the routes to the site from oong damaged or injured tJj any traffic. Tile Contractor or
any of his sub-contractors shall select route, choose and use vehides and restrict and distribute loads so that
any such extraordinary traffic as will enviably arise from the moving of !)ant and material from and to the
site shall be limited as far as reasonably possible and so that no unnecessary damage or injury may
be occasioned to such highways and btidges.
The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall pay the costs~ of strengthening any blidges or
allowing or improving any road connecting with or on the routes to the site to facilitate the movement
of the Contractor's Constructionai 'plant or materials for the Work. The Contractor shall indemnify and
keep indemnified the Owner against all daims for damage to any such claims as maybe made directly
against the Owner, and shall negotiate and pay all claims arising solely out of such damage.
2.15 Clearing of Routes in Roads/Streets
Routes of the proposed pipelines in roads/streets are shown in the plans. Clearing of said routes
shall be the responsibility of the Contractor including the settlement of claims and complaints by
the affected public.
2.16 Interference with Existing Works
In addHion to Clause 3.19 Cons/ruction Interferences of the Technical Specifications, the Contractor
shtlll at all times conduct his operations so as to interfere as little as possible with existin~J water
distribution facilities and existing works of any other governmental or private utility. Work that is likely to
interfere with any existing facility shall be programmed in cooperation with the Engineer.
Tlln Contractor sl~all conduct m·:ploraiol~¥ ~·xov8ti rm tr:o cl~term:ne underground obstruc\!011 nnd Gxisting
;·!·,:!ins so thal noected CiWl'!:F~3 in f)l":.~ct~: c.;an t·e .;,ff:::l:'tf;d. No :~.dclitional compensnlion \'Jill b~) rlllry,vc d
;11r GX!)Iomtor; c~xctMllionz..
SECTION V- PART B
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Moreover, all infonnation regarding existing water mains and other facilities, as shown on the
Drawings are based on existing records and the Owner assumes no responsibility for acx:uracy of such
information or for any additional cost incurred by the Contractor as a result of such inaccurate
information.
2.17 Verification of Proposed Interconnections with the Existing Mains
The Contractor shall oooduct e.><Porntmy excavation to verify the location, size, depth and type of all
existing water mains to be retained and connected to the proposed pipelines at all locations where
proposed interconnections are shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall conduct the exploratory
excavations and submit shop drawings of all interconnections prior to ordering materials required. The
Contractor may submit aHem alive methods of proposed interconnections to those shovm on the Drawings.
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in advance of all exploratory excavations so that the Engineer or
his representative may be present at each excavation to verify the condition of the existing pipeline as it
is exposed.
The cost of these exploratory excavations shall be included in the cost of making the
interconnection to the existing mains and no additional compensation will be allowed.
2.18 Interconnection with Existing Mains
The Contractor shalf conduct interconnections with existing mains in such a manner as to minimize
the period of interruption in water service. No area shall be deprived of water for more than twenty
four (24) hours. Prior to any connection work, the Contractor shall notify the OVmer and the Engineer
of such plan so that necessary notices to the consuming public can be made. Interconnection work
cannot be made unless there is an approval by the Engineer. Maximum sanitary precautions shall
be implemented by the Contractor during interconnection work, so as to prevent any heaHh hazard that
may be preaptated by sudl work.
The Contractor shall furnish all pipes and frttings, equipment and materials necessary to connect the
proposed feeder mains to the existing mains and conned the same to the feeder mains constructed under
this Contract at \he location on the Drawings in accordance with the requirements of these specifications
and/or the Engineer.
t
All cut-ins and connections shall be done with proper toqls and equiJlOOnl. Whenever tapping or cutting of
pipe is required, it shall be done with a tapping or cutting machine designed for the specific purpose.
Before proceeding to making the cut-in or connections, all tools, equipment, and materials necessary
shall be ready on hand and the cut-ins and/or ronnedions done 'Mth the least inconvenience to the
consumers.
2.19 Protection of the Environment
The ContrRctor shall comply fully with all relevant national and loc8l environmental legislation, regulaUons and
standards, the Environmental Management Plan induded in the Bidding Documents (refer to Annex C) and
the conditions of the Environmental Compliance Certificate
Wrthin one month from the S!Rrt Date the Contractor shall submtt to the Engineer and the Owner an
environmental mnr.Rgement plan and program that comply with the above, to ensure that the following
objectives are rr~f.t
j)rcrnote '~n,Aronrnental p,otecUon ar.d safety under r:rir:dpe of economy, ef~dency z.nd with hlg!1 regard
for social upliftment
<:·n~.u ,·~ (!lwlity onviror.mo::nt tl1rough prop::Jr m:=t\d(enance of i8n:1, Dir r~ nd ·;;ater ·~ualfty.
SECTION V- PART B
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
The environmental management plan and progrnm shall parucular1y stipulate the responsibilities.
schedule of activities and mitigation measures. Among the critical points to be stipulated shall define
the following:
Pre-construction phase (clearing and grubbing activities, adjacent areas affected, srte for disposal,
etc.)
Construction phase (temporary facilities, sanitation and waste disposal, clearing of trees,
earthwork, slope stabilization, and soiV river embankment, erosion control measures, etc.).
Demolition phase, removal of debris and waste material removal, restoration, etc. (Traffic
management plan, c!eanlil"!ess of working area, precautionary and safety measures, contingency
response to any ki:ld of emergency)
The Contractor shall take all reasonable steps to protect the environment on and of the site and to avoid
damage to natural surroundings or nuisance to person and to the property of the public or others
resulting from pollution or their causes arising as a consequence of his methods of operations.
The Contractor shall not discharge into or pollute nearby rivers, creek, or surface waters with fuels, oils,
bitumens, chemicals, acids, sewage, wastewater, and other harmful materials, debris or foreign
materials. Such materials shall not be stored beneath trees and adjacent to any rivers, aeek, stream or other
body of water.
Florn within the contrnct boundaries, but outside the limns of the Work mentioned under the contract as
indicated in the"drawings shall be preserved insofar as practicable in its present conditions. The
Contrnctor shall confine his construction activities to the areas defined by the drawings or technical
specifications, and to the disposal borrow areas indicated in the dra-Mngs as appuved by the Engineer.
All temporary facilities and buildings shall be located at places approved by the Engineer. Upon completion
of the Contract, except as othetwise authorized by the OWner, all temporary faci@es shall be removed and
its site shall be restored by the Contractor at his own expense to the rx-esentable conditions.
The locations of all pts and quanies for borrow and construction materials shall also be subject to approval by
the Engineer prior to opening. The sides shall be sloped and ltimmed, and overburden as stripping
spread uniformly. Adequate arrangement shall be made to have proper drainage so that water will not
be accumulated therein and to protect soil erosion.
. ·- ·-. ,.J . ' • . .
The surplus excavated materials shall be disposed at the designated areas in the manner approved by
the Engineer.
2.20 Right to Operate Facilities
Anytime before the provisional acceptance by the OWner of the work done under the Contract, the Owner
shall have the right to opernte any portion of the work for the purpose of supplying water, and such operation
shall in no way constitute an acceptance of part or all of the work or a release to the Contractor from
fulfilling all of his obligations under the Contract. However, if the Owner shall use the facilities prior
to provisional acceptance, the Owner shall be responsible for any damage to pumps, pipes, valves and
other equipment, matelial or instruments.
2.21 Taxes and Duties
a Foreign Taxation
The prices bid by the Contractor shall indude all taxes, duties and other r.harges imposed outs!cle
the Philippines on !he prt)cluction, s.-~1 :::: and ir<m~pc·rt of ti;G ContrRctor's 8quipment, ;;!ant,
m1:1terials and supplies ·:o f)t:! ussd or futni~·IJccl w1dS:r ltw Con!rac{, ;md Ctl11~2 ~ei\~CB.S POlfom:&d
uncler\he Contract. ·
~.
·.•
SECTION V- PART B
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
b. Local Taxation
The prices bid by the Contractor shall indude all customs duties, import duties, business taxes,
income and other taxes that may be levied in accordance with the national and/or local laws
and regulations in the Philippines on the Contractor's Equipment, Plant, Materials and Supplies
(permanent. temporary and consumable) acquired for the purpose of the Contract and on the
services performed under \he Contract. Nothing in \he Contract shall relieve the Contractor from
his responsibility to pay any tax that may be levied in the Philippines on profits made by him with
respect to the Contract.
c. Income Taxes on Staff
The Contractor's staff, personnel and labor will be liable to pay personal income taxes in the
Philippines with respect to such salaries and wages as are chargeatxe under the national and/or
local laws and regulations.
2.22 Details Confidential
The Contract and everything contained therein shall be treated as confidential and private. No
information shall be published concerning the Worl<. unless othefWise specifically pennitted in writing by the
ONner.
2.23 Procedure of Claims
The following provisions supplement Clause 5.2 - Extra Work Cost;ng of the Technical
Specifications:
a. Notice of Claims
Notwithstanding any other provision of the Contract, if the Contractor intends to daim any
additional payments, he shall give notice of his intention to the Engineer within seven (T) calendar
days after the event has first risen.
b. Contemporary Records
I
'
Upon the oa:;urrence of the event referred to herein, the Contractor shall keep such contemporary
.I records as may reasonably be necessary to support any daim he may subsequently wish to make.
Without admitting the Owner's liability, the Engineer shall, on receirt of such notice, inspect such
contemporary records and may instruct the Contractor to keep further contemporary records as are
reasonable and may be material to the daim. The Contractor shall permit the Engineer to inspect
all records kept pursuant to this subsection and shall supPly him with copies thereof as and
when the Engineer so inslructs.
c. Substantiality of Claims
V\;W1ln twenty-eight (28) calendar days of gMng a notice uooer the Contract, the Contractor shall
send to LWUA through the Engineer, for consideration of the amount daimed and the grounds
up::m which the claim is based. In the event the c!aim has a continu:ng effect, such accounts shall
be considerEd to be an interim ao:ount and the Contractor shall, at such inteMJ!s as the LWUA
m8y re<1sonahly require. ~flncJ fu.-lher accounts giving the accumulated arr.ount of the claim anti
<'lny further grouncls upon Vlhicll it is bJsc(J. In Cflse vJhere lntertm accour.ts <1re sent to LI/1/UA, the
Ccrtractor slla!l ser;d a iina! <lCCount wflhin twenty-eight (28) calendar days at the end resulting
frcm \he event
,L'f'l.y (·J:'tim 1)'/ t l!3 C'ontr~r,ln '.\~i l li;fl I~ CIG:-; n::·t C9rll!)ly with the c:foreir.G!~1'·)1~-"'j l·f0'·./~.'Gri3 s)'",n!l
i':'.: f t;;.; ·~: ~_~n.s1rJ~f$~t
,.I.
SECTION V- PART B
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3. SPECIAL PROVISION TO BE ADDED TO SECTION V, PART A - TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS FOR WATER SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION
This specific provision describes the technical requirements which are not contained in the Standard
Technical Specifications. It is basically the elaboration of 'NOrk items within the scope of work that forms
part of this Contract Spedfication.
3.1 General Requirement
a Mobilization I Demobilization
Mobilization shall indude transportation to the site of Contracto~s plant, materials, equipment,
employees, furnishings and temporary fadlities as defined in this Section.
Demol)lization shall indude dismantlement and removal from the site of Contractors plant,
materials and equipment and all temporary fadlities. Demobilization shall also include clean-up
of the site after completion of the Contra·ct Work as approved by the Engineer and transportation
from the site of Contractor's empoyees.
b. As Built Drawings
The Contractor shall be responsible for preparing the As-buill drawings of the Project.
These drawings shall indicate all approved cha(¥Jes from the detai~ shown on the original
drawings which were made during the course of construction, showing exact as-built location,
dimension and kinds of materials, equipment, accessories and other item of work. exposed
or concealed. Preparation of as-built drawings shall be done as soon as the corresponding
wor1< item has been completed. Corresponding as- built drawings approved by the Engineer
shall be submitted together with the Monthly Progress Payment Report (MPPR). Preparation
of As-Built Drawings and submission shall not be a separate pay item under the contract.
Cost shall be deemed induded in the General Requirements Part I, of the contract.
All as-buitt drawings shall be CAD generated drawir¥J on size A..J sheets and two (2) white prints
copies of each shall be attached to the MPPR. The original sheet and copy on AutoCAD Release
2008 CD-ROM shall be submitted before the final inspection and acceptance of the
Owner. Legends for the drawings shall be submll:ted for apprpval and acce~Xance of the Owner.
c. Material Testing
An independent testing laboratory will be nominated by the Contractor, which will be

approved by the Engineer. The approved laboratory shall undertake all tesiJng material of sample
required under the various Sections of this Specification. All tests shall be undertaken in the
project site unless otherv-1ise directed by the Engineer lhat a particular test be made in a
laboratory. The cost of all tests required in this Contlclct shall be borne by the Contractor, and shall
be deemed as included in the unit prices of contract except for hydrotesting of pipelines. For
pressure and leakage testing of pipes, refer to Clause 12- Pressure and Leakage Testing
and Disinfedi'lg.
d. Permits and Licenses
The procurement and payment of .:::11 excavation permits and other perrni!s necessary in the
projeet implementation shall be the rasponsibility of the Contractor as .specified ln C!ouse
6.8 - Penm1s and Ucenses. Cost of perrnits to be issued by the Local Government Units
(LGUs) and National Agencies such as the Department of Public Works and Highways
(DPWH) ::>!J<JII be di~:-J m;.;d n$ indud€·d in tile 'Jnit prices of every itBm i,l 'U1·3 umtr:~ct. No
s8p;:tmte l;<l}ment will be' (lu!d l'J ti12- Cuil!i'<il:tcr fc,r any permit ar'~ir.g frorn c:n>
1wud\ !~_8ms ~~~ lh8
(:CilliaCt.
SECTION V- PART B
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
e. Special Items
The Contractor shall provide insurance, bonds and interest. The Contractor shall also provide
Enginee~s office and temporary site facilities, provide and install project sign.
The bonds and interests shall be secured for the entire duration of construction in order to
safeguard the smooth implementation of \he contract. Cost of such insurance, bonds and
interest shall be deemed as included in the Contracto~s Overhead and Prnfrt of un~ prioe of every
~em of the contract.
Temporary Site Facilities, Project Organization and Resource Management:
1. Site Offices - All site offices shall be built at the Project work site as soon as the Contractor
mobilizes. These shall include the Contractor's and Enginee(s offices described as follom:
i. Contractor's Office - During the performance of the Contract, the Contractor shall
maintain a field office at the site of the 'NOrk at which he or his autholized agent shall be
present at all times while the work is in progress. Instructions from the Owner, or
his authorized representative, issued at his field office, shall be considered as having
been delivered to the Contractor. One copy of \he Contract Documents including the
drawing and specifications for the 'M)rk shall be kept at all times in said office, ready for
instant reference.
Whenever the Contractor is not at the site, orders may be given by the Engineer to, and
shall be aocepted and obeyed tJ.j, the Cont:rad.~s superintendent. provKied such orders are
within the authority vested in the Engineer as specified in Clause 3.2 Engineer's Authority.
The Contractor may, ho'Never, require that such orders be given in writing.
ii. Project Office - The Contractor shall provide a Project Office with ·a temporary
built space or separate rented office space as specified in the attached Appendix. The
said office shall be weatherproofed building separate from the Contractor's field office and
shall be provided with water, electricity, air-ronditioning, telephone and toilet facilities.
The office shall have a minimum ftoor area of approximately 60 square metres. The
door to the office shall be equipped with satisfactory lockset. All facilities and equipment
provided under this section shall be turned over Jo the OWner and will become his
property upon competion of the Contract.
The Contractor shall bear the operating expenses of the Project Office which shall
include water, power supply, telephone bills, building maintenance and insurance,
consumable and non-consumable offiCe supplies and computer and printer maintenance
until expiration of the original contract period. If ttie Contractor is not at fault and the
Contract time is extended, the Contractor may be required to continue paying all
the aforesaid operating expenses during the extended period until final accaptance of
the project. subject, however, to reimbursement by LWt.JNOM"'ef 0:1 an actual
expenditure basis.
The Contractor shall also provide/furnish the Project Office with furniture and
equipment as indicated and with minimum-specification stated herein:
1) Desk Tcp Computer
CPU
RAM
He1rcliS~\
v;.::eo ~... lemor~'/
VGA e<;i•J
110 Par:.;
~
I
SECTION V - PART B
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Keyboard
Mouse
Monitor
Multi-Media features
Sound card
Modem
CD ROM Drive
Speaker
Pre load softwafP
Accessories
3 - Power Cords
1 - Printer Cable
1 - Screeo Fi~er
Power Supply Unit
Computer shalf be provXfed VviD11 000 watts AVR (automatic vo~age regulator) and 60 VA
UPS (unintemJ!XOO power sum) units 'Mth capacity to support the computer and
monitor or a 600 VA UPS with built in AVR.
2) Desk Jet Colored Printer (A3)
Print Method
Print QuafJty
Print Speed
Dimension
We~ht
Memory
Media Handling
Media Type/Size
I
Desl<jet printer shall be provK!ed 'Mth installer and user's manual.
3) Digital Camera
CCDPixels
OpticaVDgttal Zoom
Lens
Focalle~h
Aperture
Focusirg Range
Shutter Speed
ISO Equivalent
Speed
Flash Range
Image Fermat
Su~ied ~s.soric.::.
4) CopyirQ t.."'achlne
CopySpee-.i
VV2.rm-up lim~
,_.
SECTION V - PART B
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Paper Capacity
Tray1
Bypass tray
Maximum Paper
Size
Media Type
Bypass tray
Tray 1
Copy Ratio
Zoom
4 Pre-set ratios
Dimensions
Weight
8edrical
Requirements
Powerconsumpjon
5) Facsimile Madline
Type
Communication
lines
Compati!)lity
Data Compression
Method
Transmission Time
Document Size
Document Feed
Document
Thid<ness
Effective
Scanning Vvidlh
Scanning Method
Effective Recording
Vvidlh
Recording Paper
size
Recording Method
Resolution
Horizontal
Vertical
Power Supply
Power ConsumJ:Ajcn
we;ght
Dimensions (w/o tei.)
Other Features
Convenient
Dialing
Transmission/
reception
Oihers
2. Water Supply, Povter and L~h!!ng, and Telephone
i. '.·'1<-ttGr Su~p:,, - r:-~r .-> ~1 <.. ~)Sf~l'Lic.ns r:;;quired in the exccuric.n (;!· illo ~·nn·~r;::ct the
CLmt.-actor ~k~H t::~ r.-:;;;,,·., .~ : t'!~ 1c;· providing nmple ;'.l~·l:'ll' :..nr:·i:r t~r.•.!~~.- :j i}J\:'::.::!J,T:
.. .,
t •:O
SECTION V- PART 8
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
sufficient for all construction purposes. For tile conduct of hydrotestlng on installed
pipes, the OWner shall fum ish, >Mtl1out charge, the volume of water required.
Should additional testing be necessary, the Contractor will be charged by the Owner for the
additional volume of water to be utilized at the existing rate of water per cubic metre during
construction, however, the Owner reserves the right to lim~. suspend, or terminate this
supply of water as set forth above should il consider such action to be detrimental to
the operation of the system. In this event, the Contractor shall obtain water from
other approved source at his 0\'JTl expense.
ii. iPower and Ughting - The Contractor shall make all necessary applications and
arrangements and pay all fees and charges for elertrical energy for power and light
necessary for the proper completion of this Contract during ~s entire progress. The
Contractor shall provide and pay for all temporary wiling, switches, connections, meters
and power bills.
There shall be sufficient electric lighting so that all work may be done in a workmanlike
manner when there is no sufficient daylight or during night work.
iii. Telephone and Communications- The Contractor shall make all necessary applications
and arrangements and pay all fees, and charges for telephone and communications un~s
necessary for the coordination between site, the head office, the project management
office, and others. The Contractor shall provide and pay for all connedion requirements
and telephone bills.
3. Project Signs I COA Sign Board- The Contractor shall furnish, erect and maintain a minimum of
five (5) Project Signs and one (1) COA Sign Board in accordance with the Standard
Drawings. The location for the erection of these signs by the Contractor shall be as directed by
LWUf.1.K>Mler:
4. Procurement of Project Vehicles- The Contractor shall fum ish at the site of the project one
(1) unit of two (2)-wheel drive general purpose vehicle. The general-purpose service
vehicle shall be used throughout the duration of the contract, and shall be made available
within one (1) month from the date of receipt by the Contractor of the Notice to Proceed.
The service vehide shall be handed over to the OWner upbn completion of the Project. The
Contractor shall be responsible for the costs of LTO registration, comprehensive
insurance, and the maintenance of the vehicle during the entire duration of the contract.
Quantity One (1) unit

Model Double Cab Pick-up 2 WD
DIMENSIONS .A!'ID I!IJ8GHTS
Overall length not less lh<'ln 4000 mm

Overall width not less than "1600 mm
Overall height not more than 181 o mm
Wheel base not less than 21300 mm
Ground cleamr•.: e not less than 210 mm
Curb weight not more than 1!.>50 l<g
Gwss vGhicle v. t;:qh~ not more tilan 2GOO !qJ
4 \".y1;.1cJt:r i:·, line Ol ·lV

r ·:z.k rl Di~ pi ~c~ 'r;;:·i~ l 110 t !<:'3::> \hf:n 3000 ·:~:
!,{.._ i •) <md Gtrc..:I.J r;J t le:>::; Ulan 80.0 ;\ 83.0 ;n,n
·, ;
SECTION V - PART B
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Max. Horsepower (SAE net) not less tllan 60/40 kw

Max. Torque (SAE net) not less than 180 /2400 N-m
Fuel System direct type fuel injection
CHASSIS
Suspension Rigid axle, leaf springs

Front Rigid axle, leaf springs
Rear Discs/Drums
Brakes, front/rear Ball-nut
Steering 5 .6 m
Min. turning radius (tires) Not less than 60 liters
OTHER ACCESSORIES
Air Conditioning unit

Car Stereo with Am/FM Radio
Anti-rust warranty (at least 3 years)
Spare tire with rim
Manufacturer's Standard tool set including wrenches and jack w/ handle
Set cover
Floor mat
3.2 Provisions to be Added to Clause 7- Earthwork
a. Banicades and Warning Ughts
The Contractor shall ,:rovide and maintain one hundred (1 00) unns of banicades at any time, spaced
every ten (1 0) metres of the total length of the pipe laying activities and ten (1 O) units of battery
powered blinking warning lights. These will serve as warning signs to ensure the safety of the
motorists and pedestrians during day and night pipelaying activities. The said number of units of
barricades and warning lights shall be turned over to the Owner after the completion of the
Project.
b. Steel Plates
The Contractor shall provide/maintain twenty (20) pieces of steel plates with dimensions
of 16 mm - 1.219 x 2.438 metres and with the ASTM A3 6 material specifications. These
steel plates will be used to cover the trenches and to ensure the safety of the motorists
and pedestrians during pipe laying activities. The said f1umber of pieces shatl be turned
over to the Owner after the completion of the Project.
c. Site Work
1. Scope - Furnish all plant, labor. equipment, materials and perfo1m all operations in connection
'Nith demolition, dealing and grubting, earthwork, sand ard gravel bedding for the construction of
Wcrter Su~ System, in strict aa:orda~ v,;tt, this section or the Specincations <md the
applicable contract Draw.~. su~ed to the terms arx:l cond'rtion ofthc cor.lr2d.
:?.. Ar.picatle Documents - The foltvAr.g ~p:;cifications ~rd St.sr.c:mls mfc:rred to hBre1nr1fter by
baf>ic design<J!ion shall for:n part of the fpe<;ifK;.ations to U;e extent rw,~..<u-t:;d by me ;2fetencJ
U1erBto.
f\rr;eri~n A&>ociaho1~ of Glate Hgi·;','iclY c-,nc\ Transport Gll\d:!.&(Mf-HYO)
.....·
-;
SECTION V- PART B
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
T147-70 - The field determination of Density of SO!l in Place, American Society of Testing and
Materials (ASTM) C3&-84 Sieve analysis offine and course aggrBdated
3. Clearing and Grubbing
Clearing - All areas within which structure or related construction has to be

aa:omrAished shall be deared of matted roots, trees, brush, snags, vegetation, rubbish,
spoils, and other objectionable matteJS. All combustible materials from clearing
operation shall be removed from site of work and disposed of as directed by the
Engineer.
ii. Grubbbing- Grubbing shall consist of the removal of tree stumps, forest growth, brush
and rubbish from the work areas to be occupied by permanent structures and from
other areas within the indicated dearing limits as directed by the Engineer.
1) Trees and Shrubs to be retained shall be protected proper1y from damage,

2) Stumps shall be removed entirely. Roots and matted roots shall be grubbed out to
at least 150 mm below the existing StJ"fcrn
d. Trench Excavation for Pipeline Work
1. No excavation for any section of pipeline installation shall be performed by the Contractor
unless pipe, valves, fittings, seNice materials, and all other materials including sheet piles
necessary to complete the installation are deflvered to the site.
2. Double trench excavation when required shall be done in accordance with the typical
drawings. Trench bottom shall be compacted and tested up to 95% compaction. Payment
shall be as per separate pipe laying works but no payment for over-excavation shall be
allowed if no deviation from the standard drawings for double trench.
3. Any deviation from the standard or required trench excavation shall be treated as over-
excavation and shall be measured and paid forasiooicated in the ti:i ttems.
e. Backfill Materials for Pipe Trenches
1. Native Bar.l<fill- Native m<Jterials (except clay, sm, muck) that are free from grass, roots, or
other vegetation, boulders or rock pieces having maximum dimension less than 75 mm may
be used as native backfill. For alleys and roads not subject to traffic load, excavated
materials may be used as backflllir)Q materials above pipe zone provided it is propeny
tamped to attain approximately 90% compaction.
2. Imported Backfill- Any earth material (except clay,si~. muck) and satisfying the specification
for native backfill may be used to replace unsuitable material. If excavated material from
trench excavation is not suitable for backfill as mentioned in Item!, imported or borrow
materials from approved source shall be used; and the corresponding cost shall be pald
according to the Bill of Quantities.
3. Sand BE<:!ding- sand bedding unless, otherwise specified. shal! be borrowed material, the
cost of which is included in the unit cost of pipelflying and \vilh minimum chmacteli~iics
5peclne<l herein. In case selected bedding material from ttenc.f"1 is S1Jit8ble, con·esponding
co~t st1<1ll be d€clucted from the cost ot pipelayir>;J.
Mate1ial t11at is free of organic matter, does not contain stone or rock fragments larger than 10-
mm in greatest climensiong nnd is non-cohesive srall be user: e~s se!ected s~ndy mate1ial.
Noi mGrc: !hfln 50% of i11e mate1ial shnil pa~o:; !lw No. 2~,0 siev8 (O.o·r~J mm). ·rnr-J
{, 1-Cit~Jil<~ l :)l~~ II ienu ii:~("ff to ens·~ of compm:ti (Hl .:1n'J s:-:<' :J be: !)lace-d ,:,t fl · llC,L:-it<f:.;
( c:ntr:~i 1t <wpm<HJiir;~l iiB c!,i;mum ii:'l" (f)rr,paction.
SECTION V- PART B
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
f. Dewatering
1. General - The contractor shall provide all labor, materials & equipment necessary for
dewatering. It shall have on hand, at all times, suffident pumping equipment and machinery
in good working condition and shall have available, at all times, competent mrkmen for
the operation of the !XJmping equipment. Adequate standby equipment shall be kept available
at all times to ensure effident dewatering operation and maintenance during power failure.
Dewatering for structures and pipelines shall corrmence when groundwater is first
encountered, and shall be continuous until sudl times as water can be allowed to rise and the
work situation so permits.
At all times, site grading shall promote drainage. Surface runoff shall be diverted from
excavations. Water entering the excavation from surface runoff shall be collected in
shallow ditches around the perimeter of the excavation, ctained to sumps, and be pumped or
drained by gravity from the excavation to maintain a lxlttom free from standing water.
Devvatering shall, at all times, be coooucted in sudl a manner as to preserve the undisturbed
bearing capacity of the sub;)rade soils at j:rop()sed bcttcrn ctexravat:i0!1.
If foundation soils are disturbed or loosened by the upward seepage of water or an

uncontrolled flow of water, the affected areas shall be excavated and replaced with drain
rock at no additional oost to the Owner. ·
The Contractor shall maintain the water level below the bottom of excavation in all mr1< areas
where grourrlwateroccursduri~ excavation, cooslruction, backfimng, and up to aocejXance.
Flotation shall be prevented by the Contractor by maintaining a positive and continuous removal
of water. The Contractor shall be fully responsi~ and lialje for all damages, whim may resu~
from failure to adequately keep e<cav<iions dewatered.
If well points or wells are used, they shall be adequately spaced to provide the necessary
dewatering and shall be sand packed and'or oltler means used to prevent pumping of fine sands
or si~ from the subsurface. A continual check by the Contractor shall be maintained to
ensure that the subsurface soil is not being removed by the dewatering operation.
The Con1rndor shall dispose of water from the Vlfof1< in a ~ manner without damage to
adjacent property. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining any permits that may
be necessary to dispose of water. No water shall be drained into work built or under
oonstruction without prior consent of the Engineer. Wat.er shall be filtered using an approved
method to remove sand and fin&sized SOil particles before disposal into any drainage system.
The release of groun<:Jv..tater to its static level shall be performed in such n manner as to
maintain the undisturbed state of the natural foundation soils, prevent disturbance of
compacted backfill and prevent flotation or movement of structures, ppelines, and SC"M:)IS.
2. Equip11ent - [)evrcrtering, where required, may include the use of well points, sump pumps,
temporary pipelines for water disposal, rock or gravel P,acement, and other means. Standby
::umpng equiJX118nl shall be maintained on the job site.
3.3 :)rolJi:::ons to be Added to Clause 8- Reinforced Concrete
a. ConsiJlleiion Joints in Concrete Wor1<s
t , ~': li')ll!CiiGn joint is d8fir.ed ns n joint in the concrct8 intre<ll!C("CJ ·!'or r:onvGnier.ce in ('•;nsl.rur:;llnn
~.·. ~ 1i 1 h':.l~ ~·r;n-::ial maa.sur03 arc ta!{~;n to ac11:eve sui:·sGqu:;r.t onllnulty '.'Jl!hout l~ro-.Ji!:!on fer T Y
1._;t,~•:u n:c>Vc!'nenl
SECTION V- PART B
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval, as soon as practicable after the
commencement of lhe Work and not less than three weeks before the commencement of
concreting, shop drawings showing his proposals for placing concrete on which the position
and fo1111 of all construrnonj(Jjnts and lifts shall he shown. No concreting shall be started until the
Engineer has approved the method of placing, the positions and form of the construction joints
and the lifts. The constnJctjon joints shall be so located as not to impair the strength of the structure.
Rebates, keys or notches shall be fanned, and waterstops may be used, at the Contractor's
own cost, when deemed neoessary or required by the Engineer to complete the water tightness at
the j(Jjnts. The position of construction joints and size of fonnwork panels shall be so
coordinated that, where possible, the line of any construction joint lines and fo1111work j(Jjnts, and
purposely inclined j(Jjnts, shall foon a uniform joint with a batten of approved dimensions to give
a straight and neat joint Rne.
Concrete placed to fo1111 the face of a construction joint shall have all la~anoe removed and the
aggregate exposed J)iorto the padng of f~h concrete. Form retarder may be used to achieve
easy removal of the surface concrete wHh the prior approval of the Engineer. The laitanoe
shall, wherever practicable, be removed by spraying the concrete surface with water und er
pressure and brushing while it is still green. While the concrete is still green, the whole of the
concrete surface fanning part of the joint shall be hacked to expose the aggregate. Where
aggregate is damaged during hacking, it shall be removed from the concrete face by further
hacking. All loose matter shall be removed and the exposed surface thoroughly deaned by
the brushing, air blasting or washing, and the surface to which the fresh concrete is applied shall
be dean and damp. Thereafter, fi"esh concrete may be placed as desaibed in Clause 8.15- Order of
Placing Concrete.
Construction joint shall generally be located as follO'NS:
Columns : Joints in columns shall be made at the underside of floor members and at floor
levels. Haunches and column capitals shall be considered as part of and
continuous \'M the fioor or roof.
Floors Joints in the system for an area of more than six hundred square metres (600
m2) shall be located at or near the middle of the.spans in slab, beams or girders,
unless othe!wise instructed. For system less than slx hundred square metres (600
m\ flooring joints shall nat be allowed.
Walls· Vertical joints shall be away from comer. Hortzontaljointsshall be above

splays or openings.
Large slabs shall be constructed in a checkerboard pattern not larger than 20m of the longest
edge, with aHemate bays concreted, and adjacent sections being concreted after a period agreed
by the Engineer.
b. Provisions to be Added to Clause 10- Piping
The contractor shall furnish all labor, materials equipment and perform all operation in
connection with the reinforced concrete encasement, to complete the work, in strict accordance
with the applicable requirement e:f Clause 8- Reinforced Concrete.
Compressive strength for anr.h·)r or thm5t blocks ancl concrete encasement for pipe shall llnve
a minimliln 28·day cornpres~w sirenglh of 13:/8 MPa (2000 psi) unless olh€1Wise shown.
SECTION V- PART B
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3.4 Provisions to be Added to Clause 10- Piping
a Examination of Pipes
Shortly before laying or fixing any valve, pipe or fitting, the Contractor shall, in the presence of
the Engineer, carefully examine each to ascertain damage or defect occasioned during
loading, handling and transportation, subsequent delivery and acx:eptanoe by the Contractor as
being in sound condition. All damage and all defects revealed by this examination should be
repaired and remedied to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall give the Engineer not less than 4~ hours notioef to examine any pipes,
valves and fittings. The Contractor shaH not proceed to install such pipes, valves and fittings
until those have been approved as tree from damage and defects by the Engineer.
All pipes and fittings, which are severely dented or similar1y damaged, shall be discarded
unless, in the opinion of the Engineer, a portion of such pipe or fitting may usefully be salvaged, in
which case the contractor may cut off and discard the damaged portion only.
All pipes and fittings which are found to be cracked orwhidl have any defect whidl, in the opinion of
the Engineer, adversely affects their suitability for Incorporation in the Work shall be discarded.
All damaged ends shall be rut off well beyond the damaged area and machined true.
b. Cutting of Pipes
All pipe materials shall be cut according to directions obtained from the manufacturer. The
Contractor shall be solely responsible for the provision of all equipment necessary for cutting and
tuming pipes. For steel pipes, see prcMsions in Clause 10- Piping.
c, Pipe Laying
Laying of pipes shall be executed in conformity with applicable standards and pipe
manufacturers instructions.
.
The same care which was exercised during the loading, shipment, unloading and stringing of the
pipe should be taken during the actual laying of the pipe In !\5 1inal position.
Pipe covers. wooden disks and other transit protections fixed by the ppe and other
manufacturers shall be retained in piace until the pipes are inspected shortly before they are laid.
When pipes are strung adjacent to the pipe trench pfior to laying, they shall be supported clear
of the ground on suitable approved supports to prevent any damage to the pipes or to external
coating, and gaps shall be left at intervals and at well defined tracks and roads to perrntt the free
passage of livestoc.'<, veh:des and persoos.
Steel pipe can be assembled in the trench or assembled above the trench and lowered into it by
rne.:~ns of a series of differential dlain hoists or similar equipment. The total pemnissible length of
pre-assern~ed pipelines shatl be lim~ed up to four (4) segments.
d. Jointing
1. fl/.echanical Coup:~- Ends to be joined by mechonical GOIIplings ::=hall be plain and

type in accordance with the governing standard. In addition, the welds on ends to be
jcined by coupH:~qs without pipe stops shall be ground flush L'J r,1;mit ~~lipplnCJ the
coupling in at le.o,,:.t one dir·'3ction to clear the pipe joint. Outs:de <llr!mcicr nncl od· of. round
tolerances sh~ll be wil11in limits :;pecified hy th\:! roupling manul<:.c\tuE.r.
SECTION V- PART B
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
The middle ring of each mechanical coupling shall have a thickness at least equal to that
specified for the size of pipe on which the coupling is to be used and shall not be less than 175
mm long. The pipe stop shall be omitted from the inner surface of the middle rings of
couplings installed in structures and at other locations where the couplings are used for
closures or union connections are required. .
The couplings shall be deaned and shop primed with the manufacture(s standard rust
inhibitive primer.
Mechanical coupings shall be carefully installed in accordance with the manufacture~s

recommendations. Pipv ends shall be dean and smooth. A space of at least 6 mm and not
more than 25 mm shall be left between the ppe ends.
2. Ranged Joints- Ends to be fitted with slip-on flanges shall have the long~udinal or spiral welds
ground flush to accommodate the type of flanges provided.
Flange faces shall be normal to the pipe axis with a maximum tolerance of 0.40 mmlm of
flange diameter. Angular deflection (or layback) of the flange face shall not exceed 0.75
degrees from a plane st~rface and shall be uniform, within 025 mm. All flanges, after welding to
the pipe, shall be measured and shall be refaced , if necessary, to bring them within the
specified tderanres.
The Contractor shall coordinate dimensions and drillings of flanges furnished with the
flanges for the valves and other equipment to be installed in the pipng.
Blind flanges shall conform in diameter, drilling and thickness to the flanges to which they
attach and shall be reinforced as required to produce a watertight joint under the specified
test pressure.
Flanges shall be of the slip-on type, except that welding-neck or slip-on fl anges welded to
short lengths of pipe shall be used where installation of flanges in the fi eld is permitted
or required.
All bolts and nuts shall be of low carbon steel, hot-dip galvanized. Pipe shall extend
completely through screwed-on flanges. The pipe end and flange faoe shall be machine
finished in a single operation . Flange faces shall be -flat ·and J3erpendicular to the ppe
centertine.
When bolting flanged joints, care shall be taken to avoid restraint on the opposite end of
the pipe or fitting 'Ntlich would prevent uniform gasket oompression or which would cause
unnecessary stress in the flanges. One flange shall be free to move in any direction while
the flange bolts are being tightened. Bolts shall be tightened gradually and at a uniform
rate, so that gasket compression is uniform. For ductile iron, flange dimensions sha:l follow
ISO 7005 and 7005.2.
3. Push on Joints - The pipe manufacture(s instructions and recommendations for proper jointing
operations shall be followed. All joint surfaces shall be lubricated with approved jointing
sc~l11ion immediately ~fore the joint is completed. Lubricant .sha ll be suitClble for use ill
pe:table water, shall be ~t·)re<J in closed oontCliners cmd shall be kc()t clean. Each spigot end
shCIH be suitable beveled !O f<'idlilate e1ssembly of pipe ends far restmined joint. Joints :c;ha!i
Cll!c.v ~ maximum ~milSS:rJe defleaion of tilre~ ci6~Jrees (3.) for a ripe dinme1er of xO rnm
and above and four degrees (4') for pipe diameters of 200 and 300 mm.
a. Pi}W L.ayir.g in Roads
Q;_,t:'lr~co::. f,nm cen!~rtine of Pl!~".lirP tn r.:::.r.le!lir..?. cf U12 rr'-"'ci·.v~w> <>··~ ~~r•:'J·f!l in thfl mad ~·E~onr;
l.ms8d on llle 6S!irnaled dearar;Ct.S to obstructions. -, i1ese <Jrstances are for the guidance of
SECTION V- PART 8
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
the Contractor during construction. However, actual field condnions shall be considered by
the Contractor and in cases where distances-out from roadway centerline are not properly
shown in the road sections, or in cases of ambiguity, the following criteria shall be used as
guide in detennining the exact location of the pipeline to be laid:
1. The line should, as much as possible, not pass through existing obstructions that are
permanent or semi-pennanent in nature, such as paved arcaded sidewalks; drainage
manholes, dndles and electric line posts are considered temporary structures since these can
be relocated.
2. Future line of storm drainage pipelines are to be laid on the side of the road opposite that side
on which the domestic water supply lines are laid.
3. Future sannary sewer lines are to be laid along the centerline of the road.
4. Minimum cost of replacement of e>dsting roadway pavements to be destroyed to accommodate

the water supply pipelines.
5. Future widening of roa<fv.tay pavement.
6. Pipelines may be laid over or under existing sanitary or drainage lines.
7. Minimum cost of water supply pipeline laying especially with regard to minimizing the number
oftittings to be used.
Specific solutions to problems relative to the above-mentioned guidelines shaH be referred to

the Engineer for approval before actual trench excavation is commenced by the Contractor.
The fines of trenches shall be staked out at least one week before scheduled start of
excavation work
The Owner reserves the right to order changes in alignment to avoid interference with existing
obstructions and to minimize Ule nec:essJty of destroyirYJ existing pavement.
Wtere it is not aii<Nr'ed by the concerned agency O.e. DPWI-I) to undertake pavement breakirYJ and
excavation for ppe trendles aloJYJ or across major roads,.the contractor shall employ alternative
methods oL frenc:hless pipOO.yiJYJ. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the proposed
trenchless methodology induding source of technology and other relevant informations for approval.
The Contractor shall n<X proreed YrM the works >Mthout the approval of the Engineer.
f. Cross Connection
1. On Proposed Mains - The Contractor shall install new cross connections on new water
m<~ins. The installation shal! be as directed by the CMner, ard in acmrdance>Mth ~an.
All wor1< included in this sedion shaH be in accordance with the specifications and standard
d1<1Wngs and payment shall be ma:le under separae uM pice ttl ttems listed in the Bid Form
2.. On Existing Mans- The Con!ractor shall verify the location, size, depth and type of all existing
mn!ns to be retained ard connected to the proposed pipelines prior to ordering materials for the
in~crconnection. lnfomtation regarding existing water mains, as shc~vn in the plans, is based en
r-:.-~:.;Ung records and the <NmE-r assumes no responsibility for 8cauncy of such information or
<Ill'/ additional cost incurred by tile Contractor as a resu~ of sum inaccurate information.
r: -:r{omtmy &xc.avation to dE-termine unclergrounrJ nb~n!c:Uon <1r.d E:)/jsung mains to l:;e

;I ·. HC(•tlli:::c~Ed ~1a:1
t;e don;;> ahead of plpe!trn< c.:.i.:,,.>l'.iillwn so Hmt H1e needed ci1nnges iii
::'' ::t:lCJ can bG EJected. In cs~es wiwi';:; n~;;,, :·,~,.~~~ ;;: .·1ro t•:; r:o !:.1ld ~xijscent to tile e;<islli·.:J
..
SECTION V - PART B
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
pipes, the OM1er reserves the right to salvage such exislirYJ mains. The Contractor shall arrange
his work so that the OMler may reoover the ppes to be satvag€d.
The Contractor shall at an times c.orduct his operation so as to interfere as little as possible with
existing water distribution fadlities. Work that is likely to interfere with existing fadlities shall be
pugrammed in oooperation ~ the E[YJineer. No area shall be deprived of water for more than
24 hours. The Contractor snail provide at no cost to the Owner all temporaty valves, bulkheads,
interconnections and sidelining necessary to meet the requirements of this section. Before
starting work which will intooere \Wh existi[YJ facirties, the Contractor shan do all preparatory work
and shall see that all tools, materials and equipment are re<ldy and on hand.
Some sleeve joints shall be required for the connections between existing and proposed
networks. Immediately after mobilization, and within two (2) months after Notice to
Proceed, the Contractor shall inspect all the existing pipes at the location where such
connections have to be installed.
The Contractor shalf measure the actual outside diameter of the existing ppes and submit
these figures for the approval of the Engineer before the final order is placed.
The Contractor shall conduct interconnections with e)Qsting mains in such a manner as to
minimize the period of interruption in the water service. Work shall be coordinated such
that no water interruption shall be experienced by an area for more than 24 hours. Prior to
connection work, the Contractor shall notify the Owner and the Engineer of such pian so
that necessary notices to the consuming public can be made. Interconnection work cannot
be made unless there is an approval by the Engineer. Maximum sanltaty precautions shall
be implemented by the Contractor during interconnection work, so as to avoid any health
hazard that may be predpitated by such 'NOfk.
The Contractor shall furnish all pipes and frttings, equiJ:ment and materials necessary to
connect the proposed feeder mains to the existing mains; disconnect existing mains
constructed under this Contract at the location shown on the Drawings in accordance with the
requirements of these Specifications and/or of the Engineer.
All cut-ins and connections shall be done with proper tools and equipment. Whenever
tapping or cutting of pipe is required, it shall be done With a tapping or cutting machine
designed for the specific purpose. Before proceeding to nrat<ing·the cat-in or connections,
all tools, equipment and materials necessary shall be ready on hand and the cut-ins and/or
connections done with least inconvenience to the consumers.
The Owner will forward to the Contractor as soon as possible, the list of connections to
be installed under the Contract with full information on their type and locaUon.
g. Anchor Blocks I Thrust Blocks
Anchor blocks or thrust blocks shall be provided at strategic points to prevent unnecessary
movement during occurrence of transient pressures along the pipeline. These blocks shall
be located in accordance with the drawings or as directed by \he Engineer either for steel, c.ast or
ductile !ron and PVC pipe.
h. nestmined Joints
Restrained joints for ductile iron or cast iron pipes shall be installed in accordance with
~~-:;o 10804.. '1 or with t11e stnndarfJ recommemle<l by ll1e manufacturer. The use or
1 :1stra!ned or anchored joint is to avoid the construction of rone:reto ::mchor blocks nt ee1cl1
~.';' nd or d8viation of tr.e pipe. exposed ductile or '~<l~l iron pipr.s s11all be mstmin:-:d cr
r·::v:llc-rc:.d unless the pipe h ~no'lorcd on til:; .:U!)iXIt by rn~!<.1i::c !rtr.:lp er c.lRrnp.
SECTION V- PART B
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Some section of the main transmission pipes proposed with Cl or Dl pipes will be restrained
and will have to comply with the fobM~:
unrestrained ppes, restrained ppes and tittings will come from the same manufacturer
Restraining devices, using a W"elded bead will not be acx:epted. Pipes designed for
restrained joints may also be used for unrestrained jointing using the same gaskets.
The maximum operating pressure for au diameters of restrained !)pes will be 16 bars or higher.
i. Existing Pipes on the Proposed Pipeline Route
1. The Contractor shall be aware that some pcrtion of the proposed pipe will be laid
underneath the existing distribution pipelines. The Contractor shall therefore take extra
precautions not to damage the 8):]sting ppes.
Test p~ for every 500 m shall be conducted prior to start of excavation in order to verffy the
exact de~ and location of the emng pipes.
During excavation, extra care shall be undertaken and temporary ppe support shall be
placed to the existing ppes,to reach the required grade elevation.
2. During back1illing, wtlen the backfill reaches the level of the existing pipe, the temporary
pipe support shall be removed so that the required rompadion ~II be otxained.
j. Oismantling and ReconnectiOn
All defective service connections connected to existing water mains, which are not to be
replaced or to be abandoned, shall be dismantled by removing the corporation cod<. and closing
the hole in pipe walls by a repair saddle clamp. The service connection shall then be
reconnected to the new mains as spedfied in the drawirgs.
k. Evaluation of Leakage and Replacement
The Contractor shall excavate all identified leakage to be. evaluated by the Owner and/or the
Engineer whether or not replacement is necessary. Only ttJose proposed identified or dilapidated
or heavily damaged shal! be replaced. Salvage of replaced materials shall be given to the Water
District.
3.5 Provisions to be Added to Clause 12-Pressure and Leakage Testing and Disinfecting
a. Pipeline Hydrotesting
At any timo, the length of unhydrutested in.c:talled pipelines shall not exceed 500 m. No further
pipelaying shall be allowed if this pro,ision is mt teiOJ complied with.
In heavily traveled roads/streets, hydrotesting should be done within 15 days after plpelaying .
No further pipelaying shall be allowed in these roads/streets if previous installations were not
11ydrot~ed.
~tG rrovisions to beAcJded to Clause 14-?a.infng an< I Coating
Grouncl Reservc:rs shsll be P3inted C?ccording to tile dr2'11ings or as dimctcd hereinafter. n·,ecost
of painting for Grourd Reservoir shall be paid ax ording to the bid items indi~tcd in the bio form.
Cc;ior shall be uS apprc.-w tiJ the 0n r.or
SECTION V- PART B
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
a. Exterior walls to be backfilled
TVV'O (2) coats of 15 mil. Each, Koppers Bitumastic No. 50

ColdapPied Or af)froved equivalent
Coal tar enamel
b Exposed exterior walls

-·-
Twoooats Dutdl Boy_55~ or
Concrete Sherwin WiSams A25WXJ
Mansory Paint - Or approved equivalent
3.7 Provisions to be Added to Clause 17- EJect:ro..Mechanical Works
Variable Speed Booster Pumping System
a. General
1-
1. The Contractor shall furnish materials, equipment and labor to install and test the
pumping system complete with the pumps, motors, mounting bases, piping, valves,
variable frequency drives, and appurtenance as indicated on the contract dr~wings
and as herein specified. ·
2. The Contractor shall insure that the variable frequen cy drives, pumps and motors are
properly installed.
3. To assure a properly integrated and compatible system, an equipment descrtbed In

this section shall be furnished by the Pump manufacturer who shall have a minimum
of fifteen years experience in electronic variable speed pumping systems; a service
representative shall be present at the job site during installation, and who shall
assume full responsibility for the proper operation of the system.
4 . The Contractor shall arrange for the Pump Manufacturer to provide a factory trained
representative as required for the purpose of super-Vising installation, startup, final
field acceptance testing, and providing instruction to the owner's operating-personnel
on the proper operation and maintenance of the equipment in this section. The
variable frequency drives, pumps and motors shall be wa rranted against defects in
materials and workmanship for a period of three yea rs from date of installation and
commissioning.
b. Reference Standards
Tl1e work in this section is subject to the requirements of applicable portions of the
following standards:
1. Hydraulic Institute Standards

2. IE!::E Standards
3. NEMA Standards
4 . NAtional Electric Code
~). G3H;.\ Rules and Regulatiof1s
c. G~noral Description
"(i'::· '/8riOlJI8 frequency drive rallnpi n:,J ~:y::t ~ m Sil ?:i •: ·· .~:·.j ,( C;- ;.; rn ~S! 8f r.ontro! r :. n01.
~:'3 ; ·. ~: \ r/tu.n smitl.sr.:;, v::,ri <lb!e fn:.quen•.y ~Jn'., ~r; for G<l .: l ~ .~ .. .~ ~; <·,r, ~l !;,,:r!•) <', :·,:un c::rtl c! <::!~, ·;
SECTION V- PART 8
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
motors, and centrifugal pumps. The variable frequency d rive pumping system shall be
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ or pre-approved equal.
Variable Frequency Drive
Each variable frequency drive shall convert 3-phase 60-hertz utility power to variable
voltage and frequency 3 phase, AC power for stepless motor control.
The VFD shall be a UL listed quiet operating pulse with modulated

design utilizing power semi-conductors. The VFD shall utilize fully digital microprocessor
based nux vector switching techniques for acoustically quiet motor operation. The VFD
and its options shall comply with the applicable requirements of IEEE-519, FCC-Part 15
Subpart J and the N.E.C.
The VFD, together with all options and modifications. shall mount within a standard
NEMA 1 enclosure suitable for continuous operation in an ambient temperature of zero
degrees centigrade (0°C) to forty degrees centigrade (40°C), an altitude of up to 3300
feet above sea level, and humidity of 0 to 95% non condensing.
The VFD enclosure shall be front access with top or bottom cable entry. The VFD shall
be of modularized construction for ease of troubleshooting and accessibility. All high
voltage components within the enclosure shall be isolated.
The VFD shall be rated for the HP, full-load amperes, and RPM of the motor, and shall
be designed to provide continuous speed adjustment of three phase motors. The
variable frequency output voltage shall provide constant volts-per-hertz excitation to the
motor terminals up to 60 hertz.
The VFD shall have the following independent adjustments via keypad. Keypad security
shall be available to prohibit unauthorized data entry:
1) Acceleration 0.1 - 360 seconds (selectable)

2) Deceleration 0.1 - 360 seconds (selectable)
3) Minimum speed
4) Maximum speed
5) Current Limit
6) Overfrequency limit
7) Programmable electronic motor overload
8) Volts/He11z
The VFD shall have the following standard protective features:
1. The VFD shall shut down should any of the following faults occur and read out a
digital display:
i. Over-temperature
ii. Motor Overload
iii. Hig h DC buss voltage
iv . H i~ h motor cur(ent
v. Motor ground
vi. Function losf.
vii. Low DC buss voltage
SECTION V- PART B
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
4. Line-to-line and line-t~round output short circuit protection running and starting
5. Programmable auto restart (number of restart attempts and time interval between
resets are selectable). Settings shall be selected via the command center keypad.
6. The VFD shall be provided with the following installed modifications:
Input disconnect shall provide a positive disconnect between the controller and all
phases of the incoming AC line. The disconnect shall be designed to mount Inside the
controller enclosure and include a mounting bracket and through the door interlocking
handle with provisions for padlocking.
Isolated Process Control Interface shall enable the VFD to follow a 0-20ma. 4-20ma, 0-
1OVD-C and frequency pulse (isolated or non-isolated) signal.
A parameter unit to calibrate and monitor internal function.

In manual mode, the VFD shall follow a manual speed reference selected via keypad. In
automatic mode, the VFD shall receive and follow a signal from - - - - - -
microprocessor controller for full range operation.
Motors
Energy efficient motors are to be provided with the following basic features:
(a) All motors shall conform to the latest applicable requirements of NEMA, IEEE, ANSI,
and NEC standards.
(b) Motors shall be designed for continuous duty operation, NEMA, Design B with a 1.15
S.F.
(c) Motors are to be furnished with class "'P insulation.
(d) Stainless steel nameplates with:
(1) NEMA efficiency index nominal efficiency (MGI-12-536)
(2) AFBMA bearing numbers
(3) Lubrication instructions
d. Testing
The pump manufacturer shall be capable of providing certified testing of drives, motors,
and pumps prior to shipment.
..·.\

LWUA Vol2. Reformat PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

LWUA Vol2. Reformat PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

LWUA

NOV I MBI R 2009

PART A- STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

PART B- SPECIAL PROVISIONS

PART A- STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR

WATER SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION

1. DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS ..................................••............................ 1-1

1.1 Owner .................................................................... ... ........................... .. 1-1

2. SPECIFICATIONS, DRAWINGS AND RELATED DATA .................................... . 2-1

2 .1 Specifications. Drawings and Discre pancies ............................................ 2-1

3. ADMINISTRA TION-ENGINEER..OWNER-CONTRACTOR RELATIONS ............ . 3-1

3.1 Administra tio n's Authority ...................... ......... .. ...................................... 3-1 ~· ·- ·-

3.2 Engineer's Authority ................................................................................. 3-1

4. MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP ...... ........................................................... .. 4-1

4.1 Safeguarding of Equipment, Materials and Work...................................... 4-1

5. PROGRESS AND PAYMENT .............................................................................. 5-1

5.1 Variation Orders and Change Orders....................................................... 5-1

6. BONDS, INSURANCE, LEGAL RESPONSIBILITY AND PUBLIC SAFETY ........ 6-1

7. EARTHWORK ..................................................................................................... 7-1

7.1 General ..... 00 ............... oo ...... oo.oo .............. ................................................ . 7-1

8. REINFORCED CONCRETE ................................................................................. 8-1

8.1 Work Included............................................. .................. ........................... 8-1

9. STEEL AND MISCELLANEOUS METAL WORKS .............................................. 9-1

9.1 General................................................................................................... 9-1

10. PIPING ................................................................................................................ 10-1

10.1 General ................................................................................................... 10-1

10.19 Steel Casing................................ ............................................................ 10-39

11. VALVES ............................................................................................................. . 11-1

11 .1 General .................................................................. ............................... . 11-1

12. PRESSURE AND LEAKAGE TESTING AND DISINFECTING ........................... .. 12-1

12.1 General ......................................... .............................. ............................ 12-1

13. SURFACE RESTORATION AND PAVING .......................................................... 13-1

13.1 General ................................................................ ...... ......... .............. ..... 13-1

14. PAINTING AND COATINGS................................................................................ 14-1

14.1 General ................................................................... ~............................. .. 14-1

'IG. SECURITY FENCING .......................................................................................... 15-1

15.1 General .................................................................................................. 15-1

16. FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM ............................................................................. 16-1

16.1 General................................................................................... .... ..... ....... 16-1

17. ELECTRO-MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT ............................................................ . 17-1

17.1 General................................................................................................... 17-1

18. WATER METERS ............................................................................................... . 18-1

18.1 General ........... ...................................... .............................. ................ .... 18-1

19. CONCRETE MASONRY ...................................................................................... 19-1

19.1 Scope ofWork........................................................................................ . 19-1

20. CARPENTRY AND JOINERY....................................;.. ,.................................... .. 20-1

20.1 Scope ofWorl<.................... ..................................................................... 20-1

21. DOORS-WINDOWS-GLAZING............................................................................ 21-1

21.1 Scope ofWork........................................................... .............................. 21-1

flOOFING AND TINNERY ...................................................................................

~2. 1 Scope ofWork.... .......... ...................... ..................................................... ;J.?.-1

23 . WALL AND FLOOR FINISHES ............................................................................ 23-1

23 .1 Scope of Work......................................................................................... 23-1

24. PLUMBING......................................................................................................... . 24-1

24.1 Scope of Work ............................................................... ......................... . 24-1

LIST OF STANDARD DRAIWNGS

CD-1 01 R Typical Trench Details

1 - DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

1.3 PROCURING ENTITY

1 - DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

1.11 CONSTRUCTIONAL PLANT

1.12 TEMPORARY WORKS

1.15 WORKING/CALENDAR DAY